Bob Vilahttps://www.bobvila.comen-USThu, 20 Feb 2025 04:09:33 -0500WordPress 6.7.2hourly1<![CDATA[Satin vs. Semi-Gloss Paint: What’s the Difference?]]>The two paint finishes sound almost interchangeable, but they’re not. Here’s when to use them for best results.

The post Satin vs. Semi-Gloss Paint: What’s the Difference? appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/satin-vs-semi-gloss/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=95537Thu, 20 Feb 2025 00:13:21 -0500DIYPainting & FinishingWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

When you’re choosing fresh paint for your walls, after color, the next big decision is sheen. Light reflection on interior walls is an important part of the design and mood of a room. However, too much shine looks like wet paint, and a wall with too little shine can instead absorb light. Two middle-of-the-road options for paint finish—satin and semi-gloss—are quite popular for being neither too shiny nor too matte.

“Satin and semi-gloss each have their place in the home,” says Erika Woelfel, vice president of color and creative services at Behr. However, telling satin vs. semi-gloss apart can get somewhat tricky. Is semi-gloss shinier than satin? To answer, pay attention to the main ingredients: pigment, the powdery ingredient that gives paint its color; and resinous binder. The more resin a paint has, the shinier it is. That’s because it allows the paint to flow more and soaks up the powdery pigment well, making for a smooth consistency. 

Semi-gloss, one step under high-gloss in terms of sheen,  is shinier than satin because it has a higher percentage of resinous binder than pigment. Satin is shinier than eggshell and matte finishes for the same reason. Both semi-gloss and satin are available in traditional paint types including oil-based, latex, and low- or no-VOC (volatile organic compound) versions. However, the subtle differences in satin vs semi-gloss paint can make one a distinctly better fit for your project than another.

Satin Paint

Behr Satin Paint and Primer.
Photo: Behr

Satin finish paint has a slight sheen, so it reflects light better than both eggshell and matte finish interior paints. But satin absorbs more light than semi-gloss paint, and thus is forgiving of pre-existing imperfections. So, with this in mind, what is satin paint used for? “A satin finish, like Behr Premium Plus Interior Satin Enamel, offers a soft, durable look that resists dirt—ideal for living rooms, hallways, and bedrooms,” says Woelfel. 

If you’ve got dings and dents in your walls, cabinets, or soon-to-be-painted dresser, the flatter nature of satin will look better over pocks, divots, and scrapes since it draws the light in and tricks the eye into seeing a more even surface. If you want to deflect attention away from faults and blemishes without spending hours sanding them away, satin is the way to go.

That said, satin paint such as Benjamin Moore Regal Select Interior Paint in the satin/pearl finish is durable and somewhat light-reflective, so it works in areas where semi-gloss is too shiny. “It is perfect for adding a subtle contrast against walls painted in a matte or eggshell finish,” says David Underwood, associate technical project manager at Benjamin Moore. 

Satin Paint Pros and Cons

ProsCons
Covers dents and dings in the painted surface better than semi-glossNot as durable as semi-gloss
Light-reflective enough to brighten a small roomLacks enough light reflectivity to highlight features like crown molding 
Mutes glare
Easy to clean

When to Use Satin Paint

Use satin finish paint when you want to:

  • Highlight a ceiling or other well-lit surface without creating too much glare
  • Brighten up a hallway
  • Cover living-area walls that have imperfections or require regular paint touch-ups
  • Paint high-traffic areas

Semi-Gloss Paint

Behr semi-gloss paint.
Photo: Behr

Semi-gloss paint’s higher percentage of resin compared to pigment results in a shinier, and therefore, more light-reflective finish than satin. When looking at the difference between gloss and semi-gloss paint on walls or trim, it’s the mirror-like finish of gloss that is a step up from the semi-gloss sheen. 

“A semi-gloss finish is more luminous and perfectly suited to highlight architectural details of your home and create dimension on millwork, trim, wainscoting, and doors,” says Underwood. If used on living-area walls, semi-gloss paints like Benjamin Moore Advance Interior Paint create too much of a glare and can make paint colors appear darker. Factor that in when you’re making a final decision about which paint finish to use. 

However, there are cases when semi-gloss is the best choice. “Semi-gloss, such as Behr Ultra Scuff Defense Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel, provides a higher sheen with added moisture-resistance, making it perfect for trim, doors, cabinets, and high-traffic spaces like kitchens and bathrooms,” says Woelfel.

Semi-Gloss Paint Pros and Cons

ProsCons
Gives a polished, formal lookHighlights imperfections in the wall surface
Easy to cleanMust be applied in thin layers with a short-nap roller to avoid a bad paint job that shows brush marks
Moisture-resistantMakes paint color appear darker
Durable

When to Use Semi-Gloss Paint

Use semi-gloss when you want to:

  • Increase the light reflection in a room
  • Ensure ease of cleanup in bathrooms or kids’ rooms
  • Repaint your garage doors for shine and easy cleanup
  • Highlight millwork such as banisters, chair rails, or architectural features in old houses
  • Create a durable surface on high-touch areas like baseboards, interior doors, or kitchen cabinets
  • Reduce mildew and mold in high-moisture areas like basements or laundry rooms

Differences Between Satin and Semi-Gloss Paint

A man in a blue cap paints interior baseboards.
Photo: Bill Oxford via Getty Images

Sheen

Semi-gloss has more sheen than satin because of the higher resin-to-pigment ratio. But how will you tell the difference when you’re looking at a wall? You’ve likely seen shiny baseboard paint  up against a more matte wall. That’s likely a semi-gloss finish because it’s the best paint for doors and trim when paired with satin. But if you’re looking at an existing paint job and wondering whether it’s satin or semi-gloss, try feeling it. Semi-gloss has a sort of plastic-like, sticky texture compared to the more matte satin finish, which feels much like the surface of an eggshell.

Maintenance 

“For a balance of durability and aesthetics, satin works well in most spaces, while semi-gloss delivers extra protection where frequent cleaning is needed,” says Underwood. The higher the gloss, the easier the cleanup of messes like fingerprints and smudges. For objects and areas that get a lot of use and therefore require frequent wipe-downs—bathrooms, kitchens, playrooms, and kids’ bedrooms, semi-gloss is often the wiser option. 

Because a semi-gloss painted surface is slicker, it’s more resistant to moisture and easier to go over with a damp cloth or special sprays designed for minor household disasters. While both are durable compared to eggshell or matte options, semi-gloss has a slight advantage thanks to the additional binders that give it both a higher sheen and more resistance to fading or grease stains.

Price

In general, the higher the gloss, the higher the price, but usually the difference is minor. “Both satin and semi-gloss finishes have a reflective quality and equivalent price point,” says Underwood. “The higher percentage of resinous binders in the semi-gloss can make it slightly more expensive than satin paints.” So, if you’re looking to save a little bit of money buying paint for the whole home interior, satin is the most budget-worthy option of the two that still offers a hint of sheen.

FAQs

Q. Should interior doors be satin or semi-gloss? 

Use semi-gloss paint for interior doors. This finish provides high-touch areas like doors with a durable finish that’s easy to maintain.

Q. What type of paint is best for baseboards?

Baseboards should also be painted with semi-gloss paint, which is easy to wipe clean and can stand up to dings and scrapes..

Q. What is the best sheen for interior walls?

If you want to add a bit of a sheen to your walls, then using a satin finish is the way to go. Satin is slightly light-reflective and can brighten a room. Semi-gloss can be too shiny, creating a glare in living areas.

The post Satin vs. Semi-Gloss Paint: What’s the Difference? appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[Yes, Your Home Needs a Radon Test Kit — And These Are the Best]]>Instant radon gas testing and ongoing detection keeps you safe and gives you peace of mind.

The post Yes, Your Home Needs a Radon Test Kit — And These Are the Best appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-radon-test-kit/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=112492Wed, 19 Feb 2025 18:21:50 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Radon test kits detect the presence of radon gas, a byproduct of uranium decay in rock and soil. Radon can enter homes by seeping through cracks in the foundation, slowly accumulating until it reaches dangerous levels. Prolonged exposure to this harmful gas can cause health issues like headaches or even cancer. 

Radon is tasteless, odorless, and colorless, making it undetectable without specialized radon testing equipment. These home technology tools can measure radon levels over a few days or months or provide continuous monitoring. Since no level of radon exposure is considered safe, knowing which radon sensor you can rely on is essential. 

After tapping a home safety expert for insights and testing a few popular options, we chose the Airthings Corentium Home Radon Detector as the best radon test kit. It’s portable, has an easy-to-read screen, and takes multiple measurements to capture trends. Below, we detail what we like and don’t like about this product and the rest of our picks so you can choose one of the best radon test kits to keep your family safe.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Airthings Corentium Home Radon Detector
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: First Alert RD1 Radon Test Kit
    Jump to Review
  3. UPGRADE PICK: Airthings Wave Plus Smart Radon Detector
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST SMART: Airthings View Plus Smart Air Quality & Radon Monitor
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST SHORT-TERM: AccuStar Short-Term Charcoal Canister Radon Test Kit
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST LONG-TERM: Ecosense RadonEye Radon Sensor & Detector
    Jump to Review
The Best Radon Test Kit Option
Photo: amazon.com

Radon Test Kits Comparison Chart

Product NameTypeResultsPortability
Airthings Corentium Home Radon DetectorBattery-operated deviceInstant on device Portable
First Alert RD1 Radon Test Kit1-time test kitMust be mailed to lab; results emailed  3 to 5 days after lab receipt Portable
Airthings Wave Plus Smart Radon Detector Battery-operated smart deviceInstant in app and on device Portable; mounts to wall or ceiling 
Airthings View Plus Smart Air Quality & Radon MonitorBattery- or USB-powered smart deviceInstant in app and on device Portable; mounts to wall 
AccuStar Short-Term Charcoal Canister Radon Test Kit1-time test canisterMust be mailed to lab; results available next business dayPortable 
Ecosense RadonEye Radon Sensor & DetectorPlug-in deviceInstant in app and on device Portable but requires outlet 

Our Top Picks

After researching dozens of radon test kits and testing a few as part of our guide on the best air quality monitors, we recommend the following six options for their ease of use, accuracy, and value. 

Best Overall

Airthings Corentium Home Radon Detector

 Airthings Corentium Home Portable Radon Detector on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • First results shown on screen within 24 hours
  • Lightweight and portable
  • Displays both long- and short-term readings

What We Don’t Like

  • Some users’ units stopped working after a few years

Specs

  • Type Battery-operated device
  • Results Instant on device
  • Portability Portable

The Corentium Home radon detector kit by Airthings is one of the first continuous radon test kits to use batteries, allowing you to take it into any space that needs testing. The clear digital display provides both long- and short-term radon levels, revealing daily fluctuations as well as overall averages. Once you’ve tested your home for at least 30 days, Airthings also makes it easy to generate a free self-inspection report through its website. 

Though this portable radon detector does start delivering readings within 24 hours, the manufacturer recommends waiting at least 20 days before taking action if levels appear high. This ensures plenty of time for results to stabilize, so you know your readings are reliable. To test another area after your first test is complete, simply reset the unit and move it to a new location.  

Get the Airthings Corentium Home radon test kit at Amazon, Ace Hardware, Walmart, or Airthings.

Best Bang for the Buck

First Alert RD1 Radon Test Kit

 First Alert radon test kit on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Listed under the EPA’s Radon Gas Measurement Proficiency Program
  • Low price includes lab fees in most states
  • Results emailed 3 to 5 business days after receipt

What We Don’t Like

  • Can only be used once
  • User pays shipping costs

Specs

  • Type 1-time test kit
  • Results Must be mailed to lab; results emailed 3 to 5 days after lab receipt
  • Portability Portable

The First Alert RD1 home radon test kit is a simple and effective way to detect dangerous radon gas in your home. It essentially functions as a disposable radon detector that you allow to sit for a few days and then send away for results. To use, simply open the sealed activated charcoal packet, place it in the lowest livable area of your home, and leave it. After 2 to 4 days, seal it up and send it to the lab. Within 3 to 5 days of lab receipt, you’ll receive the results by email.

Unlike most mail-in radon test kits, this simple charcoal option includes the laboratory fee for most states (excluding New Jersey), though you will need to pay for shipping. Still, its price and reliability are difficult to beat for those looking for a one-time, short-term test.

Get the First Alert radon test kit at Amazon, Lowe’s, or First Alert.

Upgrade Pick

Airthings Wave Plus Smart Radon Detector

 Airthings Wave Plus Radon and Air Quality Monitor on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Provides continuous results via Bluetooth
  • Monitors radon, CO2, VOCs, humidity, temperature, and air pressure
  • Visual indicator shows current air quality

What We Don’t Like

  • Detailed results only available within Bluetooth range

Specs

  • Type Battery-operated smart device
  • Results Instant in app and on device
  • Portability Portable; mounts to wall or ceiling

While the Airthings Wave Plus radon and air quality monitor is more expensive than our top two picks, it also tests a lot more than just radon. Once set up, this unit provides continuous readings for radon gas buildup, carbon dioxide (CO2), volatile organic compounds (VOCs), humidity, temperature, and air pressure.

The Wave Plus radon gas monitor runs on batteries and is easy to mount on a wall or ceiling. Its on-unit color-coded display indicates whether air quality is good (green), fair (yellow), or bad (red). For more detailed information, pair the unit with the Airthings app via Bluetooth for real-time reading and tips on how to improve indoor air quality. You can also see current and past readings on Airthings’ web dashboard. 

What our tester says: “This Airthings monitor is quite an overachiever! As part of a larger test, we exposed it to a dish of oil-based stain for 2 hours. When we checked back in, the light was red (indicating hazardous air quality), and the app showed the volatile organic compound levels had spiked.”—Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Airthings Wave Plus radon test kit at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Smart

Airthings View Plus Smart Air Quality & Radon Monitor

 Airthings 2960 View Plus Radon & Air Quality Monitor on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Wi-Fi and Bluetooth connectivity; compatible with IFTTT, Homey, Google Assistant, and Amazon Alexa
  • Detects a wide range of pollutants and irritants
  • Data available on unit, app, and Airthings website

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires 6 AA batteries

Specs

  • Type Battery- or USB-powered smart device
  • Results Instant in app and on device
  • Portability Portable; mounts to wall

This smart monitor from Airthings makes it easy to check levels of radon, PM2.5 (particulate matter), CO2, temperature, VOCs, air pressure, and humidity. It also provides pollen forecasts so those with allergies can stay informed about outdoor conditions. As a continuous radon monitor, this unit has its own display showing current levels, and users can also check the app or Airthings website for long-term readings. It also features a visual indicator with green, yellow, and red status lights for at-a-glance monitoring. 

The View Plus is compatible with IFTTT, Homey, Google Assistant, and Amazon Alexa and runs via batteries or the included USB-C cable. You can place it virtually anywhere indoors to test levels in multiple locations or mount it to the wall to ensure continually safe radon levels in a basement​.  

Get the Airthings View Plus radon test kit at Amazon or Airthings.

Best Short-Term

AccuStar Short-Term Charcoal Canister Radon Test Kit

 AccuStar radon test kit on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Same-day results available if received by noon
  • Easy to use; requires zero technological know-how
  • Durable canister design keeps results safe

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t measure radon; only reports whether levels are under 4 pCi/L (picocuries per liter)

Specs

  • Type 1-time test canister
  • Results Must be mailed to lab; results available by next business day
  • Portability Portable

This short-term test kit by AccuStar uses activated charcoal to absorb radon and its byproducts over a 48- to 96-hour period. Its easy-to-use design simply requires you to leave the unit undisturbed for a few days, mail it in, and wait for the results, which can arrive same-day if the canister is received by noon. 

Though the cost of the AccuStar radon detection kit includes laboratory fees, you will need to pay to ship the unit in. The durable canister protects the test unit while in transit, ensuring your results remain accurate and safe from interference. This low-tech pick is perfect for those nervous about determining radon safe levels on their own and real estate agents testing radon in homes for clients.

Get the AccuStar radon test kit at Amazon, The Home Depot (2-pack), or AccuStar Labs.

Best Long-Term

Ecosense RadonEye Radon Sensor & Detector

 Ecosense RadonEye Home Radon Detector on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • First reading is 90 percent accurate and available in 10 minutes
  • Results shown in app and on device
  • Tracks short- and long-term readings and trends

What We Don’t Like

  • Some reports of Bluetooth connectivity issues

Specs

  • Type Plug-in device
  • Results Instant in app and on device
  • Portability Portable but requires outlet

The Ecosense RadonEye home radon detector takes 30 independent counts of pCi/L levels every hour, delivering the very first reading just 10 minutes after setup. To get started, simply plug in the electronic radon detector and leave it on a flat surface to allow it to begin collecting data. 

Short-term results from this radon gas detector are displayed on the unit’s OLED screen and updated every 10 minutes. Additional hourly, monthly, and yearly data is available via Bluetooth connectivity on the RadonEye app. This pick’s continuous monitoring system not only provides an average reading over time, it also sounds an alarm if radon levels exceed 4 pCi/L. 

Get the Ecosense radon test kit at Amazon, Walmart, or Ecosense.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Radon Test Kits

The Best Radon Test Kit
Photo: amazon.com

When gathering our list of recommendations, we primarily considered the most important aspects of radon home kits—accuracy and ease of use. We selected a variety of units that make it simple to test for radon, choosing a few one-time kits that need to be sent to a laboratory as well as several that offer instant access to results via the unit itself or an app.  

Most picks on our list are battery-operated units, though some can also be powered using a standard plug or a USB cable. We also included one low-tech option that does not require power at all and simply needs to sit and absorb radon for a few days before being mailed in for reading. Finally, since the prices of radon detectors can vary greatly, we were careful to include picks at a range of costs since everyone needs to be able to afford to test for cancer-causing radon gas

What to Consider When Choosing a Radon Test Kit

To select one of the best radon kits for your needs, it’s important to consider test type, accuracy, and ease of use and installation. 

Types of Radon Test Kits

A radon test kit will use one of several methods to test the air in your home for elevated radon levels. Regardless of which type of radon monitor you choose, these helpful devices are the only way to determine your family members’ exposure to this harmful gas other than a professional radon inspection

Short-Term Radon Test Kits

Radon kits for short-term use collect readings from your home over a 2- to 90-day period and must then be sent to a laboratory for the results to be read. The lab fees necessary for proper testing are likely included with your purchase, though shipping generally costs extra. 

Because short-term radon test kits are the fastest and least expensive test option, real estate agents often use them to check for safe radon levels before selling a home. However, since radon levels fluctuate, short-term test kits are not the most accurate testing method. For definitive results, long-term testing is necessary.

Long-Term Radon Test Kits

As their name indicates, long-term radon test kits are designed to test levels of radon gas over a longer period, such as weeks, months, or years. Like short-term tests, some are single-use devices that must be sent to a laboratory to be read, though others have screens or Bluetooth connectivity that allows you to monitor levels yourself. 

Since a long-term radon test kit collects a greater volume of data, periodic spikes that naturally occur are less likely to raise unnecessary alarms, which may happen with more limited readings. The downside of this type of detector is that it will typically be more expensive than a one-time use or short-term kit and may not be necessary if radon levels are consistently lower than 4 pCi/L.

Alpha-Track Radon Test Kits

The alpha-track radon test kit is a long-term test that measures levels of radon using polycarbonate plastic sheets placed in the lowest livable level of the home. If radon gas is present, it will emit alpha particles that create tracks on these sheets, with higher levels of gas producing greater numbers of tracks. Once the test kit has collected data for the suggested amount of time, it is sent in to be read. Generally speaking, alpha-track tests are more accurate than short-term test kits but don’t provide the ongoing measurements offered by long-term detectors.

Charcoal Radon Test Kits

Charcoal radon test kits are short-term options that work similarly to alpha-track units, though they use charcoal rather than polycarbonate plastic to measure levels. Generally speaking, they’re also cheaper and faster since they only monitor radon gas for between 2 and 90 days. For this reason, they are less accurate since they are susceptible to radon spikes and possible interference during shipping.

Digital Radon Test Kits

Digital radon test kits are also known as radon detectors, and they are the most expensive type of radon tester for home use. Most digital units can be mounted to the wall or ceiling or simply placed in the lowest level of the house. 

However, installation requirements typically extend well beyond mounting, as most of these kits use Bluetooth connectivity to deliver detailed readings to an app. Some digital kits also offer recent readings directly on the test unit, though their screens aren’t often large enough to display the long-term data that makes digital tests so valuable. Further adding to their worth, many digital kits also test home air quality levels of humidity, carbon dioxide, volatile organic compounds, and more. 

Accuracy

Accuracy is one of the most important factors to consider when choosing a radon test. Generally speaking, the longer a radon test kit collects data, the more accurate the results will be. This is because increased testing time allows you to determine average pCi/L levels without the influence of random positive or negative spikes.

Since short-term radon tests are susceptible to spikes in radon levels that can skew the average, they are considered the least accurate test option. Because they collect more data, long-term and continuous tests are the most accurate radon test kits available.

Ease of Use and Installation 

Radon test kits are designed to be easy to use, both for the consumer’s benefit and to ensure accurate results. Passive radon test kits, like charcoal and alpha-track test kits, are easy to set up but must be sent to a lab for results. 

On the other hand, active radon test kits, like digital radon detectors, are a bit more involved in setup but relatively easy to use after that. More advanced smart home-compatible detectors require additional technical know-how for ongoing use. It’s a good idea to consider your radon testing needs and comfort using technology before selecting a test kit.

FAQs

The following frequently asked questions section can help answer questions like “What is radon testing?” or “How much does a radon mitigation system cost?”. 

Q. How does a radon test work?

Radon tests work by measuring the amount of radon in the air. Charcoal devices absorb radon, enabling lab techs to count radioactive particles to estimate levels. Alpha-track kits must also be read in labs, but they use a plastic film that produces marks when radon gas strikes it. Digital detectors have sensors that detect and count alpha particles before displaying them on the device or in an app.

Q. How do you use a radon test kit?

Radon test kits are generally used by opening a sealed package and leaving the test kit exposed to the air for a certain amount of time. Some must be sent in to be read, while others provide measurements you can access yourself.

Q. Where should a radon test be placed?

Radon levels should be placed on the lowest occupied level of the home. Most manufacturers recommend setting them on a surface a few feet off the floor or mounting them to a wall so they won’t be accidentally disturbed or knocked over by kids or pets. 

Q. What do you do if you test positive for radon?

If your home tests positive for high levels of radon, contact a qualified radon mitigation contractor. They can provide an estimate for installing a radon mitigation system that will continually remove excess radon from your home.

Q. What buildings are most likely to be affected by radon contamination?

While buildings and homes on hillsides may be more likely to be affected by radon, any structure can be subject to radon contamination. Kevin Feak, Senior Fire Protection Engineer for the architecture and planning firm LaBella, says, “Radon is heavier than room air and will move to the lowest area. Areas below ground level, such as basements or crawl spaces, are at the highest risk.” 

Q. How often should I test for radon levels?

The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) guide to radon recommends testing for radon at least every 2 years. The EPA also suggests testing if you renovate your home or are considering selling it, as you will need to provide test results to the buyer.

Q. How can I minimize my chances of being affected by radon?

According to licensed Professional Engineer Kevin Feak, “The first step in determining your radon risk is to use the EPA’s Radon Zone Map. The second step is testing for radon with either a home test or calling a professional. Lastly, a mitigation system can be used to remove radon from your home or business.”

Q. How reliable are home radon test kits?

Different types of home radon test kits have different levels of reliability, with long-term tests being the most reliable and short-term tests being less reliable. Still, since short-term tests are typically less expensive, using them to perform more frequent tests over time can be an economical way to measure radon levels.

The post Yes, Your Home Needs a Radon Test Kit — And These Are the Best appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[Have You Ever Cleaned the Underside of Your Deck?]]>Learn why it’s imperative you do.

The post Have You Ever Cleaned the Underside of Your Deck? appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/exterior/cleaning-under-deck/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=428744Wed, 19 Feb 2025 18:16:32 -0500ExteriorDeck, Patio & PorchDIYWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

It’s easy to notice when it’s time to clean your deck surface, and many of us make sure to keep that backyard deck as tidy as our interior gathering spaces. But, it takes a bit of effort to dip down below the deck and consider maintaining the underside. Unlike the foundation walls of your home, the deck structure is typically uncovered and at the mercy of whatever severe weather is thrown at it. So, it’s a good idea to go under the deck to clean away the muck and check the soundness of the structure every spring. It’s an investment in your family’s safety, the deck’s appearance, and the longevity of your deck.

If you need a bit more motivation, consider this: About half of the 60 million decks in the U.S. need to be replaced or repaired, according to the North American Deck and Railing Association (NADRA), so there’s a good chance yours might be one of them. And the Consumer Product Safety Commission estimates 2,900 injuries and two deaths were caused by deck, balcony, or porch failures between 2016 and 2019. So with safety top of mind, here are the key deck features to clean and check. 

Get a good look at the ledger board.

It’s usually easiest to use an electric pressure washer—like the Ryobi 40V 1500 PSI, which earned “best cordless” honors in our hands-on testing—to clean the underside of a deck. Since you are directing water up and around you while you are working underneath the deck, it’s best to start at the house and work your way out toward the yard. Plus, the connection between the deck and the house, called a ledger board, is the most common place that deck failures happen. By cleaning away any debris, you’ll be able to get a good look at the ledger connection to make sure it’s still sound and securely connected. 

Remove mold and mildew from joists and under decking.

While the method for cleaning under a deck is similar to cleaning the decking on the surface, there are a few more things to consider. Mold and mildew fans out in the gaps between the decking boards and then it layers on the joists below. Use a deck cleaner or brightener with oxalic acid to remove mold and mildew while rejuvenating the natural color of the wood. As you’ll be working overhead with a chemical, make sure to wear a face shield, gloves, hat, and waterproof jacket to protect your skin and eyes. 

The point isn’t to make the deck look like it was just built; it’s to get rid of mold, mildew, and dirt to reveal the deck surfaces so that you can get a good look at the structure and inspect its condition. 

A deck surface with water pooling on decking.
Photo: Deb Perry/Moment via Getty Images

Check for any water issues. 

If you have a shaded deck with lots of conifer trees around, the needles can collect between the decking boards and create an organic dam that makes it difficult to shed water. And then microbes gather and can rot decking. Blasting the collection of goo from below with a pressure washer can be easier than working from the top, if you have the room below the deck. While shooting water under the deck, you will also notice where water naturally pools, which can be a playground for insects. It’s a good idea to take care of that with improved drainage. 

Bonus tip: Another source of potential water issues under a deck is a downspout extension that’s typically under there. They often fall apart and just gush water under your deck. Make sure to check whether your drainage system is connected and directing water properly.

Maintain the health of deck posts.

In addition to the ledger board, the deck posts are what keeps the deck off of the ground. While they may seem indestructible, they aren’t. Posts can start to grey from photodegradation and particulate matter in the air. It’s a good idea to clean them annually and check that they are still sound. Since posts are treated for ground contact, the chemicals can fade over time. When we resurface an older deck, we will often treat the posts with a preservative to lengthen the serviceability of the posts. It just takes a few minutes to insert the preservative into the posts. 

A wood deck post with a preservative inserted into the post.
Photo: Theresa Clement, MyFixitUpLife for Bob Vila

Inspect areas that are always damp.

Before you turn on the pressure washer, you might notice that it’s a soggy mess underneath the deck. If it’s always damp underneath the deck, it’s a breeding ground for mold and mildew that can slowly eat away at your wood deck. Consider covering the ground with stones to help with drainage. For more serious drainage issues, you may need to install a more involved drainage system. 

Scan for missing fasteners. 

Sometimes fasteners become loose and some may even wiggle out over time. It seems like you would notice it, but if it’s under your deck and dirt has filled the fastener hole…you might not ever notice until you go underneath the deck to check. Clearing out dirt can reveal locations where you may need to replace or secure loose fasteners. 

Young rabbits in a burrow under a home deck.
Photo: Oxford Scientific/The Image Bank via Getty Images

Watch for critter problems.

While you are under your deck, you may notice evidence of unwanted guests living there. If you have a dog, you might already know there’s an issue since dogs will react to critters and then scratch at the decking surface to try to get at them. The issue with critters is that they often dig near the foundation and then shoot a plume of dirt into the yard while they dig. The other issue is that animals can go under your deck to die, which is never a pleasant situation to add to a weekend chore list. 

Add a few inches of gravel underneath the deck to make digging an unbearable task for critters, and add a critter wall around the perimeter of the deck to prevent most critters from accessing under there. Make at least one panel of the critter wall removable, so you can access under your deck when you need to clean it and check it again next year. 

Tip: If cleaning the deck reveals deeper concerns and issues, stop using your deck until a local deck inspector can evaluate your deck’s health and develop a plan for making it safe for your family and friends.

The post Have You Ever Cleaned the Underside of Your Deck? appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[This Cheap, Homemade De-icer Recipe Will Clear Your Frosty Windshield in Minutes]]>Don't shiver in your car, waiting for your windshield defroster to kick on! Mix up this DIY de-icer solution and you'll have a clear view in just a few minutes.

The post This Cheap, Homemade De-icer Recipe Will Clear Your Frosty Windshield in Minutes appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/homemade-de-icer/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=86175Wed, 19 Feb 2025 17:10:07 -0500DIYEasy DIY ProjectsRepair & MaintenanceWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Have you pulled out of your driveway lately with a frost-covered windshield, hoping that the defroster will kick in as you cruise out of your neighborhood? We’re all in a hurry to get to where we’re going, but for safety’s sake, take the time to properly de-ice your car’s windows. Clear visibility is important anytime you’re driving, but when snow and ice are involved, it’s best to be extra vigilant. This 3-ingredient de-icer recipe is super cheap, easy to make, and will get you on the road in no time.

Homemade De-Icer Recipe

  • 1 cup water
  • 2 cups isopropyl alcohol
  • 3/4 teaspoon dish soap

Combine all ingredients in a spray bottle and shake well.

Why this recipe works: This de-icer’s active ingredient is rubbing alcohol, which you can buy at drugstores for around $2.50 a pint. Also known as isopropyl and isopropanol, it has a freezing point of -128 degrees Fahrenheit, so it won’t refreeze once the windshield has been cleaned. Dish soap improves the spreadability of the mixture.

How to Use Homemade De-icer to Defrost Car Windows

This concoction is just as easy to apply to your car’s windows and windshield as it is to make. Keep a clean cloth handy to wipe excess spray off your windows; depending on how frosty your windows are, you might also need an ice scraper to coax the ice off the glass.

Step 1: Mix the de-icing solution.

Woman pours isopropyl alcohol into a spray bottle.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Fill a spray bottle with two parts rubbing alcohol to one part of water.

Woman measures dish soap into a measuring spoon above a spray bottle.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Add ½ teaspoon of liquid dish detergent for every 2 cups of solution. Shake well. Label your de-icer so you don’t get it mixed up with your other DIY cleaners.

Step 2: Coat the windshield and windows with spray.

Woman sprays homemade de-icing mixture on an icy windshield.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Generously spray the mixture onto the icy windshield and windows. Wait a minute or so as it softens the ice, or melts it altogether.

PRO TIP

This homemade de-icer also works on frozen car door locks: Spray it on the lock, wait 10 to 20 seconds to melt the ice, insert your key, and your lock should move freely. (If you do this frequently in the winter, don’t forget to occasionally spray a little WD-40 or other lube into your lock, or on your key before inserting it into the lock, to keep the lock’s inner mechanisms functioning smoothly.)

Step 3: Scrape away excess ice.

Woman uses an ice scraper to brush melting ice off windshield.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

For extra-heavy ice on windows, you may need to do a little scraping. If that’s the case, use an ice scraper or another implement to clear away the thicker patches.

Step 4: Wipe the windshield clean.

Turn your windshield wipers on and with a couple good swishes, your windshield should be de-iced, clean, clear, and ready for some driving! If you’ve applied your mixture to other windows, use a soft cloth to wipe them clean. While isopropyl alcohol that’s been diluted as recommended here will not damage car paint, wipe down any areas of your car’s body that may have been dripped on, just to be safe.

Step 5: Prevent future visibility problems.

To keep your windshield wiper lines clean and clear of ice, mix 1 cup isopropyl alcohol into ½ gallon of windshield wiper fluid and fill your under-the-hood reservoir. Alternatively, you can purchase a de-icing windshield wiper solution. Either will keep your glass ice-free when you need to clean your windshield of sandy, salty snow-splatter spat up from vehicles ahead of you on roadways, and will help keep streaks to a minimum. Keep this de-icer in your car, along with other winter emergency supplies, so you’ll always have a clear view!

The post This Cheap, Homemade De-icer Recipe Will Clear Your Frosty Windshield in Minutes appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[How to Paint Behind a Toilet]]>Repainting the bathroom? We'll show you the best ways to apply paint in the hardest-to-reach spot: behind the toilet.

The post How to Paint Behind a Toilet appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-paint-behind-a-toilet/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=101295Wed, 19 Feb 2025 15:13:10 -0500DIYBathroom RemodelingBathroomsInteriorPainting & FinishingToiletsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

The cramped space behind the toilet is a difficult portion of the bathroom to maintain, posing a challenge when it comes time to dust and an even larger one when repainting. A toilet tank situated not quite flush against the wall leaves very little room to operate a brush or paint roller but just enough that it would be noticeable to leave the color unchanged while the rest of the room gets a refresh. Fortunately, DIY-inclined homeowners and renters have two easy options for how to paint behind a toilet, neither of which require moving the bulky ceramic out of the way.

  • Option 1: Cover your toilet with a trash bag and line the floor with drop cloths so that you can work without fear of mess. This option is ideal when you are repainting your entire bathroom or the full wall where your toilet sits.
  • Option 2: Enlist a specialty tool called the Paint Behind to slide into the narrow space behind a toilet and pad on paint. Use it together with Option 1 to ensure a complete and flawless paint job or alone as a “quick fix” to correct discoloration on the patch of wall directly behind the toilet.

Before you begin, make sure to select the right primer and paint. Bathrooms, of course, are exposed to a lot of moisture and humidity, so your paint choice should be designed to withstand the combination. Consider a paint with anti-microbial additives, like Benjamin Moore’s Aura Bath and Spa collection, or an interior paint with semi- or high-gloss finish—this sheen repels moistures better than matte paints. And don’t forget to start with a top-quality, moisture-resistant paint primer. The right primer will prevent peeling and water damage for years.

Tools & Materials

Bobvila.com may earn a commission from purchases made through these links.

OPTION 1: Cover the toilet with a trash bag, then brush freely.

How to Paint Behind a Toilet
Photo: istockphoto.com

When painting the entire bathroom, prep the toilet with a drop cloth before you start but save the actual painting of the tight space behind your toilet for last—it requires the most detailed attention.

Step 1: Ventilate the bathroom.

Bathrooms are often small, enclosed spaces with poor air circulation. Materials like shower curtains and towels that retain moisture also keep them consistently humid. To boost bathroom ventilation and minimize paint drying time, remove the shower curtain, floor rug, bath, and hand towels. If your bathroom has windows, make sure they are open. Run the ventilation fan or plug in a small circulating fan.

To prevent paint fumes inhalation, you may also wish you wear a painter’s mask.

Step 2: Clean and prepare the area behind the toilet.

Clean the walls, floor, wall, and toilet surfaces with a cellulose sponge dipped in a mixture of dish soap and water. This will help remove dust and dust and hair build-up. Dry the area thoroughly with terry cloths.

Next, cover the floor around the toilet with a tarp or plastic sheet secured with painter’s tape.

Then, cover the toilet with an extra-large plastic garbage bag. (Tip: You’ll find contractor clean-up bags at your local home improvement store in sizes of up to 50 gallons, and these resist accidental tearing.) Tape the bag in place around the toilet’s base. Take care to wrap any piping or trim that might be exposed with painter’s tape.

Tried-and-True Advice

“There’s no way to paint behind a toilet with it being a bit awkward. Removing the toilet is an option, but that adds a series of steps to the process that are difficult and best avoided unless you have plumbing skills. I find that removing the lid and covering the toilet with a trash bag is efficient, and it allows for full paint coverage when using narrow, spongy brushes. Look for long handle options to make the process easier.”

—Zach Lazzari, Contributing Writer

Step 3: Prime and paint the wall.

Start with one to two coats of primer to ensure the best paint adhesion. To reach behind the toilet and around pipes, you’ll want to do the following:

  • Use a narrow paint roller to apply paint primer around the shape of the toilet, cutting in as best you can. Roll with the metal frame on the outside in order to get as close to the covered toilet tank as possible.
  • Switch to a 3-inch-wide foam brush to paint behind the toilet. Carefully load one side of the foam brush with paint primer and, when you reach behind the toilet, keep the paint-covered side in direct contact with the wall. Apply in small strokes.
  • Use a 1-inch-wide angled brush for detail work around the pipes.

Let the primer dry thoroughly before applying paint. (The paint’s drying time will depend on the temperature and humidity level in your bathroom, as well as the paint primer you choose; refer to the can for an estimated dry time between coats and before paint.)

After priming, clean your paint pan before pouring fresh paint into it. To apply your paint, follow the same tips. After the first coat, wait the amount of time recommended by the manufacturer (longer, if your bathroom is not well ventilated) so that the wall is completely dry before applying a top coat.

OPTION 2: Purchase a special painting tool to access the area behind a toilet tank.

Painting the wall behind the toilet tank can be less of a pain when you use a tool designed to fit the narrow gap between the toilet tank and wall. Sure, it may be that you only have a paint job like this once every five to 10 years (maybe more, if you are a renter who appreciates a fresh coat of paint when you move in and then often needs to repaint before you move out). There’s an innovative painting tool you can buy online to access hard-to-reach areas called the Paint Behind. It’s a flat, extendable-to-12-inches paint brush that can reach behind toilets, pipes, radiators, and other tight spots.

Person using a Paint Behind paint brush to paint the wall behind the toilet a teal color.
Photo: Amazon

Step 1: Ventilate the bathroom, then prep for painting.

Proceed in establishing good bathroom ventilation and a clean slate for best adhesion, just as you would in Steps 1 and 2 of Option 1.

Clean the wall behind the toilet with a cellulose sponge dipped in a mixture of dish soap and water (you might also try dipping a microfiber cloth in the cleaning solution and wrapping it around the Paint Behind, and extending the tool to clean behind the tank). While the wall air dries, clean the stick and let it dry completely before painting.

Cover the bathroom floor with a drop cloth held in place with painter’s tape, but skip bagging the toilet. Keep a damp paper towel nearby to wipe up any marks.

Step 2: Dip the tool into primer, and glide it across the wall. Repeat the process with coats of paint.

Dip the Paint Behind’s applicator pad into the paint tray to get primer on pad. Then, glide the paint wand the wall behind the toilet, pressing firmly to make sure the entire paint-saturated surface meets the wall.

Apply two coats of primer this way, leaving time between them as recommended by the paint manufacturer. Then, clean the Paint Behind with water and let it dry. Repeat the process with two coats of paint using the Paint Behind.

The post How to Paint Behind a Toilet appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[Ice Melt is Sold Out Everywhere—But Here’s the Solution, and it’s on Sale]]>This heavy-duty ice chopper is the best alternative to ice melt–and you can get it now at a bargain price–37% off!

The post Ice Melt is Sold Out Everywhere—But Here’s the Solution, and it’s on Sale appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/ice-chopper-deal/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=428684Wed, 19 Feb 2025 14:10:27 -0500ReviewsDealsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

If you’ve been searching for ice melt and coming up empty–you’re not alone. A relentless winter sent demand for the product skyrocketing, and store shelves are bare. With ice and packed snow making sidewalks and steps dangerously slick, you need an alternative, and here it is. Right now, the Bigfoot Ice Chopper is on sale on Amazon for $20.92 (Save $12.07).

Save 37%

big foot ice chopper on white background
ON SALE NOW

Bigfoot Ice Chopper

Yes, it takes a little manual effort, but the Bigfoot Ice Chopper does the hard work for you. Made from heavy-duty, cold-rolled steel, it has a sharp reinforced edge to break through thick ice and a cushioned grip to absorb impact. This isn’t your average snow shovel—it’s built to break up ice and packed snow fast. Best of all, you’ll never have to worry about running out of ice to melt again. But don’t wait–this deal won’t last! 

More Great Ice-Removing Products We Love 

While the Bigfoot Ice Chopper is the best deal we’ve seen, you may be able to purchase other ice-breaking tools online and pick them up locally. It’s a good idea to have an ice-removal option ready before the next storm hits. Here are some of our favorite picks.

Craftsman 48-inch L Forged Ice Scraper available at Lowe’s for $34.98

This ice scraper has a wood handle and a cushioned, non-slip grip. It’s suitable for clearing packed snow and ice from walkways with its 7-inch forged steel blade.  

Husky 47-inch Carbon Steel Ice Scraper available at The Home Depot for $38.22

The Husky ice scraper’s tempered steel blade features an electrostatic powder coating for durability. It also has a varnished hardwood handle and a soft grip for maximum comfort.

Snow Joe Impact-Reducing Steel Ice Chopper available at The Home Depot for $30.26

The Snow Joe ice breaker has an internal spring-loaded mechanism that makes using it more comfortable. It also has a D-shape handle, similar to those found on traditional snow shovels, for the best grip. 

Garant Nordic 54-inch L Steel Sidewalk Scraper available at Ace Hardware for $18.99

This sidewalk scraper is just right for slipping under packed ice and snow and forcing it up and off. We love that it’s priced under $20! 

Cub Cadet 28-inch 3-Stage Gas Snow Blower available at Tractor Supply for $1,799.99

We’ve tested many snow blowers, but if you’re looking for one powerful enough to chop ice and packed snow, you’ll need a 3-stage model. This Cub Cadet isn’t cheap, but if you’re looking for a machine that will do all the work for you–this is the one. 

Our Tested Guides and Reviews

If you’re still looking for ways to keep your sidewalks, steps, and driveways safe and clear during the winter, check out our tested guides and reviews for tips and product recommendations. 

The post Ice Melt is Sold Out Everywhere—But Here’s the Solution, and it’s on Sale appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[How to Remove Paint From Metal]]>Upcycling old metal furniture or decor? Removing paint from metal can breathe new life into your old belongings. Here's what you'll need to get the project done.

The post How to Remove Paint From Metal appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-remove-paint-from-metal/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-remove-paint-from-metal/Wed, 19 Feb 2025 12:58:08 -0500DIYCleaning & OrganizingPainting & FinishingWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Metal furniture and home decor items can last a long time, but they start to lose their appeal when their original paint job is looking less than spectacular. The good news is that it’s possible to strip the paint from metal so you can apply a new coat of paint in your current color scheme. 

While there are a range of shapes and sizes for household metal objects—from railings to side tables—there are several methods that can work to remove paint from them. Here are a few of the most effective ways of stripping paint from metal so it’s ready to be refreshed. 

Project Overview

Working Time: 2+ hours
Total Time: 2+ hours
Skill Level: Beginner
Estimated Cost: $10 to $50

Before You Begin

Painted metal can range from cabinet hardware to a metal door, so preparing for the project will depend on the painted metal object. No matter the size, select an area that is well-ventilated. It’s just as important to protect yourself, so don your rubber gloves, safety glasses, long-sleeved shirt, shoes, and pants to cover your skin completely. Then, avoid inhalation of fumes from the chemicals by opening all windows and wearing a respirator.

Before you remove metal paint, prepare the work area by covering the work surface and surrounding ground with drop cloths. If you want to save money on supplies, recycled newspapers or unfolded cardboard boxes can substitute as surface protection against the chemical stripper you’ll be using—just make sure not to leave any gaps between pieces. Paint dust and flecks can be tough to chase around later. 

7 Ways to Remove Paint From Metal

When considering which method to use to remove paint from your metal object, take note of the shape and size of the item. Some methods below are better suited for flat surfaces and others are best suited for small objects. No matter which you choose, make sure to protect your skin, eyes, and surrounding area from paint flecks and dust that could contain lead. 

1. Paint Scraper

Paint scraper used to scrape dark paint on metal.
Photo: istockphoto.com

Scraping paint from metal with a paint scraper can be a useful method for removing flaking paint from flat metal surfaces. Be mindful that softer metals may scratch more easily, so it’s important to use a plastic scraper and a lighter touch when using this method. It’s likely that you won’t be able to remove all of the paint with just a scraper, so another method may need to be used to help finish the job. 

SUPPLIES

Drop cloth
Paint scraper
Rubber gloves
Eye protection
Respirator mask
Cloth

  1. Lay out the drop cloth and don protective gloves, eye protection, and mask. 
  2. Take the paint scraper at an acute angle to the surface and push the scraping edge along the surface.
  3. Repeat the scraping motion until all paint is removed. 
  4. Wipe the surface clean with a cloth. 

2. Boiling Water

While boiling water can be a helpful way to loosen paint from metal surfaces, it’s another paint remover for metal method that isn’t practical for larger surfaces. Make sure to always wear heat-resistant gloves when removing metal from boiling water. 

SUPPLIES

Pot
Heat-resistant gloves
Paint scraper
Cloth

  1. Put on heat-resistant gloves and boil water in the pot. 
  2. Either pour boiling water over the object or submerge it in the boiling water.
  3. After the paint begins to bubble on the metal surface, use a scraper to remove the paint. 
  4. Wipe the surface of the object with a clean cloth.

Tried-and-True Advice

“In my experience, paint removal is sometimes the easiest part of the job. What nobody talks about is what to do with or how to manage the paint that comes off.

Take pressure washing, for example. Using an oscillating “turbo” type head, the water will blast into all kinds of nooks and crannies on a wrought iron railing or old table base and it’ll burst any loose paint off in seconds. And what happens next? The paint is dispersed all over everywhere for 10-15 feet around. It’ll pepper the driveway, the garage wall, the side of the house, whatever. It can be cleaned off, but now you have a second job.

Same with an angle grinder and flapper wheel. At 10,000-11,000-rpm for a 4 1/2-inch tool. That paint is a-flyin’. You’ll need a face shield at a minimum along with gloves, long sleeves and hearing protection (these are my favorite). The machine will murdilize the paint, turning it into a million pepper-sized pieces that’ll be hurled everywhere, including partially on you.

Chemical strippers are a challenge of a different sort. Paint is a solid before paint strippers are applied (this stuff is caustic—you’ll need glove and eye protection). Yes, strippers remove the paint, but before doing so, liquefy it, turning into a slurry-like sludge that gets everywhere. And, if you’re using it to remove many coats of paint, you may need multiple applications as it eats through however many layers it can eat through, then stops, leaving you with more paint to remove.

So, before stripping any finishes, figure out the reaction to the action first and decide which path is best for you, because you might just decide to find an old school dip-and-strip and let them handle it.”

—Mark Clement, Contributing Writer

3. Baking Soda or Vinegar

A hand adding baking soda to boiling water.
Photo: istockphoto.com

One way to ease paint from a metal surface is to use baking soda with boiling water. If you don’t have baking soda, white vinegar can be used in its place. While it’s an effective method for removing paint, it’s a process that’s best for smaller pieces. 

SUPPLIES

  1. Add ¼ cup of baking soda to 1 quart of water in a disposable pot.
  2. Turn on the burner and bring the mixture to a boil.
  3. Place the painted metal object in the boiling water.
  4. After about 10 to 15 minutes, the paint will likely start to lift from the surface.
  5. Turn off the heat.
  6. Put on heat-resistant gloves and remove the object from the pot.
  7. With a stiff brush or scraper remove any remaining paint. 
  8. Wipe the surface of the object with a clean cloth.

4. Heat Gun

Using a torch to remove orange paint off metal bike.
Photo: istockphoto.com

Essentially, a heat gun will liquefy the paint on the surface enough so that it will be easier to scrape away with a paint scraper. Always start with the lowest setting and wear heat-resistant gloves. 

SUPPLIES

Heat-resistant gloves
Eye protection
Heat gun
Wire brush
Cloth

  1. While wearing heat-resistant gloves and eye protection, turn on the heat gun to its lowest setting. 
  2. Move the heat gun slowly across the surface. 
  3. When the paint begins to crack and melt off the metal, use a wire brush or a paint scraper to remove the paint. 
  4. Wait for the surface to cool and then wipe the metal surface with a clean cloth.

5. Drill

Woman using drill to remove paint from metal trim.
Photo: Theresa Clement

Sturdy and complicated surfaces like metal railings may require the flexibility offered by a drill with a wire wheel attachment to successfully remove paint. Wire wheels can be flat or brush-shaped, which offers the ability to attack both flat and spindly surfaces.

SUPPLIES

Drill
Wire wheel
Eye protection
Heat gun
Wire brush
Rubber gloves
Eye protection
Respirator mask
Cloth

  1. Put on eye protection, mask, and gloves. 
  2. Attach the wire wheel to the drill.
  3. Turn on the drill at a low speed.
  4. Apply the wire wheel to the surface of the painted metal, and work the wheel over the surface to remove the paint.
  5. Wipe the debris off the surface with a cloth. 

6. Angle Grinder

Person using angle grinder to remove red paint on from metal fence.
Photo: istockphoto.com

An angle grinder in combination with a flap disc (flapper wheel) can be a good choice if you know the paint is not lead-based and there is a lot of paint to remove from the metal surface. Grinders spin up to 10,000 rpm, so be careful while using one and wear a face shield and gloves to protect your eyes and skin from flecks. 

SUPPLIES

Angler grinder
Flap disc (flapper wheel)
Eye protection
Heat gun
Wire brush
Rubber gloves
Eye protection
Respirator mask
Cloth

  1. Put on eye protection, mask, and gloves. 
  2. Attach the flap disc to the angle grinder. 
  3. Turn on the angle grinder and hold with two hands.
  4. Starting with a fine grit, apply the flap disc to the painted surface. Do not force the tool by pressing too hard. 
  5. Increase the grit of the disc until the paint is gone. 

7. Paint Stripper

A hand using a tool to strip red paint off metal.
Photo: rust-oleum.eu

A seemingly easy way to remove paint is with a paint stripper. Older versions are notoriously odorous and not environmentally friendly. However, there are newer versions that are low-odor and made from more organic materials. 

SUPPLIES

Drop cloth
Paint-stripping gel
Disposable paint brushes
Rubber gloves
Eye protection
Respirator mask
Nylon brush
Mineral spirits

  1. Pour a small amount of the stripper into a glass jar or metal can. Using a disposable paint brush, apply the chemical paint stripper to the metal, and let it set according to the instructions on your commercial stripper. As it sets, you should start to see the paint bubble up from the surface of the metal.
  2. Wearing protective gear, take a paint scraper, and chip off the bubbled paint from all the flat surfaces of the metal. For crevices and harder-to-reach areas, switch to a scrubbing pad or nylon brush (you can use the one from Step 2, but first give it a good wash and trim the bristles short!) and continue to chip away. Reapply stripper and scrape or brush away again as needed until the whole piece is paint-free.
  3. Next, dampen a rag with mineral spirits and wipe the surface down. This will remove any leftover flakes of lifted paint and the bulk of the remaining chemical residue. 
  4. Thoroughly rinse off the metal with water to completely remove all traces of the stripper, then wipe it down using a fresh, dry rag. 

Tips for Removing Paint From Metal

Person using wire brush to remove paint from metal.
Photo: istockphoto.com

Removing paint from metal surfaces can sometimes be an easy project; in other instances, it can be time-consuming and difficult. Make sure to take time to adequately set up the project area and gather everything you need, including personal protective equipment, before starting. Here are some more tips:

  • Set up the project in a well-ventilated area.
  • Protect the area with a drop cloth to collect the paint chips and dust.
  • Always wear a face mask and gloves when removing paint from metal. 
  • Use a plastic paint scraper on softer metal surfaces to prevent scratching. 
  • You may need to use a combination of methods to remove all paint from a metal surface.
  • Always try the easiest method before moving on to power tools and chemical stripping. 

Final Thoughts

Learning how to remove paint from metal surfaces will help save money and resources as you can refresh and reuse those household items. Depending on the size and shape of the metal object, one method may be better suited than another. Also, you may need to try a few methods before all of the paint is gone. If removing paint from a metal item is only the first step in a bigger upcycling project, you may want to learn more about the best paints for metal.

About the Author

Theresa Clement is a handy designer who has been improving homes for more than 20 years. A certified color expert, she is known for solving design dilemmas with paint, and has painted everything from metal and wood furniture to plastic hopper balls and gum balls to complete a look for a client. Starting with her work at architecture firms, she has authored DIY books; writes for Architect magazine, JLC magazine, and Remodeling magazine; and worked as a design producer on makeover shows. She now works with her carpenter husband on private homes and their home improvement brand, MyFixitUpLife. 

FAQs

Q. How do I remove paint from metal without scratching it?

If you need to know how to remove paint from metal without scratching, consider the type of metal you’re working with. Softer metals, such as silver, gold, and tin, can be susceptible to scratching when using a metal paint scraper or other tools. It’s best to use a plastic paint scraper and the most gentlest methods while working with soft metals to avoid scratching. If there is an inconspicuous area on the metal surface, attempt to remove the paint from that area first. 

Q. How do I remove spray paint from metal?

If you are wondering how to remove spray paint from metal, it’s similar to removing bucket paint from metal. Spray-painted metal objects can be stripped of the paint finish with the methods described above. 

Q. How do I remove rust from metal objects?

How to remove rust from painted metal is a common question, since old metal paint is usually accompanied by rust. Rust can make the process a little more difficult and a lot more messy. The easiest way to remove rust is to use a drill with a wire wheel. Operate the drill on a low setting and make sure to wear eye protection as well as protection of your skin. 

The post How to Remove Paint From Metal appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[The Best Plug-In Air Fresheners]]>Keep your home smelling fresh with the continuous action of a plug-in air freshener.

The post The Best Plug-In Air Fresheners appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-plugin-air-freshener/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=160448Wed, 19 Feb 2025 11:45:32 -0500ReviewsCleaningCleaning & OrganizingCleaning SuppliesDIYInteriorWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Spray an air freshener and it may mitigate bad house smells momentarily. But, plug-in air fresheners combat unpleasant odors continuously, masking or even eliminating them completely. These products come in a number of different formats and typically work by heating oil or wax to aerosolize or vaporize fragrances. Although air purifiers sanitize the air by filtering out dust, mold spores, pet dander, and more.

While choosing the best plug-in air freshener might seem like a simple decision, there are a number of considerations to weigh. Our favorite was the plug-in air freshener from Febreze because of its simple design and effective refills. This guide explores important features and considerations and some of the top products on the market.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Febreze Odor-eliminating Plug Air Freshener
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Air Wick Plug in Scented Oil Starter Kit
  3. BEST ECO-FRIENDLY: Air Wick Botanica Plug in Scented Oil Starter Kit
  4. BEST DIFFUSER: Pure Daily Care Ultimate Aromatherapy Diffuser Set
  5. BEST AIR PURIFIER: LEVOIT Smart WiFi Air Purifier for Home
  6. BEST MINI AIR PURIFIER: Germ Guardian Pluggable Air Purifier & Sanitizer
  7. BEST FOR BATHROOM: Mindful Design Frosted Pagoda Wax Warmer Plug-In
The Best Plugin Air Freshener Options
Photo: amazon.com

Product Comparison

TypeScent(s)Longevity
Febreze Odor-eliminating Plug Air FreshenerHeated oilClean linen, lily, and pear50 days (per refill)
Air Wick Plug in Scented Oil Starter KitHeated oilLavender and chamomile60 days (per refill)
Air Wick Botanica Plug in Scented Oil Starter KitHeated oilCaribbean sweetgrass and sandalwood, French lavender and honey, pineapple and Tunisian rosemary, and Himalayan magnolia and vanilla60 days (per refill)
Pure Daily Care Ultimate Aromatherapy Diffuser SetEssential oil diffuserLavender, eucalyptus, tea tree, orange, peppermint, lemongrass, jasmine, nutmeg, clove, and spearmintUnlimited
LEVOIT Smart WiFi Air Purifier for HomeAir purifierN/AUnlimited
Germ Guardian Pluggable Air Purifier & SanitizerAir purifierN/A4,000 to 5,000 hours
Mindful Design Frosted Pagoda Wax Warmer Plug-InWax warmerUniversal4 to 8 hours

Our Top Picks

The following recommendations take into account the abovementioned factors and features for choosing the best plug-in air freshener, in addition to overall quality and value. Check out these top options in a variety of categories for eliminating unpleasant odors and controlling the air quality in your home.

Best Overall

Febreze Odor-eliminating Plug Air Freshener

 The Best Plugin Air Freshener Option: Febreze Odor-eliminating Plug Air Freshener
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Refill cartridges
  • Suitable for large and small spaces
  • Compatible with horizontal and vertical outlets
  • Compact and lightweight

What We Don’t Like

  • Should not be used in enclosed areas with pets
  • Cannot be used with extension cords
  • Not compatible with wet or moist areas

This heated oil set from Febreze packs a serious punch—and some pleasant scents. It includes the plug-in warmer as well as one to two refill cartridges, each of which features two rotating, complementary scents that feature notes of lily and pear. Use the highest setting for large open spaces and the lowest setting for smaller rooms.

Each cartridge operates for 1,200 hours (approximately 50 days) at the lowest setting. The warmer is also compatible with all other versions of Febreze plug-in cartridges for more tropical, musky, or floral scents. The warmer is compatible with both horizontal and vertical outlets and can be placed upside down if necessary.

Product Specs

  • Type: Heated oil
  • Scent(s): Clean linen, lily, and pear
  • Longevity: 50 days (per refill)

Get the Febreze plug-in air freshener at Target or Walmart.

Best Bang for the Buck

Air Wick Plug in Scented Oil Starter Kit

 The Best Plugin Air Freshener Option: Air Wick Plug in Scented Oil Starter Kit
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Extra refills
  • 5 settings
  • Lasts for 360 days total on the lowest setting
  • Dye- and phthalate-free
  • Recyclable and eco-friendly

What We Don’t Like

  • Some users report issues with the scent quality

Air Wick’s scented oil starter kit features two warmers and six refills at a budget-friendly price. Control the amount of fragrance emitted by choosing from five settings for tackling cooking, musty, and pet odors. This kit provides a lavender aroma for 360 days on the lowest setting, with each cartridge lasting for approximately 60 days.

The oil is free of dyes and phthalates and contains natural fragrances, which include notes of lavender essence as well as chamomile and woods. The packing materials and glass cartridges are recyclable to make the product eco-friendly. The refills are also compatible with all other Air Wick plug-in air fresheners.

Product Specs 

  • Type: Heated oil
  • Scent(s): Lavender and chamomile
  • Longevity: 60 days (per refill)

Get the Air Wick Starter Kit at Amazon, The Home Depot, and Walmart.

Best Eco-Friendly

Air Wick Botanica Plug in Scented Oil Starter Kit

 The Best Plugin Air Freshener Option: Botanica by Air Wick Plug in Scented Oil Starter Kit
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Free of propellants, dyes, and phthalates
  • Cruelty-free
  • Responsibly-sourced oil
  • 100 percent recyclable packaging

What We Don’t Like

  • Some users report poor scent quality

Air Wick’s Botanica line is tough on unpleasant smells and gentle on the planet. The oil contains responsibly sourced ingredients and no chemical propellants, dyes, or phthalates, and it was not tested on animals. The scent features Caribbean sweetgrass and sandalwood, and the sweetgrass essential oil is responsibly sourced from Haiti. It comes in a 100 percent recyclable box and is made in a zero-waste plant.

The kit includes two warmers and six refills, each of which provides up to 60 days of pleasant, warm aromas on the lowest setting. Air Wick also makes a number of other eco-friendly Botanica fragrances, including French Lavender and Honey, Pineapple and Tunisian Rosemary, and Himalayan Magnolia and Vanilla.

Product Specs 

  • Type: Heated oil
  • Scent(s): Caribbean sweetgrass and sandalwood, French lavender and honey, pineapple and Tunisian rosemary, and Himalayan magnolia and vanilla
  • Longevity: 60 days (per refill)

Get the Air Wick Scented Oil Starter Kit at Amazon.

Best Diffuser

Pure Daily Care Ultimate Aromatherapy Diffuser Set

 The Best Plugin Air Freshener Option: Pure Daily Care Ultimate Aromatherapy Diffuser Set
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for aromatherapy
  • 10 essential oils with amber jars for sun protection
  • BPA-free plastic construction
  • 400-millimeter capacity
  • 7 ambient light modes

What We Don’t Like

  • No longevity between reloads listed
  • Pricey compared to similar options

Pure Daily Care makes an excellent starter kit for those interested in aromatherapy. This diffuser comes with 10 therapeutic-grade essential oils, including lavender, eucalyptus, tea tree, orange, peppermint, lemongrass, jasmine, nutmeg, clove, and spearmint. Each is packaged in a 10-milliliter amber jar that protects the oil from sun degradation.

The diffuser itself is made from BPA-free plastic with a wood grain design and has a 400-milliliter capacity. It features seven ambient light modes with two light intensity settings as well as a timer and an auto-shutoff feature that detects low water levels.

Product Specs 

  • Type: Essential oil diffuser
  • Scent(s): Lavender, eucalyptus, tea tree, orange, peppermint, lemongrass, jasmine, nutmeg, clove, and spearmint
  • Longevity: Unlimited

Get the Pure Daily Care diffuser set at Amazon or Walmart.

Best Air Purifier

LEVOIT Smart WiFi Air Purifier for Home

 The Best Plugin Air Freshener Option: LEVOIT Smart WiFi Air Purifier for Home
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Connects to Wi-Fi networks; controllable through smartphones and tablets
  • Removes 99.97 percent of airborne contaminants
  • 3-step filtration system
  • Circulates air multiple times per hour
  • Night mode

What We Don’t Like

  • Pricey
  • No air quality sensor built-in

LEVOIT smart air purifier connects to a Wi-Fi network, allowing users to control it remotely from a smartphone or a tablet. Eliminate 99.97 percent of airborne contaminants that are 0.3 microns in size, including dust, pollen, mold, and pet dander, using the ultrafine nylon prefilter, activated carbon filter, and HEPA filter. In a 183-square-foot room, this air purifier circulates air five times per hour and twice per hour in a 376-square-foot room.

For uninterrupted sleep, users can turn off all display lights while the purifier is operating. Sleep mode also operates quietly at just 24 decibels, while “high-speed” mode produces 45 decibels of sound, which is comparable to the sound of a fridge running.

Product Specs 

  • Type: Air purifier
  • Scent(s): N/A
  • Longevity: Unlimited

Get the LEVOIT Smart WiFi air purifier at Amazon or Target.

Best Mini Air Purifier

Germ Guardian Pluggable Air Purifier & Sanitizer

 The Best Plugin Air Freshener Option: Germ Guardian Pluggable Air Purifier & Sanitizer
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Compatible with standard wall outlets
  • UV-C light technology; removes VOCs, germs, and viruses
  • Compact, lightweight design

What We Don’t Like

  • Not suitable for large spaces
  • Replacement bulbs sold separately

Many plug-in air purifiers sit on a tabletop, but mini models rest directly on a wall outlet, taking up minimal space. Despite its compact size, this Germ Guardian product is powerful enough to sanitize the air in small spaces. Rather than filters, it uses UV-C light to remove airborne germs and viruses and reduce volatile organic compounds (VOCs). The light actually alters the genetic structure of particles like influenza, killing them before they are breathed in. Each bulb lasts for between 4,000 and 5,000 hours.

Product Specs 

  • Type: Air purifier
  • Scent(s): N/A
  • Longevity: 4,000 to 5,000 hours

Get the Germ Guardian mini air purifier at Amazon, The Home Depot, and Walmart.

Best for Bathroom

Mindful Design Frosted Pagoda Wax Warmer Plug-In

 The Best Plugin Air Freshener Option: Mindful Design Frosted Pagoda Wax Warmer - Plug-In
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Removable dish
  • Toggle switch turn-on
  • Produces aroma and light

What We Don’t Like

  • Wax not included
  • Should be used with soy-based waxes for best results

To bring a spa-style vibe to any bathroom, consider this Mindful Design product. As a wax warmer, it provides the peaceful ambiance of a scented candle without the stress of an open flame. The pagoda-shaped warmer has a wood frame and glass siding, and it uses a glowing filament bulb to create a gentle golden glow for a relaxing atmosphere.

The outlet cord features a toggle switch so users can easily turn the warmer off when leaving the room. The bowl is removable for easy cleanup once the wax has cooled. The wax is not included; purchase soy-based wax for the best results.

Product Specs 

  • Type: Wax warmer
  • Scent(s): Universal
  • Longevity: 4 to 8 hours

Get the Mindful Design plug-in air freshener at Amazon.

How We Chose the Best Plug-In Air Fresheners

We researched the most sought-after plug-in air fresheners in their respective categories and discovered that the best options are determined by their type, size, fragrances offered, longevity, ease of setup and use, and other special features included by top brands.

To ensure our list included top picks that satisfied a range of preferences, we included heated oil models, essential oil diffusers, air purifiers, and wax melts that are compact enough to fit standard wall outlets as well as tabletops and vehicles. While many options come with various fragrances, some options remove unpleasant odors with air purification and elimination without the use of natural or artificial fragrances.

Though some options on our list provide unlimited usage, all of the other products listed above offer odor control for 4 hours to as long as 360 days at a time in small to large rooms. Each option is also easy to set up and use by simply plugging in or refilling a reservoir with water and compatible essential oils. Plus, these air fresheners are suitable for use in living room, kitchen, automotive, and bathroom spaces and their odors.

What to Consider When Choosing the Best Plug-in Air Freshener 

A number of factors and product features may affect a plug-in air freshener’s scent, settings, aesthetic, convenience, and overall quality. Keep reading to learn important considerations when shopping for the best plug-in air freshener for unpleasant home smells.

Types of Plug-in Air Fresheners

There are four basic types of plug-in air fresheners for unpleasant odors: heated oils and sprays, wax warmers, essential oil diffusers, and air purifiers. Each provides varying benefits and offers differing levels of convenience, longevity, and additional features.

Heated Oil and Spray

These standard plug-in air fresheners are energy efficient, emitting a fairly strong fragrance while using a minimal amount of electricity. They feature cartridges filled with a wide variety of scented oils, which are then aerosolized and sprayed into the room. Most models are compatible with any refill cartridge from the same brand. Each cartridge lasts between 30 and 60 days, though longevity varies from brand to brand.

Some folks find the fragrance from this type of air freshener to be overpowering, but there are products that let you control the level of scent emitted, adjusting it to room size or user preference. Be mindful of standard plug-in air fresheners when it comes to children and pets, because heated oils and sprays are dangerous if ingested.

Wax Warmers

Wax warmers act as a safer alternative to burning candles, relying on either a light bulb or a warming plate as a heat source instead of an open flame. Bulbs for plug-in wax warmers range from 25 to 40 watts, and various models may emit soft, ambient light to mimic a candle. While some models may come with wax, it can also be purchased separately.

These products feature a heat-resistant bowl where users place wax melts or pucks that come in various natural and synthetic fragrances. The wax takes several hours to cool completely and should not be accessible to children or pets. Each wax melt lasts for up to 10 hours.

Essential Oil Diffusers

Essential oils are natural, plant-derived substances said to have a number of aromatherapeutic benefits. Essential oil diffusers heat essential oils to break them down and dispense the smaller particles into the air. Most models also use water to provide both a humidifying and air- freshening effect.

While the water reservoir must be refilled daily, only a few drops of essential oil are required. Some oil diffusers are sold with essential oils while others require that you purchase them separately. Essential oil diffusers should only be used for half an hour at a time because prolonged exposure to essential oils may have negative health effects.

Air Purifiers

Air purifiers actually eliminate unpleasant odors rather than simply covering them up. Not only that, but they also improve air quality by removing dust, pollen, mold, and pet dander. They are the ideal choice for reducing airborne contaminants that aggravate allergy symptoms and cause respiratory issues. They draw in odors and particles from the air, then use filters to purify the air before recirculating it into the room.

The highest-quality filters are known as HEPA (high-efficiency particulate air) filters. They have been certified to trap 99.97 percent of all particles that are 0.3 microns or larger in size. HEPA filters must be changed every 3 to 6 months.

When choosing an air purifier, consider the size of your space. Most manufacturers will stipulate the ideal room size for their product and provide an air change per hour (ACH) rate, which lets users know how many times per hour it will filter all of the air in the room.

Location

When choosing an air freshener, first consider where it will be placed. While a stronger fragrance may be a great choice for a large open space, it may be overpowering in a small bathroom. Also, consider any pets or young children in the household, and be sure to place the plug-in air freshener out of their reach.

Note that your vehicle may also benefit from a plug-in product. Some are designed to be plugged into a car’s 2-volt outlet, while others use a USB cable. They’re convenient for covering up the smell of fast food or stinky sports equipment. They typically power on when the engine is running to avoid wasting the car’s battery.

Scent

One of the primary considerations when choosing an air freshener is whether to go with a scented or unscented version. Standard air fresheners, as well as essential oil diffusers and wax warmers, feature a wide variety of fresh scents that can be swapped out seasonally or depending on your preference.

Decide whether natural aromas from essential oils or synthetic scents are the better choice for your household, keeping in mind that some artificial smells may act as irritants to allergy sufferers. Also remember that air purifiers eliminate odors without emitting any additional scent.

Settings

Each type of plug-in air freshener can feature a range of settings.

  • Some standard air fresheners allow users to control the level of fragrance emitted based on how strong they want the smell to be. Others feature night-lights that are convenient for late-night bathroom trips.
  • Essential oil diffusers may include timers, ambient light settings, and auto-shutoff features that detect low water levels.
  • Air purifiers often feature different fan settings, timers, and filter change indicators. They may also include smart technology, allowing users to control them remotely via a smartphone or a tablet.

Aesthetic

When choosing an air freshener that will be placed in a visible location, the product’s appearance is a key consideration.

  • Heated oil and spray air fresheners typically have a simple plastic design and display the color of the oil or liquid.
  • Wax warmers vary widely in appearance, with options to suit a number of different decor styles. They may have either a natural, a contemporary, or a bohemian aesthetic.
  • Essential oil diffusers come in a variety of shapes and sizes and feature casings made from plastic, wood, glass, and terra cotta.
  • Air purifiers often feature streamlined modern designs that help them blend in with existing decor items.

Convenience

Some shoppers may prioritize convenience when choosing a plug-in air freshener. Air purifiers offer optimal convenience since their filters only need to be changed a few times per year. Essential oil diffusers, on the other hand, need their water reservoirs filled daily.

When shopping for a standard plug-in air freshener, look for a model that is compatible with both vertical and horizontal outlets that can be plugged in upside down if necessary.

FAQs 

Here are answers to some of the most frequently asked questions about plug-in air fresheners for bad home smells.

Q: Do plug-in air fresheners use a lot of electricity? 

Plug-in air fresheners are very energy efficient, using an average of 4 watts of power.

Q: Are plug-in air fresheners a fire hazard? 

While some plug-in air fresheners have been blamed for causing fires, this is extremely rare. These incidents are typically caused by faulty wiring.

Q: What is the most effective air freshener? 

Air purifiers are more powerful than traditional air fresheners because they actually filter and eliminate dust and mold particles to clean the air in your home. The LEVOIT Smart WiFi Air Purifier for Home is one of the best air purifier options available.

Q: What is the longest-lasting plug-in air freshener? 

The Air Wick Plug in Scented Oil Starter Kit is one of the most long-lasting plug-in air fresheners on the market, with the included cartridges lasting for a total of 360 days.

Q: How often do plug-in air fresheners need to be replaced? 

The cartridges on standard plug-in air fresheners typically need to be replaced every 30 to 60 days, depending on the brand.

The post The Best Plug-In Air Fresheners appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[Our Favorite Attic Insulation is Surprisingly DIY-Friendly]]>Keep your home protected from winter’s freezing cold and summer’s sweltering heat by insulating your attic.

The post Our Favorite Attic Insulation is Surprisingly DIY-Friendly appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-attic-insulation/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=143589Wed, 19 Feb 2025 11:26:33 -0500ReviewsAtticsHeating & CoolingInsulationInteriorWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Adding sufficient attic insulation is an excellent way to protect your home from temperature extremes and moisture damage while reducing heating and cooling costs. Insulation acts as a barrier to prevent the transfer of heat flow from the inside to the outside of the house in winter or from the outside to the inside in summer.

After reviewing several types of attic insulation, including the most sought-after products, our top pick is the Owens Corning R-38 Faced Fiberglass Insulation. Made of stiff fiberglass batts, this insulation is easy to cut and install and won’t slip out of place. It also offers a Kraft paper-faced side to mitigate moisture issues.

We also spoke to a veteran roofer and contractor for an expert opinion on insulation types for attics, R-values, and when to DIY versus when to call in a professional. Read on for key tips and a curated list of some of the best attic insulation products on the market. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: Owens Corning R-38 Faced Fiberglass Insulation
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Frost King CF1 “No Itch” Natural Cotton Insulation
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST BLANKET: Owens Corning R-30 Unfaced Fiberglass Insulation
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST BLOWN-IN: Greenfiber 25 lbs. Cellulose Blown-In Insulation
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST RADIANT FOIL: US Energy Products Double Bubble Foil Insulation
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST FOAM BOARD: Owens Corning Pink Insulation FOAMULAR 250 Board 
    Jump to Review
The Best Attic Insulation Options
Photo: The Home Depot Photo: homedepot.com

Before You Buy Attic Insulation

In most circumstances, it makes sense to add attic insulation. However, in a few situations, installing insulation can cause serious problems, such as in older homes that were built with large gaps between the walls to account for the moisture that naturally leaks into homes. The gaps allow the moisture to dry without causing damage to the structure, but if these spaces are filled with insulation, it can absorb the moisture and lead to mold and rotted wood.

If you have an old or wood-shingled roof and you attempt to install insulation on the ceiling of your attic, a similar situation could occur. These older roofing materials were made to get wet, breathe, and dry, but with insulation blocking the wood, the moisture will only accumulate. 

According to Michael Casolaro, President & Owner of MCAS Roofing & Contracting, Inc. in Croton-on-Hudson, New York, you should avoid adding insulation to attics with existing ventilation or moisture issues. “If your attic has existing moisture problems, mold, poor ventilation, or exposed wires, homeowners should avoid installing insulation before first fixing these issues. Adding insulation to an attic in any of these conditions can make your problems worse,” he says. 

Also, avoid using insulation anywhere near knob and tube wiring, which is an outdated electrical system that’s a major fire hazard and should be replaced as soon as possible. 

Attic Insulation Comparison Chart

 TypeR-ValueMaterial
Owens Corning R-38 Faced Fiberglass InsulationBlanket R-38Fiberglass
Frost King CF1 “No Itch” Natural Cotton InsulationBlanket R-4Cotton
Owens Corning R-30 Unfaced Fiberglass InsulationBlanketR-30Fiberglass
Greenfiber 25 lbs. Cellulose Blown-In InsulationBlown-in or spray foam R-19 to R-60Cellulose
US Energy Products Double Bubble Foil InsulationRadiant foil Not specifiedAluminum polyester and polyethylene
Owens Corning Pink Insulation FOAMULAR 250 BoardFoam boardR-10Extruded polystyrene

Our Top Picks

The top-rated products below were chosen for their quality, price, and customer satisfaction to help you find the best attic insulation to protect your home from high- and low-temperature extremes.

Best Overall

Owens Corning R-38 Faced Fiberglass Insulation

 The Best Attic Insulation Option: Owens Corning R-38 Kraft Faced Fiberglass Insulation
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • GreenGuard Certified for low chemical emissions
  • Features a Kraft paper vapor retarder
  • DIY-friendly; easy to cut and install
  • Can be installed on top of existing insulation

What We Don’t Like

  • Must be covered with a 15-minute thermal barrier

Specs 

  • Type: Blanket 
  • R-Value: R-38
  • Material: Fiberglass 

Install this insulation from Owens Corning in an uninsulated attic or add it as a second layer to increase the R-value potential of a home and cut heating and cooling costs. It features a Kraft paper barrier to help prevent moisture issues and is GreenGuard-certified for low chemical emissions into indoor air. 

Each package includes eight pieces of fiberglass attic insulation, and each piece measures 48 inches by 16 inches. Using all eight pieces without cutting them covers a 42.67-square-foot space with 12.5-inch thick insulation. This blanket-style attic insulation is easy to cut and install, and the thick insulating material also helps reduce noise and vibration in your home.

Get the Owens Corning R-38 attic insulation at The Home Depot or Lowes.

Best Bang for the Buck

Frost King CF1 "No Itch" Natural Cotton Insulation

 The Best Attic Insulation Option Frost King CF1 No Itch Natural Cotton Insulation
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Suitable for attic floors, ceilings, and walls
  • Doesn’t require gloves or safety glasses when cutting 
  • Works around pipes, ducts, windows, and doors
  • Resistant to mold, mildew, and fire 

What We Don’t Like

  • May not provide ample thermal insulation

Specs 

  • Type: Blanket 
  • R-Value: R-4 
  • Material: Cotton 

Affordable and effective, this natural cotton attic insulation by Frost King is 1 inch thick and measures 16 inches by 48 inches. Use one or more pieces on attic walls, floors, and as attic ceiling insulation, or cut or rip up smaller pieces of insulation to fill in gaps around pipes, ducts, windows, and doors.

While this isn’t waterproof insulation, it’s made with cotton denim that’s resistant to mold and mildew. This is an all-natural alternative to woven fiberglass. Moreover, natural cotton denim is safe and easy to install with just your hands and a utility knife.

Get the Frost King attic insulation at Amazon, Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, and Walmart.

Best Blanket

Owens Corning R-30 Unfaced Fiberglass Insulation

 The Best Attic Insulation Option: Owens Corning R-30 EcoTouch Fiberglass Insulation
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Made with 65 percent recycled content
  • Easy to cut and position
  • Helps regulate heat in every season
  • Provides noise-reducing benefits

What We Don’t Like

  • May not provide ample thermal insulation

Specs 

  • Type: Blanket 
  • R-Value: R-30
  • Material: Fiberglass

This blanket insulation from Owens Corning is easy to cut, position, and install in almost any space. The woven fiberglass insulation is made with 65 percent recycled content and feels as soft as cotton.

This blanket insulation for a roof with attic space comes in 9-inch-thick insulation rolls. It boasts an R-value of 30, keeping your home warm in colder months and cooler in the warmer months. It also aids in reducing the transmission of noise.

Get the Owens Corning R-30 attic insulation at The Home Depot, Lowes, or Ace Hardware.

Best Blown-in

Greenfiber 25 lbs. Cellulose Blown-In Insulation

 The Best Attic Insulation Option: Greenfiber 25 lbs. Cellulose Blown-In Insulation
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • 25 percent reduction in heating and cooling costs 
  • Made with 85 percent recycled material
  • Reduces noise by 60 percent
  • Reduces fire hazards

What We Don’t Like

  • Some users report unpleasant smell

Specs 

  • Type: Blown-in or spray foam 
  • R-Value: R-19 to R-60
  • Material: Cellulose 

With versatile application options and an R-value of R-19, the Greenfiber Cellulose Blown-In insulation is a viable option for attics, sidewalls, and ceilings. Whether you spray it on or opt for blow-in application, this insulation is easy to apply over existing insulation or alone and reduces your heating and cooling costs by up to 25 percent. 

This insulation can cover 48 square feet of attic space and is suitable for all climates. It also reduces noise in your home by 60 percent, is made with 85 percent recycled material, and uses low-energy manufacturing. Finally, it has ample fire resistance and is carbon-locked, which makes it long-lasting. 

Get the Greenfiber attic insulation at The Home Depot or Lowe’s.

Best Radiant Foil

US Energy Products Double Bubble Foil Insulation

 The Best Attic Insulation Option: US Energy Products Double Bubble Foil Insulation
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Reflects up to 97 percent of heat
  • Suitable for high-heat regions
  • Light weight for easy cutting and installation

What We Don’t Like

  • Needs used with foam board or blanket insulation

Specs 

  • Type: Radiant foil 
  • R-Value: Not specified
  • Material: Aluminum polyester and polyethylene 

This radiant foil attic insulation by US Energy Products is a solid option when paired with another insulating material like foam board or blanket insulation because radiant foil can reflect up to 97 percent of radiant heat. The secondary insulator resists the flow of the residual heat. This insulation is easy to cut with a utility knife or scissors and simple to install with staples, nails, or an adhesive.

The insulation acts as a sandwich, with two layers of reflective metalized aluminum polyester film on the outside and two layers of polyethylene air bubbles on the inside. The air bubbles reduce the flow of heat, while the foil reflects the radiant heat. This construction keeps homes cool in warmer climates and warm in colder weather.

Get the US Energy insulation on Amazon.

Best Foam Board

Owens Corning Pink Insulation FOAMULAR 250 Board

 The Best Attic Insulation Option Owens Corning Pink Insulation FOAMULAR 250 Board
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • Suitable for attics, cavity wall insulation, and more
  • Easy to install; can be cut if necessary
  • Keeps moisture out
  • Maintains R-value in extreme temperatures

What We Don’t Like

  • Some users report awkward sizing

Specs 

  • Type: Foam board
  • R-Value: R-10
  • Material: Extruded polystyrene

Foam board insulation is rigid and lightweight, making it easy to carry and install on floors, walls, ceilings, and around windows. Use a warm utility knife to slice through this foam board from Owens Corning with a high degree of precision. This method allows users to form the insulation to the exact size requirements or even to cut rounded shapes in the foam board so heat isn’t lost around pipes or other obstructions.

This insulation has low water absorption potential and is ideal for creating a vapor barrier in narrow gaps around windows and doors where significant amounts of heat can be lost from a home in the winter months.

Get the Owens Corning attic insulation on The Home Depot.

How We Chose the Best Attic Insulations

We researched the most sought-after attic insulations in their respective categories and discovered that the best options are determined by their type, R-value, materials, ease of application, and other special features included by select brands.

While assembling our list of top picks, we made sure to include diverse options, including blanket, spray/blow-in, radiant foil, and foam board insulation with R-values ranging from R-1.3 to R-40 for any required heat resistance. These insulation options are made with fiberglass, cotton, cellulose, polyester, polyethylene, and polystyrene, all of which are easy to install and suitable for cutting or adjusting as needed. 

Our top picks also offer mold-, mildew-, and fire-resistance and the added benefit of noise reduction. Plus, many of the above options are made with recycled or pre-consumed materials and are eco-friendly. 

Types of Attic Insulation

Several different types of attic insulation are available, including blanket, spray foam, radiant foil, and foam boards, each with benefits and shortcomings. 

According to Casolaro, the three best types of attic insulation include spray foam, fiberglass batts, and blown-in insulation. “Spray foam does the best job of insulating your attic, but it’s the most expensive,” he says “Fiberglass batts are affordable, but it’s more likely that air will leak through gaps. Most often, I’ll recommend blown-in insulation, which balances effectiveness with cost.”

Read below for a more detailed look at the pros and cons of each type of attic insulation so you can decide which is best for your unique circumstances.

Blanket Insulation

Blanket insulation is one of the most common types of insulation for walls and attic floors; however, don’t use it in open spaces because the fiberglass particles can affect the air quality in your home. Cut the thick pieces of insulation to fit tightly between the gaps in wooden frames or around pipes, wires, and other obstacles.

While this insulation is also one of the most inexpensive and easiest types to install, it isn’t as effective as spray foam insulation. When installing blanket insulation, wear a breathing mask and protective gloves to avoid irritating your lungs and skin.

Spray Foam

Spray foam insulation is the primary type of attic insulation. Pair it with blanket insulation to better insulate edges and corners, and use it to seal gaps in existing walls. Spray foam attic insulation costs more than other types and can be a hassle to remove. However, it’s the most effective option for insulating your home against the transmission of hot and cold air.

The spray foam is made of liquid polyurethane, which, when sprayed into the cavity of your wall or attic, expands and hardens into a solid foam. If you haven’t used spray foam insulation before, consider hiring a professional to install it to ensure your home is adequately protected.

Blow-In 

Blown-in insulation refers to blowing or spraying insulation products into wall cavities, attics, and floors. Methods vary depending on the form of insulation selected. Two of the most common types of blow-in insulation are fiberglass, rock wool, and cellulose, which are applied in an attic space with a blowing machine for easy, even distribution. 

Conveniently, most blown-in options can be applied over existing insulation and fill between existing wall studs and ceiling joists for increased insulation. 

Radiant Foil

Because it’s designed primarily to reflect heat away from your home, radiant foil insulation is more common in warmer climates. It works through its reflective foil barrier, which is attached to kraft paper or polyethylene bubbles. The bubbles help prevent the transfer of heat through the barrier because they provide a pocket of air, which reduces the rate at which heat can move through the substance.

While standard insulation reduces the flow of heat, radiant foil reflects it. Because of this difference, radiant foil cannot be measured using the same factors attributed to blanket, spray, or foam board insulation. Radiant foil usually is the most affordable type of insulation.

Foam Boards

Low in cost and easy to install, foam board insulation is generally made of polyurethane, polystyrene, or polyisocyanurate. Sheets of foam board can be cut to fit tightly between wall studs or attic ceiling joists. Because they are not as effective at insulating, foam boards are not as popular as blanket insulation.

However, foam boards don’t cause moisture accumulation and mold growth as can blanket insulation, because the solid foam doesn’t absorb much moisture. Instead, it dries in a relatively quick time frame. 

What to Consider When Choosing the Best Attic Insulation

Finding the proper insulation for your home isn’t difficult once you’ve determined which type of insulation to purchase. If you’re wondering what is insulation made of or how to find the correct R-value for your geographic location, here’s what you need to know.

R-Value 

Attic insulation ranges in effectiveness, so manufacturers and industry professionals typically reference insulation’s R-value to help people find the best attic insulation for their homes. R-value is a measurement of the insulation’s resistance to the flow of heat. The higher the R-value rating of a product, the more effective it is at reducing energy costs.

R-values for insulation are usually listed in the product description or on the product packaging. However, radiant foil insulation isn’t measured by R-value because it’s designed to reflect heat instead of reducing the transmission of heat. The optimal R-value for the insulation in your home also depends on your geographic location. Review this Energy Star R-value chart to learn the estimated R-value for your area.

Material

Insulation for attic spaces can be constructed from a wide range of materials, including cellulose, fiberglass, mineral wool, liquid polyurethane, and polystyrene.

  • Cellulose insulation was used regularly in buildings for most of the last 100 years. This insulation material consists of cellulosic fibers like newspaper, cardboard, cotton, straw, hemp, and sawdust. At just 3.8 per inch of cellulose insulation, the R-value is relatively low.
  • Fiberglass insulation is made from tightly woven fibers that are light, malleable, and relatively simple to cut and install. This material is regularly used in blanket insulation and has an R-value of 2.7 per inch.
  • Mineral wool has an R-value of 3.3 per inch. It’s a stone-based mineral fiber insulation material that contains basalt rock and recycled steel slag.
  • Liquid polyurethane is the main ingredient in spray foam insulation. The R-value of this type of insulation ranges from 3.5 per inch to 6.5 per inch, depending on whether you’re using open-cell (3.5) or closed-cell (6.5) spray foam.
  • Polystyrene is used to create foam board insulation with a variable R-value of 3.8 per inch to 5 per inch, depending on whether it’s expanded polystyrene (styrofoam) or extruded polystyrene, which can be identified by the blue or pink color.
  • Cotton is a very reliable insulation material for your attic and it is commonly made with recycled materials and is very easy to cut and install. This material is also safer than fiberglass during installation and use as there are fewer fibers floating around. 

Tips for Installing Attic Insulation

Keep in mind that insulation cannot be installed just anywhere in your home. For instance, if blanket insulation is placed over air intake vents, the harmful particles can circulate through your home. Additionally, placing insulation near exposed electrical connections or over the top of heat vents could cause a fire. 

Based on the type and style of the home, also consider how and where to place the insulation. Older homes and homes with wooden shingles may be built with a design that allows the natural evaporation of excess moisture. Insulation installed in these areas acts as a sponge, soaking up the moisture instead of allowing it to dissipate. As moisture builds up, mold can grow and eventually rot out the wood. 

With blanket insulation, cut spaces in the insulation to allow it to fit around obstructions like drainage pipes, large water pipes, attic fans, and HVAC ducts. When blanket insulation becomes compressed, it’s less effective at insulating your home, such as when you forcibly install a piece of insulation around a pipe instead of cutting a gap to allow it to fit comfortably.

  • Don’t install insulation over air vents, near electrical circuits, or in any other areas where it poses a risk.
  • Carefully inspect older homes before installing insulation to ensure it won’t cause moisture accumulation that can lead to mold and rot.
  • Blanket insulation is not as effective if it’s compacted during installation, so cut spaces for large drainage pipes and other obstacles instead of forcing the insulation to fit around them.
  • Don’t install insulation in attics with moisture problems without first rectifying the issue. If you’re unsure if there’s moisture in the walls, use a moisture meter for detection, or call in a pro.

While laying insulation in attic spaces can be DIY-friendly, some situations require a professional insulation contractor. “If you’re a DIYer, you might be able to install your own insulation. However, there are a few situations where you should work with a pro,” advises Casolaro. “If you choose spray foam insulation, it’s tricky to install correctly without experience. Also, if your home is older, there’s a greater risk of exposed wires, moisture, and improper ventilation. A professional is more likely to recognize these issues.”

FAQs 

Before investing in new attic insulation, take a look at these frequently asked questions regarding how to insulate an attic.

Q. What is the best R-value for attic insulation?

The best R-value depends on the typical temperature fluctuations in your city or state, but average R-value recommendations for attic spaces range between R-30 to R-49.

Q. Which type of insulation is the most effective? 

Spray foam insulation is the most effective type, with a maximum R-value of 6.5 per inch.

Q. Can you put too much insulation in the attic?

Yes, you can. If this occurs, moisture can become trapped inside the space, causing mold and air quality problems.

Q. Should you remove the old attic insulation before adding new insulation?

You can remove the old attic insulation before adding new insulation, but it isn’t necessary unless the old insulation is wet, made with hazardous materials (like asbestos), or simply degrading too quickly to serve any remaining purpose.

Q. How often should attic insulation be replaced?

The rate at which attic insulation needs to be replaced depends on the type and whether or not you’ve experienced roof damage or pest infestations. Fiberglass and cellulose insulation can begin degrading 15 to 20 years after installation, while mineral wool, spray foam, and foam board can last for decades. 

Q. How much of a difference does new attic insulation make?

If your attic was previously poorly insulated, new insulation can greatly improve your home’s comfort levels and energy bills. The U.S. Department of Energy estimates that sealing air leaks and adding insulation can help households lower their heating and cooling costs by 20 percent. 

Why Trust Bob Vila

Bob Vila has been America’s Handyman since 1979. As the host of beloved and groundbreaking TV series including “This Old House” and “Bob Vila’s Home Again,” he popularized and became synonymous with “do-it-yourself” home improvement.

Over the course of his decades-long career, Bob Vila has helped millions of people build, renovate, repair, and live better each day—a tradition that continues today with expert yet accessible home advice. The Bob Vila team distills need-to-know information into project tutorials, maintenance guides, tool 101s, and more. These home and garden experts then thoroughly research, vet, and recommend products that support homeowners, renters, DIYers, and professionals in their to-do lists.

The post Our Favorite Attic Insulation is Surprisingly DIY-Friendly appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[Homemade Ice Melt Recipes: 3 Solutions for When You’re Iced In]]>Fresh out of ice melt? Make your own homemade ice melt concoctions—and save yourself a tumble down the driveway—using materials you already have at home.

The post Homemade Ice Melt Recipes: 3 Solutions for When You’re Iced In appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/homemade-ice-melt/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=56727Wed, 19 Feb 2025 11:19:12 -0500ExteriorCleaning & OrganizingDIYDriveways & WalkwaysWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

A slippery coating of ice can bring your life to a grinding halt if you don’t have the means to get rid of it. While ice melt gets the job done, what if a surprise storm strikes after you’ve used up the last of your supply? Or maybe you’re trying to cut down on commercial ice melt out of concern for plants, pets, and the environment. In either scenario, DIY alternatives can help you clear ice off your car, sidewalks, driveway, and other surfaces. So, the next time you find yourself iced in, try one of these three homemade ice-melting solutions that use ingredients you probably have on hand.

1. For front steps, car windshields and doors, and other small areas, try rubbing alcohol.

Woman wearing black winter coat sprays homemade de-icer on an icy car windshield.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Alcohol has a much lower freezing point than water. This homemade de-icer recipe harnesses its ice-melting potential: Combine 4 gallons of hot water, 16 ounces of rubbing alcohol, and 1 teaspoon of dish soap. (The dish soap reduces the surface tension of the water, helping the solution spread more evenly.) Pour the solution over icy areas, and then use a shovel to clear off loose ice and water.

For icy car doors or windshields, pour some of the cooled solution into a spray bottle and spritz the frozen areas. Keep a bottle of this solution in the car so you’re ready if the windshield gets frosted over when you’re far from home.

Pro Tip

No matter which homemade ice melt you choose, it’s a good idea to also lay down a substance that adds friction, at least to surfaces anybody might walk on. Sand, rock salt, and kitty litter all do the trick.

2. For walkways and driveways, try salt.

Rock salt, or sodium chloride, is the most common (and cheapest) ice melt around. It works by lowering the freezing point of water, eventually breaking down the ice. If you don’t have any rock salt handy for de-icing, table salt can do in a pinch. For best results, remove as much snow as possible from the surface before applying the salt. Because of its small granule size, table salt will start working faster than rock salt, but it won’t provide the same traction. As well, table salt tends to turn ice into tough-to-move slush, while rock salt is more likely to break it down into manageable chunks. For small areas, such as the front steps, try mixing warm water with table salt and applying this solution; this method also works for unsticking car tires. Though cheap and usually plentiful, salt has a few drawbacks: It is not effective at the low temperatures that some of the best commercial ice melts can handle. As well, it can harm plants, corrode metal and concrete, and impact fish and wildlife if it gets into waterways, so avoid regular use.

3. If you have nothing else available, try fertilizer.

Ammonium sulfate, a common ingredient in commercial fertilizers, works by lowering the temperature at which ice melts. While it doesn’t melt ice immediately, it speeds the process along. If you have no other potential ice melt around, check your leftover fertilizer to see if ammonium sulfate is listed as a component. To use, scatter it over the ice. Although fertilizer can help melt ice, it’s not recommended. Overuse can harm plants, fertilizer chemicals can damage concrete surfaces, and fertilizer runoff from melting ice is an environmental concern.

The post Homemade Ice Melt Recipes: 3 Solutions for When You’re Iced In appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[The Best Double-Sided Tapes]]>From craft projects to industrial and manufacturing uses, double-sided tape is one of the most versatile of all tapes available.

The post The Best Double-Sided Tapes appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-double-sided-tape/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=135317Wed, 19 Feb 2025 11:06:56 -0500ReviewsDIYEasy DIY ProjectsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Move over, duct tape, there’s another tape that has nearly as many uses. Double-sided tape can be used to adhere any two surfaces a user wants to stick together tightly—without the need for glue or nails—in crafting, household, industrial, or manufacturing applications.

With so many products to choose from, it can be hard to select the best double-sided tape for a project. We’ve done the legwork with this comprehensive review, aiming to help shoppers make the right purchase. Our favorite is the Tough & Clear from Gorilla, offering a versatile and strong bond suitable both indoors and outdoors.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Gorilla Tough & Clear Double-Sided Mounting Tape
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Phinus Clear Waterproof Double-Sided Mounting Tape
  3. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Hitlights Heavy-Duty Double-Sided Foam Mounting Tape
  4. BEST REMOVABLE: Scotch Removable Double-Sided Tape Dispensered Roll
  5. BEST FOR CARPET: XFasten Double-Sided Tape 
  6. BEST FOR PAINTED WALLS: Scotch-Mount Indoor Double-Sided Mounting Tape
  7. BEST FOR CRAFTS: AJ Sign World 164-Foot Premium Double-Sided Adhesive
The Best Double-Sided Tape Option
Photo: amazon.com

Product Comparison

LengthColorFeatures
Gorilla Tough & Clear Double-Sided Mounting Tape60 or 150 inches long by 1 inch wide; 48 inches long by 2 inches wideClearWeatherproof, 12- to 37.5-pound hold (depending on tape length)
Phinus Clear Waterproof Double-Sided Mounting Tape10 feet long by 0.75 inches wideClearNonresidue, weatherproof
Hitlights Heavy-Duty Double-Sided Foam Mounting Tape32 feet or 100 feet long by 0.39 inches wideBlackFoam core
Scotch Removable Double-Sided Tape Dispensered RollVarious, from 200 to 450 inches longClearRemovable, dispenser included
XFasten Double-Sided Tape Various, from 15 to 30 yards longWhiteUV-, heat-, and moisture-resistant
Scotch-Mount Indoor Double-Sided Mounting TapeVarious, from 55 to 350 inches longWhiteIndustrial-strength adhesive holds up to 15 pounds
AJ Sign World 164-Foot Premium Double-Sided Adhesive164 feet long by 0.5 or 1 inch wideClearUltrathin, tearable by hand

Our Top Picks

Double-sided tape can work in a variety of scenarios if the right option is used. The ones listed here were selected for their quality and price to help shoppers find the best one for their projects.

Best Overall

Gorilla Tough & Clear Double-Sided Mounting Tape

 The Best Double-Sided Tapes Option: Gorilla Tough & Clear Double-Sided Mounting Tape
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for use both indoors and outdoors
  • Easily bonds to a wide variety of materials
  • Ideal for use on glass without creating tape marks

What We Don’t Like

  • Removing the backing can be quite tricky

Products Specs

  • Length: 60 or 150 inches long by 1 inch wide; 48 inches long by 2 inches wide
  • Color: Clear
  • Features: Weatherproof, 12- to 37.5-pound hold (depending on tape length)

Gorilla’s double-sided tape is great for projects where traditional fasteners won’t work. The tape works on a variety of surfaces, including stone, concrete, glass, metal, bricks, tile, plastic, and wood. However, because it’s a permanent tape and features a strong adhesive, it’s not recommended for delicate surfaces such as painted drywall.

This mounting tape holds 1 pound per 4 inches of tape. It’s good for both indoor and outdoor applications and it won’t yellow over time. The tape is moisture- and heat-resistant up to 194 degrees Fahrenheit.

Gorilla tape offers a wide range of mounting, repairing, and bonding applications. For those who need a permanent tape that mounts in an instant with a long-lasting, weatherproof bond, Gorilla’s product is a solid choice.

Get the Gorilla double-sided tape at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Bang for the Buck

Phinus Clear Waterproof Double-Sided Mounting Tape

 The Best Double-Sided Tapes Option: Phinus Clear Waterproof Double-Sided Mounting Tape
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for a variety of surfaces
  • Waterproof, weatherproof, and multipurpose
  • Nonresidue adhesive formula

What We Don’t Like

  • Isn’t suitable for use on delicate surfaces

Products Specs

  • Length: 10 feet long by 0.75 inches wide
  • Color: Clear
  • Features: Nonresidue, weatherproof

A budget-friendly option, this double-sided tape by Phinus works best on smooth surfaces, such as glass, metal, plastic, ceramic tile, and marble. Because it has a strong acrylic adhesive base, it’s not suitable for delicate surfaces such as wallpaper, painted surfaces, or broken walls.

The tape is flexible and leaves no residue when removed from proper surfaces. It has a cold/heat resistance of -4 to 160 degrees Fahrenheit and is resistant to moisture and solvents, making it useful outdoors as well as inside the home.

Get the Phinus double-sided tape at Amazon (2-pack).

Best Heavy Duty

HitLights Double Sided Tape

 The Best Double-Sided Tapes Option: HitLights Double Sided Tape
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Provides flexibility on more difficult surfaces
  • Ideal for installing LED strips on multiple surfaces
  • Provides an excellent permanent bond

What We Don’t Like

  • Tape is difficult to remove once applied

Products Specs

  • Length: 32 feet or 100 feet long by 0.39 inches wide
  • Color: Black
  • Features: Foam core

This industrial-strength, high-bond acrylic foam tape is suitable for most applications, including outdoor use. It works on a variety of materials, including aluminum, steel, glass, and plastics.

HitLights is a heavy-duty double-sided tape that grabs a firm hold immediately. The bond created by this permanent tape actually strengthens over time, and the product truly shines in cases where waterproof adhesion is required.

Get the Hitlights double-sided tape at Amazon or Hitlights.

Best Removable

Scotch Removable Double-Sided Tape Dispensered Roll

 The Best Double-Sided Tape Option: Scotch Removable Double-Sided Tape Dispensered Roll
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Ideal for small projects like scrapbooking
  • Tape comes in the included dispenser
  • Gentle enough to not damage delicate surfaces

What We Don’t Like

  • Removability sacrifices adhesive strength

Products Specs

  • Length: Various, including 200 inches long by 0.75 inches wide, 250 inches long by 1 inch wide, 300 inches long by 3 inches wide, and 450 inches long by 1 inch wide
  • Color: Clear
  • Features: Removable, dispenser included

This removable tape features a unique adhesive that holds paper securely but is easy to reposition or remove if needed or desired. This ability makes Scotch’s tape a terrific option to use in small projects, such as photo albums and scrapbooks. (The tape is acid-free and archival, so it will not yellow or damage either photographs or papers.)

For light-duty mounting needs, this double-sided tape is a fine option, not least because it comes in an easy-to-use tape dispenser that allows the tape to glide off the roll smoothly.

Get the Scotch removable double-sided tape at Amazon, Target (3-pack), Staples, or Office Depot.

Best for Carpet

XFasten Double Sided Carpet Tape

 The Best Double-Sided Tapes Option: XFasten Double Sided Carpet Tape
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Can easily stick to most surfaces
  • Sticky enough to hold most rugs in place
  • Resistance to heat, moisture, and UV light

What We Don’t Like

  • Unless installed carefully, rugs may still curl up in the corners

Products Specs

  • Length: Various, including 15 yards long by 3 inches wide, 20 yards long by 2 inches wide, 20 yards long by 4 inches wide, and 30 yards long by 2 inches wide
  • Color: White
  • Features: UV-, heat-, and moisture-resistant

XFasten’s durable carpet tape is a top solution for keeping area rugs and runners firmly in place. If the rug may need to be moved later, no worries—the tape can be removed easily by hand without leaving a sticky residue behind.

Surfaces must be dry and free of debris before application, but the tape is safe for use on hardwood, vinyl, and tile, as well as on carpeting of all types.

Get the XFasten double-sided tape at Amazon or XFasten.

Best for Painted Walls

Scotch-Mount Indoor Double-Sided Mounting Tape

 The Best Double-Sided Tape Option: Scotch-Mount Indoor Double-Sided Mounting Tape
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for most common uses around the home
  • Comfortably tackles most DIY projects
  • Thick and pliable tape

What We Don’t Like

  • Mounting heavier objects may start to fail over time
  • Removing the tape may inadvertently peel some paint off the wall

Products Specs

  • Length: Various, including 55 inches long by 1 inch wide, 125 inches long by 1 inch wide, and 350 inches long by 0.75 inches wide
  • Color: White
  • Features: Industrial-strength adhesive holds up to 15 pounds

Not all double-sided tapes like to adhere to painted surfaces, but Scotch’s foam mounting tape delivers a strong, permanent bond in 30 seconds flat and is able to hold 1 pound per 5.5 inches of tape up to a maximum of 15 pounds when using 80 inches of tape.

This product is ideal for mounting pictures and decorations, not least because it can be used on most types of walls, including ceramic tile and wood surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. However, this tape is not recommended for use on wallpaper or delicate surfaces. For the best results, apply when the temperature is between 50 and 100 degrees Fahrenheit.

Get the Scotch-Mount double-sided tape at Amazon (125 inches), Ace Hardware (350 inches), The Home Depot (55 inches), or Lowe’s (350 inches). 

Best for Crafts

AJ Sign World 164-Foot Premium Double-Sided Adhesive

 The Best Double-Sided Tape Option: AJ Sign World 164-Foot Premium Double-Sided Adhesive
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Relatively affordable price point
  • Tape is very thin and easy to tear
  • Backing is easy to remove

What We Don’t Like

  • Adhesive is quite strong and doesn’t remove easily

Products Specs

  • Length: 164 feet long by 0.5 or 1 inch wide
  • Color: Clear
  • Features: Ultrathin, tearable by hand

AJ Sign World’s acid-free tissue tape excels in all types of arts and crafts applications. It’s easy to tear by hand—no scissors required—and it’s transparent, which makes the tape more versatile. This 1-inch wide tape is only suited for use on smooth surfaces. Note also that this is a permanent tape. Once it’s on, it’s on for good.

Those who are looking for a thinner version of this AJ Sign World tape may want to consider the 0.5-inch-wide version.

Get the AJ Sign World double-sided tape at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Double-Sided Tapes

To build our top picks list, we researched all the top double-sided tape brands available across several categories. Our recommendations cover a range of specific uses for the best double-sided tapes, each offering unique qualities to suit a household task or project.

Our top picks are available in a variety of colors and lengths. We made sure to include a varied selection of adhesive strengths, from options that can be easily removed and repositioned to others capable of holding up to 15 pounds of weight. Our list also includes a range of both thick and thin tapes, which are better suited to different tasks.

What to Look for When Choosing Double-Sided Tape 

Double-sided tape is a versatile, economical alternative to glue. It has pressure-sensitive adhesive exposed on both sides of the tape which allows two items to be bonded together. The adhesive lies on top of a carrier material, which can range from film as thin as a fraction of a millimeter up to a thick foam several millimeters thick.

Unlike single-side tape, double-sided tape creates an invisible bond between two objects. Moreover, there’s little time required for the bond to form—simply peel and stick. The tape is often used to hang signs or temporary displays, attach foam to wall panels or flooring underlayment to floors, secure and hold carpets in place for major events or trade shows, and much more. The type of double-sided tape required depends on the application.

When shopping for double-sided tape, consider the tape type, adhesive level, thickness, width, application setting, and other factors. Below are some common characteristics to take into account when picking the right double-sided tape for a particular project.

Type

There are several types of double-sided tape with various carrier materials, each serving a specific purpose. Double-sided tape types fall into one of the below categories:

  • Tissue tape is the most common type used for light bonding tasks. It’s mostly used for stationery, art, crafting projects, office, and general applications. Double-sided tissue tape is easy to tear, and is thin enough that it can adhere to irregular surfaces. It’s also inexpensive and a good alternative to glue.
  • Acrylic tape is primarily used in industrial environments. It’s stronger than tissue tape and is weather-resistant, making it ideal for both indoor and outdoor use. Acrylic double-sided tape should only be used when permanent bonding is needed.
  • Polyethylene tape, also known as foam double-sided tape, provides thick cushioning and insulation. Double-sided polyethylene tape is well-suited for uneven surfaces.
  • Floor tape is used on floor surfaces, like carpet, to hold items like area rugs or runners in place. They have medium adhesion, which allows for removal without residue.
  • Double-sided tape has either acrylic or rubber adhesives. Acrylic adhesives are stronger but more expensive and rubber adhesives are generally cheaper but less suited for long-term applications. Acrylic adhesive is also more heat- and light-resistant than rubber.

Thickness and Width 

Double-sided tape has either thick or thin bonding systems. Tapes with thick bonding systems adhere well to unusual, non-uniform, or highly patterned and textured surfaces. This type of tape usually has a foam carrier layer. Thin bonding systems are significantly thinner. Sometimes the carrier layer is so thin that they are pretty much an adhesive on top of a silicone liner. These tapes are best suited for light adhesion applications.

Width varies quite a bit with double-sided tape. Rolls are available in widths less than 1/4-inch to several inches wide. Each type of tape will have several width options to suit specific projects.

Bonding Surfaces 

The right double-sided tape for a project depends on the surface of the two objects that the user wants to stick together. Surface energy is the degree of attraction or repulsion force a material exerts on another material. Double-sided tape works best on surfaces with a high surface energy, like glass, glazed tile, and bare metals. The surface energy of plastic can vary quite a bit, but in general, it’s best to use a stronger tape. Then there’s silicone, which has such low surface energy that conventional adhesives won’t stick to it. Silicone needs a very tacky adhesive, or one specially formulated to adhere to it.

For flat and smooth surfaces like glass, aluminum, and PVC, thinner tape works well. For rougher surfaces like wood, cement, brick, and stucco, thicker tapes work best. Painted or coated surfaces need thicker, stronger tape as well.

Environment

The environment plays an important role in the adhesion of double-sided tape. Is the tape for indoor or outdoor use? Some tapes are not designed to hold up in outdoor environments.

For outdoor tapes, the weather impacts adhesion quality. The cooler the temperatures, the weaker the resulting bond will be. But high heat isn’t good for adhesion either—it can cause the adhesive to melt and loosen the bond.

Dust, grease, or moisture can also compromise the bond between two surfaces. Cleaning the surface with rubbing alcohol and making sure it’s completely dry before application will guarantee a stronger bond.

Object Weight

Double-sided tapes are rated by the maximum load they can hold. In general, thicker tapes hold more weight. Additionally, tapes with acrylic-based glue will hold more weight. However, the strength of the bond depends on the surface and weight of the object.

The load capacity is determined by the tape’s adhesive viscosity. Adhesive viscosity is similar to liquid viscosity— if it flows easily, it has low viscosity; if it does not, it has high viscosity. However, the viscosity rating for double-sided tape basically determines how well it binds to uneven surfaces. For rough surfaces, a viscous tape is preferable because it will spread into all the nooks and crannies of the uneven surface. Smooth surfaces do not need tape that is as viscous.

In some tapes, viscosity increases as the tape cures on the surface, strengthening the bond.

Pick a tape that best matches the surface energy of the items and consider the maximum load rate.

Longevity

Double-sided tape is either removable or permanent. The removable variety is meant for temporary use and is easily removed. Permanent tapes are used mostly in industrial manufacturing, but strong tapes are also available for home use. These tapes are typically used in lieu of glue or nails to permanently hold two objects together.

The longevity of the bond depends on how strong the adhesive is, as well as the environment. In climate-controlled environments, most double-sided tapes will hold a bond until the user removes it. In outdoor environments, the bond is subjected to heat, cold, and moisture, which will eventually cause the bond to deteriorate.

Removal

There may come a time when it’s necessary to remove double-sided tape. Thankfully, for most of them, a little heat will cause the adhesive to melt and break the bond. A blow dryer or a heat gun can be used to warm the surface and slightly melt the adhesive. Sometimes the tape will release from one side but hold fast to the other. In that case, it may be necessary to apply more heat to break the bond.

If heat does not remove the adhesive, try commercial residue cleaners. These products work by dissolving the sticky adhesive on the tape, making it easier to remove. Pour some of it on the tape and let it soak in for a few minutes, then scrape it off.

FAQs

Now that you have read through the characteristics of double-sided tape, you may still have a few questions. Read on to see some of the commonly asked questions about double-sided tape.

Q. How do you prepare a surface for tape application?

The surface must be free from dust, dirt, and oil, and be completely dry before application. Use rubbing alcohol to wash away any residue and dry with a tack cloth before applying the tape.

Q. What is the ideal temperature for applying double-sided tape?

The ideal temperature for both the surface and the tape is 65 degrees Fahrenheit, or 18 degrees Celsius.

Q. What is the strongest double-sided tape?

VHB tape, such as the Hitlights double-sided tape, is the strongest double-sided tape available for consumers.

Q. Can double-sided tape be removed?

Yes. Typically applying heat to the surface will cause the adhesive to melt and release the bond.

The post The Best Double-Sided Tapes appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[How to Level a Concrete Floor]]>Leveling a concrete floor is a key step before installing new flooring on top of it. Learn which tools and products make this an easy DIY.

The post How to Level a Concrete Floor appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-level-a-concrete-floor/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=50231Wed, 19 Feb 2025 10:22:06 -0500InteriorBasementsFlooringWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Q: We plan to finish the basement in my house, and there are going to be a couple of sump pumps, so we no longer need the old drain in the middle of the floor. What’s the best way to level a concrete floor?

A: There is no one way to level a concrete floor. Of all the methods available to do-it-yourselfers, which should you employ? That depends on how level you want to make the concrete. And that question, in turn, hinges on a related but different question: What type of flooring do you plan to install in your basement once the floor is level?

Leveling a concrete floor for carpeting

A bird's eye view of a concrete grinder on a concrete floor.
Photo: Nikita Sobolkov / Depositphotos

If you envision carpeting or another type of floor that forgives minor variations in subfloor grade, such as engineered wood or click-and-lock vinyl, then you can probably opt for the least labor-intensive method for leveling a floor.

Here, a concrete grinder would do the bulk of the work. (You can rent a concrete grinder from your local home improvement center.) You’d use it to grind down the most prominent ridges in the floor.

To finish the job, you would then mix a batch of concrete and use it to fill in any dips or depressions.

Tried-and-True Advice

“While floor leveler is an easy way to level floors, especially if you’re planning to lay ceramic tile, it can be a challenge to keep it out of places you don’t want it to go, especially if you’re working in a bathroom where there are plumbing fixtures coming through the floor.

To keep leveler from flowing into toilet holes and floor vents, create a cardboard barrier around these holes by cutting pieces out of an old cardboard box. Shape the cardboard around the toilet flange and any floor vents and caulk or tape them into position. When you pour the floor leveler, it will flow around them instead of going down the holes.”

—Tony Carrick, Contributing Writer

Leveling a concrete floor for tile

Pouring self-leveling compound from a black bucket onto a concrete floor.
Photo: Anna Koldunova / Depositphotos

If you want to install vinyl tile or ceramic tile, things get a bit trickier. For a successful installation, the concrete floor beneath the tile needs to be more or less perfectly level and smooth. That’s true for compact tiles and even more critical for larger ones, including the popular 1-by-2-foot size.

With small tiles, the maximum differential between the lowest and highest point on the floor is 1/4 inch per 10 feet; with larger tiles, the acceptable differential is a mere 1/8 inch per 10 feet.

To achieve such flatness, use a self-leveling compound, such as Rapid Set Concrete Leveler Self-Leveling Underlayment. These products come in powdered form and are mixed with water and a fortifying agent. You end up with a thin liquid that when poured from a bucket flows across the existing uneven concrete. Gravity will bring the liquid to a level, but you can help the process along with a broom or trowel.

Mixing and applying self-leveling compound

Closely follow the manufacturer’s instructions, because every product differs slightly. Generally speaking, no matter which compound you choose, you’ll need to take prepare the basement beforehand:

  • It’s important to remove any flaking paint or loose adhesive from the floor to ensure that the compound will grip to the concrete.
  • So you don’t need an excessive quantity of compound, it’s a good idea to grind down any spots on the floor that are especially high.
  • Floor drains must be capped and sealed around the seams.
Some jobs are better left to the pros
Get free, no-commitment project estimates from concrete flooring experts near you.
+

Pro tip: Wear cleats or rubber boots in case you need to walk across the compound while it’s still wet.

Once the self-leveling compound has set, you can install your chosen flooring. Another option is to eschew a finished floor, and opt instead to stain, paint, or polish the compound that now forms the top layer of your concrete basement floor slab.

The post How to Level a Concrete Floor appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[We Tested the Best Upholstery Steam Cleaners for Chemical-Free Sanitizing]]>Freshen up your furniture with one of these excellent steam cleaners that sanitizes and deodorizes surfaces without harsh chemicals.

The post We Tested the Best Upholstery Steam Cleaners for Chemical-Free Sanitizing appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-upholstery-steam-cleaner/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-upholstery-steam-cleaner/Wed, 19 Feb 2025 10:17:30 -0500ReviewsCleaningCleaning SuppliesInteriorWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Steam cleaners use pressurized steam from heated water to clean both soft and hard surfaces. This method requires zero cleaning solutions and chemicals, making it a preferred cleaning procedure for many health-conscious users, as well as those with sensitivities or allergies. Steam cleaning lifts away dirt and grime from upholstery and other materials while killing germs, bacteria, and pathogens, leaving behind freshened and deodorized surfaces.

To find the best upholstery steam cleaner, we tested a number of popular models that we found through extensive product research and used them to steam furniture, car interiors, throw pillows, and other household surfaces. We also put them through a stain test, evaluating how well each model removed six common household stains. Our top pick was the Kiato handheld steam cleaner thanks to its large amount of steam produced in such a lightweight unit.

In addition to cleaning upholstery, steam cleaners also function well for sanitizing sealed floors, windows, tile, and other indoor and outdoor applications. Read on to learn about the best upholstery steam cleaner for your home and how we tested each model.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Kiato Handheld Steam Cleaner
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Bissell Steam Shot Handheld Steam Cleaner & Sanitizer
  3. BEST FOR CAR UPHOLSTERY: Wagner 925E SteamMachine Elite Portable Steamer
  4. BEST FOR VERSATILITY: Bissell PowerFresh Pet Lift-Off 2-in-1 Steam Mop
  5. BEST CANISTER MODEL: McCulloch MC1375 Canister Steam Cleaner
  6. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Dupray Neat Steam Cleaner
  7. BEST FOR SPOT CLEANING: Steamfast SF-210 Everyday Steam Cleaner
  8. BEST ACCESSORIES: Costway Heavy-Duty Steam Cleaner With Accessories
Woman steam cleaning the arm of a gray recliner
Photo: Katie Barton for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

TypeTank CapacityDimensionsWeight
Kiato Handheld Steam CleanerHandheld450 milliliters (250 milliliters maximum load)7.48 inches high by 5.03 inches wide by 9.84 inches deep4.66 lbs
Bissell Steam Shot Handheld Steam Cleaner & SanitizerHandheld 6.6 ounces8.5 inches high by 5 inches wide by 9.5 inches deep4 lbs
Wagner 925E SteamMachine Elite Portable SteamerCanister 40 ounces23 inches high by 19.5 inches wide by 23 inches deep8.31 lbs
Bissell PowerFresh Pet Lift-Off 2-in-1 Steam MopHandheld steamer and floor mop13.5 ounces44.7 inches high by 11.14 inches wide by 13.2 inches deep10.6 pounds
McCulloch MC1375 Canister Steam CleanerCanister 48 ounces10.5 inches high by 12.13 inches wide by 15.55 inches deep10.78 pounds
Dupray Neat Steam CleanerCanister 54 ounces9.5 inches high by 10.5 inches wide by 10.5 inches long9 pounds
Steamfast SF-210 Everyday Steam CleanerHandheld 6 ounces8.25 inches high by 5.5 inches wide by 10.5 inches deep2.6 pounds
Costway Heavy-Duty Steam Cleaner With AccessoriesCanister steam cleaner and floor mop51 ounces14 inches high by 17 inches wide by 11 inches deep10.8 pounds

Our Top Picks

The following products are some of the best on the market for steam-cleaning upholstered furniture. We tested each, evaluating them for their design, water-tank capacities, power options, accessories, and versatility. These steam cleaners can help keep upholstered furniture fresh and clean.

Best Overall

Kiato Handheld Steam Cleaner

 The Best Upholstery Steam Cleaner Option: Kiato Handheld Steam Cleaner
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Emits large amounts of steam
  • Lightweight and comfortable to use
  • Push-down steam-release button automatically turns off
  • Removed coffee and wine stains

What We Don’t Like

  • Smaller water tank lasts only 8 minutes
  • Holding the steam-release button is cumbersome for large jobs

Product Specs 

  • Type: Handheld steam cleaner
  • Tank capacity: 450 milliliters (250 milliliters maximum load)
  • Dimensions: 7.48 inches high by 5.03 inches wide by 9.84 inches deep
  • Weight: 4.66 lbs

The Kiato handheld steam cleaner is a 10-in-1 tool designed to tackle hard and soft surfaces, including furniture, car interiors, tile, windows, and carpet. It features a lightweight design and a push-button steam release. It also comes with a 10-piece accessory kit that includes a fabric steamer and a microfiber sleeve to go on top.

This model heats up to 221 degrees Fahrenheit in 2 minutes and 30 seconds. After filling the water tank and securing the lid, you can plug this steamer in and wait for the LED light to go off. The unit is then ready for use. Using the Kiato handheld steamer is as simple as pressing the button to release steam. It automatically turns off when you let go of the button. Although it has a 450-milliliter tank capacity, you will only want to add 250 milliliters at a time.

We were impressed by how much steam the Kiato steam cleaner emitted. We used it to steam a microfiber recliner, clean a mattress, and loosen mineral deposits inside a dishwasher. When we put it up against household stains, it performed well, removing the coffee, dirt, and wine stains. It removed about 70 percent of the tomato sauce and some of the chocolate. Like the rest of the models, it didn’t work on oil.

The Kiato handheld steam cleaner was among the easiest to use, and its small size makes storage simple. It never felt uncomfortable, even when we used it for 15 minutes straight. Since it emits so much steam, it’s ideal for blasting stuck-on debris off hard surfaces.

Get the Kiato upholstery steam cleaner at Amazon.

Best Bang for the Buck

Bissell Steam Shot Handheld Steam Cleaner & Sanitizer

 The Best Upholstery Steam Cleaner Option: Bissell Steam Shot Handheld Steam Cleaner & Sanitizer
Photo: bissell.com

What We Like

  • The fabric steamer attachment left furniture looking clean and refreshed
  • 10 accessories add to the product’s suitability for many household chores
  • Easy to empty after use, and its compact size makes it easy to store

What We Don’t Like

  • Curved-front design; tips forward when holding it
  • Wasn’t able to remove chocolate, tomato sauce, or dirt stains

Product Specs 

  • Type: Handheld steam cleaner
  • Tank capacity: 6.6 ounces
  • Dimensions: 8.5 inches high by 5 inches wide by 9.5 inches deep
  • Weight: 4 lbs

The Bissell Steam Shot steam cleaner is an affordable handheld steam cleaner with 10 multisurface tools. The easy-to-attach accessories make it possible to refresh fabric, brush away grime from hard surfaces, clean windows, and scrub dirty grout. It kills up to 99.9 percent of bacteria and germs on hard surfaces.

The Bissell Steam Shot has only one steam setting, which makes it easy to use. Fill the tank with water, secure the lid, and plug it in. The heater warms in 30 seconds, and when the LED light turns off, the steamer is ready to use. It features a steam-release button that powers off when disengaged.

During testing, the Bissell Steam Shot worked well. It emitted enough steam to leave fabric looking refreshed and loosened dirt on hard surfaces for easy cleaning. The one thing we didn’t like was the curved-front design, which caused this model to lean forward slightly when holding it. It felt less stable than models without a curved design.

The Bissell Steam Shot removed wine and coffee stains during our testing. It only removed about 50 percent of the dirt, chocolate, and tomato sauce stains. While it works great for refreshing fabric and cleaning hard surfaces, it’s not our top pick for stain removal.

Get the Bissell Steam Shot upholstery steam cleaner at Amazon.

Best for Car Upholstery

Wagner 925E SteamMachine Elite Portable Steamer

 The Best Upholstery Steam Cleaner Option: Wagner 925E SteamMachine Elite Portable Steamer
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Performed the best in our stain test, removing dirt, coffee, wine, chocolate, and tomato sauce
  • Long hose, wheeled design, and 20 attachments for easy and versatile use
  • Canister features a built-in compartment for attachment storage, preventing items from getting lost
  • Can use the trigger for steam release, or set it for continuous steam

What We Don’t Like

  • Large tank capacity means a longer wait time for steam, taking up to 9 minutes
  • We experienced some water spitting while steaming, causing excess moisture on the fabric

Product Specs 

  • Type: Canister steam cleaner
  • Tank capacity: 40 ounces
  • Dimensions: 23 inches high by 19.5 inches wide by 23 inches deep
  • Weight: 8.31 lbs

The Wagner SteamMachine Elite steam cleaner features a canister design and 20 attachments. Its large 40-ounce water tank provides up to 40 minutes of continuous steam. This powerful steamer can tackle almost any job, from vehicle carpet and upholstery to dirty barbecue grills.

The 8-foot steam hose and wheeled design make this model easy to maneuver. The canister design also features attachment storage, which helps keep accessories from getting lost.

Getting started is as simple as installing an attachment, filling the water tank, securing the lid, and turning the machine on. After about 9 minutes, it produces large amounts of steam that you can control via a trigger. The trigger has two settings: press release or continuous steam.

The Wagner SteamMachine Elite was one of our favorite models due to its ease of use and efficacy. It performed the best in our stain test, breaking down the wine, coffee, and dirt. It also removed about 90 percent of the tomato sauce and chocolate stains.

This model contains a fabric steamer with a bonnet and a carpet glider. We used both to refresh the fabric interior of a truck. We also tested it on hard surfaces, including a toilet. The steam blasted stuck-on dirt from hard-to-reach nooks and crannies.

Get the Wagner upholstery steam cleaner at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best for Versatility

Bissell PowerFresh Pet Lift-Off 2-in-1 Steam Mop

 The Best Upholstery Steam Cleaner Option: Bissell PowerFresh Pet Lift-Off 2-in-1 Steam Mop
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Multipurpose cleaning tool; comes with 13 accessories and works on a variety of surfaces
  • Kills 99.9 percent of germs and bacteria; great for homes with kids and pets
  • Easy to switch from mopping to the handheld attachments for easy whole-house cleaning

What We Don’t Like

  • Somewhat small tank capacity; needs refilling during larger cleaning jobs
  • Handheld steamer spat water and didn’t remove stains as well as other models

Product Specs 

  • Type: Handheld steamer and floor mop
  • Tank capacity: 13.5 ounces
  • Dimensions: 44.7 inches high by 11.14 inches wide by 13.2 inches deep
  • Weight: 10.6 pounds

This steam-cleaning unit from Bissell is designed with versatility in mind. In its fully assembled form, it functions as a heavy-duty floor mop. Alternatively, you can detach the canister and deploy it along with the extension hose and attachments to steam-clean upholstery, pet beds, bathroom and kitchen fixtures, and a variety of other surfaces.

An included tool bag holds a set of 13 accessories for a broad array of cleaning applications. The included fabric-steamer attachment works especially well with the handheld portion of this steam cleaner for cleansing, deodorizing, and sanitizing upholstery.

Water in the 13.5-ounce tank heats up quickly, producing steam that kills up to 99.9 percent of germs and bacteria. The 25-foot-long power cord facilitates steam cleaning of even the most hard-to-reach places.

For testing, we started by using this steam cleaner as a mop, and it worked well, leaving our floors clean and streak-free. Next, we tested the handheld canister on our stain board using the fabric steamer attachment and dabbing the stain with a microfiber cloth. It tackled the dirt, wine, and coffee stains but wasn’t a match for the chocolate or tomato sauce. The handheld steamer spat water more than other models, preventing the steam from being as powerful or continuous.

Even though this steam mop didn’t perform as well in our stain-removal tests, it did a good job overall. It’s an ideal choice for those who want a versatile steam mop with a lift-off canister. However, folks who want just an upholstery steamer might fare better with a different option.

Get the Bissell PowerFresh upholstery steam cleaner at Amazon, Target, Bissell, or Walmart.

Best Canister Model

McCulloch MC1375 Canister Steam Cleaner

 The Best Upholstery Steam Cleaner Option: McCulloch MC1375 Canister Steam Cleaner
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Delivers up to 90 minutes of power, which is enough for most upholstery cleaning
  • Variable steam-flow system with an easy-to-control knob; up to 58-psi steam pressure
  • 20 accessories work on a variety of surfaces; great for tough stains or general cleaning
  • Users can control steam via the trigger or lock it in place for continuous steam

What We Don’t Like

  • Water takes time to heat up; can become frustrating when refilling during long cleaning jobs
  • Using the steamer at its highest power results in a lot of moisture on upholstery

Product Specs 

  • Type: Canister steam cleaner
  • Tank capacity: 48 ounces
  • Dimensions: 10.5 inches high by 12.13 inches wide by 15.55 inches deep
  • Weight: 10.78 pounds

Thanks to its canister design, this steamer houses a large-capacity water tank that delivers up to 90 minutes of continuous steam-cleaning power. The tank holds 48 ounces of regular tap water, and it heats to more than 200 degrees Fahrenheit in under 12 minutes.

The on-demand variable steam-flow system allows users to dial in an exact steam flow from low pressure up to 58 pounds per square inch (psi). Accessing hard-to-reach spaces is easy thanks to an 18-foot power cord and a 7-foot steam hose.

With 20 included accessories, this unit can take on a multitude of house-cleaning tasks. In addition to refreshing upholstery, this steamer works on ceramic tile, sealed flooring, grout, and more.

The McCulloch blasted through dirt, coffee, and red wine stains during testing. It also did the best on oil, eliminating about 50 percent of the stain. Since this model doesn’t come with a dedicated fabric steamer attachment, we used the jet nozzle to steam the soiled areas and then dabbed them with a microfiber cloth. Doing so was effective, lifting dirt and leaving the fabric looking refreshed.

The McCulloch came with a bag for its attachments, which helped us keep everything together. Since the canister is on wheels, it was also easy for us to maneuver. We used the jet nozzle to spray around a sink faucet, and it loosened stuck-on dirt and some of the mineral deposits. This model came with many more attachments, including a mophead. It emitted a large amount of steam, making it ideal for household and heavy-duty jobs.

Get the McCulloch upholstery steam cleaner at Amazon or Walmart.

Best Heavy-Duty

Dupray Neat Steam Cleaner

 Dupray Neat Steam Cleaner on a white background
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Compact and modern design stores easily in a small space
  • Delivers an impressive 50 minutes of continuous steam for tackling large jobs
  • Performed well in our stain test, removing dirt, wine, and coffee from microsuede
  • Mop glides smoothly for easy and streak-free floor cleaning

What We Don’t Like

  • Some water spits out before the steam, which can saturate upholstery

Product Specs 

  • Type: Canister steam cleaner
  • Tank capacity: 54 ounces
  • Dimensions: 9.5 inches high by 10.5 inches wide by 10.5 inches long
  • Weight: 9 pounds

When it comes to taking on big cleaning jobs, this large-capacity steam cleaner should do the trick. Thanks to the portable cube-shaped unit that combines an impressive 54-ounce water tank, 16-foot-long power cord, and 6.5-foot-long steam hose, the Dupray steamer is capable of delivering 50 minutes of continuous steam with ample maneuverability to reach furniture and surfaces throughout the home. The wheels on this steam cleaner allow for smooth rolling from room to room, and a retractable handle makes carrying this 9-pound unit a breeze.

Water in the tank heats to 275 degrees Fahrenheit, producing steam that kills 99.9 percent of bacteria, viruses, and pathogens in upholstery, bedding, and other household surfaces.

When we unboxed the Dupray Neat steam cleaner, we were immediately impressed by the quality. The attachments felt well constructed and the fabric steamer’s microfiber bonnet was much thicker than those from other models. We also liked the unique modern aesthetic and the cord storage on the bottom of the cube.

When we put this model to the test, it blasted through dirt, coffee, and wine stains on our microsuede fabric. It did OK on the tomato sauce and chocolate stains, eliminating about 50 percent of the soiled area. We also tested the mop attachment, which glided smoothly across our hardwood floors, picking up dirt and leaving the floors streak-free.

Get the Dupray upholstery steam cleaner at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best for Spot Cleaning

Steamfast SF-210 Everyday Steam Cleaner

 The Best Upholstery Steam Cleaner Option: Steamfast SF-210 Everyday Steam Cleaner
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Compact, lightweight unit is comfortable to use and ideal for cleaning tight spaces
  • Includes 6 attachments that are easy to connect and can tackle most cleaning jobs
  • Budget-friendly price point compared to similar options; a good beginner option

What We Don’t Like

  • Runs for only 8 minutes; not suitable for extended use
  • Was the only steamer unable to remove a dirt stain from our microsuede test fabric

Product Specs 

  • Type: Handheld steam cleaner
  • Tank capacity: 6 ounces
  • Dimensions: 8.25 inches high by 5.5 inches wide by 10.5 inches deep
  • Weight: 2.6 pounds

When those everyday oops moments occur, this convenient steam cleaner makes short work of sanitizing household surfaces, including upholstery. The 6-ounce water tank heats up in just 3 minutes, producing 8 minutes of pressurized steam for removing dirt and grime.

Despite its small size—it weighs just 2.6 pounds—this handheld cleaner is surprisingly versatile. Use one of the six included attachments for cleaning upholstered furniture as well as a wide array of hard surfaces in kitchens and bathrooms. A 12.5-foot-long power cord allows for easy maneuverability, while the 28-inch extension hose offers even greater capacity for reaching out-of-the-way surfaces and overlooked crevices.

While it performed the worst in our stain removal tests, this model is still handy for quick fabric refreshes and sanitizing hard surfaces. The Steamfast steam cleaner was able to remove wine, coffee, and tomato sauce from our test fabric but failed to remove dirt, chocolate, or oil.

This steamer is easy to use. It has only one setting, so after filling it with water, all we had to do was plug it in and wait for it to warm up. In addition to steaming upholstery, we used it to steam inside an oven, and it successfully loosened up most of the stuck-on food. The small size makes it easy to store—great for those short on space.

Get the Steamfast upholstery steam cleaner at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best Accessories

Costway Heavy-Duty Steam Cleaner With Accessories

 The Best Upholstery Steam Cleaner Option: Costway Heavy-Duty Steam Cleaner With Accessories
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Multipurpose tool that comes with 18 cleaning accessories to tackle most jobs
  • Unit has 2 large wheels and a 79-inch hose, making it easy to maneuver
  • Includes an organized cable-management system to wind around neatly when not in use

What We Don’t Like

  • Lower steam pressure may struggle with more stubborn stains
  • No indicator light to signal when the steam is ready for use

Product Specs 

  • Type: Canister steam cleaner and floor mop
  • Tank capacity: 51 ounces
  • Dimensions: 14 inches high by 17 inches wide by 11 inches deep
  • Weight: 10.8 pounds

This multipurpose steam cleaner includes 18 attachments for taking on a variety of cleaning tasks around the home. When it comes to cleaning upholstery, the steam jet nozzle and nylon brushes are especially helpful. Functional accessories such as a mophead, brass utility brushes, a scrubbing pad, and a squeegee facilitate cleaning and sanitizing not only upholstery, but also sealed floors, bathroom tile, kitchen appliances, and children’s toys.

The 16-foot power cord and 79-inch steam hose, as well as the wheels, a rolling caster, and ergonomically designed curved handle, offer ample maneuverability for reaching numerous surfaces in the home. In addition to removing dirt, grime, spills, and messes, this steam cleaner sanitizes household surfaces. Unseen and undesirable intruders such as germs, bacteria, viruses, mold spores, and bed bugs are no match for the 226 degree Fahrenheit pressurized steam.

The Costway steam cleaner holds 51 ounces of water in its tank, heating it to produce steam in under 10 minutes. It delivers 40 minutes of continuous steam-cleaning time.

Like the other canister models we tested, the Costway steam cleaner produced large amounts of steam and was better able to power through stains than handheld options. It eliminated dirt, coffee, and wine from our test fabric. While it didn’t completely eliminate tomato sauce or chocolate, it visibly reduced the stained areas.

This model comes with many useful accessories, including a mop and carpet glider. We used the carpet glider to refresh fabric seats and carpet in an old truck and tested the mop on tile floors. The attachments were easy to use, and the mop left the floor clean. We also tried out the trigger that locks in place for continuous steam.

Get the Costway upholstery steam cleaner at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Upholstery Steam Cleaners

We researched the best upholstery steam cleaners with high customer satisfaction in a variety of categories. After compiling our list, we tested each model. Our tests consisted of using each upholstery steam cleaner on furniture, mattresses, and car upholstery to evaluate the ease of use. We then put all models through a more extensive test, assessing how well they could remove six common stains: dirt, vegetable oil, tomato sauce, red wine, coffee, and chocolate sauce.

We assembled a test board consisting of foam, batting, and microsuede fabric attached to plywood. We added ⅛ teaspoon of each test substance to the board and allowed it to dry for an hour. We then used each steam cleaner to remove the stains. If the steam cleaner came with an upholstery steamer and microfiber bonnet, we used it for stain removal. For models that didn’t come with an upholstery steamer bonnet, we relied on the jet nozzle to steam the stain and then dabbed it with a microfiber cloth. These methods were equally effective.

No steam cleaner was able to remove the oil stain, but all had varying degrees of success with the other substances. The biggest factor in stain removal was the amount of steam the machine emitted.

We also evaluated any extra attachments, how easy it was to empty and store each model, and how effective the steamers were for other household surfaces. We assigned and tracked number values for easy comparison.

What to Consider When Choosing an Upholstery Steam Cleaner

Before purchasing an upholstery steam cleaner, it’s essential to consider what your needs are. Manufacturers offer a wide array of types, sizes, water-tank capacities, attachments, and accessories, each with their own benefits and optimal uses. Ahead, learn about the features that may influence your selection process as you search for the best upholstery steam cleaner to suit your purposes.

Unboxed Bissell steam shot with accessories
Photo: Katie Barton for Bob Vila

Type

Steam cleaners that work well for upholstery materials are versatile and capable of taking on many other cleaning tasks around the house. Depending on the type, steam cleaners tackle dirt, grime, and messes on both soft and hard surfaces, indoors and outdoors. Here’s an overview of the types of steam cleaners available on the market, along with information about how they function for cleaning upholstery.

  • Handheld steam cleaners make upholstery cleaning easy as you simply hold the steamer units adjacent to the upholstered furniture and move them along the surface.
  • Vacuum-type steam cleaners facilitate the cleaning of floors and carpets, but many of them feature reconfiguration capability, breaking down into handheld units that work well for upholstery. Users move the handheld units along the surface of upholstery fabric for cleaning.
  • Vapor steam cleaners utilize steam from water heated to at least 240 to 260 degrees Fahrenheit, resulting in a low-moisture vapor that leaves minimal residual dampness. Vapor steam cleaners utilize higher temperatures than many other steam cleaners do.
  • Cylinder steam cleaners (also known as canister steam cleaners) feature steam hoses attached to the rolling cylinders or canisters that hold large-capacity water tanks for extended steam-cleaning time. Attachments for the steam hoses facilitate upholstery cleaning as you move them along the surface.
  • Garment steam cleaners feature handheld nozzles on the ends of steam hoses that attach to water tanks. The steam loosens and lifts dirt, deodorizes, and freshens upholstery fabrics on furniture as well as clothing.

Size and Weight

Consider how you plan on using your steam cleaner to determine the ideal size and weight. Larger and heavier models offer the capacity for heavy-duty cleaning and extensive cleaning sessions, while small and lightweight units offer the advantages of portability and convenience for quick cleanups.

For example, canister models are considerably larger and weigh more than handheld steam cleaners, but they offer the advantage of large-capacity water tanks that deliver continuous steam for anywhere between 30 and 90 minutes. On the other hand, a small handheld steamer weighs much less than a canister or vacuum type, but it holds less water and produces steam for only a few minutes before it requires refilling.

Corded vs. Cordless

Steam cleaners operate on corded electrical power from standard household outlets. After the electrical power source heats the water in the cleaner’s water tank to above 212 degrees Fahrenheit, creating steam, the pressurized steam is forced through a hose or a nozzle, delivering powerful cleaning action to household surfaces.

Some steam cleaners include extra-long power cords for enhanced maneuverability, allowing you to access hard-to-reach places throughout the home for cleaning and sanitizing. Since steam cleaners draw a large amount of electricity, there are currently no cordless options.

Power and Runtime

Battery runtime is associated with the volume of water held in the steam cleaners’ tanks. Larger water tanks in canister models may produce steam for up to 90 minutes of continuous cleaning. Alternatively, the small water tanks in lightweight, handheld steam cleaners produce enough steam for approximately 8 to 10 minutes of runtime. Of course, the tanks may be refilled as often as necessary for continuous cleaning.

Heating time is another feature to consider. Related to the volume capacity of the water tanks and the power of the heating elements, heating times vary from approximately 30 seconds to 12 minutes. A faster heating time means that the water converts to steam more quickly, allowing you to jump right into the task at hand.

Steam Settings

In the process of selecting the best steam cleaner for upholstery, shoppers may also want to consider their needs for a steamer that is capable of accomplishing other cleaning tasks. Many steam cleaners offer versatility via low-, medium-, and high-steam pressure settings. Users can adjust the settings to facilitate cleaning various surfaces and accomplishing either light freshening jobs or the tough removal of stuck-on dirt, grime, and stains.

Cleaning upholstery requires low to medium steam pressure, depending on the type of fabric and the degree of soil. Delicate upholstery fabric should be steam-cleaned on the lowest steam setting. Thicker, more durable fabric can tolerate a medium steam setting, especially if tough stains and stuck-on messes present cleaning challenges. Manufacturers of some steam cleaners recommend their use on leather upholstery, but you’ll want to check manufacturers’ information before using steam cleaners on leather furniture.

Alternatively, you can adjust the steam pressure settings to medium or high for cleaning hard surfaces. High-pressure steam works well on tile, grout, granite, stainless steel, and sealed flooring. Keep in mind that using a high-pressure setting will cause the steam to run out more quickly, resulting in the need to refill the water tank.

Tank Capacity

Every steam cleaner contains a water tank with a heating element that heats the water above 212 degrees Fahrenheit to produce steam. Handheld units include tanks that generally hold about 6 to 8 ounces of water for steam production. These are lightweight and easy to handle, but they produce steam for only about 8 to 10 minutes before the small water tanks run dry. Handheld steam cleaners are ideal for quick touch-ups and brief everyday cleaning chores.

On the other hand, users sometimes need to tackle cleaning jobs that require extended steam- producing runtimes. For these tasks, larger steam cleaners with increased water-tank capacities fill the bill.

Canister or cylinder steam cleaners feature larger water tanks that usually hold about 40 to 54 ounces of water. Heating the larger volumes of water to build up steam, these types of steam cleaners can deliver up to 90 minutes of continuous steam for extended cleaning sessions.

Maneuverability

When steam-cleaning upholstery, you’ll want to maneuver the steam-releasing units over and under the curved surfaces of furniture and into cracks and crevices. For this reason, steam cleaners with long power cords as well as extension hoses with easy-to-hold nozzles make the job easier. Maneuverability is a particularly valuable feature for reaching into a vehicle to clean car interiors, which are susceptible to accumulating dirt and debris.

Some steam cleaners offer power cords up to 18 feet long and steam hoses up to 8 feet long. With these features, you can direct the steam to hard-to-reach places for accurate targeting of dirt and grime.

A canister or a cylinder steam cleaner with a long extension hose allows you to reach into nooks and crannies. Alternatively, a lightweight handheld steamer with a long power cord provides up-close and targeted cleaning power.

Attachments

Many steam cleaners include attachments to facilitate cleaning a variety of objects and materials. Some common attachments include steam hoses, straight nozzles, angled nozzles, metal brushes, nylon brushes, window squeegees, mop pads, and scrapers.

For steam-cleaning upholstery, nylon brushes, steam hoses, and angled nozzles work particularly well, allowing you to maneuver the steam over, under, and around curved surfaces.

Shoppers looking for steam cleaners that can accomplish a range of cleaning jobs beyond sanitizing upholstery will want to take note of what attachments, if any, are included with each available steam cleaner.

FAQs

Q. What surfaces can a steam cleaner be used on?

Steam cleaners can be used on both hard and soft household surfaces, including upholstery, clothing, sealed flooring, ceramic tile, grout, stainless steel, and more.

Q. Do upholstery steam cleaners utilize chemicals?

No. The primary reason for using steam cleaners is that the cleaning action comes from pressurized steam created by heated water, which contains zero cleaning solutions or chemicals.

Q. Should hot or cold water be put in a steam cleaner?

Pour cold water into the tank of the steam cleaner. The heating element will heat the water to produce steam.

Q. Does steam-cleaning kill bugs?

Yes. Steam cleaning kills bed bugs on the surface of mattresses and bedding as well as those embedded ¾ inch deep into the fabric surfaces.

Q. How long should upholstery be steam-cleaned?

Hold the steamer nozzle on the upholstered surface to release the steam, but keep it moving. Don’t hold the nozzle in one place so long that the upholstery becomes damp.

Meet the Tester

Katie Barton has more than 10 years of experience in product writing, has tested dozens of cleaning products, and has authored hundreds of articles for major media outlets. Her cleaning and organizing advice has been featured on a variety of popular home and finance websites. She takes an unbiased approach to product testing, using each product multiple times or for several days to determine efficacy. Her goal is to help readers decide which products are worth their hard-earned money and which fall flat.

Additional research provided by Carol Benton.

The post We Tested the Best Upholstery Steam Cleaners for Chemical-Free Sanitizing appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[The Best Weeding Tools, Tested and Reviewed]]>Weeds crop up in every landscape, infiltrating flower beds, lawns, and even container gardens. Get the right weeding tool to deal with these invaders.

The post The Best Weeding Tools, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-weeding-tool/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=108856Wed, 19 Feb 2025 09:35:15 -0500ReviewsLandscapingLawn & GardenLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Though herbicides control weeds, these chemicals can pose serious health risks to humans and wildlife. Manual weeding, on the other hand, gets the job done without harm to people, pets, or the environment. With a well-made weeding tool and some vigilance, banishing these pesky plants can be fairly simple.

Weeds proliferate in your garden seemingly overnight, and it’s easiest to remove them when they’re young. Some weeds, such as dandelions, develop a single taproot that grows deeper into the soil as the plant matures. The longer the taproot, the more difficult it becomes to eradicate. Though some weeds release without a fight, others will have gardeners wondering whether they need a jackhammer to dislodge them. That said, timing and soil conditions are key to weed removal: After a rainfall, soil is softer and more willing to release roots.

With a proliferation of weed-control tools available, choosing the right one for the task at hand may feel like a shot in the dark. To help, we searched out and tested tools that work best for a variety of circumstances. Our favorite was the Original Weeder from CobraHead, thanks to its versatile uses and durable tempered steel head. Shoppers looking for the best weeding tool will want to check out our shopping considerations and product reviews ahead.

  1. BEST OVERALL: CobraHead Original Weeder & Cultivator Garden Tool
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Radius Garden Ergonomic Weeder
  3. BEST KNIFE WEEDER: Nisaku NJP801 Yamagatana Stainless Steel Knife
  4. BEST STANDING WEEDER: Grampa’s Weeder
  5. BEST FORK WEEDER: Corona Extended Reach ComfortGel 2-Prong Weeder
  6. BEST SHORT-HANDLE HOE: Elegital Blue Arrow Express Kana Hoe 217 Garden Tool
  7. BEST LONG-HANDLE HOE: Truper Tru Tough Welded Warren Hoe
The Best Weeding Tools Options
Photo: Debbie Wolfe

Product Comparison

TypeHandle LengthHead Size
CobraHead Original Weeder & Cultivator Garden ToolDigging, cutting, raking8 inches5 inches long by 1 inch wide
Radius Garden Ergonomic WeederDigging5.75 inches9 inches long by 1.5 inches wide
Nisaku NJP801 Yamagatana Stainless Steel KnifeDigging, cutting5.5 inches7.5 inches long by 1.75 inches wide
Grampa’s WeederDigging, pulling 39 inches1 inch wide by 2.5 inches deep, with a 5.5-inch step lever
Corona Extended Reach ComfortGel 2-Prong WeederDigging, pulling34 inches3 inches long by 0.5 inch wide
Elegital Blue Arrow Express Kana Hoe 217 Garden ToolDigging, chopping, slicing5 inches5 inches long by 1.25 inches wide
Truper Tru Tough Welded Warren HoeDigging, chopping54 inches6 inches long by 4.75 inches wide

Our Top Picks

With our shopping considerations in mind, which we look at later in greater detail, we created a list of the best weeding tools for typical lawn, garden, and landscape projects. Read on to learn more about these tools and how they performed in our tests.

Best Overall

CobraHead Original Weeder & Cultivator Garden Tool

 The Best Weeding Tool Option: CobraHead Original Weeder & Cultivator
Photo: amazon.com

Bob Vila Approved badge

Bob Vila Approved recognizes the household and DIY products that impressed us most in our real-world testing and that exemplify core values of the Bob Vila brand, including craftsmanship, innovation, and value for the dollar. Winners of this designation come recommended by our professional review team and are personally approved by Bob Vila.

This Bob Vila Approved product carries our brand’s highest level of recommendation.

Bob Vila Approved badge

Bob Vila Approved recognizes the household and DIY products that impressed us most in our real-world testing and that exemplify core values of the Bob Vila brand, including craftsmanship, innovation, and value for the dollar. Winners of this designation come recommended by our professional review team and are personally approved by Bob Vila.

Product Specs

  • Type: Digging, cutting, raking
  • Handle length: 8 inches
  • Head size: 5 inches long by 1 inch wide

What We Like

  • Multiuse tool works great for both for weeding and planting
  • Tempered steel head is durable and easily lasts several seasons
  • Thick, comfortable handle; ideal for long hours in the garden
  • Works in any soil type; provides excellent versatility

What We Don’t Like

  • Only for up-close work; may require lots of bending and kneeling
  • Cuts deep taproots instead of pulling them

Great for removing stubborn weeds from heavy soil, this weeding tool’s curved, forged-steel end hooks deeply beneath the weed to lift and remove it. It’s made to easily pierce soil and let the user apply pressure from the side, bottom, or any angle in between to find the weed’s weakest point.

The multifunction tool’s shovellike tip resembles a snake head and can be used for planting rows of seeds, scratching in fertilizer around plants, and scraping out young weed seedlings. The plastic grip is designed to help gardeners keep a firm hold while they work.

In testing, the CobraHead’s versatility truly impressed us. The curved shaft and fingernail-like shape of the blade dug deep into the soil for removal of taproot, yet it just scratched the surface to cultivate safely next to young seedlings. In addition to our in-ground and container garden weeding tests, we used the CobraHead to prepare planting spots for new seedlings. The tough blade quickly loosened the surface to a depth of about 4 inches with little effort.

The thick handle provided a sure, comfortable grip in either hand. The drawback of this tool’s design is that it easily cuts off the deepest taproots, leaving the stump behind to resprout. But for young weeds of all types, cultivating near sensitive plants, and occasional soil preparation work, this is a handy little tool. We can highly recommend the CobraHead’s unique shape and lightweight design to tackle weeding and many other garden-related tasks.

Get the CobraHead weeding tool at Amazon, Gardener’s Edge, or Grow Organic.

Best Bang for the Buck

Radius Garden Ergonomic Weeder

 The Best Weeding Tool Option: Radius Garden 102 Hand Weeder
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs

  • Type: Digging
  • Handle length: 5.75 inches
  • Head size: 9 inches long by 1.5 inches wide

What We Like

  • Digs deeply to remove the whole tap root
  • Comfortable ergonomic handle helps reduce fatigue after prolonged use
  • Strong die-cast aluminum blade will not bend

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires bending or kneeling; not a long tool
  • Thick blade is more difficult to use in heavy soil

Gardeners need a strong grip to weed in dense soil, but as hands tire, grip strength suffers. The curved handle on the Radius Garden weeding tool is designed to keep the user’s hand and wrist aligned while pushing the serrated aluminum tool next to the root to lift out the weed. This impressive tool helps remove deeply rooted weeds that grow at the base of vegetables, shrubs, and perennials—and it’s a bargain, to boot.

The narrow blade easily cuts through any type of soil to remove pesky weeds and help to navigate around nearby plants without damaging their roots. The unusual shape of the thermoplastic grip provides a smooth, comfortable surface that’s easy to hang on to.

Another versatile weeder that doubles as a transplanter, this Radius hand tool proved impressive for the price. It was very effective at removing established taproot weeds, with the narrow blade easily reaching 5 to 6 inches deep to loosen the soil for thorough removal without breaking the root. For shallow, fibrous weeds, we slid the blade just below the soil surface at a shallow angle, a slow process, but ultimately successful.

As a transplanter for seedlings, however, it worked quite well. It was lightweight and easy to use, and the oversize ergonomic cushioned grip left us with virtually no hand fatigue after extended use. Those who need a taproot weeding tool for working in confined spaces will find this one quite helpful, and it’s likely to come in handy for other chores as well.

Get the Radius Garden weeding tool at Amazon.

Best Knife Weeder

Nisaku NJP801 Yamagatana Stainless Steel Knife

 The Best Weeding Tool Option: Nisaku NJP801 Yamagatana Stainless Steel Knife
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs

  • Type: Digging, cutting
  • Handle length: 5.5 inches
  • Head size: 7.5 inches long by 1.75 inches wide

What We Like

  • Mid-tang stainless steel blade is very sharp and durable
  • Sharp edge and measured blade markings helps with precision
  • Comfortable nonslip grip feels good in the hand
  • Hard plastic sheath included to protect the blade when not in use

What We Don’t Like

  • Premium price point compared to similar products
  • Sheath not as durable as the knife; may need replacing every few seasons

Though several popular configurations of weeding knives exist, we prefer the classic Japanese hori hori knife design. This weeding tool by Nisaku combines classic style with modern materials that will probably last a lifetime. The stainless steel blade features one smooth sharpened edge and one serrated edge to cut easily through weed roots, divide clumps of perennials, and cut garden twine. The concave face of the blade is ideal for removing taproots, and engraved measurement markings help to gauge transplant planting depth.

The ergonomic contoured handle includes a textured surface for improved grip and a wide molded hilt loop for hanging on a hook in the garden shed. The knife comes with a plastic sheath for safe carrying and storage.

In testing, the do-it-all Nisaku hori hori garden knife proved comfortably constructed, well-balanced, and easy to use for large and small hands. It did a great job of taproot removal and skimming the soil beneath fibrous rooted weeds, though it was less successful when it came to prying weeds from narrow cracks between bricks and pavers. We also used it to dig, divide, and transplant a few hostas that had finished blooming, and it made quick work of the tough fibrous roots.

The blade’s material construction looks, feels, and is in fact extremely high quality: high carbon 440C stainless steel hardened to HRC 58—similar in material and hardness as professional kitchen knives and top-notch pocket knives. Even after digging around in the dirt, the edges were still sharp enough to slice easily through ¼-inch-thick forsythia branches. Though we found the plastic scabbard to feel rather cheap, we believe that serious gardeners will want to keep this tool close at hand for all sorts of chores.

Get the Nisaku weeding tool at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Standing Weeder

Grampa’s Weeder

 The Best Weeding Tool Option: Grampa’s Weeder
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs

  • Type: Digging, pulling
  • Handle length: 39 inches
  • Head size: 1 inch wide by 2.5 inches deep, with a 5.5-inch step lever

What We Like

  • Can easily pull taproot lawn and garden weeds
  • Made from durable hardwood handle and steel head
  • Works from a standing position; better for reducing back pain

What We Don’t Like

  • Specialty single-task tool not as versatile as other weeders
  • Weeds can clog the tool head; can require manual removal

Before the days of spray-on weed killers, obtaining a weed-free lawn meant pulling the pesky unwanted plants by hand. Grampa’s Weeder was probably hailed as a miracle back saver when it was introduced in 1913. Now the classic design represents an efficient alternative to chemical controls. Plus, it can be rather fun to use.

The simple, ingenious design features a steel step-on lever connected to a hinged jaw. Step down to insert the tool into the soil, then lever back on the handle to pull out the weed, root and all. Results are immediate, with no ugly dead weeds left in the lawn.

During tests, we found Grampa’s Weeder was most effective for use on dandelions and other fleshy rooted and rosette-forming weeds such as wild violet and wild lettuce. We had the greatest success when our clay-based soil was moist but not muddy. When the soil was too wet, the tool lost gripping ability, and when the soil was dry, the weed roots were more likely to break off. But in the most favorable conditions, we pulled 10 to 12 weeds per minute (5 to 6 seconds per weed).

Working just a few minutes a day, long enough to fill a bucket with weeds, we completely eradicated weeds from 5,000 square feet of lawn in 3 days. Grampa’s Weeder worked just as well in landscape and flower beds. For those who deal with regular invasions of taproot and fleshy root weeds, this could be a helpful weapon to fight the good fight.

Get the Grampa’s Weeder weeding tool at Amazon, Ace Hardware, or Garrett Wade.

Best Fork Weeder

Corona Extended Reach ComfortGel 2-Prong Weeder

 The Best Weeding Tool Option: Corona Extended Reach ComfortGel 2-Prong Weeder
Photo: acehardware.com

Product Specs

  • Type: Digging, pulling
  • Handle length: 34 inches
  • Head size: 3 inches long by 0.5 inch wide

What We Like

  • Cushioned nonslip grip is easier to handle for long periods
  • Capable of pulling out tough taproot weeds
  • Works from a standing position to save users’ backs
  • Also useful as a trash gatherer; multi purpose tool

What We Don’t Like

  • Taller or shorter users may find it less comfortable
  • Sharp head sometimes cuts off some of the root

Two-prong weeders are taproot specialists, and this one from Corona is one of the best. This weeding tool is made of steel with a sharpened heat-treated fork-tipped blade. It features a long handle that turns weeding into stand-up work, saving the user’s back and knees, while a trapezoidal-shaped cushioned-grip handle reduces hand fatigue.

We used this Corona tool to pull weeds from lawn, landscape, and garden beds. Although it is made of steel, it felt lightweight to carry around, and we appreciated the simplicity of the design—a complete lack of moving parts. It proved easy to operate one-handed: Slide the head into the ground next to the weed, then pull the lever backward to excavate the weed. It worked best on medium to large weeds (smaller weeds often slipped between the forks) when soil was damp. Mud, unfortunately, prevented the lever action from working properly, while hard dry soil led to root breaks and only partial removal. This weed puller was especially useful for woody weeds such as young oak, sweet gum, and elm seedlings. Despite soil condition issues, the tool proved to be an easy-to-use, easy-to-store asset for patrolling the yard.

Get the Corona weeding tool at Ace Hardware, Lowe’s, or Acme Tools.

Best Short-Handle Hoe

Elegital Blue Arrow Express Kana Hoe 217 Garden Tool

 The Best Weeding Tool Option: Elegital Blue Arrow Express Kana Hoe 217 Garden Tool
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs

  • Type: Digging, chopping, slicing
  • Handle length: 5 inches
  • Head size: 5 inches long by 1.25 inches wide

What We Like

  • Sharp blade easily slices through roots; great for dealing with lots of weeds
  • High-carbon-steel blade and hardwood handle
  • Blade easy to sharpen and stays sharp a long time
  • Blade is angled for user comfort and efficient work

What We Don’t Like

  • Not designed for left-handed use
  • Overall tool length feels a bit too short

A kana hoe, which works on the pull stroke, is used for scraping and slicing cleanly through shallow roots in the upper layers of soil. This one from Elegital is built for up-close work in raised beds, container gardens, and in-ground gardens. The broadly curved blade is attached to the handle at a comfortable angle to reduce hand and wrist fatigue while working aggressively. It features a hardwood handle and a high-carbon-steel head that stays sharp longer and resharpens more easily than other types of steel.

The size of this tool was just right for scratching out 2 or 3 square feet of weeds at a time. The sharp blade sliced right through, whether the weeds were young or well established. In established garden areas, three or four strokes were adequate to cut through weed roots and break up the resulting debris. It works the soil to a depth of up to 4 or 6 inches, so it’s useful for preparing planting holes as well. However, where thick tree roots or large rocks were present, it became much less effective.

This kana hoe would be a great choice for general weeding and replanting in raised beds or well-established in-ground gardens but probably not for landscape beds. Note: The blade orientation is for right-handed users. Lefties may want to check out this one from Bonsai.

Get the Elegital weeding tool at Amazon.

Best Long-Handle Hoe

Truper Tru Tough Welded Warren Hoe

 The Best Weeding Tool Option: Truper Tru Tough Welded Warren Hoe
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs

  • Type: Digging, chopping
  • Handle length: 54 inches
  • Head size: 6 inches long by 4.75 inches wide

What We Like

  • Welded steel head and hardwood handle is durable and long lasting
  • Lightweight and easy to use; works large soil areas quickly
  • Also useful for planting and cultivating

What We Don’t Like

  • Not built for use in untilled soil

This garden hoe is designed to be effective at eliminating different kinds of weeds in different garden spaces, and help with planting too. With an overall length of 54 inches, the Truper Tru weeding tool is a back-saving weed slayer. It offers plenty of reach to work through raised beds efficiently and in-ground gardens without unnecessary bending and stooping. It features a 54-inch hardwood handle and welded steel head.

We liked that we could easily use any edge of this hoe to eradicate weeds in different ways. Between rows of garden vegetables, we mostly used the long, slightly curved sides of the blade to scrape the weeds away, switching to the right or left side as needed to avoid damaging garden plants. Between plants spaced at least 4 or 5 inches apart, we employed the pointed end to scratch out weeds. In addition to weeding, we used this hoe to pull soil into mounds (“hills”) to plant squash and to create long, narrow furrows for planting beans.

The hardwood handle was lightweight and strong, and it felt good in hand, but it is no doubt susceptible to degradation if left exposed to the elements. Plus, we found that the tool was not particularly effective at working in heavy clay soil that had not been previously tilled. Still, this Warren hoe would make an excellent primary weeding tool for any vegetable gardener, and its versatility will suit those just beginning to establish a garden tool collection or with limited storage space.

Get the Truper weeding tool at Amazon, DK Hardware, or North 40 Outfitters.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Weeding Tools

Those looking for nontoxic ways to eliminate weeds from lawns and gardens typically begin by simply pulling them by hand. Soon enough they realize that specialized tools are better for controlling the toughest weeds. The locations where those tools will be used and the types of weeds that are present play dominant roles in deciding which weeding tools are best suited for the job. Our tests, therefore, included a variety of tools designed for specific tasks.

We carried out our weeding tool tests in two trial areas: a lawn and a vegetable garden. Both areas included a variety of common weeds with different growth habits, such as dandelions, wild violet, crabgrass, and spurge. We used each tool for a minimum of an hour to weed in one or both of these areas, depending on the tool design. For instance, we used the Warren hoe only in the garden, but we tested the Radius weeding tool in both areas.

For inclusion in this guide, we required that a tool offer excellent results in one or more critical weeding tasks: general weed control in raised or in-ground garden beds, general weed control in container gardens or confined spaces, or removing taproot and rosette weeds from lawns. Because of the diversity of designs tested, we evaluated each tool based on its ability to perform its own designed purpose instead of comparing dissimilar tools.

The Best Weeding Tools Types
Photo: Debbie Wolfe

What to Consider When Choosing the Best Weeding Tool

With a wide array of weeding tools from which to choose, it may be difficult to decide on the best ones to maintain garden beds and lawns. However, shoppers may appreciate the variety when they understand the features each tool offers, from pulling weeds to cutting through compacted soil. Take some time to learn about these implements and the factors that set them apart to find the best tool for weeding any yard.

Types of Weeding Tools

The method of weed removal, such as digging, chopping, cutting, slicing, or raking, distinguishes the several types of weeding tools from one another.

Digging and Chopping

Taproot weeds such as dandelions require a digging tool that penetrates soil deeply enough to dislodge the entire root. Traditional fork-tongue fishtail weeders work well. Snakehead and spearpoint tips also rise to the task. Grub hoes, the toughest of these tools, may make the best match for large weeds in heavy soil.

Short-handled chopping hoes help remove large weeds in areas that require more precision, such as around the base of perennials and shrubs. Steel diggers, perhaps the best digging tools for hard clay soil, won’t bend or break in denser soils.

Cutting and Slicing

Although not always useful on deeply rooted weeds, cutting tools such as knives and sickles work well on roots that are more fibrous, such as those of crabgrass and creeping Charlie, which sit close to the soil surface.

Knives cut away entire pieces of weed-infested turf and scrape out weeds from sidewalk cracks and pavers. Slicers, such as stirrup-style hoes, skim the surface of the soil with a push/pull motion. They quickly remove smaller weeds or those in cultivated beds.

Raking

Ideal for loose, easy-to-work soil in cultivated flower and vegetable gardens, raking weeders, like stirrup hoes, forks, and hybrid cultivators, combine digging and raking tools on a single head to lift clusters of shallow-rooted weeds.

These tools work with a push/pull action, skimming the soil surface and dislodging smaller weeds that gardeners can gather and discard or leave in place to decompose and feed the soil. Consider a long-handled raking weeder for removing weeds around shrubs and a short version for raised beds and tight spaces.

Size and Weight

The size and components of a weeding tool have the most impact on its weight. Hand tools may weigh less than a pound and usually no more than 5 or 6 pounds. Lighter manual full-length tools such as hoes and forks usually weigh between 5 and 10 pounds.

A heavy tool can be tiring to wield when weeding for a long period, so try to strike a balance between durability and weight (not to mention cost). Aluminum and plastic garden tools are lighter and less expensive, but they most likely won’t last very long. Steel and fiberglass are pricier and last longer. Wooden tools weigh more and cost less.

Those working on a small flower bed with minimal growing areas may find a smaller, lighter tool sufficient. Smaller tools allow for more flexibility and precision in tighter spaces. More extensive gardens require heavier, sturdier tools that provide more leverage for digging and breaking up soil.

Blade and Handle Material

Stainless steel, aluminum, plastic, wood, and fiberglass figure prominently into the handles and blades of weeding tools.

  • Steel lasts a long time and gets the job done, but it’s not lightweight. A steel shaft or handle weighs more than aluminum, plastic, and fiberglass. And only stainless steel or powder-coated steel resists rust.
  • Aluminum weighs less than steel and resists rust. On the other hand, this less expensive material bends and dents more easily than steel. Aluminum may not stand up well to hard, rocky soil.
  • Plastic handles weigh less and cost less, but the lightweight, inexpensive material can break or crack with heavy or extended use—so they’re hardly a bargain in the long run.
  • Wood handles and shafts provide a cost-effective, durable, and moderate weight option. But wood can break, crack, and rot in certain weather conditions.
  • Fiberglass provides a strong and lightweight handle at a slightly higher price. This material stands strong against rust and extreme weather.

Handle Length

For the right handle length, consider both the work area and the user’s own physical limitations. Large garden beds and walkways are best weeded from an upright position that takes the stress off the back, helping gardeners do the greatest amount of work with the least amount of effort. If bad knees or hips make it difficult to kneel comfortably, choose a longer handle.

Some weeders include a feature that lets users pull the weed and discard it without having to bend over. Raised beds and tight spaces are conducive to short-handled weeders that let gardeners—especially those with healthy joints—get up close. Some weeding tools include an ergonomic grip that keeps the hand and wrist at the same angle, eliminating strain on joints caused by prolonged repetitive use.

Grip

Rubber coating on grips and handles can help alleviate wear and tear on hands. Shoppers will want to keep in mind that regardless of the ergonomic or fatigue-relieving features any handle or grip might offer, it’s still a good idea to wear a quality pair of gardening gloves to avoid scratches and cuts from branches, stones, and thorns.

Plastic handles designed in ergonomic shapes that offer a comfortable grip work fine for smaller tools. However, they often can’t handle the leveraging pressure that larger tools can, and they will snap easily.

The Best Weeding Tools Options
Photo: Debbie Wolfe

FAQs

Q. What are the best tools for removing weeds?

Many different tools can aid in removing weeds. As noted in this guide, weeding tools typically fall into three categories: digging and chopping tools, cutting and slicing tools, and raking tools. Within these categories, there are a variety of options, including fork weeders, snakehead weeders, spearpoint-tip weeders, grub hoes, knife weeders, sickles, and stirrup hoes.

Q. Which tool is used for removing weeds around plants?

It’s important to move carefully around flowers, shrubs, and other plants to avoid damaging their roots. With this in mind, the Elegital weeding tool is a good choice for maintaining control while removing weeds from around plants.

Q. What is the best tool for removing dandelions?

Pullers tend to be the best dandelion weeder tools. One of the best tools for removing dandelions is Grampa’s Weeder.

Q. What is the best hand weeder?

The best hand weeder can vary depending on the user and the task at hand, but the CobraHead weeding tool and the Radius Garden weeding tool are among the best hand weeders available.

The post The Best Weeding Tools, Tested and Reviewed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[6 Smart Ways to Prevent a Soggy Yard with Every Rain Shower]]>Ward off water woes in your front, back, or side yard with a few improvements to your landscaping.

The post 6 Smart Ways to Prevent a Soggy Yard with Every Rain Shower appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/slideshow/6-smart-ways-to-prevent-a-soggy-yard-with-every-rain-shower-52840/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/6-smart-ways-to-prevent-a-soggy-yard-with-every-rain-shower/Wed, 19 Feb 2025 09:21:51 -0500ExteriorCurb AppealWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Get to know your yard drainage options.

istockphoto.com

The following article is paid advertising created in partnership with SupplyHouse. Its facts and opinions are those of BobVila.com.

In an effort to reduce the flooding that follows rainstorms, today’s subdivisions are designed to direct runoff toward easements and curbs so water safely heads to the community’s stormwater drainage system.

Unfortunately, that’s not always enough to prevent your property from looking a bit swampy after a storm. If, for example, your yard doesn’t have enough slope to allow rainwater to run off, you could end up with standing water that kills your grass, leaks through your home’s foundation, and even creates a perfect environment for mosquitoes to breed. Obviously, it’s a good idea to address drainage problems sooner rather than later.

If portions of your yard hold water every time it rains, first try contacting your local zoning and planning authority. They may be able to help fix the drainage issue at no cost to you.

It may turn out that the problem isn’t in their jurisdiction, but don’t panic. Homeowners can take measures to alleviate localized flooding. Daniel O’Brian, technical expert for SupplyHouse.com, shared the following drainage and landscaping techniques for reducing flooding and directing water where it’s supposed to go—away from your house.

Divert water underground.

istockphoto.com

During a rainstorm, the torrents of water that rush through the gutters and out the downspouts can contribute to flooding if they can’t easily run off your property. The problem may be low spots, or a single spot, in the yard that prevent these streams from running to the storm drain. If so, rainwater can be safely rerouted through a French drain, a perforated underground pipe that collects and directs surface water.

“French drains provide a relatively easy method of moving excess water from pooled areas to a curbside storm drain,” O’Brian says. Installation involves digging a trench from the low-lying area to the street and inserting a buried pipe into a bed of pea gravel within the trench. Flexible pipe (as opposed to rigid pipe) allows you to customize the configuration of the drain as needed to maneuver around tree roots or other permanent objects in the yard. Once the pipe is in place, it’s covered with pea gravel and then topped with soil and grass.

Improve the yard grade.

istockphoto.com

The slope of your yard determines where and how rainwater will drain, making it the single most important factor in preventing your yard from flooding. For efficient drainage, your yard should have a minimum slope of 2 percent away from your house—that’s a fall of two feet for every 100 linear feet of yard.

If your yard doesn’t have adequate slope, water can pool in various areas or even back up along the foundation of your house, where it can lead to leaks and serious foundation problems. You can improve the grade by spreading topsoil along the foundation and in low areas to facilitate drainage.

Clear water from flooded patios and walkways.

istockphoto.com and supplyhouse.com

When a patio or sidewalk sits lower than the surrounding yard, it can end up covered in standing water after a rainstorm, and this water can take days to evaporate. Until then, those paved areas are unusable.

Raising the level of a patio or sidewalk is labor-intensive and often cost-prohibitive, but it’s not your only option. “Storm drain channels offer an increasingly popular means of eliminating standing water,” O’Brian shares. “Installed along sidewalks or patios, they direct water away from foot traffic.”

A product like Fernco’s StormDrain Plus Channel with Grate (available from SupplyHouse) should be installed along the lowest slope of the patio or sidewalk, where it can connect to a buried French drain (discussed above). When it rains, water that runs onto the patio will drain through the grate, into the channel, and through the French drain to an easement or the curb.

Protect your foundation.

istockphoto.com and supplyhouse.com

Flooding near your home’s foundation can spell big trouble, especially if you have basement windows and window wells. Because they are located below ground level, these are prime spots for water to collect and inevitably leak into the home.

“Sump pumps—especially when equipped with a backup battery—can provide a fail-safe method for draining these window wells,” O’Brian says. Install a collection tank with a sump pump, such as the Zoeller Premium Cast Iron Submersible Sump Pump (available from SupplyHouse), directly beneath the window well. When the tank fills with water, the pump turns on and pumps the water out and away from the house.

Create a rain garden.

istockphoto.com

If low-lying areas of your yard are consistently under water after a storm, consider turning these swampy patches into attractive, all-natural solutions to your water trouble: rain gardens.

Typically, these plant beds fill depressions in the ground with porous soil and plants that thrive in standing water, such as ferns and Japanese silver grass.

A rain garden can be as big or as small as you need, or are willing to take on, to correct your runoff problems. For a yard with more than one area that floods, you can create multiple rain gardens, or you can opt to direct water from one low-lying area via a trench and a buried perforated pipe to a single rain garden.

Consider a dry well.

istockphoto.com and supplyhouse.com

If your property experiences flooding that soaks into the ground relatively quickly (within one to four hours), your yard may be a good candidate for one or more dry wells.

Dry wells, like rain gardens, are positioned in low-lying areas to collect water, but instead of being used to grow plants, the excess water is held in buried tanks and then slowly released into the surrounding soil. The top of the tank features a grate through which water can enter and homeowners can inspect the water level below.

You may opt to install a dry well in the runoff path of each downspout. Alternatively, you can direct water to a dry well via a buried French drain and perforated pipe, such as the FLEX-Drain 4-inch by 12-foot Perforated Flexible Pipe (available from SupplyHouse).

The post 6 Smart Ways to Prevent a Soggy Yard with Every Rain Shower appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[12 Smart Ways to Lock a Door Without a Lock]]>These temporary fixes can help you secure apartment doors, bathroom doors, bedroom doors, and even entry doors that don't have a permanent lock.

The post 12 Smart Ways to Lock a Door Without a Lock appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-lock-a-door-without-a-lock/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=247494Tue, 18 Feb 2025 22:23:01 -0500DIYExteriorInteriorWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Locks are the best method for securing a door. But if a lock fails, the door doesn’t have a lock, or you don’t trust the lock situation in an apartment or hotel, you can take steps to ensure that the door and the home are secured. Even if the exterior door has a lock, extra security can help fortify a sliding door to the yard, and locking your bedroom door can keep your college roommate from wandering in.

While the best fix is often to install, rekey, repair, or replace a lock, we also know of some clever DIY hacks for how to lock a door without a lock. The following are quick, temporary solutions that can help you get a good night’s sleep without worrying about your safety.

1. Use a Doorstop

A wooden doorstop made of pine is being used to wedge open a door.
Photo: robcruse / Getty Images

Doorstops are typically used to prevent doors from closing. But when you place a doorstop against an inward opening door, it physically prevents someone from opening it, even if they can turn the door knob. It’s a simple, effective method to help secure a home when the door lock or latch is broken. For extra security, look for a doorstop with an alarm such as a siren or barking dog sound. A nonslip bottom is essential to help resist pressure, especially for travel-size doorstops.

A doorstop will not work on outward-opening doors, however. And with enough force, an intruder could manage to bypass a doorstop. Consider securing an outward-opening door with an additional method on this list for increased security.

2. Make a Barricade Using the Back of a Chair

White wooden chair in a family room with a white-grey chaise lounge.
Photo: iStock

Installing a quality door lock is important, but if you need to barricade a door using items you have around the house, look no further than your dining room: Sturdy chairs can be a good choice for keeping a door closed because you can angle them so that the top of the chair wedges under the door handle while the chair’s feet stay firmly planted against the ground. This creates pressure between the door and the floor along the back and legs of the chair, preventing the door from opening. 

The back of the chair also can block lever-style door handles from opening downward. If the door handle also can open the door with an upward turn, then this method isn’t as useful. In this case, tie a belt or rope to the lever handle from the chair as outlined next to prevent it from opening downward or upward.

3. Tie a Belt or Rope

Brown leather belt rolled up on a wood table.
Photo: iStock

Lever-style door handles tend to be easier to lock than door knobs because a belt or rope can help restrain the physical movement of the handle. Just attach one end of the belt or rope to the handle and the other to a fixed object. Consider using two tethers to completely prevent movement when the handle can open both upward and downward.

A belt or piece of rope also is a good option for securing an outward-opening door because the tether can be attached to a heavy indoor object like a refrigerator or couch. For French doors, wrap both handles with the tether, blocking them from opening.

4. Insert a Portable Door Lock

A portable door lock in the jamb of a white door with dark metal hardware.
Photo: iStock

These helpful devices are great for renters and travelers who cannot install more permanent solutions. As the name suggests, an Addalock portable door lock is designed so you can use and remove it as necessary. Most consist of a metal piece, sometimes referred to as a claw, that fits over the bolt or latch on the existing door knob, and a lock that fits into the claw to prevent the door from opening. These locks are less effective on outward-opening doors.

5. Install a Security Bar

Silver security bar across a white door.
Photo: iStock

For better protection against significant force, like intruders attempting to kick a door in or break it down with their shoulder, security bars can help. Security bars or barricades consist of a pair of heavy-duty brackets that DIYers can fasten to the wall or door frame, depending on the product. A thick metal or wood bar then sits in the brackets, blocking the entire width of the door. 

You can lift this security bar up and out of the brackets when you need to use the door, and can quickly place it back in the brackets afterward with very little effort. Security bars are not effective at securing outward-opening doors.

6. Stick a Fork in It

Silver fork detail on light shaded background.
Photo: Massimo Merlini / Getty Images

In a pinch, you can grab a simple fork to temporarily lock a door that opens inwardly. To secure the door, bend the tines of the fork so that the tips of the tines fit into the door latch and the rest of the fork can comfortably remain in the gap between the door and the door frame when the door is closed. Open the door and remove the fork, then break off the handle of the fork. 

Place the head of the fork back into the door latch as before, making sure that the bent tines are securely hooked to the door latch, then close the door. With the door closed, slide the handle of the fork through the tines, creating a horizontal barrier that prevents the door from opening inward.

7. Prop Up a Door Jammer

Door jammer leaning up against a white door on a wood floor.
Photo: Amazon

A door jammer is a simple alternative to DIY solutions for locking a door without a lock, and an especially good solution for securing apartment doors. These tools typically consist of a height-adjustable security bar with a rounded end designed to fit snugly under a door knob or door handle. The other end has a padded foot that is made to sit flat on the floor and resist sliding, creating a system that puts pressure on the floor if someone attempts to open the door inwards. For recommendations on the solution for your situation, refer to our tested guide to the best door security bars.

8. Install a Floor Barricade

Black floor barricade installed in front of a white door on a wood floor.
Photo: Amazon

Floor barricades are made up of two pieces: a base and a brace that can fit into or be removed from the base. Install a floor barricade by inserting screws through the base and into the floor. Make sure when opening the door that it will clear the top of the base before installing, so you can use the door when the brace is removed. When you want to secure the door, just insert the brace and it will prevent the door from opening inward. Using a floor barricade is a good choice to help prevent a break-in for people who can install it in their homes, but it isn’t an option for renters and travelers.

9. Remove the Door Handle

Young woman removing door knob from a white interior door.
Photo: Jose Luis Pelaez / Getty Images

While this isn’t the best option to keep the door secure, removing the door knob or handle entirely presents a challenge for anyone trying to gain access to the home (or an interior room). Without a handle, an intruder can’t open the door in the traditional sense, though anyone interested in using this method should keep in mind that with enough effort and one or more makeshift tools, a savvy person can turn the door mechanism even without a handle. It might be best to pair this option with another temporary door lock, such as a doorstop, or even a barricade.

10. Mount a Strike Plate Lock

Silver Strike Plate Lock on a white background
Photo: iStock

A strike plate lock is a small device that a DIYer can mount to the door frame. It works similarly to a standard door chain except that the strike plate lock has a metal loop that slips over the door handle to prevent the door from opening. This method is more secure than relying on a set of screws on the back of a door to keep the door secured against break-ins. Also, users can install a strike plate lock using the existing strike plate screw holes to prevent further damage to the door frame. Or place it high and out of kids’ reach to secure a wandering toddler.

11. Install Security Film and a Glass-Break Sensor

A hand reaching for a white glass break sensor.
Photo: Amazon

Not all doors are made with solid wood or metal, so it’s important to consider how to prevent someone from simply shattering the glass to access the door knob or lock. One of the best ways to increase the security of your front door with an adjoining glass panel or a glass door is to apply a security film to the door. The film will reinforce the glass and hold the shards together if shattered. 

However, with enough time and effort, a potential intruder might still be able to break through the film, so pair this setup with a glass-break sensor that will detect when the glass is broken and then sound an alarm. This sudden alarm paired with the unexpected protection of security film will typically dissuade would-be thieves and trespassers. 

12. Block a Sliding Door with a Broom Handle or Bar

A steel patio bar that locks a sliding door.
Photo: Amazon

Sliding doors are often installed at the back or side of the home, where they open into the yard. Even if you use security film and a glass-break sensor, these measures are only effective if the door has a functional lock. If the lock on your sliding door is not working or might not be robust enough to stop determined assailants, then you should wedge a security bar into the door frame or track. 

Alternatively, you can place a sturdy household object like a broom handle or a long wooden dowel to block the sliding door and prevent it from opening, thereby securing the back door even without a reliable lock.

The post 12 Smart Ways to Lock a Door Without a Lock appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[How to Fix a Noisy Radiator]]>Tired of all the banging and clanking your radiator is making? Here's what you can do to get some peace and quiet.

The post How to Fix a Noisy Radiator appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-repair-a-noisy-radiator/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=54604Tue, 18 Feb 2025 16:57:12 -0500InteriorDIYHeatingHeating & CoolingRepair & MaintenanceWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

There’s a simple reason why builders relied on steam radiators for decades and decades—they work! But every technology has drawbacks, and with steam radiators, homeowner complaints often center around noise. At times, with all that clanking and banging, you might wonder why the radiators didn’t come with earplugs. What causes that cacophony, and how can you usher in quiet? If you want to repair a radiator that’s making a lot of noise your home, here are a few things to know.

Why is the radiator making noise?

In a typical steam heat system, a single pipe extends from the boiler to the radiators. At the point where the pipe connects to a radiator, you’ll find an intake valve. This component performs two functions. First, it feeds steam into the radiator. Second, once the steam cools and condenses into water, the intake valve allows the liquid to drain out of the radiator and return to the boiler. At least, that’s how things are supposed to work. But water often gets trapped in the radiator, and when that happens, steam is blocked from entering. As the trapper water and blocked steam play a game of tug-of-war, they produce the delightful symphony that keeps you up at night. So aside from being an awful racket, a noisy radiator means that your system isn’t operating as well as it should.

Find trusted local pros for any home project
+

What to Do About a Noisy Radiator

Tilt it toward the intake valve.

A properly functioning steam radiator does not sit perfectly level on the floor. Rather, it tilts slightly toward the intake valve. That positioning allows condensed water to flow out of the radiator, not by means of a pump, but through the force of gravity. Therefore, if your radiator starts getting noisy, the first thing to check is check whether the radiator remains tilted toward the valve. Use a level, and if you see that the radiator sits level or is tilting away from the valve, intervene. Try slipping a wooden shim or paint stirrer under the legs on the end opposite to the valve. A tilt of only five degrees or so should do the trick.

Tried-and-True Advice

“Growing up in freezing-cold Scotland, I often dealt with noisy radiators that would clank and bang at all hours. One simple trick I found helpful was using a long-handled screwdriver to gently tap the top of the radiator. This can help release trapped air inside, which is often the cause of the noise. Just be sure to tap lightly—too much force could cause damage. It’s a quick fix that worked for me, and might help reduce the noise in your own radiator.”

—Paul Rankin, Contributing Writer

Insulate the radiator pipe.

If you’ve checked the radiator and found that it’s tilting correctly, a different common problem may be at play. Often, steam condenses in the pipe before it even reaches your radiator. If that’s the case, the fix is to insulate the pipe, wherever possible, along its run up from the boiler. Pipe insulation couldn’t be much easier to work with, but the portions of the pipe most in need of insulation may be hidden behind a wall.

Clean or replace the steam vent.

Another possible cause of radiator noise: the steam vent. Try this: Close the intake valve so that no steam can enter the radiator. Next, remove the steam vent from the radiator, placing it in a bowl of vinegar. Let it sit overnight. Doing so may help dissolve any calcium deposits that have gradually accumulated over time. If that doesn’t work, purchase a new steam vent to see whether the replacement fares any better. Readily available at most home centers, a new vent only costs about ten bucks, so it’s worth a shot if all else fails.

Finally, a friendly reminder regarding the use of steam radiators in general: The intake valve should be either fully open or fully closed. Leaving the valve partially open can result in leaks and damage to floors.

The post How to Fix a Noisy Radiator appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[The Best Retractable Garden Hose Reels to Keep Hoses Contained, Tested]]>Tame an unruly garden hose with a sturdy retractable storage reel that best suits your yard and budget.

The post The Best Retractable Garden Hose Reels to Keep Hoses Contained, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-retractable-garden-hose-reels/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-retractable-garden-hose-reels/Tue, 18 Feb 2025 10:45:56 -0500ReviewsLawn & GardenTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

If you’ve ever used a hose around the garden, you may know the struggle of wrangling it when you’re done with a given task. Although many garden hose storage options seek to simplify putting away a garden hose, few make it as easy as a retractable hose reel. There are a number of retractable hose reels on the market, and we tested eight top models for functionality, durability, installation ease, value, and curb appeal.

How does a retractable hose reel work? A round housing unit holds a garden hose and a reel powered by a large spring. As you extend the hose from the unit, a spring attached to the reel begins to wind and tighten. When you’re finished using the hose and want to store it, simply tug the hose to release a locking mechanism and engage the spring-loaded reel, which automatically winds up the hose in about 20 seconds. 

Our top pick was the 130-foot retractable option from Giraffe Tools thanks to its lockable hose and 180-degree swivel. Find out how each product fared in our hands-on testing and which ones are our top picks for the best retractable garden hose reels in various categories.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Giraffe Tools 130-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel
  2. RUNNER-UP: Aquazilla 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel 
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Eneacro 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel 
  4. UPGRADE PICK: Macnaught 60-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel
  5. BEST FOR SMALL YARDS: Gardena 50-Foot Wall-Mounted Hose Reel
  6. BEST FOR MEDIUM YARDS: Giraffe Tools 90-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel
  7. BEST FOR LARGE YARDS: Giraffe Tools 155-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel
  8. BEST SPIKE-MOUNTED: Gardena 66-Foot Retractable Hose Reel on Metal Spike 
The Best Retractable Garden Hose Reels Options
Photo: Katie Barton for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

LengthSizeNozzle
Giraffe Tools 130-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel130 feet½-inch diameterAdjustable with 9 spray pattern
Aquazilla 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel100 feet⅝-inch diameterPistol grip with 9 spray patterns
Eneacro 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel 100 feet½-inch diameterPistol grip with 9 spray patterns
Macnaught 60-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel60 feet½-inch diameter Not included
Gardena 50-Foot Wall-Mounted Hose Reel50 feetUnspecifiedFire hose
Giraffe Tools 90-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel90 feet⅝-inch diameterPistol grip with 9 spray patterns
Giraffe Tools 155-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel155 feet½-inch diameterPistol grip with 9 spray patterns
Gardena 66-Foot Retractable Hose Reel on Metal Spike66 feetUnspecifiedFire hose

Our Top Picks

These top picks represent some of the best retractable garden hose reels on the market today. They are easy to operate, with proven designs that will quickly retract a hose without tangling. We’ve included a selection of reels to accommodate various hose lengths, and we extensively tested each model for functionality and durability.

Best Overall

Giraffe Tools 130-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Giraffe Tools 130-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • 130-foot hose locks at any length, making it ideal for all yard sizes
  • Auto-rewind system retracts the hose without any kinking or tangling
  • Hose reel features a 180-degree swivel and is removable for storage

What We Don’t Like

  • Loose rubber gaskets inside the hose’s couplings fell out upon unboxing

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 5/5; Functionality 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 5/5 

Product Specs

  • Length: 130 feet
  • Size: ½-inch diameter
  • Nozzle: Adjustable with 9 spray patterns

With its ample length and durable construction, this retractable garden hose reel from Giraffe Tools is a quality choice for just about any yard. It comes equipped with a 130-foot hose that locks at any length, allowing it to reach even the far corners of a lawn. The hose itself is made of an abrasion-resistant hybrid material that can handle pressures of up to 600 pounds per square inch (PSI)—nearly twice what most hoses can handle—without bursting. This is a key feature, given that the hoses in retractable reels generally aren’t replaceable. 

The Giraffe Tools retractable hose reel came with everything we needed to mount the bracket to our wooden post, and the process was simple, taking less than 10 minutes. The handy quick-release system made it easy to set the reel in the bracket and remove it for portability or storage. The hose pulled out smoothly, requiring little effort on our part. To retract the hose, we gave it a gentle tug, and the auto-rewind system kicked in, rolling it up without any kinking or tangling. 

We also appreciated the hose’s high-quality spray nozzle, which features nine unique spray patterns. We repeatedly dropped the hose on our concrete patio to test for durability, and there was no damage to the nozzle or couplings. The only malfunction we encountered was minor: The rubber gaskets in the hose’s couplings were loose, falling out as we unboxed the reel. It was easy to put them back in place, but potential buyers will want to keep this in mind.

Get the Giraffe Tools 130-foot retractable garden hose reel at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Runner-up

Aquazilla 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Aquazilla 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Easy-to-install mounting bracket; hose reel locks in place via a metal pin
  • 100-foot hose length is ideal for yards and gardens of all sizes
  • Durable 9-pattern spray nozzle is suitable for various applications

What We Don’t Like

  • Retraction requires the gentlest of pulls; required several attempts after each use

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 5/5; Functionality 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs 

  • Length: 100 feet
  • Size: ⅝-inch diameter
  • Nozzle: Pistol grip with 9 spray patterns

The Aquazilla retractable water hose reel was on par with our top pick, earning it the Runner-Up award. The hose features a ⅝-inch diameter and a 100-foot length, perfect for extended reach through the yard. The mounting bracket has a 180-degree swivel, and the hose locks at any length. 

Upon unboxing the Aquazilla retractable garden hose, we were impressed with the attractiveness of the design. A handle at the top of the reel made it easy for us to carry and then install the product. It took us a mere 5 minutes to install the mounting bracket on our wooden post; the reel hooked to the bracket via a removable metal pin. 

During testing, we could pull the hose smoothly from the reel, and it locked into place the second we stopped pulling. Our only issue was that retracting the hose required only the gentlest tug, which we never could seem to achieve on the first try. However, once the hose did retract, the hose guide prevented any kinking. The heavy-duty, pistol-grip spray nozzle resisted any cracking when we dropped it on our concrete patio. We also found the nozzle’s nine different spray patterns useful for many applications, including rinsing off our patio and watering flowers.

Get the Aquazilla retractable garden hose reel at Amazon.

Best Bang for the Buck

Eneacro 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Eneacro 100-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Reasonably priced compared with retractable hose reels of a similar size
  • Easiest to pull the hose of all the models we tested
  • 100-foot hose length is suitable for yards and gardens of all sizes

What We Don’t Like

  • Plastic housing unit appears to be of lower quality than other top picks

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 3/5; Functionality 5/5; Durability 3/5; Value 5/5 

Product Specs

  • Length: 100 feet
  • Size: ½-inch diameter 
  • Nozzle: Pistol grip with 9 spray patterns

This retractable garden hose reel from Eneacro offers several good features at a reasonable price. It automatically locks at any length and retracts slowly using an internal breaking mechanism. The hose’s 100-foot length makes it suitable for yards and gardens of all sizes. The reel includes a side mount and can rotate 180 degrees to reach all parts of a yard, and users can remove the reel from the bracket for easy winter storage. 

Upon unboxing, it was apparent why this garden hose reel was cheaper than other products on our list. The plastic housing unit was thinner, and the hose looked to be of lower quality. However, looks can be deceiving, as we were pleasantly surprised by this hose reel’s performance. 

We installed the mounting bracket by drilling four pilot holes and then screwing the bracket in place. We then attached the reel and began using the hose. This hose was the easiest to pull among all of our top picks. There was no resistance, and drawing out the entire hose length took zero force. When we had finished using it, the hose retracted smoothly. The hose also features a handy pistol-grip nozzle with nine spray patterns. While this model’s housing unit appears to be a lower quality than that of the other products, it’s still an ideal option for users who value ease of use—and at a lower price.

Get the Eneacro retractable garden hose reel at Amazon.

Upgrade Pick

Macnaught 60-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Macnaught 60-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Features durable construction and an attractive modern design
  • Hybrid polymer hose is thick, flexible, and resistant to kinking
  • Simple installation and easy to remove from the mount for portability or storage

What We Don’t Like

  • Inconsistent retraction; the hose sometimes rewinds to one side rather than evenly throughout the reel
  • Doesn’t include a spray nozzle or screws for the mounting bracket

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 5/5; Functionality 3/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs

  • Length: 60 feet
  • Size: ½-inch diameter 
  • Nozzle: Not included

For shoppers who want to invest in a higher-priced retractable hose reel, it’s best to choose a sturdy model designed for ease of use like this Macnaught hose reel that features heavy-duty construction and a high-quality hose. Although the 60-foot hose has a smaller ½-inch diameter, it’s made from a hybrid polymer material that doesn’t hold a coiled shape, making it easier to extend and less likely to kink. 

When we unboxed the hose reel, we were impressed with the material quality. The hose felt flexible but thick—definitely a grade above the other options. The housing unit featured durable plastic and a modern design. It included a metal bracket for installation; unfortunately, though, no screws were included. Luckily, we had some screws on hand and were able to mount the bracket to our post in just a few minutes.

Similar to other retractable garden hose reels, this model locks automatically and retracts with a gentle pull. However, the retraction was inconsistent during our testing. Sometimes the garden hose would retract in an even pattern, while other times it would all go to one side. In those instances, we’d have to unwind the hose and retract it again to straighten it out. An additional downside to this model is that it didn’t include a spray nozzle.

Get the Macnaught retractable garden hose reel at Amazon

Best for Small Yards

Gardena 50-Foot Wall-Mounted Hose Reel

 The Best Retractable Garden Hose Option Gardena 50-Foot Wall-Mounted Hose Reel
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Includes hose guide for easy, even retraction within the reel
  • Reel attaches to the mounting bracket via a removable metal pin
  • Hose is easy to pull out, locks in place, and smoothly retracts

What We Don’t Like

  • Hose features plastic couplings with snap-on connections, which may be less desirable 

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 4/5; Functionality 4/5; Durability 4/5; Value 4/5 

Product Specs

  • Length: 50 feet
  • Size: Unspecified
  • Nozzle: Fire hose

The shorter 50-foot hose on this Gardena model is ideal for keeping flower beds and landscaping in smaller yards well irrigated. Similar to other hose reels, it mounts to a wall and swivels 180 degrees to access different parts of the yard. A bracket on the mount pairs with a standard padlock (not included) to prevent theft. Users can easily remove the reel from the mount for winter storage. 

We installed the bracket to our wooden post with four screws and then set the reel on top, locking it in with a metal pin. We then tested the hose, pulling it out and retracting it more than a dozen times. The hose extended and retracted smoothly and efficiently each time. This product includes a handy hose guide for installation on the corner of a house or building to prevent snags.

Rather than metal couplings like the other hose reels we tested, this product has plastic couplings with snap-on connections. The water source hook-up, however, has a standard threaded connection. Additionally, this hose reel has a basic fire-hose nozzle, which wasn’t our favorite, but it works well for watering plants.

Get the Gardena 50-foot retractable garden hose reel at Amazon.

Best for Medium Yards

Giraffe Tools 90-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Giraffe Tools 90-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Attractive and high-quality housing unit made from reinforced propylene plastic
  • Kink-proof hose retracts via a guide that keeps it tidy inside the housing unit
  • 90-foot hose length and versatile spray nozzle are ideal for many applications

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t pull as smoothly as other tested products from this brand; requires force

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 5/5; Functionality 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.5/5 

Product Specs 

  • Length: 90 feet
  • Size: ⅝-inch diameter
  • Nozzle: Pistol grip with 9 spray patterns

The Giraffe Tools 90-foot retractable garden hose reel is an attractive option for midsize yards and gardens. The housing unit is durable, consisting of reinforced propylene plastic that won’t fade in the sun. The reel features a self-layering system that guides the hose into the unit smoothly and without any kinking. 

This model included everything we needed to mount it, including a propylene bracket and four screws with plastic anchors. After mounting, all we had to do was set the reel in place. We started our functionality testing by pulling the length of the hose out of the reel multiple times. We immediately noticed that this model required much more force to pull than the other Giraffe Tools models we tested.

The retraction on this hose worked as expected, rewinding smoothly and without kinks. We repeatedly dropped the nine-setting spray nozzle on the concrete patio to mimic the regular wear and tear the hose might experience. The couplings never warped, and the nozzle didn’t crack or show any signs of damage. Overall, this is a high-quality retractable garden hose reel, but it requires some upper body strength to extend the entire length of the hose.

Get the Giraffe Tools 90-foot retractable garden hose reel at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Best for Large Yards

Giraffe Tools 155-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel

 The Giraffe Tools 155-Foot Retractable Garden Hose Reel on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Extra-long hose length of 155 feet is ideal for large yards, gardens, and barns
  • Durable, heavy-duty housing is made from reinforced and fade-resistant propylene
  • Versatile spray nozzle with 9 spray patterns meets multiple needs

What We Don’t Like

  • Long hose length makes reel heavier to carry and install
  • Wider mounting bracket may limit installation options

Our Ratings: Installation 5/5; Curb Appeal 5/5; Functionality 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.5/5 

Product Specs

  • Length: 155 feet
  • Size: ½-inch diameter 
  • Nozzle: Pistol grip with 9 spray patterns

With a whopping 155 feet of hose length, this Giraffe Tools option is one of the longest retractable garden hose reels on the market, making it ideal for yards that extend far from the spigot. The reel functions similarly to other retractable hose reels, locking automatically at any length and retracting with a simple tug. 

The mounting bracket was wider than others on our list, requiring a minimum of a 4-inch by 6-inch post on which to mount it. Alternatively, users can mount it directly to the side of a house or building. We installed the bracket on our wooden post, which took only a few minutes. We then set the reel in place and began using the hose. The reel weighs about 40 pounds, making it slightly more challenging to install.

We expected such a long hose to be more difficult to pull, but it wasn’t. It pulled smoothly from the reel, locking in place each time we stopped. It also retracted with a gentle tug, never kinking. The durable sprayer nozzle featured the same nine-setting pistol grip as on all the Giraffe Tools models we tested. We subjected the nozzle to many drops on our concrete patio, and it held up well. And we found the multiple sprayer settings useful for a variety of applications.

Get the Giraffe Tools 155-foot retractable garden hose reel at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Spike Mounted

Gardena 66-Foot Retractable Hose Reel on Metal Spike

 The Gardena 66-Foot Retractable Hose Reel on Metal Spike on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Easy-to-install metal ground spike eliminates the need for wall mounting
  • Hose pulls out smoothly and retracts with a gentle tug
  • 66-foot length suits small to medium yards and gardens

What We Don’t Like

  • Includes a basic adjustable nozzle instead of a higher-quality spray nozzle
  • Expensive for the quality and size of the hose reel

Our Ratings: Installation 4/5; Curb Appeal 4/5; Functionality 5/5; Durability 3/5; Value 3.5/5 

Product Specs 

  • Length: 66 feet
  • Size: Unspecified
  • Nozzle: Fire hose

Users who can’t or don’t want to wall-mount a hose reel can still enjoy the benefits of a retractable garden hose with the spike-mounted Gardena 66-foot hose reel. The housing unit is constructed with frostproof and UV-resistant material and features RollControl technology for safe retraction.

This hose reel came with everything we needed to install it. We mounted the stake by finding a suitable, utility-free area in our yard and then used the included metal rod to twist the stake into place. We couldn’t get the stake all the way into the ground, but we pushed it deep enough to support the hose reel. We then assembled the reel and placed it on the mount. 

The hose didn’t feel quite as durable as the other models we tested, but it extended and retracted smoothly with no tangling or kinking. The 66-foot length makes it best suited for small to medium yards. This model has a fire-hose adjustable nozzle, which didn’t have the quality of the nozzles on other top picks. However, it still held up to many drops on the concrete patio and worked well for watering plants. 

Get the Gardena 66-foot retractable garden hose reel at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Retractable Garden Hose Reels

  • Products tested: 8
  • Hours spent testing: 6.5
  • Tests performed: 5
  • Average price: $180

Before starting our hands-on testing of the best retractable garden hose reels, we researched top consumer needs and considered more than 15 options with high user reviews. Then, we narrowed our list to eight models to test and spent a month installing and using each retractable hose reel.

First, we mounted each hose reel to a wooden post using the included bracket and screws, if applicable. To test for functionality, we extended the full length of the hose and then retracted it at least a dozen times, noting the overall ease or difficulty, the smoothness, and how well it retracted. We also dropped the hose couplings and any included nozzles on our concrete patio multiple times to mimic the natural wear and tear these parts may undergo. Finally, we kept all of our test results in a rubric, and—at the end of the testing period—used these results to rate each product and award it as the top pick in one of the categories.

What to Consider When Choosing a Retractable Garden Hose Reel 

Although knowing the length of the hose is key when you’re purchasing a retractable garden hose reel, there are other important factors to consider, such as the hose diameter, nozzle type, and mounting design. 

Length

“Hose length is definitely a top consideration,” says Jeremy Yamaguchi, CEO of Lawn Love. “If you want to be able to extend your hose out to water the plants across your lawn without requiring a watering can to make up the difference, then make sure to measure the distance you need.”

Though other types of hose storage solutions may allow you to add length by attaching an additional hose, you won’t be able to add to or replace the hose that comes with a retractable reel. The best way to determine the length you’ll need is to measure from an outdoor spigot to the farthest point in the yard. Hose lengths for retractable garden hose reels typically range from about 50 to 150 feet. 

Mounting and Portability 

A retractable garden hose holder comes with a mounting kit for installation on the side of a house, shed, or even a fence or post. The mounting kit allows the reel to hinge left to right 180 degrees, making it easier to direct the hose toward a flower bed, driveway, or other location. 

Mounting the hose reel is necessary to provide a solid base while pulling the hose for retraction. A hose reel wall mount typically has a removable pin that allows the user to detach the entire device from the mount, which is convenient when storing the hose in a shed or garage for the winter. 

Hose Size

Hose sizes for retractable garden hoses vary from ⅜ of an inch in diameter up to ⅝ of an inch in diameter. A larger-diameter hose can carry more water and therefore produce a higher flow rate than a smaller-diameter hose. With this in mind, a ⅜-inch or ½-inch hose is best suited for watering plants, while a ⅝-inch hose is ideal for uses that demand higher water volume, such as running a sprinkler or washing a car. 

Nozzle Type

Some garden hose reels feature one of two types of nozzle: pistol grip or fire hose. Pistol-grip models fit ergonomically in the hand with a grip and trigger that allow the user to regulate the amount of output. The nozzle has a throttle tip for toggling between eight or nine spray patterns, including a stream, broad fan, and mist. 

Fire-hose nozzles are long and straight. The user can adjust the spray from a high-pressure stream to a broad fan by twisting the nozzle. Though a fire-hose nozzle doesn’t offer the same variety of spray patterns as a pistol-grip nozzle, it is usually made from all-metal parts and is typically more durable. 

Most nozzle types use standard fittings, so you can easily replace one later with an aftermarket nozzle, if necessary.

The Advantages of Owning a Retractable Garden Hose Reel

Although retractable reels are one of the more expensive storage solutions for garden hoses, there are several good reasons to invest in one. A retractable hose reel makes it easy to collect and store a garden hose that is up to 155 feet in length, eliminating the need to wrangle a hose manually. Garden hose reels also feature wall mounts, which can inconspicuously attach to a house or shed, unlike a hose reel cart that requires indoor storage. These reels detach easily from their mounts and double as a storage container for the hose during winter months. A retractable garden hose reel can:

  • Eliminate the need to manually wind up a hose
  • Store the hose in an out-of-the-way place
  • Allow for convenient transport of the hose for winter storage

“With longer hoses, it’s definitely helpful to have a crank feature or a retractable design to bring the hose back into place. If you don’t need a long hose and/or don’t need to take it out very far, a retractable hose may be an unnecessary expense,” says Yamaguchi. With that in mind, if you have a small yard with low water needs, a quality expandable hose may be sufficient.

FAQs

If you’re wondering how to use your new retractable garden hose reel or want to know what to do if the hose becomes damaged, read on for answers to these frequently asked questions. 

Q. Why do I need a retractable garden hose reel?

A retractable garden hose reel makes it easier to collect and store the hose by eliminating the need to manually wind it up. A quality hose reel also provides a tidy place to store the hose during the winter months. 

Q. How do I use a hose reel?

To use a hose reel, grab the nozzle end and pull the hose to the desired location for watering. The hose will automatically lock when you stop pulling. To retract the hose, give it a quick tug. The hose reel will automatically wind up the hose in about 20 seconds. 

Q. Can I replace a hose in a retractable hose reel?

Most hoses in retractable hose reels are not replaceable. If the hose becomes damaged, however, you may be able to repair it with a patch kit. 

Meet the Tester

Katie Barton has over 10 years of experience in product writing, has tested dozens of cleaning products, and has authored hundreds of articles for major media outlets. Her cleaning and organizing advice has been featured on GOBankingRates, Realtor.com, Yahoo!, Cabin Life, and more. She takes an unbiased approach to product testing, using each product multiple times or for several days/weeks to determine efficacy. Her goal is to help readers decide which products are worth their hard-earned money and which fall flat.

Additional research provided by Tony Carrick.

The post The Best Retractable Garden Hose Reels to Keep Hoses Contained, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[The 7 Wood Chippers That Cut Best in Our Tests]]>Keep your yard tidy and free of debris with one of the best wood chippers.

The post The 7 Wood Chippers That Cut Best in Our Tests appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-wood-chipper/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-wood-chipper/Tue, 18 Feb 2025 10:09:36 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More › https://c.aps.amazon-adsystem.com/apstag.js window.apstag = window.apstag || { queue: [], init: function() { apstag.queue.push(['i', arguments, (new Date).getTime()]) }, fetchBids: function() { apstag.queue.push(['f', arguments, (new Date).getTime()]) }, setDisplayBids: function() {}, targetingKeys: function() { return []; } } window.apstag.init({ pubID: "49cdee1c-072d-4765-8313-7c45826cbedc", // APS provided value adServer: 'googletag', videoServer: 'DFP', signals: { ortb2: { site: { page: "https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-wood-chipper/", publisher: { id: "49cdee1c-072d-4765-8313-7c45826cbedc" // APS Provided - publisher UUID } } } } }); apstag.queue.push(function () { window.apstag.nativeContent().enable(); });

A wood chipper cuts twigs, limbs, branches, and other solid yard material into small pieces. These chips may provide mulch for a garden, kindling for a fire pit, or even the raw material for pressed wood to make furniture or complete other carpentry projects.

The best wood chipper for home usemust accommodate the twigs and branches you feed into it and suit your power requirements. While thebest electric wood chipperis quieter and runs on a home power supply, gas and power take-off (PTO) models are much more powerful, cutting through more material at a faster pace.

We interviewed a landscaping expert to get his insight on what specifically to look for. Then we shopped around to identify electric and gas-powered wood chippers that our readers could count on for their outdoor cleanup projects. Then we spent more than 8 hours assembling and testing the following picks in a huge brush pile in order to compare wood chippers.

Through this testing, we selected the Earthquake K33 Chipper Shredder as our best overall wood chipper for its ability to shred and chip branches of 3 inches in diameter, 301 cubic centimeter (cc) 4-cycle gas engine, low shredder hopper, and dock-and-lock bagging system.

Continue reading for insight on our shopping considerations and check out ourwood chipper reviews to see how each of these models performed in our tests—and why one of them may be the best wood chipper for your project.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Earthquake K33 Chipper Shredder
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Sun Joe CJ601E Electric Wood Chipper
  3. UPGRADE PICK: DK2 OPC503 3-Inch Disk Chipper Shredder
  4. BEST FOR COMPOSTING: Earthwise Electric 15-Amp Corded Chipper Shredder
  5. BEST WITH LEAF VACUUM: Troy-Bilt CSV060B Chipper Shredder Vacuum
  6. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Champion Power Equipment 3-Inch Chipper Shredder
  7. ALSO CONSIDER: Predator 6.5 HP 212cc Chipper Shredder
A person feeding a tree branch into the best wood chipper while standing in a yard next to a pile of mulched wood.
Photo: Debbie Wolfe for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

EngineBranch CapacityWeight
Earthquake K33 Chipper Shredder301cc gas engine3 inches140 pounds
Sun Joe CJ601E Electric Wood Chipper14 amp (A) corded electric1.5 inches25.4 pounds
DK2 OPC503 3-Inch Disk Chipper Shredder7 horsepower (hp) 208cc Kohler Command Pro gas engine3 inches187 pounds
Earthwise Electric 15-Amp Corded Chipper Shredder15A corded electric motor1.75 inches30 pounds
Troy-Bilt CSV060B Chipper Shredder Vacuum163cc gasoline engine1.5 inches125 pounds
Champion Power Equipment 3-Inch Chipper Shredder224cc Champion gasoline engine3 inches135.6 pounds
Predator 6.5 HP 212cc Chipper Shredder212cc gas engine3 inches120 pounds

Our Top Picks

We tested some of the top-rated wood chippersin our test facility brush pile. Read on to learn how each of these machines performed in our tests and why we consider them to be among the best wood chippers for home use.

Best Overall

Earthquake K33 Chipper Shredder

 The Earthquake K33 Chipper Shredder on a white backgound.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Starts easily and handles tough material without stalling
  • Chips branches up to 3 inches in diameter
  • Easy loading of leaves and small debris
  • Includes a dock-and-lock bagging system
  • Large 11-inch airless wheels

What We Don’t Like

  • Pricey compared to other options
  • The included bottle of oil isn’t enough

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 301cc gas engine
  • Branch capacity: 3 inches
  • Weight: 140 pounds

The best all-around wood chipper we tested was durably built, easy to operate, and tackled the toughest branches without bogging down. It also featured a compact design that made it easy to transport and store. A 301cc gas engine and dual-knife chipper disc allow the Earthquake K33 chipper shredder to tackle branches up to 3 inches in diameter. Four hammer assemblies (two J-hammers and two tri-hammers) on the shredder make quick work of leaves, pine cones, smaller sticks, and other yard waste.

The big, powerful engine is the key to this chipper’s success. It started on the first pull and produced more than 13 foot-pounds of torque, while the other gas models in the test group averaged just over 11 foot-pounds. With that kind of power, the Earthquake K33 did an outstanding job chipping the thickest branches that bogged down or stalled out the other chippers.

When it came to shredding, we liked that the hopper opening was just 35 inches high, whereas some of the others were over 40 inches high. The lower height made it easier to load, especially when we were dumping large quantities of debris from a container. To offset the low height and still allow for leverage to make transport easy, the handlebar attaches at an angle so that it is higher than the rim of the hopper.

The debris bag worked great, too. Rather than relying on a drawstring as most models did, this one uses a locking bracket with its own handle. A support rod holds the bag open so that it fills all the way, with no need to reposition or shake down the material. When it’s full, the handle rotates off the mounting bracket for transport, and a heavy-duty zipper on the opposite end facilitates fast disposal.

We felt that the performance and build quality warranted the premium price for this wood chipper. Although it’s not the cheapest model available, the Earthquake K33 would make a smart pick for heavier use on larger properties.

Get the Earthquake wood chipper at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Mowers at Jacks.

Best Bang for the Buck

Sun Joe CJ601E Electric Wood Chipper

 The Sun Joe CJ601E Electric Wood Chipper on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Shreds branches up to 1.5 inches thick
  • Strong 14A electric motor
  • Upright configuration saves space in storage

What We Don’t Like

  • Not made for shredding leaves or soft, pliable stems
  • Operates more slowly than other electric chippers

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 14 amp (A) corded electric
  • Branch capacity: 1.5 inches
  • Weight: 25.4 pounds

For those who want to save money when cleaning up a small yard, Sun Joe’s 14A electric wood chipper could be considered thebest budget wood chipperaround. This affordable small wood chipper uses an electric motor that runs at speeds up to 4,300 revolutions per minute (rpm). As a light-duty chipper, it won’t clear fallen trees or do heavy landscaping work, but it cuts sticks and limbs up to 1.5 inches thick and produces usable mulch for the garden or yard. When the job is done, its compact, upright design won’t take up a lot of room.

This electric chipper has the lowest average price of all the models we tested, making it a smart choice for budget shoppers with limited storage space. Setup and start-up took about 15 minutes, and all tools were included in the box. We also noticed right away that this chipper was even lighter than the other electric models, weighing in at just over 25 pounds. The stated reduction ratio is 16:1 (to reduce a volume equal to 16 bags of debris down to one).

After a half hour of grinding branches, we noted that this Sun Joe model operates somewhat slower than other electric chippers and produces larger particles. In 30 minutes of chipping a mix of green and woody branches, it produced approximately 15 gallons (three 5-gallon buckets full) of chips. The motor strained a few times but never jammed, so we didn’t get to try out the jam-clearing function in a real-world scenario. The compact, upright build; strong performance; and maintenance-free design make this an easy choice for everyday use.

Get the Sun Joe wood chipper at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Upgrade Pick

DK2 OPC503 3-Inch Disk Chipper Shredder

 The DK2 OPC503 3-Inch Disk Chipper Shredder on a white background.
Photo: lowes.com

What We Like

  • Professional-grade Kohler gasoline engine for durability
  • Large hopper capacity and lower height for easier loading
  • Air-filled off-road tires and removable ATV towing hitch
  • Drop stand and locking wheels

What We Don’t Like

  • Horizontal configuration takes up more storage space
  • Top discharge configuration can become clogged with fine debris

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 7 horsepower (hp) 208cc Kohler Command Pro gas engine
  • Branch capacity: 3 inches
  • Weight: 187 pounds

The towable DK2 chipper shredder features a 7 hp 208cc Kohler Command Pro engine and dual high-strength steel-carbide cutting blades for reliable performance in tough conditions. Pneumatic off-road tires, a removable ATV towing hitch, and a drop stand make it easy to access worksites on difficult terrain. The wheels lock in place for added safety while chipping. An extra-large hopper and branch auto-feed chute placed at a comfortable height make it easier to load composting materials, yard waste, brush, and branches up to 3 inches in diameter.

After about a half hour of easy assembly, we fueled up the DK2 chipper shredder and moved it in place for testing. The large air-filled tires and hand-truck configuration made it the easiest gas-powered model to move manually; the added convenience of the removable tow bar was icing on the cake. Locking the wheels in place for operation required removal of the wheel pins from the end of the axle, sliding the wheels outward on the axle, and reinstalling the pins through the wheels and axle. In practice, this was only slightly awkward and less complicated than it may sound. The machine started on the first pull and ran smoothly throughout the test.

We operated the chipper for a half hour, feeding it a combination of green and dried hardwood branches, sunflower stalks, cornstalks, brush, and dried leaves. We really liked the wide mouth and comfortable height of the chute at just 36 inches high. It made it super easy to load leaves and other fine-textured materials. Even the largest, driest branches presented no problem. However, we did note that some of the fine material fed through the hopper accumulated at the base of the discharge chute. It did not clog the flow, but we recommend occasionally checking for excessive buildup during the course of a workday. Overall, this was the most pleasurable chipper shredder we tested. It was very easy to maneuver, powerful, and relatively quiet compared to competitors.

Get the DK2 wood chipper at Tractor Supply Co. or The Home Depot

Best for Composting

Earthwise Electric 15-Amp Corded Chipper Shredder

 The Earthwise Electric 15-Amp Corded Chipper Shredder on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Powerful exhaust-free operation
  • Includes a 1.2-bushel collection bin
  • Processes large branches
  • Lightweight yet durable construction

What We Don’t Like

  • Limited working range without extension cord
  • Shallow plastic hopper is somewhat flimsy

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 15A corded electric motor
  • Branch capacity: 1.75 inches
  • Weight: 30 pounds

When processing organic waste for composting, a clean, quiet electric chipper makes sense. The Earthwise 15A electric chipper grinds sticks and branches up to 1.75 inches in diameter and other yard and garden waste into smaller, more uniform particles for fast, efficient composting. It requires no gas or oil and virtually no maintenance. The included 1.2-bushel plastic collection bin makes it easy to capture chips, and the slim design with rear wheels makes for easy transport.

The Earthwise electric chipper was the easiest to assemble of all the models we tested, taking only about 10 minutes. However, we didn’t love the lightweight plastic snap-in-place hopper since the tabs lined up with difficulty and the assembled hopper was too easy to knock off while working. On the other hand, we really liked the plastic collection bin that simply slides into place and backs out like a drawer.

Feeding a wide range of such materials as plant stalks and woody branches was a breeze, and the included tamper tool helped us safely feed smaller items. The motor operated quietly, unfazed by even the largest, driest woody material, and the finished chips were quite uniform in appearance. We filled the collection bin within the half-hour testing time frame. The strong electric motor, compact build, and generously sized collection bin make this an easy choice for composting enthusiasts.

Get the Earthwise wood chipper at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best with Leaf Vacuum

Troy-Bilt CSV060B Chipper Shredder Vacuum

 The Troy-Bilt CSV060B Chipper Shredder Vacuum on a white background.
Photo: homedepot.com

What We Like

  • Excellent versatility; chips, vacuums, shreds, and bags
  • Gas engine reduces user fatigue
  • 24-inch vacuum width
  • Onboard vacuum hose reaches into tight spots
  • Accepts branches up to 1.5 inches in diameter

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires more storage space than other chipper shredders
  • Does not work well in natural areas or tall grass

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 163cc gasoline engine
  • Branch capacity: 1.5 inches
  • Weight: 125 pounds

Anyone looking to win “Tidiest Yard in the Neighborhood” will want to look into Troy-Bilt’s chipper-shredder-vacuum combo. With its 24-inch vacuum opening, leaf removal is as simple as walking across the lawn. Need to collect a few leaves blown beneath the shrubs or a pile near the front-door vortex? Just detach the 8-foot-long 7-inch-diameter vacuum hose and it will reach them. If a few sticks fell from the shade tree, simply insert them into the 1.5-inch chipper feed chute.

This machine operates somewhat like a push lawn mower. The deck height is adjustable for optimal leaf pickup. It rolls smoothly on 11-inch rear wheels and 8-inch front wheels. The cast-aluminum impeller is powered by an easy-starting California Air Resources Board (CARB)–compliant 163cc engine. It turns eight bags worth of yard waste into a single bag of chips and collects them in the onboard 2-bushel felt bagger.

This Troy-Bilt model arrived mostly assembled, with the exception of the handle, bagger, and hose. Installing those took about 15 minutes. Then we added oil and gas, adjusted the deck height, and started testing.

We found that the Troy-Bilt exhibited good suction, easily picking up dry or damp leaves, small pine cones, and twigs from the lawn, and the hose feature sucked up matted debris from beneath shrubs. The 1.5-inch chipper feature operated smoothly and efficiently for the most part. We tested it with both green wood and dried hardwood branches, though strongly curved and crooked branches did need to be broken into short pieces or tossed aside in a few cases.

The weight of the engine and deck countered the weight of the debris bagger quite well until the bag was mostly full. Emptying the bagger onto the ground was easy enough, but transferring the chips to a disposal bag was awkward. This machine could really help those who live where summer storms regularly leave debris in the yard or where autumn leaves fall over an extended period of time. It could also boost productivity during spring cleanup.

Get the Troy-Bilt wood chipper at The Home Depot, The BuildClub, or Troy-Bilt.

Best Heavy-Duty

Champion Power Equipment 3-Inch Chipper Shredder

 The Champion Power Equipment 3-Inch Chipper Shredder on a white background.
Photo: homedepot.com

What We Like

  • Powerful 224cc engine and dual-blade chipper
  • Extra-large shredder hopper handles debris up to 0.5 inches thick
  • Branch feed chute accepts straight limbs up to 3 inches thick
  • Hand-truck style makes it easy to maneuver over uneven terrain

What We Don’t Like

  • Tall stance makes loading more difficult
  • Handle built into the hopper rim with no padding or finger molding

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 224cc Champion gasoline engine
  • Branch capacity: 3 inches
  • Weight: 135.6 pounds

The ruggedly built Champion Power Equipment 3-inch portable chipper shredder proved to be the best heavy-duty wood chipper in our tests. A clean CARB-compliant 224cc Champion gas engine drives the chipper’s steel blades. This chipper grinds the equivalent of 20 bags of yard debris to fit into one bag. The large hopper is suitable for shredding fine debris like twigs, leaves, and other material smaller than 0.5 inches thick, while the branch feed chute accepts limbs up to 3 inches in diameter. The discharge chute features an adjustable angle top and comes with an easy-to-use 2-bushel drawstring collection bag for fast, easy cleanup.

As with the other models we tested, we set aside 30 minutes and a large pile of branches, brush, and leaves to test the Champion chipper shredder. After 45 minutes of easy assembly, we added gas and oil before going to work. The tall height of the hopper rim, which is where the transport handle is located, was a help and a hindrance. Because the wheels are on the same side of the machine as the handle, it easily maneuvers like a hand truck over all kinds of terrain, and the tall height provides welcome leverage. Later on, however, we realized that the 50-inch-tall hopper was less comfortable for loading debris compared to models with lower hoppers.

The engine started on the first pull of the recoil cord. We were impressed by the smooth operation and grinding power provided by the big gas engine. This was the largest gas engine in our test lineup. The automatic feed branch chute fed really fast, even with dry, large-diameter hardwood. The hopper, as noted earlier, was a bit too high for comfort but was wide enough to hold lots of material. The machine never clogged or showed signs of struggle with the workload. We also noted the machine’s small footprint, which makes it ideal for saving space in storage. This is a great choice for making fast work of occasional tough cleanup jobs.

Get the Champion Power Equipment wood chipper at The Home Depot.

Also Consider

Predator 6.5 HP 212cc Chipper Shredder

 The Predator 6.5 HP 212cc Chipper Shredder on a white background.
Photo: harborfreight.com

What We Like

  • Affordable and effective for medium-duty cleanup
  • Easy to load with leaves and small debris
  • 2-bladed chipper flywheel makes quick work of larger branches
  • Includes discharge collection bag

What We Don’t Like

  • Less powerful engine
  • Can get bogged down with tougher branches

Product Specs 

  • Engine: 212cc gas engine
  • Branch capacity: 3 inches
  • Weight: 120 pounds

No need to overspend on a seldom-used specialty tool. The Predator chipper shredder is value priced and delivers more chipping capability than electric models, along with the freedom of movement that only comes with gas-powered equipment. In terms of its overall build, it mimics our top pick but comes with a smaller 212cc engine and a drawstring debris bagger.

We assembled the Predator wood chipper in about 45 minutes, and other than having difficulty trying to read the tiny lettering used in the instructions, assembly went smoothly. This chipper does not come with engine oil, so be prepared with 2 quarts of 10W-30. Immediately after fueling up the first time, it started on the third pull, but going forward the engine started on either the first or second pull every time.

This chipper comes equipped with air-filled tires. For us, that was a good thing, as they rolled easily across all types of terrain, including wet ground. However, users will need to be cautious to prevent punctures. Another unique feature was the wheel brakes that could be locked for safety while chipping.

This chipper was a bit underpowered for branches thicker than about 2 inches. When we fed it larger material, the engine consistently bogged down, and in three cases stalled out. It was not a great performer compared to the other gas models we tested, but it was several hundred dollars cheaper on average. As a step up from electric chippers, the Predator wood chipper was a lot faster, more powerful, and generally more convenient for working anywhere on the property. Budget-conscious shoppers in need of a light- to medium-duty wood chipper will find good value here.

Get the Predator wood chipper at Harbor Freight.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Wood Chippers

Our testing observations and comparison started with unpacking and assembling the chippers. All of the electric wood chippers came together in about 15 minutes as they were all comparatively lightweight and compact. While basic, disposable tools were included in the packaging; however, using personally owned tools ought to make the job go faster and easier. All of the electric chippers require a heavy-duty 12-gauge extension cord to avoid tripping the circuit breaker during operation.

Assembling each of the gas-powered chippers took 45 minutes to 1 hour and required installation of the hopper, branch chute, safety guards, discharge chute, wheels, and standing brace. These machines all weigh more than 100 pounds, so it’s a good idea to have a helper. Again, the included tools will get the job done, but using ones from a personal tool kit makes the process more comfortable. The packages included engine oil and gasoline that must be added before operation.

After assembly, we transported each of the chippers across the lawn to the worksite. In so doing, we noted that the small plastic wheels on the electric chippers provided the most stability on solid, flat ground. The larger hard wheels on the gas machines worked fine on average lawns but caused some struggles on sloped, uneven surfaces. The towable DK2 chipper, which includes a handle for moving by hand, was the easiest to move on rough ground.

In general, chippers with wheels on the same side of the machine as the handle—what we called a “hand-truck” configuration—were easier to maneuver than those with wheels and handles on opposite sides of the machine, like a wheelbarrow. The wheelbarrow configuration requires the user to lift the handle and bear more of the machine’s weight versus the hand-truck configuration, which transfers more weight to the wheels.

Finally, we set up and operated each chipper for 30 minutes. During operational testing, we fed each model a combination of large and small branches, including green wood and dried wood, and dry leaves (when applicable) to observe the full range of functionality. In addition to the machine’s ability to chip, we observed chip consistency, working stability, operator comfort, and noise level from a purely subjective standpoint to help determine our preferences and recommendations.

We also spoke to Kaustubh Deo, president of Blooma Tree Experts, a tree care company based in Seattle, Washington, featuring International Society of Arboriculture (ISA)–certified arborists with over 17 years of experience. He says that once you’ve purchased a chipper, “Don’t forget to follow the maintenance instructions in the guides. Make sure you keep the chipper knives sharp and rotate them.” He also adds this expert tip: “Rental shops that rent out chippers should be able to sharpen chipper knives for you.”

What to Consider When Choosing a Wood Chipper

Before buyers choose a wood chipper for their yard cleanup needs, they’ll want to take a few minutes to educate themselves on the most important shopping considerations for these tools.

Types of Wood Chippers

Wood chippers fall into three main types based on their power source: electric, gas, and PTO.

Electric

Electric wood chippers often look a lot like golf bags. These compact machines run quieter than either gas or PTO chippers, but they often lack the power and capacity needed to deal with material larger than 2 inches in diameter.

For small branches and yard trimmings, an electric wood chipper does the trick. They’re reasonably priced, lightweight, and easy to use. Plug them into a standard outlet, and they’re good to go.

Gas 

The most common residential models, gas wood chippers are larger, louder, and produce gasoline exhaust. Gas-powered wood chippers generally employ 4-cycle engines from 150cc to 250cc and produce 7 to 10 hp. To find the models with the lowest exhaust emissions, look for the CARB-compliant label. CARB adheres to the highest emission standards in the United States.

More powerful than electric options, gas chippers need not sit near an outlet and won’t tether the user to an extension cord. Situated in the middle of the price range for chippers, gas-powered options cost more than electric ones but are not quite as much as PTOs. Gas chippers can typically handle material of more than 3 inches in diameter.

PTO

PTO refers to the drive shaft on the wood chipper, through which it attaches to a splined output shaft on a tractor, mower, or truck. Through this connection, the PTO wood chipper draws energy from the engine of the vehicle. This method of energy supply makes PTO wood chippers more effective than their gas or electric counterparts. They can cut through more material at a faster rate.

The best PTO wood chippersmake an excellent choice for anyone who lives on a large plot of land. They cost more than either electric or gas chippers, and they require a compatible vehicle to work. These machines are much larger and less convenient for average home landscapes. Although professionals will want to findthe best commercial wood chipper, we did not test PTO-driven models.

Bag Capacity

Not all wood chippers use bags or bins to gather the chipper refuse. Those who are looking for one that comes with a bag or bin will want to consider the storage container’s capacity. Larger bags make a great choice if users plan to use the wood chipper for a big cleanup project.

Keep in mind that the larger the bin, the heavier and more cumbersome it will be to empty. If weight is a concern, a model with a smaller bag or bin will require more frequent but easier emptying—a smart choice to avoid the risk of injury that comes with lifting a heavy bag.

Cutting Blades

Wood chippers use one or both of two cutting-blade types to grind up yard waste: fixed blades, also called knives; or hinged blades, sometimes called hammers. The most commonly used material for both blade types is hardened chromium-alloy steel. Steel tends to bend rather than chip and may be resharpened numerous times before it needs to be replaced.

A wood chipper’s ability to cut through material fed into the machine is a key factor. Shoppers will want to think about how they’ll use their wood chipper. An electric wood chipper will be fine for small branches and clippings. These devices usually shred branches up to 2 inches in diameter across the widest point. Those dealing with larger material will want to consider a gas or PTO chipper, which may be able to shred materials up to 4 inches in diameter. Some commercial wood chipper models cut through branches up to 7 inches in diameter, though these cost significantly more than the average residential wood chipper.

Torque

A wood chipper uses a powerful motor to turn a series of cutting and grinding blades with enough force (torque) to cut through solid wood quickly. Torque describes the rotational force, typically measured in foot-pounds, that a motor imparts on an object. In wood chippers, torque forces the blades to cut through any appropriate material pushed into the hopper. Most residential wood chippers get a torque rating between 7 and 15 foot-pounds.

Shredding Chute

Many chippers include two different chutes for feeding material into the machine: a long, narrow branch chute for thick branches; and a wide shredding chute, also known as a hopper. Shaped like a broad funnel, the shredding chute compresses bundles of thin pliable twigs and branches so that they can contact the blades more efficiently. This separate chute shreds less rigid material, such as weeds, leaves, grass, and other soft plant waste, so it can come in handy for common yard work.

While a leaf shredder would tackle this job, a wood chipper with a built-in shredding chute gets the same results in a more cost-effective and space-saving way. However, a wood chipper/leaf shredder combo will cost more than a model without the shredder. But this combo may be considered the ​​best residential wood chipper option.

Reduction Ratio

The reduction ratio of a wood chipper indicates how small the material will be after it has passed through the wood chipper. For example, if a wood chipper has a reduction ratio of 8:1, it will reduce the material down to an eighth of its original size. Another way to think of it is that it can reduce eight bags of yard waste to fit into one bag. The reduction ratio of most wood chippers typically ranges from 8:1 to 20:1.

Chippers need more power and energy to cut materials into smaller pieces. As the engine size increases, so does the price of the chipper. If users don’t need to cut material into tiny pieces, they can save money by choosing a chipper with a lower reduction ratio.

Weight and Mobility

Weight and mobility rank as key considerations in the purchase of a wood chipper, but many shoppers overlook these factors. Thebest small wood chipper for the extent of yard work is typically the ideal purchase. A wood chipper that’s too big or doesn’t have decent wheels can be very difficult to move around the yard, which reduces overall yard cleanup efficiency.

Look for wood chippers that come with sturdy stands and large wheels capable of moving over grass, paving stones, deck boards, sticks, and any other obstacles on the ground. Keep in mind that the heavier a wood chipper, the more difficult it will be to move across uneven ground or up steep inclines. For larger properties with fewer trees, a lightweight wood chipper may be ideal because users can move it around the yard quickly and effectively without significant fatigue.

How to Use a Wood Chipper Safely

There’s a reason wood chippers make frequent appearances in horror films. This incredibly dangerous yard tool should only be operated by an experienced user who is sure to take the following safety precautions:

  • Read the manufacturer’s instructions thoroughly before using a wood chipper.
  • Use hearing protection, eye protection, hand protection, and a hard hat.
  • When users are feeding branches into the wood chipper, they shouldn’t force stubborn branches into the blades. Users will want to let the chipper pull branches in while they stand to the side to avoid flying debris.
  • Keep hands and any other body part away from the wood chipper when it is connected to a power source. A simple accident could result in severe injury or death.
  • Users will want to disconnect the power and the spark plug before performing maintenance to ensure that the wood chipper does not start up while they’re vulnerable to the blades.

The Advantages of Owning a Wood Chipper

Yard-waste disposal is the greatest benefit of owning a wood chipper. Bushes require regular trimming, trees may need pruning, and old trees shed dead branches frequently, which can create a substantial pile of wood and yard material to remove. A wood chipper makes it easy to use or dispose of that debris.

Wood chippers are also a useful tool to reduce the potentially harmful emissions produced by burning chemically treated wood. Instead of releasing these toxic fumes and unpleasant odors into the air, wood can be mulched and used to protect plants.

Besides mulch, users may also create pressed wood for carpentry projects or biofuel for certain cars or other machinery.

To recap, a wood chipper:

  • Quickly process yard waste into small, easily managed chips;
  • Provides an environmentally friendly means of disposing of yard waste; and
  • Produces useful materials like mulch, pressed wood, and biofuel.

FAQs

Q. How big a wood chipper do I need?

Electric wood chippers are made for processing small and midsize twigs and branches. For this purpose, most users only require a wood chipper with a 1.5-inch cutting diameter. But if you have older trees on your property, or wish to grind up leaves and other finely textured material, you may want to have a larger gas-powered chipper. These models feature a hopper for processing fine materials and a larger branch chute to chip branches up to 3 inches in diameter.

Q. How do you use a wood chipper?

Choose a level location for the machine to sit. Once it is in position, set the parking brake on any equipment used to haul it and then adjust the chip deflector and chip chute to direct chips to your desired location.

Check the chipper for any debris before starting. If it is clear, start it up. If it isn’t, you’ll want to disconnect the spark plug and clean it out before turning it on. Never perform maintenance of any kind without disconnecting the power.

With the engine started, feed material into the wood chipper, blunt end first. The machine will begin chipping away, allowing you to back off and move to the side of the chipper so you don’t get hit by pieces that may shoot out. Once you have finished chipping, clean up the wood chips with a leaf blower or leaf vacuum and either dispose of them or put them to good use.

Q. How do you feed a wood chipper?

To feed material into the wood chipper, begin with the blunt end and carefully guide it into the chipper. You may also want to include a mixture of dry and green limbs so that the moisture from the green branches can help to cool and lubricate the wood chipper’s knives.

Q. How loud is a wood chipper?

A wood chipper’s noise output generally falls between 85 and 110 decibels, which is more than enough to warrant hearing protection.

Q. How much does a wood chipper cost?

Wood chippers range in price from about $150 to well over $2,000, depending on the type, size, torque, and overall power. Typically, residential wood chippers cost about $200 to $800, though heavy-duty models can greatly exceed this amount.

Q. Can wood chippers shred leaves?

Some wood chippers can also shred leaves, but if you don’t need to chip any wood, it may be better to invest in a dedicated leaf shredder instead. These tools tend to take up less space and they are more affordable.

Q. Is it better to chip wood when it is dry or wet?

Dry wood is harder and causes more wear and tear on the chipper’s blades, so it’s best to do wood chipping when the wood is cool and moist.

Q. What shouldn’t I put in a wood chipper?

Keep yourself safe and protect your equipment by only chipping branches within the size range your machine is built to process. Never place branches that may have nails or screws, lumber, excessively sappy wood, long vines, palm fronds, or other fibrous materials into the chipper.

Q. How do you clean a wood chipper?

Start any maintenance process by stopping the engine (ensuring all moving parts have stopped before proceeding) and disconnecting the spark plug wire or power cord to prevent accidental start-up.

To clean the wood chipper, begin by removing the flail screen and any larger debris. Clean the flail screen separately, and then clean the chute and around the muffler with water and a brush or dry cloth. Avoid using a high-pressure spray of water because it can contaminate the fuel system.

Meet the Tester

Mark Wolfe is a writer and product tester with a background in the nursery and landscaping industries. For more than 20 years he mowed, edged, planted, pruned, cultivated, irrigated, and renovated beautiful landscapes. Now he tests and writes reviews about the latest outdoor power equipment, hand tools, lawn care products, and other outdoor-living goods.

Additional research provided by Timothy Dale and Tom Scalisi.

The post The 7 Wood Chippers That Cut Best in Our Tests appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[The Best PEX Crimp Tools for Plumbing Projects, Tested]]>If you’re tackling a PEX-centric plumbing project, you need the right tool to ensure leak-free joints. Use one of these PEX crimp tools to seal the deal.

The post The Best PEX Crimp Tools for Plumbing Projects, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-pex-crimp-tool/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=137855Tue, 18 Feb 2025 09:37:45 -0500ReviewsHand ToolsMajor SystemsPlumbing SuppliesTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

PEX (cross-linked polyethylene) tubing is widely used in today’s plumbing and HVAC systems because it’s flexible and easy to work with if you have high-quality PEX crimp tools. We researched more than 20 PEX crimpers, and we chose four for hands-on testing. While all performed well, our favorite is the Iwiss iCrimp F1807 kit for its durability and multipurpose versatility. 

In addition to the ones we tested, we’re featuring several additional PEX piping tools that we feel would be good picks for anyone working with PEX tubing. Keep reading to find out what to look for when shopping for tools for PEX plumbing, and find out how the following earned a spot on this lineup of the best PEX crimp tools.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Iwiss iCrimp F1807 All-In-One Crimping Tool Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Plumbflex Crimper Tool Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Iwiss iCrimp CRP1096 PEX Cinch Tool Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST MULTIPURPOSE: SharkBite PEX Crimp Tool
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST COMPACT: Iwiss iCrimp IWS-FAS PEX Copper Ring Crimp Tool Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST MULTISIZE HEAD: Apollo PEX Multi-Head Crimp Tool Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST FOR TIGHT SPACES: Iwiss iCrimp Angle Head F1807 PEX Crimp Tool Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. BEST PROFESSIONAL: Milwaukee M18 Press Tool Kit With PEX Crimp Jaws
    ↓ Jump to Review
  9. ALSO CONSIDER: Iwiss iCrimp IWS-C Angle PEX Crimping Tools
    ↓ Jump to Review
The Best PEX Crimp Tools
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

TypeLengthCapacity
Iwiss iCrimp F1807 All-In-One Crimping Tool KitCrimps15.55 inches⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes 
Plumbflex Crimper Tool KitClamps11 inches½- and ¾-inch PEX pipes
Iwiss iCrimp CRP1096 PEX Cinch Tool KitClamps 11.02 inches⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes
SharkBite PEX Crimp ToolCrimps14.5 inches⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes 
Iwiss iCrimp IWS-FAS PEX Copper Ring Crimp Tool KitCrimps 12.2 inches ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes
Apollo PEX Multi-Head Crimp Tool KitCrimps 17 inches⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes
Iwiss iCrimp Angle Head F1807 PEX Crimp Tool KitCrimps 13.7 inches ½- and ¾-inch PEX pipes 
Milwaukee M18 Press Tool Kit With PEX Crimp JawsCrimps 
13.5 inches
⅜-, ½-, ⅝-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes
Iwiss iCrimp IWS-C Angle PEX Crimping ToolsCrimps 7.87 inches½- and ¾-inch PEX pipes

Our Top Picks

The best PEX crimp tools on the market are made with effectiveness, ergonomics, and ease of use in mind. Check out our list of the ones we tested plus some additional models we think look great.  

Best Overall

Iwiss iCrimp F1807 All-In-One Crimping Tool Kit

 Iwiss ICrimp F1807 PEX Crimp Tool Kit in a storage case
Photo: Amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Performance 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Crimps
  • Length: 15.55 inches 
  • Capacity: ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes 

What We Like

  • Accommodates PEX A, B, or C tubing types 
  • PEX crimp removal tool and pipe cutter included 
  • Includes a go/no-go gauge 
  • Hard carrying case included

What We Don’t Like

  • Hand strength needed to crimp 

If you’ll be installing a lot of PEX, this Iwiss iCrimp kit has everything you need in one place. The kit comes with a crimper; jaws for ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch pipe; a PEX pipe cutter; and a crimp-removal tool. It also features a go/no-go gauge and a wrench for calibrating the crimper. We liked the way all the tools fit nicely into the included hard plastic carrying case for protection.

The Iwiss PEX crimping tool kit is easy to use. We were able to change jaws when we were crimping different sizes of tubing. The long handles make applying sufficient force for crimping relatively easy, but it still takes some hand strength to crimp the rings snugly. The included go/no-go gauge is a definite perk. 

After crimping a ring on a PEX fitting, we used the gauge to see if we’d crimped it accurately. The removal tool made it easy to cut through incorrectly fitting crimp rings, and the cutter was a nice bonus because it ensured flush tubing edges that fit smoothly against the shoulders of the copper fittings. This kit gives you everything you need to run PEX tubing. 

Get the Iwiss iCrimp F1807 all-in-one PEX crimp tool at Amazon.

Runner-up

Plumbflex Crimper Tool Kit

 The Best PEX Crimp Tools Option: Plumbflex Crimper Tool Kit
Photo: The Home Depot

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Performance 4.8/5; Durability 4.5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Clamps
  • Length: 11 inches
  • Capacity: ½- and ¾-inch PEX pipes

What We Like

  • Works with cinch rings from different manufacturers
  • Includes a high-quality cutter
  • Comes with 50 clamps in both sizes
  • Attached cinch rings securely in testing

What We Don’t Like

  • Doesn’t come with a go/no-go tool
  • Not suitable for ⅜- or 1-inch PEX

The Plumbflex PEX crimper is suitable for use with ½- and ¾-inch tubing, the most common sizes used in residential construction. This clamp-type tool performed flawlessly in our tests. We used it to attach stainless steel cinch clamps to both sizes of PEX tubing, and the fittings were snug and secure. Plus, it comes with 50 clamps of each size, so we had plenty to test with. 

It doesn’t come with a go/no-go tool, but you can pick one up for under $10 from any home improvement store. We used one of the go/no-go tools that came with another model we tested, and each clamp we applied was right on target.

One of the benefits of a PEX clamp tool (including this one) over a traditional crimp tool is the ability to reach into tight spots because there’s no need to spread the handles as far. We tried out the Plumbflex on a few cinch rings we had from a different manufacturer, and it worked just as well. 

Another perk is the PEX cutter that comes with the clamp tool. It cuts the tubing straight and flush so the edges fit smoothly against the shoulders of the brass crimp fittings. If you won’t be installing narrower ⅜-inch or larger 1-inch tubing, the Plumbflex is a quality pick. 

Get the Plumbflex PEX crimp tool at The Home Depot.

Best Bang For The Buck

Iwiss iCrimp CRP1096 PEX Cinch Tool Kit

 iCrimp PEX Cinch Tool with Removing Function in its plastic packaging
Photo: Amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Performance 4.5/5; Durability 4.5/5; Value 4.8/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Clamps 
  • Length: 11.02 inches
  • Capacity: ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes 

What We Like

  • Works with multiple sizes of PEX
  • Comes with 30 cinch rings
  • Compact size for working in tight spaces 
  • Comes with good cutter

What We Don’t Like

  • No storage case included
  • Complicated removal function

If you’re looking for a budget-friendly tool for securing stainless steel cinch rings, look no further than the iCrimp PEX cinch tool. This clamp cincher works for any size PEX and comes with 30 clamps, so you can get started right away. It performed well in our tests, but it took a bit more hand strength to completely snug the cinch rings than the Plumbflex model. 

Still, it did a good job and comes with a top-notch PEX cutter. The only downside was that the removal feature of the tool didn’t work well for us. We followed the instructions for adjusting the tool from the clamping feature to the removal feature (which requires about five steps), and then we tried to cut the tabs, but all we got were smashed tabs. Maybe we didn’t do it right (that’s likely), but it seems like a complex process and simpler to just use a dedicated removal tool. 

One additional thing to note is that the iCrimp cinch tool cannot be calibrated. However, we found it well calibrated right out of the package, and it should be fine for completing most PEX plumbing projects. This tool lets you make high-quality connections at an affordable price point.

Get the Iwiss iCrimp CRP1096 PEX crimp tool at Amazon.

Best Multipurpose

SharkBite PEX Crimp Tool

 The Best PEX Crimp Tools Option: SharkBite PEX Crimp Tool
Photo: Lowe’s

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.8/5; Performance 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.8/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Crimps
  • Length: 14.5 inches
  • Capacity: ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes 

What We Like

  • Consistently made secure connections
  • Easy-to-change jaws
  • Go/no-go gauge included
  • Mini hard case
  • Ergonomic handles for comfort

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavier than some at nearly 4 pounds
  • Limited use in tight spots

We’re big fans of traditional push-to-connect SharkBite fittings, so we were excited to test the brand’s crimper tool and weren’t disappointed. At just under 4 pounds, the SharkBite crimper is one of the heavier PEX plumbing tools we tested, but it did a spectacular job of creating a secure connection each time. 

We tested it with stainless steel crimp rings, but it’s also designed to accommodate copper crimp rings. Changing jaws on the SharkBite was simple, and it comes with a go/no-go gauge so we could check each ring after crimping to ensure it was correct. It performed flawlessly. 

The SharkBite comes complete with a mini hard case that secures the gauge and the jaws, and it fits over the head of the PEX pipe crimping tool. We actually prefer this type of case because it doesn’t take up a lot of space in our tool box, and we can even slip it in a tool belt. The mini case protects the working parts of the tool and keeps the accessories secure. 

However, it doesn’t come with a removal tool and is not designed for use in restricted spots—its handles must be completely opened (nearly 180 degrees) to crimp a ring. However, it manages all standard PEX sizes, and the ergonomic handles reduce hand fatigue. 

Get the SharkBite PEX crimp tool at Lowe’s

More Great Options

While we didn’t personally test the following PEX plumbing crimpers, they were on our short list before we selected the ones we wanted to test—and they’re still among our top picks. 

Best Compact

Iwiss iCrimp IWS-FAS PEX Copper Ring Crimp Tool Kit

 Iwiss ICrimp IWS-FAS PEX Copper Ring Crimp Tool Kit in its storage case
Photo: Amazon

Product Specs 

  • Type: Crimps 
  • Length: 12.2 inches 
  • Capacity: ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes

What We Like

  • High-leverage design
  • Multiple jaw sizes 
  • PEX cutter and go/no-go gauge included 
  • Comes in a hard plastic case

What We Don’t Like

  • Shorter handle than comparable options 

We know it can be tough to find a compact PEX crimper that fits in a tool box but still provides the leverage required to seal off a PEX joint. But if you’re looking for just that kind of item, check out the Iwiss IWS-FAS PEX crimping tool. This crimper uses a high-leverage design that allows the user to apply enough pressure for a perfect seal despite its compact 12.2-inch design.

This PEX crimping kit is more than just an innovative tool. We like that it comes with the jaws required for crimping ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch pipe, plus a PEX cutter, a go/no-go gauge, and a hard plastic case to carry it all. That’s a lot!

Get the Iwiss iCrimp IWS-FAS PEX crimp tool at Amazon or Walmart.

Best Multisize Head

Apollo PEX Multi-Head Crimp Tool Kit

 Apollo 69PTKH0015K PEX Multi-Head Crimp Tool Kit
Photo: Amazon

Product Specs 

  • Type: Crimps 
  • Length: 17 inches 
  • Capacity: ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes

What We Like

  • 4 sets of jaws 
  • Go/no-go gauge and wrench included 
  • Plastic carrying case 

What We Don’t Like

  • Big, heavy construction 

For a heavy-duty crimping tool that can tackle most PEX tubing plumbing projects, we think the Apollo PEX multihead crimp tool kit is worth a look. This tool kit comes with the crimper, four sets of jaws (⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch sizes), a go/no-go gauge, and a wrench for adjustments and calibration. The jaws swap out with two hex bolts, which the included wrench also fits.

The Apollo provides plenty of leverage for sealing off plumbing joints, good for creating up to 100 pounds of force. The components pack nicely into the plastic carrying case, keeping everything secure and in one place between projects. The only thing we would like it to include is a PEX cutter to make straight flush cuts.

Get the Apollo PEX crimp tool at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best For Tight Spaces

Iwiss iCrimp Angle Head F1807 PEX Crimp Tool Kit

 Iwiss iCrimp IWS-FA Long-Version Crimp Tool Kit in its storage case
Photo: Amazon

Product Specs 

  • Type: Crimps 
  • Length: 13.7 inches 
  • Capacity: ½- and ¾-inch PEX pipes 

What We Like

  • Suitable for crimping tasks in tight spaces
  • Tubing cutter and crimping rings included 
  • Go/no-go gauge included
  • Hard plastic carrying case

What We Don’t Like

  • Shorter handles provide limited leverage 
  • No PEX cutter included

One advantage that PEX fittings have over copper piping is that in-wall repairs in tight spaces are much easier and safer, but they can still be challenging to reach and crimp. This product’s unique offset-head design allows the user to get a grip on any ½- or ¾-inch crimp, even in hard-to-reach places. We think this would be optimal for renovations where the user is retrofitting the plumbing.

This kit’s crimper comes with built-in jaws for ½- and ¾-inch pipe, as well as a tubing cutter and several crimp rings. It also has a go/no-go gauge, alerting the user to calibration issues and potential leaks. All of this gear stores away in a hard plastic carrying case. While we didn’t test this model, we’re familiar with many Iwiss iCrimp PEX plumbing tools, and we’ve never had a problem with any of them. 

Get the Iwiss iCrimp angle head PEX crimp tool at Amazon.

Best Professional

Milwaukee M18 Press Tool Kit With PEX Crimp Jaws

 Milwaukee M18 Fuel 2-Gallon Compact Quiet Compressor on a white background
Photo: The Home Depot

Product Specs 

  • Type: Crimps 

  • Length: 13.5 inches

  • Capacity: ⅜-, ½-, ⅝-, ¾-, and 1-inch PEX pipes

What We Like

  • Power PEX crimp tool
  • Fast and precise alignment

  • Green light to show cycle is complete

  • Kit includes charger, 2 batteries, and case

What We Don’t Like

  • Bulk makes it challenging to work in tight spaces
  • Cutter, ⅜-inch, and ⅝-inch jaws are not included

We’re well aware that using a manual PEX crimp tool all day can result in hand pain. While we’ve never used a powered crimp tool, we think the technology is awesome and we’re looking forward to seeing more manufacturers implement it in the near future. 

Milwaukee’s powerful 18-volt press tool kit is the solution many professionals prefer. Spring-loaded jaws provide precise alignment for flawless fitting of all PEX crimp sizes. According to Milwaukee, this tool is 40 percent faster than powered rivals, with a full cycle taking just 3 seconds.

Optimized force means no calibration intervals interrupt work, and no calibration tool is required. A pre-press battery check ensures sufficient charge to complete the crimp successfully, and a green LED confirms this at the end of the cycle. However, there’s no cutter in the kit, and while three sets of jaws are included, the ⅜- and ⅝-inch versions cost extra.

Get the Milwaukee PEX crimp tool at The Home Depot or Amazon.

Also Consider

Iwiss iCrimp IWS-C Angle PEX Crimping Tools

 Three iCrimp Angle PEX Crimp Tools on a white background
Photo: Amazon

Product Specs 

  • Type: Crimps 
  • Length: 7.87 inches
  • Capacity: ½- and ¾-inch PEX pipes

What We Like

  • PEX cutter included with purchase
  • Compact size for tight spaces
  • Precalibrated design 

What We Don’t Like

  • Short handle may be difficult for some users 

Occasionally, plumbing projects and repairs get so tight and restricted that they require scaled-down tools to get the job done. For projects like those, we like the iCrimp angle PEX crimp tool combo. This two-pack of PEX crimping tools features a ½-inch crimper and a ¾-inch model, plus a PEX tubing cutter, both sized to easily fit in a standard tool box. 

These PEX crimping tools can fit in some tight spots thanks to their compact size and diameter-dedicated jaws. Unlike many other crimp tools, both of these tools come from the factory precalibrated. If you’re looking at making water-supply line repairs or retrofits, we think this is a good pick for getting in those tight spots. 

Get the Iwiss iCrimp IWS-C angle PEX crimp tool at Amazon.

Jump to Our Top Picks

The Best PEX Crimp Tools
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

How We Chose and Tested the Best PEX Crimp Tools

Testing Stats
Products tested 4
Time spent testing 3 hours
Tests performed4
Price range$32 to $750

Before selecting the tools we wanted to test, we chatted with Korey Gregory, superintendent at water damage specialists ASAP Restoration in Tempe, Arizona. He stresses that “ineffective PEX crimp tools don’t create a tight enough seal around the ring.” 

We then extensively researched and chose to test PEX crimp tools made for PEX A, B, or C with crimps or clamps to suit individual users’ preferences. We selected models for various PEX tubing sizes, including ⅜-, ½-, ¾-, and 1-inch sizes. Several of our picks come from Iwiss, a leading manufacturer of high-quality crimping tools. 

In actual testing, we used each tool to securely attach rings or clamps to PEX fittings. We swapped out the jaws (when applicable) and used the accessories that came with the tools to see how well they were made. We used go/no-go gauges to determine whether the crimping tools were securing the fasteners to the correct degree. 

During the tests, we awarded points based on a rubric. Afterward, we averaged the points to find our top pick and categorize the other models according to their best uses. 

What to Consider When Choosing a PEX Crimp Tool 

Gregory offers some additional sound advice: “One of the ways to ensure that you get a quality crimper is to choose ones with longer handles rather than shorter ones. Longer handles help to give you leverage when doing the actual crimping.” He adds, “If you are starting a plumbing business, have wrist problems, or just a huge number of PEX crimps to do, then a powered PEX crimper tool might be worth the investment.”

Types of PEX Crimp Tools 

PEX is a flexible tubing that can transport fresh water, hot water, radiant heating, and even sprinkler-system water, making it very popular in residential applications.

These plastic pipes all work the same way, and most of the same joints will apply for all three types. However, their makeup and characteristics vary. One thing to understand is that PEX A, B, and C do not indicate a grade or quality of PEX piping. Those designations simply designate the manufacturing process used to create the pipe. 

PEX A

PEX A is the most expensive type of PEX, and it has some desirable properties. For one, even though it comes in rolled coils, PEX A will hold its new shape when straightened, making it easier to install through wall cavities and floors. However, PEX A does have the potential to leach more production-related chemicals, like toluene and methyl tert-butyl ether (MTBE), into the water supply. Also, it has a lower bursting pressure than PEX B. 

PEX B

PEX B can cost half as much as PEX A, and that price comes with some advantages and disadvantages. PEX B has a higher bursting pressure than PEX A, and chemical leaching from the pipe is considerably less likely. However, it doesn’t straighten well and it kinks relatively easily, which can make it a bit of a hassle to install.

PEX C

PEX C isn’t very common, and DIYers are unlikely to come across it. The manufacturing process used to create PEX C makes it relatively weak compared to PEX A and B. It’s also less resistant to oxidation, meaning PEX C will wear down through normal usage faster than A and B.

Crimps vs. Clamps

The Best PEX Crimp Tools
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

When shoppers are learning about PEX plumbing tools, a key point is that there are crimps and clamps

  • Crimps may be stainless steel or copper crimp rings that slide over a joint, and the crimping tool squeezes the entire ring down onto the barbed fitting underneath. Copper crimps are burlier than clamps, but they’re more susceptible to corrosion. 
  • Clamps are stainless steel bands with small tabs and locking holes. Clamping tools squeeze a tab that snugs the crimp fitting over the tubing. Stainless steel clamps are easier to install and less likely to corrode, but they’re also much thinner than copper crimps, so they may bend or separate more easily. 

Length

For putting strong pressure on a crimp, longer handles are better. The longer the tool’s handle, the more leverage the user can apply to the crimp or clamp, requiring less effort to create a perfect seal. Look for a pipe crimping tool at least 11 inches in length. Since longer-handled PEX piping tools can be slightly awkward, they might have more of a learning curve than shorter-handled ones. 

Clamps tend to be easier to secure and require less effort, so handle length isn’t as much of a priority. 

Weight 

Plumbers and electricians who use these tools regularly will want to look for options between 1 and 9 pounds; most options weigh under 4 pounds. However, heavyweight options may provide more crimping power than their lighter counterparts.

Pipe

Before picking a crimping or clamping tool, know what type of pipe it works for. While many types of clamping and crimping tools work for plumbing joints, not all of them work for PEX pipe.

Some tools work for both copper and PEX pipe, but they generally require additional jaws or PEX crimp fittings. Buying models with added features can get expensive quickly, but for those who do a lot of plumbing, it might be worth the investment to be able to perform multiple plumbing functions with a single tool. Switching a fitting on a clamping tool takes less time than sweating a copper joint with flux and solder.

Capacity

Don’t worry about choosing the PEX crimp tool that is the right size. Because PEX comes in only a few sizes—⅜, ½, ¾, ⅝ , and 1 inch—most clamping or crimping tools made for PEX will do. Swapping between those sizes is usually pretty straightforward. 

Electrical and plumbing crimping tools typically have 1-inch jaws that can crimp 1-inch pipe, but their kits come with smaller jaws for tackling smaller pipes. To clamp those smaller pipes, simply open the 1-inch jaws and slip the necessary-size clamping jaws inside. 

Clamping tools are often one size fits all. They slide over the knob on the clamp and squeeze it, and those knobs are relatively universal in size.

Gauge 

The point of any plumbing job is to avoid leaks. With PEX crimps, it can be difficult to tell by eye or feel if there’s a good seal. Some tools come with go/no-go gauges to help ensure each fitting is tightly sealed.

These gauges have U-shaped cutouts meant for specific pipe sizes. To use a go/no-go gauge, slide it over the joint. Check it from several angles. The gauge should slip over the crimp about halfway before stopping. If it slides over the crimp—or not at all—the joint may have problems when pressurized. 

Calibration

Over time, clamping and crimping tools can fall out of perfect calibration. Applying pressure many times throughout a plumbing project can stretch the jaws, in which case they’ll need a little tightening.

Most PEX crimp and clamp tools have adjustment screws, and they often come with the wrenches required to tighten them. Use these to tighten the tools back to the ideal settings. Many have adjustments on both jaws, allowing for calibrating to a perfectly round result. 

The gauge can also determine if the jaws are overtightened, which can just as easily lead to a leak. 

Removal Function

Many of the best PEX clamp tools have removal functions for separating clamps from the pipe. Don’t expect to reuse these clamps or crimps, though, as the removal process either cuts them or damages their integrity. However, the fitting underneath should be completely intact.

Removing crimps requires an entirely different tool with a blade for cutting through the crimp rings. 

FAQs 

Q. What is the best PEX to use?

PEX B is considered the best all-around PEX pipe. It leaches far fewer chemicals and has a higher bursting pressure. The disadvantage is that it can be harder to work with.

Q. Do PEX clamps fail?

They can fail, but it’s usually due to human error. If the clamp is applied crookedly or unevenly, it will leak. To ensure that the clamps stay in place, check that the clamp or cinch type is compatible with the pipe being cinched.

Q. Can I crimp PEX with pliers? 

You cannot get a solid, accurate, leak-free joint with pliers, which can’t apply even pressure all around the crimp. Though this can help with some of the more nitty-gritty problems, a proper PEX pipe crimping tool is the best option.

Q. Can I run PEX through floor joists?

PEX can run through floor joists, stud walls, or almost anywhere else that would normally hold plumbing (according to local code).

Q. Can I run PEX to a water heater?

PEX should not run directly to an electric or tankless water heater, but it can run to a copper riser 18 inches or more in length, coming directly from the water heater. But be advised that the PEX tubing must be 6 inches away from the exhaust vent of the heater.

Q. What is the lifespan of a PEX pipe?

PEX may be able to last more than 100 years. While it hasn’t been around long enough to verify that longevity, long-term testing indicates it could last a century before breaking down. However, it’s important to note that hungry rodents can also cause damage.

Q. How tight do I need to crimp PEX fittings?

Typically, you will squeeze the crimper handles until they’re fully closed. At that point, the crimp is complete. Don’t stop squeezing before the handles are closed or the connection may leak.

Q. How often should PEX be clamped?

PEX should be crimped or clamped at each fitting, but it should only take one solid squeeze of the handles to complete the crimp if the tool is properly calibrated.

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a product tester and writer specializing in the construction, remodeling, and real estate industries. 

Additional research provided by Tom Scalisi. 

The post The Best PEX Crimp Tools for Plumbing Projects, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[The Best Soils for Raised Beds in Your Garden]]>The right soil is key to making your raised garden bed flourish, regardless of what types of plants you prefer.

The post The Best Soils for Raised Beds in Your Garden appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-soil-for-raised-beds/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-soil-for-raised-beds/Tue, 18 Feb 2025 08:53:57 -0500ReviewsDIYGardeningLawn & GardenLawn Care & GardeningLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

For plants, soil provides another vital element. It doesn’t just deliver nutrients to hungry fruits, vegetables, and flowers; good garden bed soil increases the airflow around plant roots to avoid compaction and improve drainage as it retains moisture for basic hydration.

Gardening with raised beds provides more control over the soil. However, the best soil for raised beds depends on the plants you want to grow. Many soil types are suitable for a variety of uses, while others are more specific in their purpose. To bolster our own research, we interviewed Elizabeth Jones, the seed librarian at the Jefferson Public Library in Jefferson, Georgia, and owner of Excel at Gardening, who gave us her expert advice on soil.

Our favorite was FoxFarm’s Happy Frog potting soil for its organic mix of pH-balanced ingredients. Read on for more of the top soils for raised beds and some things to keep in mind as you shop. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: FoxFarm Happy Frog Potting Soil
  2. RUNNER-UP: Sunday Natural Moisture Potting Soil Mix
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Mountain Valley Minute Soil Compressed Coco Coir
  4. BEST ORGANIC: Organic Plant Magic Compressed Potting Soil
  5. BEST TOPSOIL: Michigan Peat Garden Magic Top Soil
  6. BEST COMPOST: Charlie’s 10-Pound Compost
  7. BEST PEAT MOSS: Hoffman Canadian Sphagnum Peat Moss
  8. BEST VERMICULITE: Ferry Morse Professional Grade Vermiculite
  9. BEST FOR VEGETABLES: Coast of Maine Castine Organic Raised Bed Mix
  10. BEST FOR HERBS AND FLOWERS: Miracle-Gro Raised Bed Soil
The best soil for raised beds options being poured into a raised bed
Photo: amazon.com

Product Comparison

IngredientsQuantityOrganic?
FoxFarm Happy Frog Potting SoilEarthworm castings, bat guano, and aged forest products2 cubic feet✅
Sunday Natural Moisture Potting Soil MixSphagnum peat moss, peat humus, coir, perlite, ground limestone20 quarts❌
Mountain Valley Minute Soil Compressed Coco CoirCompressed coco coir15 gallons (from 1 block); other sizes available✅
Organic Plant Magic Compressed Potting SoilCoco coir, worm castings, and fertilizer12 cups (expands to 3 gallons)✅
Michigan Peat Garden Magic Top SoilReed sedge peat and sand4.5 cubic feet✅
Charlie’s 10-Pound CompostChicken manure, biochar, organic grasses and organic crop production residue0.4 cubic feet✅
Hoffman Canadian Sphagnum Peat MossPeat moss10 quarts ✅
Ferry Morse Professional Grade VermiculiteVermiculite grades8 quarts❌
Coast of Maine Castine Organic Raised Bed MixFully cured compost, sphagnum peat moss, dehydrated poultry manure, lobster and crab shell meal, greensand, biochar, worm castings and mycorrhizae1 cubic foot ✅
Miracle-Gro Raised Bed SoilSphagnum peat moss, compost, worm castings, alfalfa and kelp meal1.5 cubic feet✅

Our Top Picks

Here are some of our top soil recommendations to help fill raised garden beds. There are specialized soils as well as general mixes to help plants thrive, including soils from brands long trusted in the gardening world. All you’ll need to do is slip on your gardening gloves, open up the bags, fill up your beds, refill your watering can, and get growing. 

BEST OVERALL

FoxFarm Happy Frog Potting Soil

 Bag of FoxFarm 2-Cubic Feet Happy Frog Potting Soil
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Earthworm castings, bat guano, and aged forest products
  • Quantity: 2 cubic feet 
  • Organic: Yes 

What We Like

  • Mycorrhizal fungi content promotes root development
  • Excels at starting seeds
  • Great for winter sowing
  • pH-balanced product ideal for fruits, vegetables, and flowers

What We Don’t Like

  • Comes at a premium price

The FoxFarm Happy Frog organic garden soil contains a mix of microbes with mycorrhizal fungi and sediment. The fungi content enhances the nutrient uptake of the root system by creating a symbiotic relationship with the root mass. Essentially, it expands the root’s reach, promoting their development. 

That fungi content gets balanced with sediment that maintains the light texture and aeration needed to let plant roots expand as they consume nutrients. The mix contains a pH balance for optimal growth that’s supportive of fruit, vegetables, or flowers. Keep in mind that the soil has been inoculated with mycorrhizal fungi, so there is a possibility to see white growth in the mix, which is normal.

Get the FoxFarm soil for raised beds at Amazon, Target, or Walmart.

RUNNER-UP

Sunday Natural Moisture Potting Soil Mix

 Bag of Sunday Moisture Potting Mix
Photo: GetSunday.com

Product Specs

  • Ingredients: Sphagnum peat moss, peat humus, coir, perlite, ground limestone
  • Quantity: 20 quarts
  • Organic: No

What We Like

  • Ideal for repotting plants into containers and raised beds
  • Also includes ground limestone for added nutrients
  • Helps drain and aerate roots for better plant growth

What We Don’t Like

  • Users will want to pair it with a fertilizer for best results

With ingredients like peat humus for nutrients, perlite for aeration, and peat moss for moisture retention, Sunday’s soil mix provides the right growing conditions for healthy plant growth and proper drainage. This is especially useful when used in a raised bed setting, where aeration and drainage are vital to plant success. 

This 20-quart bag of soil is suitable for both indoor and outdoor use and is especially great for repotting plants and herbs in containers. A final special ingredient in this product is ground limestone, which adds essential calcium and magnesium nutrients to the soil for optimal plant growth. Sunday does note to consumers, however, that this is not a substitute for fertilizer.

Get the Sunday soil for raised beds at Sunday.

BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK

Mountain Valley Minute Soil Compressed Coco Coir

 Brick of Mountain Valley Minute Soil - Compressed Coco Coir
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Compressed coco coir 
  • Quantity: 15 gallons (from 1 block); other sizes available
  • Organic: Yes

What We Like

  • Compact, lightweight, and easy to store until needed
  • Available in multiple sizes, either as large bricks or smaller pucks
  • Suitable for a range of flowers, plants, and herbs

What We Don’t Like

  • Coco coir is nutrient-poor, requiring supplements for better plant growth
  • Retains moisture extremely well; not suitable for all plants

Mountain Valley Minute Soil compressed coco coir fiber grow medium squeezes the growing medium down to a compact brick full of goodness. Made of raw coconut coir, this fibrous block expands to a light texture designed to aerate and it retains moisture. At the same time, it provides a nutritious boost for topsoil. 

Gardeners can rehydrate the entire block to create 15 gallons of growing medium or hydrate only the amount needed for a specific project. The compressed packaging stores easily and provides options for a wide range of gardening needs and uses. These compressed blocks come in several sizes to suit most gardener’s available storage space. 

Get the Mountain Valley soil for raised beds at Amazon or True Leaf Market.

BEST ORGANIC

Organic Plant Magic Compressed Potting Soil

 Box of Organic Plant Magic Compressed Potting Soil
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Coco coir, worm castings, and fertilizer
  • Quantity: 12 cups (expands to 3 gallons)
  • Organic: Yes 

What We Like

  • Holds 50 percent more water than regular soil
  • Can be used on existing soil as a nutrient boost
  • Can be rehydrated as needed

What We Don’t Like

  • Not available in multiple size options

Organic Plant Magic compressed organic potting soil for gardens and plants contains natural, organic fertilizer ingredients to feed and nourish plants. This compressed soil can be rehydrated and used as the nutrient layer or applied directly to existing soil without rehydrating. This dry, organic mix alone holds 50 percent more water than regular soil, which is one reason it works so well for raised beds. 

The soil contains natural coconut coir, worm castings, mycorrhizae, helpful bacteria, amino acids, and humic acids. These ingredients work together for a slow release of nutrients so that plants don’t get overwhelmed. This package requires 12 cups of water to create 2 pounds of compressed soil. The mixture then expands to create 3 gallons of usable healthy soil.

Get the Organic Plant Magic soil for raised beds at Amazon or Organic Plant Magic.

BEST TOPSOIL

Michigan Peat Garden Magic Top Soil

 Bag of Michigan Peat Garden Magic Top Soil
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Reed sedge peat and sand
  • Quantity: 4.5 cubic feet 
  • Organic: Yes

What We Like

  • Works well with heavy clay soils to help loosen the mixture
  • Helps increase water retention in lighter soils 
  • Can be used as a top dressing and to fill holes in lawns and gardens

What We Don’t Like

  • Must be mixed with other soil

Topsoil fills a raised bed rather than nourishing the plants in it. The Michigan Peat Garden Magic top soil does that with a mix of reed sedge peat and sand. For gardeners who are using dirt from the natural landscape, this garden soil mix can loosen heavy clay soils and improve the water retention of light, airy soils. 

Sometimes topsoils can arrive with twigs and debris that aren’t harmful but don’t help your garden. The Michigan Peat topsoil (usually) arrives without clumps or these surprise additions, sticking with pure ingredients. However, the topsoil is designed to be used as conditioner for heavy soil or mixed with other growing mediums, but not used on its own.

Get the Michigan Peat soil for raised beds at Amazon.

BEST COMPOST

Charlie’s 10-Pound Compost

 Bag of Charlie’s 10-Pound Compost on a white background
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Chicken manure, biochar, organic grasses and organic crop production residue
  • Quantity: 0.4 cubic feet
  • Organic: Yes 

What We Like

  • Composted for 8 to 12 weeks
  • Powerful formula, yet it’s still safe to use in direct contact with plants 
  • Affordable compared to other big name brands

What We Don’t Like

  • Made to be used as an amendment/natural fertilizer only

Charlie’s Compost has natural ingredients composted and ready for plants to soak up nutrients. It contains a garden soil mix of chicken manure, cornstalks, forest products, hay, straw, clay, and microbe inoculants. Before being bagged, the ingredients are composted for 8 to 12 weeks, at which time they’re ready for application to the garden. 

The blend is designed to be mixed with other soils or as an additive around plants. If used in direct contact with plants, be sure to use it sparingly: It’s powerful enough to burn delicate plants. There have also been (rare) instances of bags arriving with ingredients that aren’t completely broken down. 

Get the Charlie’s Compost soil for raised beds at Amazon.

BEST PEAT MOSS

Hoffman Canadian Sphagnum Peat Moss

 Bag of Hoffman Canadian Sphagnum Peat Moss
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Peat moss 
  • Quantity: 10 quarts 
  • Organic: Yes 

What We Like

  • Provides ample drainage and aeration
  • Also adds great moisture retention
  • Relatively affordable bag

What We Don’t Like

  • Designed to be mixed with heavy soil

Hoffman Canadian sphagnum peat moss contains 99.8 percent natural ingredients, consisting almost entirely of natural peat. This mix helps break up compacted soils, aerate roots, and improve drainage. However, the peat also holds water for better moisture retention in a raised bed setting. 

This bag provides a big bang for the buck. It’s meant to mix with other soils, so even in a large raised bed, it can go a long way. Keep in mind that heavily compacted soils will require more peat to loosen the soil than light, airy soils.

Get the Hoffman peat moss at Amazon.

BEST VERMICULITE

Ferry Morse Professional Grade Vermiculite

 Bag of Ferry Morse Professional Grade Vermiculite
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Vermiculite grades
  • Quantity: 8 quarts 
  • Organic: No

What We Like

  • Can be added to other soils for a potent mix
  • Suitable for seedlings and plants that prefer a high moisture content
  • Can help promote aeration in more compacted soils

What We Don’t Like

  • May provide too much moisture for some plants 
  • Not meant to be the primary growing medium

The professional-grade vermiculite by Ferry Morse contains a mix of vermiculite grades, fine to coarse, in one mix. However, it tends to contain more fine-grade particles, which makes a difference in the plants for which it works best—mostly plants that prefer a high moisture content. With the right soils, it can be used to improve aeration and keep plants well hydrated. 

This vermiculite provides adequate moisture levels for seedlings, too. However, the fine grade doesn’t take much moisture to keep plants healthy. Gardeners need to know their plants and soil mixes well when using this vermiculite. In some cases, it can retain too much moisture for plants that are easily overwatered.

Get the Ferry Morse vermiculite at Amazon, Ace Hardware, or Ferry Morse.

BEST FOR VEGETABLES

Coast of Maine Castine Organic Raised Bed Mix

 Bag of Coast of Maine Castine Blend - Organic & Natural Mix
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Fully cured compost, sphagnum peat moss, dehydrated poultry manure, lobster and crab shell meal, greensand, biochar, worm castings and mycorrhizae
  • Quantity: 1 cubic foot 
  • Organic: Yes 

What We Like

  • Specially designed for outdoor raised garden beds
  • Balanced pH is safe to use for vegetables, fruits, plants, and flowers 
  • OMRI listed for guaranteed natural and organic materials
  • Website has a handy calculator for how much users need for their space

What We Don’t Like

  • Moisture retention and nutrients not suitable for indoor use or potted plants

Coast of Maine Organic & Natural Mix nourishes plants with natural ingredients designed for plants meant for human consumption. That doesn’t mean it can’t work well for flowers and inedibles, but when it comes to vegetables, organic ingredients ensure top nutrients. It’s OMRI listed, providing an extra layer of assurance that ingredients meet requirements to qualify as natural and organic. 

This raised bed mix contains fully cured compost, dehydrated poultry manure, sphagnum peat moss, biochar, worm castings, lobster and crab shell meal, greensand, and mycorrhizae. 

A wide and varied mix of ingredients balances pH and provides nutrients for an equally diverse range of plants. Keep in mind that this soil is designed specifically for outdoor raised beds. It’s not one to use with indoor potted plants because it won’t provide the right moisture retention or nutrients. 

Get the Coast of Maine soil for raised beds at Amazon, The Home Depot, Target, or Coast of Maine.

BEST FOR HERBS AND FLOWERS

Miracle-Gro Raised Bed Soil

 Bag of Miracle-Gro Raised Bed Soil
Photo: lowes.com

Product Specs 

  • Ingredients: Sphagnum peat moss, compost, worm castings, alfalfa and kelp meal
  • Quantity: 1.5 cubic feet 
  • Organic: Yes 

What We Like

  • Premixed bag is specially formulated for raised bed gardens 
  • Mixture can help control weeds and pests 
  • Certified by the Organic Materials Review Institute

What We Don’t Like

  • Does not control moisture as well as other options

The OMRI-certified Miracle-Gro raised bed soil mix provides organic matter needed for good drainage while growing flowers, herbs, vegetables, and fruits. The raised bed soil requires no mixing. Designed specifically for raised beds, this mixture helps keep pests and weeds under control. 

The premixed blend comes in 1.5 cubic foot bags. It takes about three bags to fill a 2-foot by 2-foot bed that is 1 foot high.

Get the Miracle-Gro soil for raised beds at Ace Hardware, Lowe’s, or Tractor Supply Co.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Soil for Raised Beds

We researched the most sought-after soil for raised beds in their respective categories and discovered that the best options are determined by their ingredients, quantity, versatility, and other special features included by top brands.

While searching for the best garden bed soil, we reached out to Teri Valenzuela, the natural science manager at Sunday, a nationwide lawn and garden care company. Her advice? “Look for ingredients like fresh compost or peat humus for good nutrient levels, vermiculite or perlite for aeration, and peat moss or coconut coir for moisture retention. These ingredients provide the right growing conditions for healthy plant growth and proper drainage.”

She adds that shoppers will want to “avoid mixes with heavier in-ground garden soil mixes, bio-solids containing contaminants, and excessive wood products. They may hinder plant growth by impacting drainage and nutrient availability.”

With these expert tips in mind, we made sure to include a wide range of soil recipes on our list of recommendations that meet these standards, avoiding poorer quality mixes. As such, many of our chosen mixes are formulated to provide drainage and aeration and select options can be used for indoor and outdoor plants, vegetables, fruits, flowers, and herbs. 

Whether you need 1 cubic foot or over 15 gallons of soil, the above list includes options that resist compacting, are pH-balanced, and can be used on existing soil with grown plants as well as seedlings. Many of our picks can be mixed with other soils to create a custom blend that works perfectly for your own plants.

What to Consider When Choosing Soil for Raised Beds

Growing flowers and food in a raised garden bed differs from growing them directly in the ground. Consider these key points before dumping dirt into your raised beds. 

Raised Bed Height

Knowing the size of your raised bed garden will help you determine how much soil you will need to fill it. Thankfully, there are plenty of useful calculators that can help with this task, taking into account shape and dimensions. In general, the taller the raised bed, the more raised bed soil you’ll need. 

Taller raised beds or tabletop designs can eliminate back strain and make gardening more comfortable. Alternatively, you can fill the bottom of a tall ground level bed with filler like dead leaves or cardboard to minimize the amount of raised bed soil mix you’ll need. 

Plant Type and Root Depth 

The plants grown in the garden will determine the best raised bed soil depth needed for optimum growth. Generally, a good rule of thumb is to build a raised bed that’s at least 6 inches deep. This depth allows for drainage and retains moisture at levels needed for many common crops. However, some plants have deeper roots than others. For example, if you plan to grow root vegetables like carrots, a depth of 12 inches is preferable. 

Raised beds are great for any kind of plant but work particularly well for growing vegetables. Elevating the growing space keeps weeds at bay and the soil warm and prevents compaction. Gardeners also get to start with pristine, neutral-pH soil. However, if you’re using previously used soil, do a soil test to determine whether you need any amendments or fertilizer to renew the nutrients.

Soil Components

Many gardeners have tried-and-true soil mix recipes, but in general, it’s best to avoid settling for uber-cheap bags of raised bed soil. A good soil mix contains topsoil, a small amount of substrate, and a significant amount of compost, which contains nutrients that improve soil conditions. 

The least expensive bags of soil are usually low quality and full of weed seed, debris, and other nasty contaminants. They’re also unlikely to contain many valuable nutrients. 

Topsoil is basically filler soil needed for everything from raised bed gardening to indoor potted plants. It makes up the bulk of most raised bed soil mixes. It’s not very rich in nutrients but is a necessary component that contains organic matter. 

The substrate makes up a small percentage of the raised bed soil mix but is extremely important. It helps control moisture content, which is key in a raised bed. Some of the substrates that might appear in soil mixes include peat moss, rock phosphate, vermiculite, perlite, and coco coir. Again, the type of plants you choose to grow will help determine the appropriate substrate to support them. 

Be careful to avoid adding too much peat moss, which can increase the acidity of the soil and throw off the pH balance. Some gardeners prefer to fill raised garden beds with a topsoil-free mix, using equal parts compost, perlite, and coco coir. It makes for a fluffy, moisture-retaining growing medium. 

Compost from multiple sources is best because it provides a wide variety of nutrients. It can even come from your own backyard pile that consists of leaves, grass clippings, and other yard waste. 

In the world of soil, the term “organic” refers to organic materials such as compost and mulch. “Nonorganic” materials aren’t necessarily harmful. They’re just inert and include things like pebbles, rock phosphate, and perlite. Nonorganic soil that contains no organic matter lacks nutrients but is also free of contaminants. When the terms are used in this way, the term “nonorganic” doesn’t mean synthetic fillers or chemicals; it means that the substances are not nor have they ever been alive. 

However, the term “organic” can also mean free of synthetic chemicals and pesticides. The USDA’s National Organic Program (NOP) covers farm practices, including soils and other substances applied to crops like organic fertilizer. In addition, the Organic Materials Review Institute (OMRI), a volunteer organization, lists products that organic farmers can use to produce food. Both the NOP or OMRI list possible soils, amendments, and fertilizers that can be used and still maintain an “organic” garden.

Topsoil

Topsoil isn’t the same as garden soil. As the name suggests, it’s the top layer of soil. This general-purpose soil is ideal for filling in garden beds or preparing a bare lawn for growth. 

It’s not very nutrient-rich, but it contains important organic matter, so it’s not entirely useless. If you buy topsoil bags and plan to use them to fill your raised beds, pour the topsoil in first since this soil makes a great base layer and filler. Then cover the topsoil with a more nutrient-rich mix of compost, peat moss, and substrates that will nourish the plants. 

Fertilizer

The best raised bed soils contain nutrients that fuel growth. Organic, natural fertilizers include various types of compost, sea kelp, and worm castings. These fertilizers enhance the quality and condition of the soil without you having to worry about contamination. The slow-release properties of organic fertilizers prevent potentially harmful buildup and ensure that your plants aren’t harmed by a flood of nutrients all at once. 

According to Jones, “You want to check what type of fertilizer is in the soil and how long it takes for it to break down so you don’t overfertilize and burn your plants. You’ll also know how often you need to fertilize again. I prefer getting premixed soil to minimize how much work (physical labor) I’ll have to do. Hand mixing and moving dirt is hard work.”

It’s also important to note that some raised bed soil mixes may contain synthetic fertilizers. They provide a quick nutrient boost but don’t improve soil condition and texture like organic options. This is why it is best to choose or make a soil mix with organic nutrient sources.

FAQs 

Q. How many soil bags do I need for a raised bed? 

It depends entirely on the size and shape of the raised bed. If you know your garden bed’s dimensions, you can plug them into a soil calculator to find out how much you need. 

Q. How do you prepare soil for a raised bed? 

If you’re buying potting soil in bags, it’s typically premixed, so there’s not much to do other than water it before planting. Topsoils that act as fillers require you to layer substrate and/or compost on top. Once you’ve done that, it’s all about water. Watering the soil prior to planting, using either a watering can or a garden hose, ensures your plants have enough moisture to start growing.

Q. Is topsoil good for a raised bed? 

A topsoil product is a great filler, but it’s not designed to be the main nutritive soil in a raised bed. The plants need nutrients, and topsoil is not rich in organic matter like compost or potting soils.

Q. Can I use only compost for a raised bed? 

Yes. In fact, the Square Foot Gardening Foundation recommends a compost-only option for gardeners on a budget or those who don’t have access to other mix-ins. However, while this can be cheaper (if you have access to free compost), the soil in a compost-only bed can become compacted. 

Q. How often should I replace the soil in my raised bed?

Jones shares her insights on this topic: “Signs that you need more soil nutrients: The plants aren’t thriving as they did in years past. Could be stunted, low fruit/vegetable production, or generally unhealthy.”

She adds, “All beds are going to lose soil. It’s the nature of raised beds. I add more soil to mine a minimum of every 2 years, more if needed. I will side-dress with compost and manure every year. Plus, I add things like egg shells, coffee grounds, and wood ash.”

The post The Best Soils for Raised Beds in Your Garden appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[Yes, You Need a Fertilizer Spreader (Not Your Hands) To Treat Your Lawn—These 9 Tested Best]]>Spreading fertilizer by hand is a good way to expose yourself to chemicals and a bad way to get consistent coverage for gorgeous grass. It's time to start using a fertilizer spreader instead.

The post Yes, You Need a Fertilizer Spreader (Not Your Hands) To Treat Your Lawn—These 9 Tested Best appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizer-spreader/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizer-spreader/Tue, 18 Feb 2025 07:21:32 -0500ReviewsDIYLawn & GardenLawn CareLawn Care & GardeningLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Whether seeding a new lawn, feeding an existing garden, or treating a yard for an insect infestation, a fertilizer spreader is an invaluable tool. These machines apply lawn care products quickly and evenly without requiring you to touch them, keeping you safe from contacting potentially dangerous chemicals and resulting in more consistent application with less product waste. In the winter, they can also be used to spread salt on icy walkways and paths. But knowing which spreader is right for your property and needs requires a little research, which is why we tested 13 popular models before selecting just nine to recommend. 

Based on our tests and the professional opinions of two lawn care experts, we chose the Earthway 50-lb. Commercial Broadcast Spreader as our top pick. This three-point fertilizer spreader holds a substantial amount of product, delivers a consistent spread pattern, and is easy to maneuver—even when full. However, there’s also a lot to like about the rest of the models that passed our tests, so it’s worth reviewing all of the best fertilizer spreaders before choosing the one that’s right for you.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Earthway 50-lb. Commercial Broadcast Spreader
    Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Titan Attachments Professional Broadcast Spreader
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Scotts Turf Builder EdgeGuard Mini Broadcast Spreader
    Jump to Review
  4. UPGRADE PICK: Scotts Elite Spreader
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR LARGE YARDS: Agri-Fab 130-lb. Push Broadcast Spreader
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST PULL-BEHIND: Agri-Fab 130-lb. Tow-Behind Broadcast Spreader
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST DROP: Scotts Turf Builder Classic Drop Spreader
    Jump to Review
  8. BEST MANUAL HANDHELD: Scotts Whirl Hand-Powered Spreader
    Jump to Review
  9. BEST BATTERY HANDHELD: Ryobi 18V One+ 1-Gallon Power Spreader
    Jump to Review
Best Fertilizer Spreader
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Fertilizer Spreaders Comparison Chart

Product NameTypeCapacityFlow Controller 
Earthway 50-lb. Commercial Broadcast SpreaderWalk-behind, rotary50 poundsSliding lever
Titan Attachments Professional Broadcast SpreaderWalk-behind, rotary50 poundsSliding lever
Scotts Turf Builder EdgeGuard Mini Broadcast SpreaderWalk-behind, rotary25 poundsDial and spring lever
Scotts Elite SpreaderWalk-behind, rotary60 poundsDial and spring lever
Agri-Fab 130-lb. Push Broadcast SpreaderWalk-behind, rotary130 poundsSliding lever
Agri-Fab 130-lb. Tow-Behind Broadcast SpreaderTow-behind, rotary130 poundsSliding lever
Scotts Turf Builder Classic Drop SpreaderWalk-behind, drop32 poundsDial and spring lever
Scotts Whirl Hand-Powered SpreaderHandheld, rotary2 poundsDial and spring trigger
Ryobi 18v One+ 1-Gallon Power SpreaderHandheld, rotary10 poundsDial and sliding lever

Our Top Picks

Each of the following models earned a spot on our list based on their standout performance in our hands-on tests. Read on to learn more about their spreading capacity, holding capacity, precision, and method of operation.

Best Overall

Earthway 50-lb. Commercial Broadcast Spreader

 The Best Fertilizer Spreader Option Earthway 50-lb. Commercial Broadcast Spreader
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Heavy-duty steel T-handle, epoxy-coated frame, and pneumatic stud tires 
  • Easy to operate and maneuver when full
  • Instructions for assembly and use are simple to follow

What We Don’t Like

  • Takes up a lot of storage space 
  • Doesn’t come with a rain cover

Specs 

  • Type: Walk-behind, rotary
  • Capacity: 50 pounds
  • Flow controller: Sliding lever

Our Ratings: Durability 5/5; Maneuverability 5/5; Ease of Assembly 5/5; Storage 3/5; Value 5/5

The Earthway walk-behind broadcast fertilizer spreader is a commercial-grade multiuse spreader sized for yards between 10,000 square feet and an acre. It features a heavy-duty poly hopper with a 50-pound capacity, and its frame has a 175-pound load-bearing limit for withstanding uneven terrain. The 13-inch-diameter stud tires are attached via rustproof rims, and the super-duty gearbox is durable enough to last for years.

While the assembly instructions for this pick were incredibly easy to follow, assembly and calibration still took a few hours. However, once we got started actually using this rugged yard fertilizer spreader, we found its two-position height adjustment handle and T-speed lever comfortable despite our different heights, and we liked how evenly the three-hole drop shut-off system delivered product across our lawn. Even when fully loaded, the air-filled pneumatic stud tires rolled effortlessly up and down slopes and over rough ground, cushioning bumps to maintain a highly consistent distribution pattern. In addition to being an excellent choice for year-round use as a lawn seed fertilizer spreader, this Earthway model would also work well with ice-melting products. 

What our tester says: “Once we got to testing this spreader, we both remarked on how durable it felt and how comfortable and easy it was to operate. Since it is on the large side, it would be nice if it had a rain cover so we could store it outside, but that’s really the only thing about this pick that we don’t love.”—Mark Wolfe, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Earthway fertilizer spreader at Amazon, The Home Depot, Walmart, Northern Tool + Equipment, or Earthway.

Runner-up

Titan Attachments Professional Broadcast Spreader

 Best Fertilizer Spreader Titan
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Large hopper is ideal for big properties
  • 3-position handle makes it easy to control flow
  • Comes with a rain cover for outdoor storage 

What We Don’t Like

  • Instructions are a bit hard to follow
  • Too large for most small- and medium-sized yards

Specs 

  • Type: Walk-behind, rotary
  • Capacity: 50 pounds
  • Flow controller: Sliding lever

Our Ratings: Durability 5/5; Maneuverability 5/5; Ease of Assembly 4/5; Storage 4/5; Value 4.5/5

Titan Attachments broadcast fertilizer and seed spreader is a versatile, high-capacity tool designed to evenly distribute herbicides, fertilizers, insecticides, grass seed, and even ice melt. With a 50-pound drum and three-position gearbox, it holds plenty of product and is easy to control for consistent application.

Built for year-round use, this spreader features a high-grade steel frame, heavy-duty plastic components, and pneumatic tires that make it possible to run on turf or sod without damaging the grass. Despite its sturdy construction, it only weighs 25 pounds, making it light enough to maneuver without much effort but heavy enough to tackle hilly, root-filled, and rugged terrain. It covers a wide path for efficient lawn fertilizer application and is probably best for open spaces that are 10,000 square feet or larger. Though it was relatively quick to assemble and calibrate at about an hour and 15 minutes, the instructions would be fairly hard to follow if you didn’t have much experience putting this type of tool together. 

Get the Titan Attachments fertilizer spreader at Amazon, Walmart, or Titan Attachments.

Best Bang for the Buck

Scotts Turf Builder EdgeGuard Mini Broadcast Spreader

 Scotts Turf Builder EdgeGuard Mini Spreader on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Comes precalibrated and fully assembled
  • Folds down for storage 
  • EdgeGuard feature keeps fertilizer on lawns only

What We Don’t Like

  • Hard to get the last bit of fertilizer out 
  • Can be difficult to maneuver on uneven ground

Specs 

  • Type: Walk-behind, rotary
  • Capacity: 25 pounds
  • Flow controller: Dial and spring lever

Our Ratings: Durability 3/5; Maneuverability 3/5; Ease of Assembly 5/5; Storage 5/5; Value 5/5

Scotts Turf Builder EdgeGuard mini broadcast spreader is small, lightweight, and easy to store, making it ideal for those with limited space. Though it can hold up to 5,000 square feet of lawn products for yards up to 10,000 square feet, its fold-down handle makes it easy to tuck out of the way when the work is complete. It also includes a control panel with precision rate settings for more accurate coverage and an EdgeGuard feature that blocks the right side to prevent fertilizer from spraying onto sidewalks or flower beds. 

During testing, we appreciated that this little spreader didn’t need any assembly. Its hard plastic wheels came attached and the spreader itself was already calibrated. Still, the wheels are fairly skinny and hard, so they didn’t roll as smoothly across uneven ground as air-filled tires. Also, we noticed that the last bits of product always got stuck to the bottom of the spreader due to static buildup. For the price, though? It’s a great choice for homeowners with small- to mid-sized yards and limited storage space who still want easy operation and precision coverage. 

Get the Scotts EdgeGuard fertilizer spreader at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Scotts.

Upgrade Pick

Scotts Elite Spreader

 Scotts Elite Spreader on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • 2 rotors for consistent coverage
  • Holds up to 60 pounds to treat over 20,000 square feet 
  • Arrives calibrated and mostly preassembled and folds for storage

What We Don’t Like

  • Some fertilizer discharges toward the wheel during use 
  • Wheels aren’t great for rough ground

Specs 

  • Type: Walk-behind, rotary
  • Capacity: 60 pounds
  • Flow controller: Dial and spring lever

Our Ratings: Durability 4/5; Maneuverability 3/5; Ease of Assembly 4/5; Storage 4/5; Value 4/5

The Scotts Elite spreader is a high-capacity option designed to efficiently cover up to 20,000 square feet with 60 pounds of product. Its twin discharge design evenly lays down material in a 6-foot-wide path, meaning it spreads fertilizer twice as fast as more basic models. 

Assembly of the Scotts Elite was quick and easy—all we had to do was snap on the wheels and unfold the handle. The soft plastic wheels rolled much more easily over varying terrain than the standard hard-plastic wheels on less expensive Scotts spreaders, but not as well as air-filled tires. We liked that the comfortable ergonomic handle has a smartphone holder so you can stay connected as you work. This is also a versatile spreader since it can accommodate large particles of corrosive rock salt in addition to standard-sized ice melt, making it a good all-around spreader for midsize suburban yards, especially in icy climates. 

Get the Scotts Elite fertilizer spreader at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Walmart, Blain’s Farm & Fleet, or Scotts.

Best for Large Yards

Agri-Fab 130-lb. Push Broadcast Spreader

 The Best Fertilizer Spreader Option Agri-Fab 130-lb. Push Broadcast Spreader
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Holds 130 pounds, covering up to 25,000 square feet 
  • Large air-filled pneumatic tires 
  • Easy to smoothly control fertilizer flow 

What We Don’t Like

  • Gearbox feels a bit undersized for so much weight
  • Coverage path also feels narrow for such a big machine

Specs 

  • Type: Walk-behind, rotary
  • Capacity: 130 pounds
  • Flow controller: Sliding lever

Our Ratings: Durability 4/5; Maneuverability 5/5; Ease of Assembly 2/5; Storage 2/5; Value 4/5

The Agri-Fab push broadcast spreader is big enough to apply conventional or organic lawn fertilizer to yards of up to 1 acre. With a 130-pound hopper, it holds nearly three times as much product as our top two picks. Depending on how you have it set, it can distribute a path width of 8 to 12 feet and cover up to 25,000 square feet with each load. 

Despite its large capacity, this lightweight spreader weighs only 6.81 pounds, enabling excellent maneuverability even when full. Its steel rod flow-control arm makes it easy for users to open and close the rustproof poly-constructed hopper, and the heavy-duty 1-inch pneumatic tires offer a smooth ride even over roots and rocks or through dips in the yard.

Assembly of this spreader takes about an hour, plus you’ll need another 10 minutes or so to calibrate it. Although the coverage path is similar to 50-pounder spreaders, the massive hopper reduces time spent refilling, making it an efficient option for larger properties. 

Get the Agri-Fab push fertilizer spreader at Amazon, Tractor Supply Co., Northern Tool + Equipment, or Target.

Best Pull-Behind

Agri-Fab 130-lb. Tow-Behind Broadcast Spreader

 The Best Fertilizer Spreader Option Agri-Fab 130-lb. Tow-Behind Broadcast Spreader
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Low center of gravity increases stability 
  • Durable steel frame and 13-inch pneumatic tires
  • Short trailer tongue makes it easy to maneuver

What We Don’t Like

  • Control arm awkward to maneuver from mower seat
  • Gearbox seems a bit undersized

Specs 

  • Type: Tow-behind, rotary
  • Capacity: 130 pounds
  • Flow controller: Sliding lever

Our Ratings: Durability 4/5; Maneuverability 4/5; Ease of Assembly 3/5; Storage 2/5; Value 4/5 

The Agri-Fab pull-behind fertilizer spreader functions as a large motorized fertilizer spreader when attached to a lawn tractor, riding lawn mower, or other vehicle via its universal hitch. Designed for properties of 1 acre or more, it features a 130-pound heavy-duty plastic hopper and a steel direct flow control arm, which is accessible from the driver’s seat for quick and even application of seed and other lawn care materials.

When trying out this tow-behind model, we liked its squatty dimensions, short hitch length, and 13-inch pneumatic tires, which made it highly maneuverable, even around curves. The low height also allowed for easier loading and improved stability on hilly ground. However, we found the control lever, located on the trailer tongue, to be somewhat awkward to operate from the mower seat. 

Get the Agri-Fab tow-behind fertilizer spreader at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, Walmart, Northern Tool + Equipment, Target, Blain’s Farm & Fleet.

Best Drop

Scotts Turf Builder Classic Drop Spreader

 Scotts Turf fertilizer spreader on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Built-in cable-driven gate control for accurate application
  • Heavy-duty frame built for long-term use 
  • Works well along flower beds and gardens 

What We Don’t Like

  • Too small for large spaces
  • Plastic wheels aren’t great for uneven ground

Specs 

  • Type: Walk-behind, drop
  • Capacity: 32 pounds
  • Flow controller: Dial and spring lever

Our Ratings: Durability 3/5; Maneuverability 3/5; Ease of Assembly 5/5; Storage 4/5; Value 5/5

The Scotts classic drop spreader is a reliable choice for small properties. Its heavy-duty plastic hopper holds 32 pounds of fertilizer for new grass or already established lawns, which is enough to cover up to 10,000 square feet. It features a 22-inch spread pattern for excellent coverage and accuracy, controllable by a cable-driven gate on the handle. Select from 23 spreader settings to customize the application rate and then squeeze the handle to open the hopper to let it flow. 

We liked that this spreader came preassembled and calibrated. It also laid a highly consistent path of fertilizer, but we had to pay attention to prevent gaps in coverage. Like many other Scotts spreaders, this one features hard plastic wheels that sometimes struggle on uneven ground or imperfect grass. Its tubular frame seems strong and durable, but the other parts are mainly lightweight plastic. This would make a good fertilizer spreader for occasional use, especially if the property has numerous plant beds, sidewalks, tree rings, and other obstacles that users need to work around.

Get the Scotts Classic fertilizer spreader at Amazon or Ace Hardware.

Best Manual Handheld

Scotts Whirl Hand-Powered Spreader

 Scotts Whirl Hand-Powered Spreader on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Takes up almost no storage space
  • Noncorrosive materials also compatible with garden fertilizers, weed killers, and ice melt
  • No assembly required 

What We Don’t Like

  • Less accurate than walk-behind spreaders
  • Flow can be inconsistent at times

Specs 

  • Type: Handheld, rotary
  • Capacity: 2 pounds
  • Flow controller: Dial and spring trigger

Our Ratings: Durability 4/5; Maneuverability 5/5; Ease of Assembly 5/5; Storage 5/5; Value 4/5

The Scotts Whirl fertilizer hand spreader is a convenient year-round tool for small yards. It measures just 8.5 inches high by 8.7 inches wide by 13.1 inches deep and weighs only about a pound, making it convenient to carry and store. Since it’s constructed from heavy-duty plastic, it’s safe to use with everything from spring and winter grass fertilizer to ice melt without worrying about corrosion, as you might with a spreader with metal components.

We liked this spreader because it takes up almost no storage space and is super easy to operate. All we had to do was fill the hopper, squeeze the trigger, and turn the handle. It has an adjustment dial to control the opening width, and the trigger opens the hopper gate to release the material as you turn the baseplate crank. There’s even a slide-out wrist support to help steady the hopper and reduce operator fatigue during use. This would be a good tool for seeding bare spots created by chinch bug damage, treating difficult-to-reach areas, or spreading ice-melt products.

Get the Scotts Whirl fertilizer spreader at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Target.

Best Battery Handheld

Ryobi 18V One+ 1-Gallon Power Spreader

 The Best Fertilizer Spreader Option Ryobi 18V One+ 1-Gallon Power Spreader
Photo: The Home Depot

What We Like

  • No assembly required
  • Great for small areas or more precise application
  • Works with everything from organic fertilizer to ice melt

What We Don’t Like

  • Battery sold separately 
  • No always-on setting

Specs 

  • Type: Handheld, rotary
  • Capacity: 10 pounds
  • Flow controller: Dial and sliding lever

Our Ratings: Durability 4/5; Maneuverability 5/5; Ease of Assembly 5/5; Storage 5/5; Value 4.25/5

The Ryobi 18V (volt) One+ 1-gallon power spreader is a cordless battery-powered tool that makes it easy to distribute fertilizer and seed as well as ice melt. Compatible with the brand’s One+ battery system and equipped with a 10-pound hopper, it’s great for quick and easy application in small- to medium-sized spaces. It features an adjustable flow rate that allows you to customize spread based on material and desired coverage and a lightweight design that’s easy to maneuver, especially compared to large, push-type spreaders.

Those looking to cover a large property will likely find their hand getting tired since there’s no always-on setting. Instead, users must hold the trigger down to propel product out, making it a better option for spot treatments or small spaces. However, if you already own compatible 18V Ryobi tools and prefer the precision of a hand spreader, it’s an excellent option.

What our tester says: “I like this little battery-powered hand spreader for spot-treating areas of my yard that seem to struggle, but I also used it this past winter to apply salt to my front porch and steps so delivery people didn’t slip. Since I already had other 18V Ryobi tools, this multi-function spreader made an especially nice addition to my lineup.”—Michelle Larson, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Ryobi fertilizer spreader (tool only) at The Home Depot.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Fertilizer Spreaders

Testing Stats
Products tested 13
Hours/weeks/time spent testing 37 hours
Tests performed5
Price range$30 to $370

Testing fertilizer spreaders meant rating them based on ease of assembly and calibration; distribution width, accuracy, and consistency; ease of controlling the on-off function while in motion; maneuverability over varying terrain; and user comfort.

To arrive at these ratings, we assembled each model, loaded them with lawn fertilizer, and ran them across a tarp on level ground, measuring discharge width and consistency. During that process, we tested the on-off functionality while moving, which is important at start-up and when preparing for end turns. Finally, we pushed or pulled each spreader through a variable-terrain course, observing the way it rolled over bumps and dips and navigated corners. 

What to Consider When Choosing a Fertilizer Spreader

To help us determine which fertilizer spreader features matter most, we also spoke to Taylor Olberding, co-founder of nationwide lawn maintenance company Heroes Lawn Care, for his professional opinion. In addition to considering your property’s size and unique features, it’s also important to consider whether you’d rather push, pull, or carry the spreader and whether there are any extras that might make using it more comfortable. You’ll also want to pay attention to what it’s made from since some materials are more durable than others. 

According to Olberding, users should “Ensure it has air-filled tires (not plastic tires), is made of stainless steel/noncorrosive material with a plastic hopper, and can be easily configured based on the fertilizer product.” He also adds, “Ensure you are able to adjust the openings for accurate application and have an edge guard to help prevent fertilizer from spreading onto nontarget areas.”

Types of Fertilizer Spreaders

Two basic types of spreaders exist for dry applications––rotary spreaders, also known as broadcast spreaders—and drop spreaders. There are also spreaders designed for liquid products, including homemade lawn fertilizer

Rotary/Broadcast Spreaders

A rotary spreader uses a rotating base plate to disperse seeds or granules that pour slowly from a hopper. They are called broadcast spreaders because they throw the product several feet to the front and sides of the spreader path. 

Rotary spreaders cover an area three times their width, or broader, on every pass. These are the fastest tools you can use to spread dry materials, but their spreading abilities are less accurate than those of drop spreaders. Rotary spreaders are available in several sizes, so you can buy one that works for a tiny garden, a large estate lawn, and anything in the middle.

Drop Spreaders

When precision is critical, choose a drop spreader. These devices drop a swath of product through a wide, narrow opening directly beneath the spreader. They provide calibrated coverage, but the precision boosts the chance that the user will miss or double-cover an area. 

For users who have precise application needs, this tool is ideal. Users can easily control where a drop spreader distributes the product because it only drops between its wheels. The downside is that users will spend more time covering a lawn using a drop spreader than a rotary spreader.

Liquid/Spray Spreaders

The most efficient way to spread liquid fertilizer and other liquid lawn treatments is with a hose-end chemical spreader/sprayer. These devices automatically mix the correct proportion of concentrated chemicals with a flowing stream of water that travels through the spreader and out the nozzle. 

Liquid spreaders are especially useful as secondary tools for emergency treatments and for applying product quickly, although they are less accurate than the other two types of spreaders. Remember, too, that liquid lawn chemicals deliver fast results, but most liquids dissipate more quickly than granules, so regular use is costly.

Method of Operation 

The most popular spreaders are broadcast because they offer a balance between speed and precision. Manufacturers make these spreaders in a wide range of sizes, including everything from small, handheld models to extra-large spreaders that can be pulled behind vehicles.

Drop spreaders are the best choice when users must navigate obstacles and narrow spaces. They work exceptionally well on small to medium intensively landscaped yards.

Holding Capacity

It is important to know the spreader’s holding capacity because that will determine how often the spreader will have to be refilled based on the size of the area it needs to cover. Ideally, users will want to simply fill the spreader once and deposit the treatment over the entire area.

Holding capacity and lawn size go hand in hand. A handheld spreader is well suited for small lawns up to 1,500 square feet. For medium-sized lawns up to 5,000 square feet, a small walk-behind spreader suits the job. Large walk-behind spreaders work well for yards up to about 20,000 square feet. Go for a tow-behind spreader if the yard is larger than half an acre.

Spreading Capacity 

Spreading capacity refers to the types of fertilizers or materials a spreader can handle. The best fertilizer spreaders can help with planting grass seeds and distributing pelletized chemicals, but far fewer can handle sand, powdered lime, and compost.

Precision 

All lawn spreaders deliver better precision than spreading fertilizer by hand, making them useful tools since applying too much or too little product is one of the most common fertilizer mistakes people make. Still, some spreaders are more precise than their competitors, and spreaders that are more accurate tend to be slower. For example, drop spreaders are precise but slow, whereas broadcast spreaders are a bit less accurate but fast. Liquid spreaders are not exact, but they are quite quick.

Drop spreaders are the most precise because manufacturers calibrate them for a consistent flow rate to spread only a thin band directly beneath the hopper and between the wheels. You can calibrate a broadcast spreader to deliver a steady flow rate, but you must walk at a consistent pace for even coverage. Manufacturers calibrate liquid spreaders to mix the amount of concentrate per gallon of water accurately, but you are in control of the coverage.

The Advantages of Owning a Fertilizer Spreader 

A fertilizer spreader simplifies lawn treatments because it allows users to quickly and evenly apply seed, fertilizer, and lawn pest control products. You will also save time and money using a spreader because it allows you to quickly and evenly apply lawn products.

  • Spreaders apply lawn treatments far more evenly than hand spreading.
  • Fertilizer spreaders significantly reduce the time and effort users expend to apply lawn treatments.
  • The use of a fertilizer spreader for lawns minimizes the user’s exposure to chemicals.

FAQs

Even if you’ve already chosen the best fertilizer spreader for your yard, you may still have a few questions. The following answers to frequently asked questions should fill in any remaining gaps in your knowledge about operating and caring for these tools.

Q. How do you use a fertilizer spreader?

Refer to your spreader owner’s manual to find the correct setting for the product you will spread. The product label tells you how many pounds to apply per 1,000 square feet. 
Load the hopper with enough product for the square footage of the area you will cover. Select the correct setting for the material you spread, squeeze the handle, and walk from one corner of the yard, continuing in straight parallel lines until the area is covered. 

Q. How do you spread fertilizer without a spreader? 

You can spread fertilizer by hand, though your results might not be as consistent as they are with a spreader. Don gloves and pour granular fertilizer into a plastic bucket. Start to walk at one corner of the yard and toss the fertilizer in a sweeping motion as you walk in straight lines. Try to keep a consistent pace to spread the product as evenly as possible. 
For more even coverage, apply half the fertilizer while you walk in parallel lines in one direction, then apply the other half while you walk in a perpendicular set of parallel lines.

Q. How do you clean a fertilizer spreader?

To clean a fertilizer spreader, empty the hopper and use compressed air or a rag to remove all granules and residue from the spreader’s parts. Thoroughly wash the spreader, paying close attention to crevices and moving parts where debris may be lodged. Allow the spreader to dry thoroughly and store it out of the elements once you’re done.

Q. When is the best time of year to fertilize your lawn?

We checked in with Chris Ramos from Blain’s Farm & Fleet to see when he recommends customers fertilize their lawns, and he had this to say: “Fertilizing in fall proves best because root strengthening through winter leads to a healthier spring lawn. Applying fertilizer during spring can benefit grasses that need an early growth advantage, especially cool-season varieties.”

Q. What should you do after fertilizing?

It’s always a good idea to read the label for post-application recommendations straight from the manufacturer. However, it’s generally best practice to water the area lightly to help the product get into the soil and avoid mowing for a few days to prevent the fertilizer from getting kicked up before it has a chance to work. 

Q. How do I know what spreader setting to use?

“To find the right setting, check the product label, which generally includes the settings for seeds and fertilizers. If you are still unsure, begin with a lower application rate and add more if necessary to prevent overapplication,” says Ramos.

Meet the Tester

Mark Wolfe is a product tester and writer with an extensive background in the nursery and landscaping industries. He kept his tool box well stocked in order to build or repair fences, walls, irrigation systems, and equipment on any given day. Now he tests and writes reviews about the latest hand tools, lawn care products, outdoor power equipment, and other outdoor-living goods.

The post Yes, You Need a Fertilizer Spreader (Not Your Hands) To Treat Your Lawn—These 9 Tested Best appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[Is Your Bermuda Grass Looking Patchy? Here’s the Best Fertilizer To Fix It]]>Bermuda grass is easy to grow and enjoyable to look at—if you have the right fertilizer to help it thrive.

The post Is Your Bermuda Grass Looking Patchy? Here’s the Best Fertilizer To Fix It appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizer-for-bermuda-grass/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=159373Tue, 18 Feb 2025 06:56:34 -0500ReviewsLawn & GardenLawn CareLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Fertilizers for Bermuda grass are high in nitrogen with lower levels of phosphorus and potassium, providing the nutrients this warm-season grass needs to grow into a lush green lawn. Drought tolerant and not picky about the soil in which it grows, Bermuda grass (Cynodon dactylon) is soft yet tough enough to stand up to kids, pets, and other traffic. Though it’s relatively easy to care for, it’s still important to choose the right lawn care products for growing Bermuda grass to ensure a strong and healthy lawn.

To help you select a good fertilizer for Bermuda grass, we spoke to an award-winning landscape contractor and international arborist about which types of fertilizers are best and how to apply them. Based on our research, our top pick is the Scotts Southern Turf Builder Lawn Food—a high-nitrogen fertilizer that enhances nutrient and water absorption. For the healthiest and best-looking lawn, we recommend you review all of our fertilizer recommendations before selecting one of the best fertilizers for Bermuda grass to meet your lawn’s needs.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Scotts Southern Turf Builder Lawn Food
    Jump to Review 
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Lawn Food
    Jump to Review 
  3. BEST ORGANIC: Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST LIQUID: Simple Lawn Solutions Energizer Micronutrient Blend
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST NITROGEN ONLY: Simple Lawn Solutions High Nitrogen Lawn Food
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST FAST-ACTING: Scotts Green Max Lawn Food
    Jump to Review 
  7. BEST FOR NEW GRASS: Scotts Turf Builder Lawn Food
    Jump to Review 
Best Fertilizer For Bermuda Grass
Photo: Amazon Photo: amazon.com

Fertilizers for Bermuda Grass Comparison Chart

Product NameNPK RatioQuantityCoverage
Scotts Southern Turf Builder Lawn Food32-0-1014.06, 28.12, or 42.18 pounds5,000, 10,000, or 15,000 square feet
Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Lawn Food30-0-65 pounds7,200 square feet
Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food10-0-117 or 51 pounds5,000 or 10,000 square feet
Simple Lawn Solutions Energizer Micronutrient Blend6-0-032 ounces3,200 square feet
Simple Lawn Solutions High Nitrogen Lawn Food28-0-032 ounces3,200 square feet
Scotts Green Max Lawn Food27-0-216.67 or 33.33 pounds5,000 or 10,000 square feet
Scotts Turf Builder Lawn Food32-0-412.5 or 37.5 pounds5,000 or 15,000 square feet

Our Top Picks

Without the proper fertilizer or weed and feed for Bermuda grass, your lawn may look sickly and sparse. Each of the following fertilizers provides the nutrients Bermuda lawns need, enhancing color uniformity and promoting a thick, dense turf. 

Best Overall

Scotts Southern Turf Builder Lawn Food

 Best Fertilizer For Bermuda Grass Scotts
Photo: Lowe’s

What We Like

  • Feeds for up to 8 weeks
  • 3 sizes for various property needs 
  • Helps lawns absorb water and nutrients

What We Don’t Like

  • Can’t be used within 1 month of first frost

Specs

  • NPK ratio: 32-0-10
  • Quantity: 14.06, 28.12, or 42.18 pounds
  • Coverage: 5,000, 10,000, or 15,000 square feet

The Scotts Southern Turf Builder lawn food is specifically designed for warm-season grasses like Bermuda grass. Its 32-0-10 NPK ratio provides an ample dose of nitrogen to promote lush, green growth while also supplying a good amount of potassium for enhanced drought and heat tolerance. Though this is our top pick for Bermuda lawn maintenance, it’s safe for use on all grass types and can also be applied while lawns are wet or dry. When used as directed, you can walk on it immediately after application, making it a smart choice for families and pet owners. 

This Bermuda grass care product uses Scotts’ All-in-One Particles technology to build strong, deep roots that can withstand challenging conditions. We also really like that it comes in three sizes yet only requires application every 6 to 8 weeks. Depending on the size of your yard, you may only need one bag. Though watering is not required after application, Scotts says light watering will help it act faster.

Get the Scotts Southern fertilizer for Bermuda grass at Lowe’s, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Scotts.

Best Bang for the Buck

Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Lawn Food

Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Dissolves easily when used with a Garden Feeder
  • Feeds up to 7,200 square feet of Bermuda grass
  • Starts feeding instantly for quick results

What We Don’t Like

  • Ideal application method requires additional purchase

Specs

  • NPK ratio: 36-0-6
  • Quantity: 5 pounds
  • Coverage: 7,200 square feet

Miracle-Gro’s water-soluble lawn food is a fast-acting fertilizer with an NPK ratio of 36-0-6 designed to promote a lush lawn. Its high concentration of nitrogen plus added iron help grass develop a gorgeous green color within days of application. This Miracle-Gro fertilizer is safe for use on both warm- and cool-season grasses and is easy to apply with the aid of the brand’s hose-end garden feeder (sold separately)—simply fill the dispenser with the water-soluble granules, attach a garden hose, and spray the lawn in a uniform pattern. When applied in this way, a 5-pound container can feed lawns up to 7,200 square feet.

Miracle-Gro recommends using this product for Bermuda grass lawn care every 4 to 6 weeks during the growing season. The quick-release formula provides a rapid nutrient boost, making it ideal for lawns in poor condition. 

Get the Miracle-Gro fertilizer for Bermuda grass at Amazon, Ace Hardware, Walmart, or Miracle-Gro.

Best Organic

Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food

 The Best Fertilizer for Bermuda Grass Option Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Safe to walk on immediately 
  • Works for up to 10 weeks
  • Overapplication doesn’t cause turf burn

What We Don’t Like

  • Needs to be applied when lawn is dry and recently mowed

Specs

  • NPK ratio: 10-0-1 
  • Quantity: 17 or 51 pounds
  • Coverage: 5,000 or 15,000 square feet

Jonathan Green’s organic lawn food is a granular fertilizer for Bermuda grass made from a mix of plant and animal proteins like feather meal, soybean meal, molasses, and wheat middlings. Its 10-0-1 NPK slow-release formula provides a steady delivery of nitrogen as well as supplemental iron to keep grass green and lush for up to 10 weeks. 

This organic fertilizer is safe for kids and pets to walk on immediately after application, and even when overapplied, it won’t burn your grass. It’s well suited to both cold- and warm-season grasses and can be used in spring, summer, or fall. For best results, the manufacturer suggests distributing it when grass is dry and has been recently mowed. It’s available in either a 17-pound bag covering up to 5,000 square feet or a 51-pound bag that feeds up to 15,000 square feet, making it easy to find the right fit for lawns of all sizes.

Get the Jonathan Green lawn fertilizer for Bermuda grass at Amazon, Walmart, or Johnathan Green

Best Liquid

Simple Lawn Solutions Energizer Micronutrient Blend

 Best Fertilizer For Bermuda Grass Grade
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Comes with a hose attachment
  • Ideal for small to medium lawns
  • Easy-to-use liquid solution

What We Don’t Like

  • 1 bottle won’t be enough for large lawns

Specs

  • NPK ratio: 6-0-0
  • Quantity: 32 ounces
  • Coverage: 3,200 square feet

The Simple Lawn Solutions lawn energizer has a simple 6-0-0 NPK ratio with added nutrients like sulfur, magnesium, and manganese. This formula helps improve soil composition and supports enzyme production, protein synthesis, and nutrient absorption for a healthy, thick lawn. It’s also enhanced with iron, helping grass produce chlorophyll to create an intensely green hue.

Since this is a liquid pick, its uptake into grass roots and blades is relatively quick, so you should notice results within days of application. Though we chose the 32-ounce size for inclusion in our list, this product is also available in 1- and 2.5-gallon containers—they just don’t come with the convenient spray applicator attached. Since this concentrated product must be diluted, it may be smart to buy the bottle with the applicator first and refill it with more budget-friendly bottles for subsequent use. The 32-ounce size will treat up to 3,200 square feet, while the 2.5-gallon jug covers up to 32,000 square feet. 

Get the Simple Lawn Solutions energizer fertilizer for Bermuda grass at Amazon or Simple Lawn Solutions.

Best Nitrogen Only

Simple Lawn Solutions High Nitrogen Lawn Food

 Best Fertilizer For Bermuda Grass Nitrogen
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Uses a blend of quick- and slow-release nitrogen
  • Comes in a ready-to-use sprayer and bigger jugs
  • Can be used on all types of grass

What We Don’t Like

  • Sprayer bottle has limited coverage

Specs

  • NPK ratio: 28-0-0
  • Quantity: 32 ounces
  • Coverage: 3,200 square feet

If you want immediate greening and lasting results, Simple Lawn Solutions high-nitrogen lawn food is the pick for you. The concentrated liquid has a 28-0-0 NPK ratio with 70 percent quick-release and 30 percent slow-release nitrogen to get Bermuda grass lawns healthy and keep them that way. Like the other Simple Lawn Solutions product on this list, this one is available in a convenient 32-ounce hose-end dispenser jug for easy application over 3,200 square feet of lawn as well as larger bottles that don’t have the sprayer. 

This nitrogen-only product is particularly effective for treating nitrogen deficiencies and enhancing lawn thickness. It’s suitable for use on all types of grass and shows results within days. Still, the fact that it comes in a ready-to-spray bottle does bump up the price a bit, so you may want to buy larger refill bottles after your initial purchase to help bring the overall cost down. 

Get the Simple Lawn Solutions high-nitrogen fertilizer for Bermuda grass at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Simple Lawn Solutions.

Best Fast-Acting

Scotts Green Max Lawn Food

 The Best Fertilizer for Bermuda Grass Option Scotts Green Max Lawn Food
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Has added iron for enhanced greening
  • Results in just 3 days; works for up to 8 weeks
  • Also available in a ready-to-spray liquid formula

What We Don’t Like

  • Can cause turf burn if overapplied

Specs

  • NPK ratio: 27-0-2
  • Quantity: 16.67 or 33.33 pounds
  • Coverage: 5,000 or 10,000 square feet

Scotts Green Max lawn food is a dual-action fertilizer that delivers quick greening and thickening for Bermuda grass and all other lawn types. Its 27-0-2 NPK ratio formula also includes 5 percent iron for enhancing greening in just 3 days, and it can be applied in the spring, summer, or fall. You can spread it while grass is wet or dry and walk over it immediately after. 

Like all high-nitrogen fertilizers, this pick can cause burn grass if overapplied. For best results, Scotts recommends using it with a broadcast/rotary spreader on a setting of 3¼ to 3¾ or a drop spreader on 7 to 7½. A 16.67-pound bag is enough to cover up to 5,000 square feet, and it’s also available in 33.33-pound packages that feed up to 10,000 square feet.

Get the Scotts Green Max fertilizer for Bermuda grass at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, Walmart, or Scotts.

Best for New Grass

Scotts Turf Builder Lawn Food

 The Best Fertilizer for Bermuda Grass Option Scotts Turf Builder Lawn Food
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Safe for use when seeding
  • Promotes root development to prevent future problems
  • Compatible with any grass type

What We Don’t Like

  • Some reports of increased weed growth

Specs

  • NPK ratio: 32-0-4
  • Quantity: 12.5 or 37.5 pounds
  • Coverage: 5,000 or 15,000 square feet

This Turf Builder lawn food from Scotts is safe to use when seeding and helps build deep roots to encourage quick and vigorous growth. Its high nitrogen content is compatible with all grass types, aiding each in absorbing water and nutrients. By encouraging such strong growth, this pick protects your lawn against future problems.

This granular fertilizer comes in 12.5- and 37.5-pound bags for 5,000 or 15,000 square feet of coverage, respectively. It’s easy to apply using a spreader, and Scotts has setting instructions on the back of the bag. For quick results, the company recommends watering after application, though it’s not necessary. Scotts also says your lawn will look its best if you use this product every 6 to 8 weeks during the growing season. 

Get the Scotts Turf Builder fertilizer for Bermuda grass at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Scotts.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Fertilizers for Bermuda Grass

To gather our list of top picks for Bermuda grass fertilizer, we drew on our team’s lawn care experience and the advice of a landscaping expert. We identified the most important features to look for first and then found a variety of products that met those criteria. 

To ensure compatibility with Bermuda grass specifically, we prioritized fertilizers with high amounts of nitrogen, no phosphorus, and relatively low levels of potassium. We also considered ease of application, including frequency of suggested feedings, and looked for both liquid and granular options as well as synthetic and organic options. Lastly, we prioritized products that come in a range of sizes so shoppers with small and large lawns have plenty of excellent fertilizers to choose from. 

What to Consider When Choosing the Best Fertilizer for Bermuda Grass

Reviewing the following considerations prior to making your final fertilizer selection will help ensure you choose the right product for your needs. 

Fertilizer Types

Lawn fertilizers come in three main types: liquid, granular, and water-soluble. Each has its benefits and drawbacks.

  • Liquid: This type of fertilizer gives Bermuda grass a quick burst of nutrients as the grass absorbs them directly through its foliage, which is the quickest way. However, due to their short-lived effects, they typically require more frequent applications. Liquid lawn fertilizers often come concentrated and require a garden-type pump sprayer or hose-end dispenser for application.
  • Granular: Dry granular fertilizers come in tiny pebbles for application with push-type fertilizer spreaders. Some formulations dissolve slowly to release nutrients over time, though some contain a percentage of quick-release nutrients for faster results. Generally speaking, the overall effects of granular fertilizers last longer than those of liquid products, allowing for less frequent applications.
  • Water-soluble: Water-soluble fertilizers are small, sand-like bits that dissolve quickly in water. They’re typically used with a hose-end dispenser so lawnkeepers can fertilize and water the grass simultaneously. Because water-soluble fertilizers generally require a hose for application, they’re best for smaller yards.

NPK Ratio 

Commercial lawn and yard fertilizers contain premeasured quantities of nitrogen (N), which stimulates leafy green growth; phosphorus (P), which plays a vital role in flower and fruit production; and potassium (K), which boosts overall plant health. These three nutrients are listed on the fertilizer package by weight. 

The best fertilizer for Bermuda grass will have an N-P-K ratio high in nitrogen with little or no phosphorus and a small amount of potassium. For example, an NPK ratio of 32-0-10 contains 32 percent nitrogen, no phosphorus, and 10 percent potassium. This is a great ratio for Bermuda grass. 

Organic vs. Synthetic 

Most lawn fertilizers contain synthetic ingredients, but the demand for organic fertilizers made of natural ingredients is increasing. 

  • Organic: Natural lawn fertilizers contain various blends of nonchemical nutrients, such as poultry manure, compost, livestock manure, and earthworm castings. They often cost more because the ingredients require more work to collect, treat, and turn into fertilizer. Most organic lawn fertilizers come in granule form and don’t cause harm to plants or aquatic life if they drain into waterways.
  • Synthetic: Formulated in a lab with chemicals or artificial versions of natural ingredients, synthetic fertilizers contain concentrated nutrients, such as potassium, phosphorus, and nitrogen. Some brands contain other minerals, including calcium or boron, to increase soil health. Excess chemical runoff from synthetic fertilizers may harm fish if it gets into waterways and ponds.

Application

Many types of Bermuda grass require fertilizing only once or twice per growing season to reach their full potential, but some of the new hybrid forms of Bermuda grass, such as Midway, Tifway, or Tifgreen, benefit from more frequent applications. 

The first fertilizer application of the year should be after late spring or early summer once the grass is fully green. At this time, growers can apply an all-purpose lawn fertilizer with a high ratio of nitrogen according to the instructions on the package. If you intend to overseed with more Bermuda grass seed, wait 2 weeks after fertilizing. 

Depending on the product you’re using, you may need to apply a second round of fertilizer in midsummer and a third in the fall. You may want to use a lawn fertilizer containing a higher level of potassium for the fall application, as this will help with disease resistance and root strength for Bermuda grass in winter.

For the best long-term results, consider having the soil tested for deficiencies and add additional nutrients as needed. In most communities, growers can take soil samples to their local County Extension Agency for a comprehensive soil test and nutrient recommendations.

FAQs

Though you probably aren’t still asking, “What is Bermuda grass?” you may still have questions about fertilizing this type of grass. Read on for answers to the most commonly asked questions about the best fertilizers for Bermuda grass. 

Q. How often should I fertilize my Bermuda grass? 

It depends on the fertilizer’s potency and whether it’s a quick- or slow-release formula. In general, Bermuda grass needs fertilizer every 4 to 6 weeks.

Q. When is the best time to fertilize my Bermuda grass?

The best time to fertilize a lawn of Bermuda grass is late spring once it’s fully green. Reapply fertilizer in midsummer and fall or more often depending on the fertilizer’s strength.

Q. How do I apply fertilizer to my lawn?

Use a pump-type sprayer or a hose-end sprayer to apply liquid fertilizer and a push-spreader for granular fertilizers. Be sure to follow the instructions on the package to avoid overapplication that causes fertilizer burn

Q. Can I apply fertilizer to wet grass?

In most cases, yes—though it is best to wait after heavy rain when water is still running off the lawn because the fertilizer could wash away.

Q. Do you have to water after fertilizing?

Most granular fertilizers can remain on the lawn for a couple of days before watering, but check the instructions to be sure.

Q. Should you bag Bermuda grass clippings?

We spoke to Scott Seargeant, an award-winning International Consulting Arborist and owner of Seargeant Landscape & Arboriculture, about whether it’s better to mulch or bag Bermuda grass clippings. He said, “Mulching Bermuda grass is better than bagging it. The clippings will break down and return some of the elements back into the ground where the grass can use them again.”

Q. Can you overfertilize Bermuda grass?

Yes, you can overfertilize Bermuda grass, in fact, overfertilization is one of the fertilizer mistakes most people make

Q. How do you encourage Bermuda grass to spread?

We also asked landscape contractor Scott Seargeant this question, and he gave the following advice: “Mowing Bermuda grass at a lower height of about 1 inch will cause it to grow more horizontally. Adding a moderate amount of fertilizer will increase growth. This should be done in warm to hot weather.”

The post Is Your Bermuda Grass Looking Patchy? Here’s the Best Fertilizer To Fix It appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[The Best Fertilizers for Zoysia Grass]]>A mainstay in warm southern regions, zoysia grass thrives when it receives some nutritional support. Use this guide to find the best fertilizers for nurturing a lush stand of zoysia turf.

The post The Best Fertilizers for Zoysia Grass appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizers-for-zoysia-grass/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=211779Mon, 17 Feb 2025 15:39:33 -0500ReviewsLawn & GardenWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Native to Asia, zoysia is a warm-season turf grass commonly grown in the southern part of the U.S., where summer temps easily reach the century mark. It tolerates extreme heat, high humidity, and even slight drought. In general, most all-purpose lawn fertilizer products are also optimal for zoysia grass because turf grasses have similar nutritional needs. 

Those looking to establish a new zoysia lawn or boost the health of an existing one can often do so by applying lawn fertilizer. Our favorite fertilizer for zoysia grass is the Scotts Green Max Lawn Food for its easy-to-apply granular formula; NPK ratio of 27-0-2; and 10,000-square-foot coverage area. However, we found all the selected products on this list to be effective and reliable. 

Ahead, learn what type of fertilizer is desirable for use on a zoysia spread, and find out why the following lawn-food products are among the best fertilizers for zoysia grass.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Scotts Green Max Lawn Food
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Lawn Food
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST BALANCED FORMULA: Simple Lawn Solutions Advanced 16-4-8 Balanced NPK
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST PLUS WEED CONTROL: Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed 3
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR ALKALINE SOIL: The Andersons PGF Complete 16-4-8 Fertilizer
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST WITH MICRONUTRIENTS: Simple Lawn Solutions Lawn Energizer
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST SLOW-RELEASE: Milorganite Slow-Release Nitrogen 6-4-0 Fertilizer
    Jump to Review
  8. ALSO CONSIDER: Pennington 100536576 UltraGreen Lawn Fertilizer
    Jump to Review
A person pouring a bag of fertilizer into a spreader
Photo: amazon.com

Product Comparison

TypeCoverageNPK Ratio
Scotts Green Max Lawn FoodGranularUp to 10,000 square feet27-0-2
Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Lawn FoodWater-soluble granules Up to 7,200 square feet36-0-6
Simple Lawn Solutions Advanced 16-4-8 Balanced NPKConcentrated liquidUp to 3,200 square feet16-4-8
Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed 3GranularUp to 5,000 square feet28-0-3
The Andersons PGF Complete 16-4-8 FertilizerGranularUp to 5,000 square feet16-4-8
Simple Lawn Solutions Lawn EnergizerConcentrated liquidUp to 12,800 square feet6-0-0 
Milorganite Slow-Release Nitrogen 6-4-0 FertilizerSlow-release granulesUp to 2,500 square feet6-4-0
Pennington 100536576 UltraGreen Lawn FertilizerGranular, slow-releaseUp to 5,000 square feet30-0-4

Our Top Picks

To qualify for a spot in this lineup of the best fertilizers for zoysia grass and be considered an asset to regular lawn care, the following products had to meet specific criteria. They have a higher nitrogen ratio than potassium or phosphorus, which is a must for any lawn fertilizer; they are straightforward to apply; and they contain quality ingredients. The following lawn fertilizers vary slightly in usage and nutritional ingredients, but each is a standout in its category. 

Best Overall

Scotts Green Max Lawn Food

 A Bag of Scotts Green Max Lawn Food - Lawn Fertilizer Plus
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Granular
  • Coverage: Up to 10,000 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 27-0-2 

What We Like

  • Boosts growth and promotes quick greening
  • Can be applied in any season and to any grass variety 
  • Treats areas of up to 10,000 square feet 

What We Don’t Like

  • Can stain concrete, driveways, and other surfaces  

For quick zoysia greening and a boost in growth, consider Scotts Green Max Lawn Food, which features a high nitrogen 27-0-2 NPK ratio. In addition to the standard nutrients, Green Max contains iron, a micronutrient that helps lawn grasses green up quickly. 

The manufacturer recommends using a drop spreader to apply this granular product for best results. When applied as directed, a 33.33-pound bag treats up to 10,000 square feet of lawn. Keep it off sidewalks and driveways, as iron tends to leave rusty stains on concrete and masonry. Brush off any errant product with a broom promptly to prevent staining.  

Get the Scotts Green Max fertilizer for zoysia grass at Walmart.

Best Bang For The Buck

Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Lawn Food

 A bag of Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Lawn Food
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Water-soluble granules 
  • Coverage: Up to 7,200 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 36-0-6

What We Like

  • Absorbs quickly into the ground  
  • Easy to apply 
  • Suitable for small to large yards

What We Don’t Like

  • Must have a hose applicator to apply (not included)

There’s no need to spend a lot of green to feed a zoysia lawn. Miracle-Gro’s affordable water-soluble fertilizer comes with a high-nitrogen NPK ratio of 36-0-6, which helps grass develop a rich green color while boosting health and encouraging dense growth. 

This option comes in a 5-pound bag of water-soluble fertilizer. Just dump a bag into a hose-end applicator, and connect the applicator to the end of a garden hose. When the water is turned on, the fertilizer is diluted and dispersed evenly for spraying over the lawn. A single box treats up to 7,200 square feet and is mild enough to use every 2 to 3 weeks if desired. It’s a budget-friendly way to keep a zoysia lawn healthy and looking great. 

Get the Miracle-Gro fertilizer for zoysia grass at Amazon or Ace Hardware.

Best Balanced Formula

Simple Lawn Solutions Advanced 16-4-8 Balanced NPK

 A bottle of Simple Lawn Solutions Advanced 16-4-8 Balanced NPK
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Concentrated liquid
  • Coverage: Up to 3,200 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 16-4-8 

What We Like

  • Contains beneficial nutrients
  • Comes with a built-in sprayer attachment use 
  • Suitable for 3,200 square feet of any grass type 

What We Don’t Like

  • Slightly pricey for the coverage area provided 
  • Some users have reported difficulty using the hose attachment 

Those looking to add a broader range of nutrients to their zoysia lawn may appreciate Simple Lawn Solutions Advanced 16-4-8 liquid fertilizer. It provides ample nitrogen and smaller amounts of phosphorus and potassium to help with root growth and encourage rich color. The product also contains seaweed and fish emulsions that may help balance soil that lacks nutrients (a soil test is recommended to be sure). 

Simple Lawn Solutions is a concentrated liquid, but there’s no need to worry about measuring or mixing. It comes in its own spray dispenser that attaches to a garden hose for uniform distribution. One 32-ounce bottle treats up to 3,200 square feet of lawn.

Get the Simple Lawn Solutions Advanced fertilizer for zoysia grass at Amazon, or Simple Lawn Solutions.

Best Plus Weed Control

Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed 3

 A bag of Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Granular
  • Coverage: Up to 5,000 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 28-0-3 

What We Like

  • High nitrogen content for lawn greening
  • Suitable for areas of up to 5,000 square feet  
  • Easy to apply with most broadcast or drop fertilizer spreaders 

What We Don’t Like

  • Herbicide performance may suffer if the lawn is dry at application
  • Should not be exposed to water within 24 hours of application 

Dandelions and clover are no match for Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed 3, which does double duty as a fertilizer and a pesky weed killer. Its high-nitrogen NPK ratio is 28-0-3, making it well suited for greening up lawns, including zoysia lawns, and encouraging the grass to reach a rich color. 

In addition to its nutritional content, Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed contains 2,4-D, a selective herbicide that kills annual weeds but won’t harm zoysia grass. The manufacturer recommends mowing the grass and watering it before applying this fertilizer—the 2,4-D herbicide adheres best to damp leaf blades, giving it the most weed-killing power. 

One 14.29-pound bag of granular Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed for zoysia grass treats up to 5,000 square feet of lawn and is suitable for use in a broadcast or drop spreader. 

Get the Scotts Turf Builder fertilizer for zoysia grass at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Best For Soil Conditioner

The Andersons PGF Complete 16-4-8 Fertilizer

 A bag of The Andersons Professional PGF Complete 16-4-8
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Granular
  • Coverage: Up to 5,000 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 16-4-8 

What We Like

  • High nitrogen content as well as humic acid
  • Slow-release nutrients
  • Small particle size good for even distribution 
  • Fast-acting formula offers visible results in 6 to 14 days

What We Don’t Like

  • Other amendments may be required to reduce high pH levels

Zoysia grass grows best in soil with a pH between 6 and 6.5, but if your yard is higher on the pH scale, fertilizing with a product that neutralizes pH might be a good idea. (Rather than guessing at the pH level, the best course of action is to have the soil tested by a local extension agency or soil test kit.) 

The Andersons Professional PGF fertilizer contains humic acid, which helps neutralize pH levels in any turf type. In addition, the product features a 16-4-8 NPK ratio, so the grass will receive a healthy dose of nitrogen and small amounts of phosphorus and potassium. An 18-pound bag of The Andersons PGF fertilizer will treat up to 5,000 square feet for up to 8 weeks, with visible results in 6 to 14 days. 

Be aware that this product can help neutralize the pH level, but depending on the soil test results, it may not be sufficient for reducing it to an optimal level for growing zoysia. A professional soil test will be required to determine that. 

Get The Andersons fertilizer for zoysia grass at Amazon (18 pounds).

Best For Maintenance

Simple Lawn Solutions Lawn Energizer

 A bottle of Simple Lawn Solutions Lawn Energizer
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Concentrated liquid
  • Coverage: Up to 12,800 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 6-0-0 

What We Like

  • Nitrogen for boosting grass color
  • Easy-to-use concentrated liquid
  • Can be used on all grass types

What We Don’t Like

  • Must be diluted and poured into a sprayer (not included)

Most of the time, high nitrogen is all that’s necessary to boost grass color and health, but that doesn’t mean additional nutrients won’t be beneficial, especially if the soil is depleted of natural nutrients (a soil test is the best way to find out).

Simple Lawn Solutions Lawn Energizer contains an added oomph of nutrients, including iron, magnesium, and manganese, which are trace minerals designed to enhance soil. The iron and nitrogen content encourages a rich color and robust growth, while the other nutrients may help root growth and overall grass density. 

The product comes in a 1-gallon concentrated liquid form and can be diluted and applied via a pump-type garden sprayer to spaces of up to 12,800 square feet. Note: While Lawn Energizer may boost the health of slightly depleted soil, it may not be sufficient for correcting significant soil problems—only the result of a professional soil test will let home landscapers know how to properly amend the soil. 

Get the Simple Lawn Solutions Energizer fertilizer for zoysia grass at Amazon and Simple Lawn Solutions (32 ounces).

Best Slow-Release

Milorganite 32 lb. Slow-Release Nitrogen Fertilizer

 A bag of Milorganite 32 lb. Slow-Release Nitrogen Fertilizer
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Slow-release granules
  • Coverage: Up to 2,500 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 6-4-0 

What We Like

  • Slowly releases nutrients into the grass
  • Provides quick greening and healthy growth 
  • Environmentally friendly formula  

What We Don’t Like

  • Iron ingredients may stain concrete if not removed promptly 
  • May leave behind a slight earthy aroma when first applied 

Some lawn fertilizers should be applied every 2 weeks, but Milorganite Slow-Release Nitrogen Fertilizer dissolves gradually, so it keeps feeding the grass for up to 10 weeks. This product has a 6-4-0 NPK ratio and contains iron to help green up the lawn quickly. 

A 32-pound bag of Milorganite Fertilizer treats up to 2,500 square feet of lawn. If that seems like less coverage than other fertilizers, keep in mind that it works longer, so fewer feedings are necessary throughout the summer. The granulated formulation can be applied with a drop spreader or a broadcast spreader. To keep the iron in the product from staining concrete, sweep away any excess product that gets on sidewalks and patios immediately after application. 

Get the Milorganite fertilizer for zoysia grass at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Ace Hardware.

Also Consider

Pennington 100536576 UltraGreen Lawn Fertilizer

 A bag of Pennington UltraGreen Lawn Fertilizer
Photo: amazon.com

Product Specs 

  • Type: Granular, slow-release
  • Coverage: Up to 5,000 square feet
  • NPK ratio: 30-0-4 

What We Like

  • Contains iron for thick greening
  • Provides helpful nutrients for up to 3 months
  • Compatible with most drop or broadcast spreaders  

What We Don’t Like

  • Iron ingredients may stain concrete if not promptly removed 
  • Suitable for application between June and August only 

The combination of 5 percent fast-acting iron and 10.5 percent slow-release nitrogen in this Pennington UltraGreen lawn fertilizer is just the ticket for enhancing lackluster lawns for up to 3 months. With an NPK ratio of 30-0-4, there’s plenty of nitrogen to go around, but it dissolves gradually over 3 months to keep grass consistently fed. The iron in Pennington UltraGreen is fast-acting and will help grass develop a rich green color in a few short days. 

A 14-pound bag of Pennington UltraGreen covers up to 5,000 square feet and can be applied by either a drop spreader or a broadcast spreader. Be sure to sweep away any product that gets on patios or sidewalks to prevent staining from the iron in the mix. 

Get the Pennington fertilizer for zoysia grass at Amazon, or The Home Depot.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Fertilizers for Zoysia Grass

Lawn fertilizer products are straightforward, and most contain high nitrogen levels, the most critical nutrient for greening up a lawn and boosting growth. We looked extensively at dozens of lawn fertilizer products before selecting the ones in this lineup as among the best for zoysia grass. 

In general, most lawn fertilizers will be good bets for applying to zoysia grass because zoysia has the same nutritional needs as other turfgrasses. We looked at nationally known companies with stellar reputations for making quality lawn and garden products, such as Miracle-Gro and Scotts. Still, we didn’t automatically eliminate fertilizers from smaller or niche manufacturers if they contained quality ingredients. 

Finally, we looked at how satisfied customers were with different lawn fertilizer products. In the final analysis, we considered products containing additional ingredients, although our focus was still on ensuring that the product had adequate nitrogen.

What to Consider When Choosing a Fertilizer for Zoysia Grass

Keep a few basic factors in mind when shopping for a zoysia fertilizer, including yard size and product coverage rates, the overall health of the existing soil, and the preferred application method. For the best results, test the soil before applying fertilizer. Soil test kits are available online and from local extension agencies, many of which allow users to ship samples to a professional lab for testing and soil amendment recommendations.

Standard lawn fertilizers typically do not contain all the components necessary to correct significant soil problems. Rather, their primary purpose is to boost the color of the grass and make it grow faster.

Type

Fertilizer products for treating zoysia lawns are available in three standard types: liquid, water-soluble, and granular. Each has its benefits and considerations.

  • Liquid: For the quickest fertilizer uptake, consider applying a liquid product. Of the three types of fertilizer, liquid works the fastest because the blades of grass readily absorb the product. Liquid fertilizers come in ready-to-use solutions and concentrated formulas that require dilution with water.
  • Water-soluble: This fertilizer looks grainy, but when mixed with water, it dissolves almost immediately, making it suitable for treating with hose-end applicators. Miracle-Gro fertilizers are often water-soluble, and using them is as easy as dumping a premeasured packet into a hose-end container and then spraying old or new grass. This type of product is absorbed just as quickly as a liquid product.
  • Granular: Rather than spraying, granular lawn fertilizers are applied using a fertilizer spreader, such as a drop spreader or broadcast spreader. Many are formulated to release the nutrients over time for continuous lawn feeding.

Soil pH

Zoysia grass grows well in various soil types, including sandy soil and loamy soil. It prefers a slightly acidic soil types from 6 to 6.5 on the pH scale. However, it will often tolerate slightly more alkaline or more acidic soil types (within a 0.4-point range) if other needs are met, such as regular watering and fertilizing. A few types of zoysia grass fertilizer provide pH-balance ingredients. Still, if the existing soil is over 7 (too alkaline) or under 5.6 (too acidic), it may require the application of different amendments, such as sulfur or lime. The only way to know for sure is to have the soil tested at a lab and then amended according to the recommendations before zoysia fertilization.

NPK Ratio

On virtually all zoysia grass fertilizing products (except a few all-natural products), buyers will find an NPK ratio that signifies the amount of the three essential nutrients found in fertilizer: nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), and potassium (K).

Zoysia is like other turf grasses when it comes to an optimal NPK ratio. Look for a ratio where the amount of nitrogen is higher than both phosphorus and potassium. For zoysia, a typical NPK ratio might be 15-1-5, which indicates the product contains 15 parts nitrogen, 1 part phosphorus, and 5 parts potassium by volume. 

Nitrogen is necessary for giving zoysia grass a rich green color and for boosting healthy growth. Some lawn fertilizer formulations may contain no phosphorus or potassium at all, in which case the package might read 10-0-0.

Organic vs. Synthetic

Most lawn fertilizers contain synthetic components, but a growing number of manufacturers are developing all-natural fertilizers as consumer preference for eco-friendly products increases. Lawn grasses typically react the same way to the nutrients in either type of fertilizer, so the zoysia grass will benefit from both.

  • Synthetic: Fertilizers that contain chemical and artificial ingredients, such as synthetic forms of minerals and nutrients, are often less expensive to produce than natural products. These fertilizers will not go bad but may lose some of their effectiveness over time. 
  • Organic: Shoppers will likely notice how much more expensive all-natural fertilizers are than synthetic options—some organic products run more than three times as much for a product that covers the same size lawn. The price difference lies in the difficulty of manufacturing organic fertilizers, which typically include earthworm castings and sterilized manure ingredients. Organic fertilizers are often safer to use around pets and people, depending on the specific product.

Application

Zoysia grass doesn’t green up as early in the spring as cool-season grasses, such as fescue, and the general rule of thumb is to wait to apply fertilizer to zoysia until it’s fully green. By waiting, the grass gets a chance to green up naturally, which prompts its roots to wake up from winter and draw on their own energy. This gives them a solid start to the growing season. After the zoysia is green, applying a nitrogen fertilizer will help it maintain rich color and boost growth. 

Deciding when to fertilize zoysia also depends on the product. Some products call for applying fertilizer as often as twice a month, while others should be used just once per growing season. Additionally, consider fertilizing the zoysia lawn one last time in the fall. This will strengthen the grass and help it remain resilient and healthy during its upcoming winter dormancy.

FAQs

Zoysia is a hardy, robust type of grass that thrives in heat, but it still requires some care to reach its full lush potential and stay healthy all summer long. Those learning how to care for zoysia grass will undoubtedly have some questions: What is the best fertilizer for zoysia grass, and what makes a zoysia lawn denser?

Q. When should I fertilize my zoysia lawn?

Apply fertilizer in mid to late spring after the grass greens up, then follow the manufacturer’s instructions for subsequent applications, ranging from every 6 to 12 weeks during the growing season. A final application in the fall before the grass goes dormant is also a good idea to protect the roots of zoysia during its dormancy.

Q. Can you overfertilize zoysia grass?

Yes, it’s possible to overfertilize and weaken the grass by applying the fertilizer at a rate that exceeds the recommended rate or by using fertilizer more often than recommended.

Q. How do I make my zoysia grass green?

Apply a lawn fertilizer that’s high in nitrogen, such as NPK 15-0-8. The high nitrogen will encourage a rich green color. Users will also want to apply fertilizer to grass in the spring when new seedlings are beginning to sprout to ensure they are hardy when fully grown.

Q. How do I make my zoysia grass thicker?

Zoysia grass spreads by rhizomes that run beneath the soil. The healthier the grass is, the denser it will become. In addition to zoysia grass fertilization, mow the lawn regularly (once or twice a week) and water during times of drought.

Q. Does zoysia grass require a lot of water?

Zoysia can tolerate frequent rainfall and slight drought conditions, but it will stay the healthiest with regular watering. Good zoysia grass care includes making sure the lawn has a minimum of 1 inch of water per week.

Q. How tall should you cut zoysia grass?

Zoysia is a low-growing grass that should be kept mowed at about 1 to 3 inches depending on the type of yard space and the sun exposure. Those with a lot of sun exposure will want to trim their grass to a maximum of 1.5 inches, while those with partial shade will want to consider a 2- to 3-inch mowing height. This is also convenient for those who don’t want to do a lot of maintenance since zoysia grass tends to grow slowly.

The post The Best Fertilizers for Zoysia Grass appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[The Best Weed and Feed Products for Fewer Weeds and Greener Grass, Tested]]>Make any lawn look healthy and green by selecting the right weed and feed product.

The post The Best Weed and Feed Products for Fewer Weeds and Greener Grass, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-weed-and-feed/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-weed-and-feed/Mon, 17 Feb 2025 15:17:06 -0500ReviewsDIYLandscapingLawn & GardenLawn CareLawn Care & GardeningLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

A drab, weedy lawn isn’t a lost cause with the help of modern weed and feed fertilizers. Designed to introduce essential nutrients to accelerate the grass’s growth, these products help lawns grow thick and healthy. At the same time, they put the hurt on weeds to choke out the plants you don’t want in favor of the lush carpet of greenery you do. After researching the top fertilizer mixes, we tested eight of the top weed and feeds on a lawn that needed some serious help. These weed and feed products were all tested for at least 4 weeks with varying results and levels of success.

After testing, we can say that our favorite is the GreenView Broadleaf Weed Control Plus Lawn Food. It’s highly concentrated, so it doesn’t take much product to make a big difference. We tested the products in a grid, and the square with this product outgrew (and out-greened) all the others. 

The test lawn needed both nutrients and weed reduction, so it gave us the perfect canvas for testing. Keep reading to get a look at how the best weed and feed performed in real-world conditions and what kind of growth (and weed death) you can expect in your own yard.

  1. BEST OVERALL: GreenView Broadleaf Weed Control Plus Lawn Food
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed
    Jump to Review
  3. UPGRADE PICK: BioAdvanced 5-in-1 Weed & Feed
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST NATURAL: Espoma Organic Weed Preventer
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST COOL-SEASON: GreenView Fairway Formula Spring Weed and Feed
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST WARM-SEASON: Scotts Turf Builder Southern Triple Action
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST LIQUID: Scotts Liquid Turf Builder With Plus 2 Weed Control
    Jump to Review
The Best Weed and Feed Product Options
Photo: Stacey L. Nash for Bob Vila

Before You Buy Weed and Feed 

Maintaining a healthy lawn includes mowing, weeding, watering, and fertilizing. However, fertilizing isn’t always necessary. Overfertilizing a lawn will make the grass grow more vigorously, requiring more frequent mowing or leading to runoff, which ends up in the local watershed. 

Excessive fertilizing can also result in lawn burn, which is when the nitrogen and salt levels in the soil are too high and cause yellow to brown strips or patches of dead grass. A lawn only needs fertilizing if the soil lacks the vital nutrients to help it grow. Home soil test kits can be used to check the soil composition and help you decide what type of fertilizer will best nourish your grass. 

Product Comparison

NPK RatioApplicationGrass Type
GreenView Broadleaf Weed Control Plus Lawn Food27-0-4Spring or early fallKentucky bluegrass, fine and tall fescues, perennial ryegrass, Bahia, St. Augustine, common Bermuda, hybrid Bermuda, zoysia, centipede, Colonial bent
Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed26-0-2SpringKentucky bluegrass, fescue, ryegrass, centipede, Bahia, Bermuda, zoysia
BioAdvanced 5-in-1 Weed & Feed22-0-4Spring, early summer, fallBermuda, fescue, buffalo grass, seashore paspalum, zoysia
Espoma Organic Weed Preventer9-0-0SpringAll grasses
GreenView Fairway Formula Spring Weed and Feed24-0-6Spring or fallKentucky bluegrass, Bermuda, buffalo grass, perennial ryegrass, fine and tall fescues, Bahia, centipede, zoysia, St. Augustine (except for Floratam)
Scotts Turf Builder Southern Triple Action29-0-10Active growth periodsSt. Augustine, Floratam, zoysia, centipede, carpet grass
Scotts Liquid Turf Builder With Plus 2 Weed Control25-0-2Spring or fallBahia, Bermuda, centipede, zoysia, Kentucky bluegrass, fescue, ryegrass

Our Top Picks

The following list includes the fertilizers that stood out during research and were then tested to narrow the field to some of the most effective weed and feeds on the market. This list includes both liquid and granular weed treatments. 

Best Overall

GreenView Broadleaf Weed Control Plus Lawn Food

 A bag of GreenView Broadleaf Weed Control Plus Lawn Food on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Doesn’t require a lot of product to make a difference
  • Capable of killing over 250 weed varieties
  • Slow-release nitrogen formula
  • Made a noticeable difference in grass growth rate and health

What We Don’t Like

  • Should not be used on Floratam St. Augustine, Dichondra, and carpet grass 
  • Contains 2,4-D

Our Ratings: Application 5/5; Feed Effectiveness 5/5; Weed Control 2.5/5; Value 5/5 

Product Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 27-0-4
  • Application: Spring or early fall
  • Grass type: Kentucky bluegrass, fine and tall fescues, perennial ryegrass, Bahia, St. Augustine, common Bermuda, hybrid Bermuda, zoysia, centipede, Colonial bent

Taking care of a lawn and reducing common weeds is part of property ownership, and for those who want to spruce up lawn health quickly, this GreenView weed and feed mix can do it. This fertilizer and weed killer for lawns is made with a slow-release nitrogen formula that thickens grass, without excessive growth, targeting 250 weed varieties, including dandelions, clover, plantain, dollar weed, and ground ivy. It was the top performer in our testing, creating grass that outgrew the rest. It’s also a great spring or fall weed and feed.

The granules are effective for over 8 weeks and are safe to use on warm- and cool-season grass types, though there are a few varieties to avoid. Plus, the slow release nitrogen is safer to use when temperatures start to rise without burning the grass or causing other lawn injury.

The grass was noticeably taller and greener in the square with this GreenView mix. It’s also a highly concentrated fertilizer and weed preventer, so it doesn’t take a large amount to make a big difference in lawn health. While it didn’t kill existing weeds, fewer weeds grew in the area where this mix was applied. Our only issue with this product is that it contains 2,4-D (as did almost all of the other synthetic products in this test), which has the potential to affect human health and the environment. Make sure to read the application instructions to reduce the potential harmful effects.

Get the GreenView broadleaf weed and feed at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., The Home Depot, Walmart (39 pounds), or GreenView.

Best Bang for the Buck

Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed

 A bag of Scotts Turf Builder Weed and Feed on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Quick, tangible results for thickening grass and preventing weeds
  • Highly concentrated and ample quantity
  • Compatible with multiple grass varieties

What We Don’t Like

  • Not suitable for warm-season grasses
  • Contains 2,4-D

Our Ratings: Application 5/5; Feed Effectiveness 4.5/5; Weed Control 2.5/5; Value 4/5 

Product Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 26-0-2
  • Application: Spring
  • Grass type: Kentucky bluegrass, fescue, ryegrass, centipede, Bahia, Bermuda, zoysia

Scotts is a well-known brand with an extensive range of lawn care products, including fertilizer and weed and grass killer. This product combines the strongest weed and feed for lawns available from Scotts. It’s supposed to kill common broadleaf weeds like dandelions and clover using WeedGrip technology while feeding the lawn for thicker grass. However, our testing revealed more feed than weed. Granted, the lawn we tested it on has a serious clover and dandelion problem. It’s possible the weed issues were too much even for this powerful weed killer. While we didn’t see a noticeable difference in weed health, they didn’t proliferate.

Scotts Turf Builder is one of the most popular and economical fertilizer and weed control combination products available. Although this weed and feed for Bermuda grass works on many common turf grasses, such as fescue, centipede, Kentucky bluegrass, ryegrass, Bahia, and zoysia, it’s not recommended for some warm-season grasses, such as St. Augustine, Dichondra, or carpet grass. As a synthetic product, it contains 2,4-D, which has the potential to damage human and environmental health.

Get the Scotts Turf Builder weed and feed at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot. 

Upgrade Pick

BioAdvanced 5-in-1 Weed & Feed

 A bag of BioAdvanced 5-in-1 Weed & Feed on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Works on over 200 weed and grassy-weed varieties 
  • Long-lasting formula feeds for up to 3 months
  • Provides nutrients as well as heat and drought resistance
  • Requires a minimal amount of mix to make a big difference in lawn health

What We Don’t Like

  • Not suitable for new grass
  • Contains 2,4-D

Our Ratings: Application 5/5; Feed Effectiveness 5/5; Weed Control 3.5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 22-0-4
  • Application: Spring, early summer, fall
  • Grass type: Bermuda, fescue, buffalo grass, seashore paspalum, zoysia

Taking care of grass while keeping away common weeds and crabgrass can be exhausting and time-consuming. But the BioAdvanced 5-in-1 weed and feed long-lasting formula greens grass and boosts growth so much that users might need to add an extra cutting to their weekly routine. This potent mix can act as a grass killer for crabgrass as well as broadleaf weeds like clover, dandelion, chickweed, and 200 other weed and grassy-weed varieties. It also strengthens established grass by fortifying roots. 

With a coverage area of over 4,000 square feet, this weed and feed mix resists the effects of heat and drought and is safe to use on cool-season grass types. It’s also a highly concentrated mix, requiring a minimal amount to be effective. 

In testing, it made a big difference in grass growth rate and health, making the grass noticeably brighter and taller. However, it didn’t do much to choke out the clover and weeds, though it showed some ability to prevent new weeds from sprouting. It also contains 2,4-D, a chemical that can potentially harm the environment or people.

Get the BioAdvanced weed and feed at Lowe’s, Walmart, or BioAdvanced.

Best Natural

Espoma Organic Weed Preventer

 A bag of Espoma Organic Weed Preventer on a white background.
Photo: acehardware.com

What We Like

  • Made from 100 percent corn gluten meal
  • Can be used in any season and is compatible with all lawn types
  • Can be used in flower beds or vegetable gardens

What We Don’t Like

  • Only covers 1,250 square feet of lawn
  • Doesn’t fertilize or control weeds as well as synthetic products

Our Ratings: Application 5/5; Feed Effectiveness 4/5; Weed Control 2.5/5; Value 3.5/5 

Product Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 9-0-0
  • Application: Spring
  • Grass type: All grasses

Espoma’s Organic Weed Preventer is a natural solution to prevent lawn weeds without harming the environment. This product is made with 100 percent corn gluten meal, which is a byproduct of the corn-milling process that contains a high amount of nitrogen. When applied to your lawn, the nitrogen in the corn gluten meal provides a slow-release fertilizer to nourish the grass and make it more resistant to weeds. Additionally, the corn gluten meal acts as a natural pre-emergent herbicide that inhibits the growth of weed seeds by drying out their roots.

Unlike chemical-based weed preventers, Espoma’s Organic Weed Preventer is safe for pets, children, and the environment. It can safely be used on flower beds and in gardens. During testing, we found that much more of this mix is required to be as effective as synthetic fertilizers. The granules are also more noticeable on the lawn. However, we didn’t have to worry about children or pets walking on that lawn while the granules were still visible. We also appreciated that it can safely be used on flowers and vegetable gardens. 

This fertilizer/weed preventer did improve grass color and growth, but it didn’t perform as well as synthetic products. Espoma can help prevent pre-emergent weeds, but not those already growing.

Get the Espoma weed and feed at Ace Hardware or Walmart. 

Best Cool-Season

GreenView Fairway Formula Spring Weed and Feed

 A bag of GreenView Fairway Formula Spring Weed and Feed on a white background.
Photo: tractorsupply.com

What We Like

  • Kills over 200 varieties of weeds
  • Slow-release formula fertilizes for up to 12 weeks
  • 36-pound bag treats up to 10,000 square feet of lawn
  • Made a noticeable difference in the health and growth rate

What We Don’t Like

  • Contains 2,4-D
  • Didn’t kill existing weeds

Our Ratings: Application 5/5; Feed Effectiveness 5/5; Weed Control 2.5/5; Value 4.5/5 

Product Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 24-0-6
  • Application: Spring or fall
  • Grass type: Kentucky bluegrass, Bermuda, buffalo grass, perennial ryegrass, fine and tall fescues, Bahia, centipede, zoysia, St. Augustine (except for Floratam)

GreenView Fairway Formula fertilizes lawns, targets over 200 lawn weed species, and prevents crabgrass from growing. It contains both slow-release and quick-release nutrients that feed a lawn for up to 12 weeks at a time. We like that the slow release reduces the number of times the fertilizer would need to be applied in a year. 

Due to the slow-releasing formula, GreenView Fairway Formula is best for use on established lawns with a healthy root system. Using it on new grass may result in burning and stunted growth. It can be used on warm- or cool-season grasses, but check the acceptable grass varieties as there are some exceptions. 

This mix noticeably boosted grass health during testing, with the grass growing at a faster rate and being greener than non-treated grass. It comes in a large bag and doesn’t require a lot of granules to be effective, making it an economical option for large lawns. However, we didn’t notice any difference in weed health, either killing them or preventing more from growing. 

Get the GreenView Fairway Formula weed and feed at Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware (18 pounds), The Home Depot, Walmart, or GreenView.

Best Warm-Season

Scotts Turf Builder Southern Triple Action

 A bag of Scotts Turf Builder Southern Triple Action on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Helps lawns withstand heat and drought
  • Large coverage area of up to 8,000 square feet
  • High-nitrogen formula

What We Don’t Like

  • Not safe for people and pets until fully watered in and dry
  • Contains Atrazine

Product Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 29-0-10
  • Application: Active growth periods
  • Grass type: St. Augustine, Floratam, zoysia, centipede, carpet grass

We understand that warm-season grasses need a weed and feed that can withstand heat and drought conditions while building a thick green lawn. Scotts Turf Builder Southern Triple Action is a 3-in-1 weed and feed made for southern lawns. It’s safe for use on St. Augustine, zoysia, centipede, and carpet grasses, but it’s not recommended for use on Bermuda grass. This product also contains an insecticide that targets fire ants, mole crickets, sod webworms, fleas, armyworms, and more, and it keeps them away for up to 6 months. 

Please note that this product wasn’t tested due to the geographic location of the tester.

Get the Scotts Turf Builder Southern weed and feed at Amazon, Tractor Supply Co., The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best Liquid

Scotts Liquid Turf Builder With Plus 2 Weed Control

 A spray bottle of Scotts Liquid Turf Builder With Plus 2 Weed Control on a white background.
Photo: amazon.com

What We Like

  • Suitable for fertilizing and weeding in any season on any grass type
  • Easy to apply
  • Affordable
  • Noticeably killed weeds after a single application

What We Don’t Like

  • Contains 2,4-D

Our Ratings: Application 4/5; Feed Effectiveness 3/5; Weed Control 2.5/5; Value 1.5/5 

Product Specs 

  • NPK ratio: 25-0-2
  • Application: Spring or fall
  • Grass type: Bahia, Bermuda, centipede, zoysia, Kentucky bluegrass, fescue, ryegrass

Scotts Liquid Turf Builder weed spray lets users easily fertilize a lawn while killing dandelions and clover. One of this product’s best features is the ease of application. All that’s required is for the user to attach the applicator to a garden hose and apply this liquid weed and feed concentrate spray as needed. The process was easy during testing. The bottle has a clear strip so we could see how much we’d applied as we went along. That was helpful, as we applied it to a small area and didn’t want to use the entire bottle. 

Scotts weed and feed helps control buckhorn, chickweed, clover, dandelion, ground ivy, henbit, knotweed, and more. Scotts Liquid Turf Builder weed and feed spray can be used with almost any grass type during any season. When used as directed, it won’t burn the lawn and only requires one or two treatments per year. However, for those who don’t notice a change in weeds after one application, it can be applied again within 3 to 4 weeks. 

The brand says there should be a noticeable decline in weeds after a few days, but we didn’t notice weeds dying out until 3 weeks into testing. This was one of the few products that killed existing weeds. While it increased grass growth and deepened the green somewhat, it didn’t have the drastic health benefits for the grass as some of the other weed and feeds we tested.

Get the Scotts liquid weed and feed at Amazon, Lowe’s, Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot.

Or, DIY Your Own Weed and Feed

While there are many effective weed and feed products on the market, using commercial weed and feed can be expensive and harmful to the environment. A more natural solution is to make a DIY weed and feed using safe and effective ingredients. 

Mix 1 pound of corn gluten meal, 1 cup of Epsom salt, and 1 cup of dried lawn clippings to make your own weed and feed. Corn gluten meal acts as a natural pre-emergent herbicide that prevents weed seeds from germinating, while Epsom salt provides magnesium and sulfur to nourish the grass. Dried lawn clippings act as a slow-release fertilizer that provides nutrients for healthy lawn growth. By using this natural DIY weed and feed, users can maintain a beautiful and healthy lawn without harming the environment.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Weed and Feed

Testing Stats
Products tested:7
Hours spent testing:8 weeks
Tests performed:1
Price range:$20 to $70

We created a numbered grid using marking paint and stakes, and one weed and feed fertilizer was applied in each square. The exception was the liquid weed and feed, which required application in a larger area; it was applied to a 100-square-foot area next to the grid. 

We calculated how much weed and feed to spread in each square based on the manufacturer’s instructions so that we didn’t over- or under-fertilize. The space was small enough that we spread the fertilizers by hand to prevent them from mixing. We then took pictures upon application and once a week for 4 weeks. Each weed and feed was scored according to a rubric based on how much product it required, how well it performed, and the ingredients. We also considered the eco-friendliness of each fertilizer, looking for nontoxic options and also pet-friendly weed and feed. 

What to Consider When Choosing Weed and Feed 

Not every weed and feed formula works on every type of grass or in every climate. You need to keep in mind the type of grass, the weed species you want to target, and fertilizer ingredients. Different weed and feeds are also designed for application during different seasons to provide nutrients the grass needs at specific stages of the growth cycle and to better target weeds when they’re at their most vulnerable. 

Weed and Feed Type

Weed and feed can be divided into several types. The first is between natural and chemical weed and feeds. Natural weed and feeds may be organic (but not always) and often contain cornmeal as a natural weed preventative and grass fertilizer. These weed and feeds do not contain synthetic chemicals. 

Chemical weed and feeds can be further divided into pre- and post-emergent weed and feeds. Pre-emergent weed and feeds contain chemicals that prevent weed seeds from germinating. They do not target already existing weeds. Post-emergent weed and feeds contain chemicals that target existing weeds while fertilizing grass. However, some products (like BioAdvanced 5-in-1 Weed & Feed, our upgrade pick), contain chemicals that affect both pre- and post-emergent weeds. 

Grass Type

The best weed and feed product for a lawn depends on the grass type. Grass species have different nutrient requirements, so not all products are safe for every species of grass. Using the wrong weed and feed can stunt growth, burn, or further damage the grass. In general, grass species are divided into two categories: warm season and cool season. The seasons do not refer to the time of year but the climate and average soil temperature range. 

  • Warm-season turfgrasses grow best with average soil temperatures between 80 and 95 degrees Fahrenheit. Warm-season grasses thrive in the warmer climates of the southeastern and southwestern United States. They include Bahia, Bermuda, carpet grass, St. Augustine, and zoysia (Japanese lawn grass).
  • Cool-season turfgrasses grow best with average soil temperatures between 60 and 75 degrees Fahrenheit. Cool-season grasses thrive in the cooler climates of the Midwest and northern regions of the United States. Some cool-season grasses are Kentucky bluegrass, perennial ryegrass, and tall and hard fescue.

Selecting a weed and feed that’s compatible with the grass species will provide far better results.

NPK Ratio

To grow a lush lawn, your soil needs to have essential nutrients. Fertilizers temporarily add nutrients to the soil. Fertilizers typically list their nutrient ratios as an NPK formula. This denotation represents the percentage of nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), and potassium (K) in the product. 

  • Nitrogen (N) helps the grass grow properly and develop a green color.
  • Phosphorus (P) helps develop strong root systems.
  • Potassium (K) protects plants from disease, drought, and cold. 

There are at least 11 states that ban phosphorus fertilizer use or sale. Luckily, many lawn weed and feed manufacturers have adapted to this and removed phosphorus from their products. Don’t worry—the weed and feed will still green and thicken the grass without the additional phosphorus.

Fertilizers can also contain secondary elements and micronutrients needed for healthy growth, such as sulfur, calcium, magnesium, boron, iron, molybdenum, zinc, copper, chloride, nickel, and manganese. To find out exactly what nutrients the lawn needs, conduct a soil test. Either purchase a test for home use or take a soil sample to the local cooperative extension testing office. 

Natural vs. Synthetic

There are distinct differences between natural and synthetic weed and feeds. 

Natural and organic weed and feed products contain plant-based or mineral ingredients that are safe for the environment and human health. They nourish the soil and plants to make them more resistant to weeds and prevent weed seed germination. 

At this time, natural alternatives aren’t as effective as their synthetic counterparts. However, some users of natural weed and feeds report that they notice healthier grass and fewer weeds after using the products for several seasons. In short, it takes patience and consistency to see gradually improved lawn health. It also takes more of the product to fertilize, which increases the overall cost, but it’s often worthwhile for the long-term health of people and the environment. 

On the other hand, chemical-based products contain synthetic herbicides that quickly kill weeds and improve grass health. However, they may contain ingredients that hurt beneficial plants, insects, and wildlife. Two of the most commonly used herbicides, 2,4-D and Atrazine, have been linked to numerous health and environmental problems. 2,4-D is a hormone-disrupting chemical that can potentially cause cancer, congenital disabilities, and developmental issues in children. Atrazine is a highly toxic herbicide that can contaminate drinking water, cause congenital disabilities, and harm wildlife. 

Be careful when applying these products in areas with a shallow water table, as they have the potential to contaminate the water supply. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and keep children and pets off the lawn until the product has dried or worked its way into the grass/soil. 

Application

Weed and feed comes in two forms: liquid and granular. Liquid forms are simple to apply and kill weeds faster than the more economical, though slower-acting, granular forms. Weed killer spray or liquid weed and feed is designed for small yards. Granular weed and feed covers more area, often 5,000 square feet or more, and is often available in 18-pound bags and larger. Granular versions offer a better value, but users do need to water their lawns after application for the product to penetrate the grass.

FAQs

If you want a pet-safe weed and feed or are curious to know what type is best for killing stubborn weeds, read on for answers to these and other commonly asked questions.

Q. How fast does weed and feed work?

Depending upon the brand, it may take from 5 days to up to 2 weeks to see the visible results of weed and feed. However, natural and organic products may take longer to produce visible results. 

Q. When is the best time to apply weed and feed?

As with most gardening or fertilizing tasks, it is best to apply weed and feed in the spring. This is when weeds are actively beginning to grow, which allows the weed and feed to kill the weeds as seedlings. However, some brands do not recommend that the weed and feed become wet after application, so apply the weed and feed before rain—in some cases, at least 24 hours before any forecasts of rain. 

Q. Should I mow before weed and feed?

Read the manufacturer’s instructions. Some weed and feed products should be applied a day or two after mowing, while others should not. The application time varies by product and sometimes by the season in which the product is used.

Q. Is weed and feed bad for my lawn?

Weed and feed is a combination of fertilizer and various weed killers, so these products are not bad for your lawn. 

Q. Is weed and feed safe for dogs?

If used properly, pet-friendly weed and feed and many standard weed and feeds are generally safe to use on lawns and spaces where dogs (and even children) are actively playing. However, always follow the package instructions because some herbicides can be moderately toxic to dogs.

Meet the Tester

Stacey L. Nash has written about home and garden products, home design and decor, and general indoor and outdoor home improvement for 5+ years. She’s passionate about research and hands-on testing to find the products that add true value to homeownership and daily life. She lives on 12 heavily wooded acres, where she and her family put home and outdoor products to the test while avoiding bears and cougars. 

Additional research provided by Debbie Wolfe. 

The post The Best Weed and Feed Products for Fewer Weeds and Greener Grass, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[The Best Soil Test Kits, Tested]]>A quality soil test kit will reveal the health of the soil, but are some kits better than others? We tested the most popular kits available to see if they provided quality results—find out which ones fared the best in our hands-on testing.

The post The Best Soil Test Kits, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-soil-test-kits/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=161733Mon, 17 Feb 2025 14:32:20 -0500ReviewsDIYGardeningLawn & GardenLawn Care & GardeningLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Testing garden soil is the best way to determine what it needs—if anything—and how much. A variety of soil testing kits are available, but how reliable are they? Home gardeners rely on these kits when deciding whether to amend their soil, so to narrow down the best soil test kits, we tested for accuracy, dependability, and ease of use. 

Soil testers range from simple pH strips to complex kits that pinpoint deficiencies. Serious gardeners will want to reach for comprehensive tests. As Jon Traunfeld, director of the Home & Garden Information Center at University of Maryland, explains, “We recommend that gardeners have their soil tested by accredited soil testing labs, public or private. A basic test that measures soil pH, important soil nutrients, and organic matter costs $20 to $25. The labs also provide recommendations for lime and fertilizer if needed.” These tests are available directly from labs or through your county extension office. 

For the average home gardener though, it can be easier to buy a soil test kit online, so that’s what we tested. To ensure accuracy, we compared product results to test results acquired from the Kansas State University soil testing lab. Our favorite product ended up being the MySoil Test Kit—it was easy to use and the results were simple to interpret, and most importantly of all, they were accurate. Ahead, learn what to look for when shopping for a soil test kit, and find out why the following products are well suited for helping determine soil deficiencies. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: MySoil Test Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Soil Savvy Soil Test Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Atree 3-in-1 Soil pH Meter Tester Kits
    ↓ Jump to Review
  4. BEST PH STRIPS: Garden Tutor Soil pH Test Strips Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  5. BEST CHEMICAL TEST: Luster Leaf 1662 Soil Test Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  6. BEST DIGITAL TEST: Luster Leaf 1605 Digital Soil Test Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  7. BEST FOR CROPS: Whitetail Institute Laboratory Soil-Test Kit
    ↓ Jump to Review
  8. BEST PRECISION PH: Bluelab Soil pH Pen
    ↓ Jump to Review
Soil test kit on a table next to 3 test tubes with colored liquids
Photo: amazon

Product Comparison

Type of TestTests ForResult Time
MySoil Test KitProfessional, mail-in13 nutrients plus pH levelResults by email within 6 to 8 days of mailing the sample
Soil Savvy Soil Test KitProfessional, mail-in14 nutrients plus pH level11 days from when the sample was mailed
Atree 3-in-1 Soil pH Meter Tester KitsAnalog probeMoisture, pH, lightImmediate for moisture and pH, 10 minutes for light
Garden Tutor Soil pH Test Strips KitStripspH levelsWithin 20 seconds of testing
Luster Leaf 1662 Soil Test KitChemical (at home)pH, nitrogen, phosphorus, potassiumVaries by the test but all within a few minutes
Luster Leaf 1605 Digital Soil Test KitChemical (digital results)Nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, and pHWithin a few seconds
Whitetail Institute Laboratory Soil-Test KitProfessional, mail-inCalcium, magnesium, phosphorus, potassiumResults available by email in one week
Bluelab Soil pH PenDigital probepH and temperatureImmediate

Our Top Picks

The kits we tested had to be accurate and relatively simple to use to earn a spot on this lineup. Test kits and equipment vary by the type of test being performed, so some are better suited to home gardeners, while others appeal to commercial and agricultural growers. We tested a range of kits—some required mailing off a soil sample for professional analysis, some involved chemical testing at home, and others required nothing more than sticking a probe in the soil.

Best Overall

MySoil Test Kit

 MySoil Test Kit on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Professional, mail-in
  • Tests for: 13 nutrients plus pH level
  • Result time: Results by email within 6 to 8 days of mailing the sample

What We Like

  • Professional test for pH and a range of soil nutrients and minerals 
  • Process is clear and straightforward 
  • Results are detailed and easy to understand 

What We Don’t Like

  • No print option available on the website

For professional results, check out the MySoil test kit, which allows gardeners to gather soil samples and have them professionally tested. The MySoil kit offers an in-depth analysis, revealing the amounts of micronutrients, NPK, and macronutrients in the tested soil.

With the MySoil kit, we registered online and followed detailed instructions, gathering a large amount of soil from various areas of the property, mixing it together well, and filling the provided testing cup with the soil blend. Then we sent my soil sample to MySoil as well as an additional soil sample to Kansas State University’s agricultural department so we would have a quality comparison.

We received an email 6 days later with the results of the soil tests. We were impressed with the comprehensive results. The lab listed the levels of existing nutrients, including nitrogen, potassium, sulfur, calcium, iron, and more, and then compared our soil’s levels with optimal levels, which were also listed for each nutrient. We also received a bar chart that allowed us to visually compare the results, making them simple to understand.

Best of all, when the soil results from K-State came back, they were very close to the MySoil results, making us feel very comfortable with the quality of the MySoil lab results.

Get the MySoil soil test kit at Amazon or MySoil

Runner-up

Soil Savvy Soil Test Kit

 Soil Savvy Soil Test Kit on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Professional, mail-in
  • Tests for: 14 nutrients plus pH level
  • Result time: 11 days from when the sample was mailed

What We Like

  • Soil-collection instructions are easy to follow
  • Results provide detailed recommendations for both synthetic and organic amendments
  • Tests for aluminum, which our top pick does not test for 

What We Don’t Like

  • Could provide a better explanation of the results
  • It took the longest of all labs to get results

The Soil Savvy soil test kit offers professional soil analysis and custom fertilizer recommendations. It comes with a scoop, a collection cup containing liquid and a plastic ball, a prepaid postage envelope, and complete instructions for collecting and submitting a soil sample. 

As with the other soil samples we sent in the mail for professional testing, used the same soil gathered from various spots and then blended well. We spooned the soil into the cup, sealed it, and then went online and registered the barcode that came with the kit.

The lab took a little longer than we’d anticipated to get back to us, but in 11 days, we got an email directing us to log on for my results. We were impressed by the accuracy of the test results—they were right in line with the K-State results, and we also received customized recommendations for amending my soil to make it healthier. The Soil Savvy recommendations were broken down by synthetic and organic fertilizers—telling me exactly how much of each to apply per 1,000 square feet to amend the soil. 

Soil Savvy could have provided a better explanation of the results, however. We understand what nutrient ratios are, but a newbie gardener might benefit from further explanation of what the numbers mean. The lab tested for the 14 most common nutrients plus pH level.

Get the Soil Savvy soil test kit at Amazon or Soil Savvy.

Best Bang For The Buck

Atree 3-in-1 Soil pH Meter Tester Kits

 Atree 3-in-1 Soil pH Meter Tester Kits on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 5/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Analog probe
  • Tests for: Moisture, pH, light
  • Result time: Immediate for moisture and pH, 10 minutes for light

What We Like

  • Very simple to use and provides immediate or near-immediate results
  • Doesn’t need batteries
  • Low-effort option

What We Don’t Like

  • Only measures moisture, pH, and light

Not all gardeners need or want a nutritional analysis of their soil. Some just want to know the pH level or how much light a plant would receive in a specific location. The Atree soil pH meter provides those answers accurately and at an affordable price.

We tested the Atree meter by inserting it in various spots in our flower garden. Over the years, we’ve added amendments, such as sulfur, to specific areas where acid-loving plants are growing, and we were curious whether this simple tester would pick up on that. It did—the soil around our hydrangeas, which we’ve amended heavily, tested at 6 on the pH scale, while the soil around our daisies registered at 6.8. Both seemed accurate based on our historical knowledge of our soil and the amendments we’ve made.

We then tested both moisture and light levels in various garden spots, and the Atree again seemed accurate. While this tester didn’t determine things like specific nutrient levels, we found that it would be great for gardeners who are happy with the health of their soil but would like to know if the light is adequate or whether the soil is draining well. The Atree did a good job measuring both.

Get the Atree soil test kit at Amazon

Best Ph Strips

Garden Tutor Soil pH Test Strips Kit

 Garden Tutor Soil pH Test Strips Kit on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Strips
  • Tests for: pH levels
  • Result time: Within 20 seconds of testing

What We Like

  • Quick and accurate pH test results
  • Simple to use and read
  • Includes 100 test strips for lots of testing at an affordable cost

What We Don’t Like

  • Poor packaging likely led to short shelf life

Garden Tutor’s test strips offer quick results in determining indoor or outdoor soil’s acid/alkaline content. The kit contains 100 test strips and also includes a 16-page handbook that lists optimal pH levels for growing various plants.

We found the Garden Tutor soil pH test strips to accurately determine the pH levels in various parts of our flower garden. The simplest of all the kits we tested required mixing soil from a specific garden area with water and then dipping it in a pH test strip. In a few seconds, sensitive tabs on the test strip turned color, and we visually matched them to the color-coded chart on the outside of the bottle to determine the amount of acid or alkalinity of the soil.

We tested the soil in an area we knew had a lower pH, as we’ve added pH-lowering amendments for years. The Garden Tutor test strips determined that level to be 6.1, which sounded close and aligned with other pH tests we performed. We then tested the soil in a spot we knew was more alkaline and got a higher pH reading.

One thing we wish the manufacturer would have included, however, was a moisture-absorbent pack with the strips. We used about 20 strips in our initial tests, and all were fine. Three weeks later, however, the pH pads had all turned brownish, which we suspected was due to moist air getting into the bottle.

Get the Garden Tutor soil test kit at Amazon or Garden Tutor.

Best Chemical Test

Luster Leaf 1662 Soil Test Kit

 Luster Leaf 1662 Soil Test Kit on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Chemical (at home)
  • Tests for: pH, nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium
  • Result time: Varies by the test but all within a few minutes

What We Like

  • Provided accurate results
  • Looks intimidating but it’s relatively easy to use
  • No need to send off a sample and wait days for results
  • All the components fit into a small kit that’s easy to store 

What We Don’t Like

  • Did not have enough solution to complete 40 tests

In addition to determining soil’s pH level, the Luster Leaf soil test kit pinpoints the amount of the three most common soil macronutrients: nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium. There’s no need for the user to send a sample to a laboratory with this chemical test. 

When we first opened the Luster Leaf test kit case, we were surprised by the number of vials and bottles of solutions. It didn’t look very easy. After reading the instructions, we found it was actually pretty simple. Testing involved gathering soil, putting a tiny bit in a glass vial, adding a specific liquid and/or powder (depending on the test), and shaking the vial. We were then able to compare the color of the liquid in the vial to an included chart to get the results.

To determine the accuracy of the Luster Leaf tests, we compared the results we got from the mail-in soil tests. The NPK results were close to the lab results. For an at-home test, we were pretty impressed. (The pH, on the other hand, tested lower than the lab tests, but the soil where we took the sample for this test had been previously amended to lower pH.)

The downside? The manufacturer says the kit will perform 40 tests. We found that to be inaccurate. We followed the instructions carefully and had only enough solution to do about 15 tests.

Get the Luster Leaf 1662 soil test kit at Amazon.

Best Digital Test

Luster Leaf 1605 Digital Soil Test Kit

 Luster Leaf 1605 Digital Soil Test Kit on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Chemical (digital results)
  • Tests for: Nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium, and pH
  • Result time: Within a few seconds

What We Like

  • Digital results are straightforward and very easy to interpret
  • Testing just requires inserting the sample and pressing a test button
  • Includes a booklet that has pH preferences for over 450 plants

What We Don’t Like

  • Only 5 capsules per test for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash

The second Luster Leaf kit in the lineup tests for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium, but it takes some of the complexity out of testing using color-coded capsules. It also takes the guesswork out of matching the results with its easy-to-read digital display. Everything is color-coded: N, P, and K correspond with purple, blue, and orange, respectively, while green is for pH.

We collected a soil sample, filled one of the four test tubes, and then added filtered water to the tube. We shook the soil and water solution, inserted a color-coded capsule in the vial, and shook again. Once the contents were well mixed, we inserted the vial into the hole at the top of the digital reader and pressed the button corresponding to the test.

This was the same test as the first Luster Leaf kit, but it was more user-friendly, and the color-coding made everything understandable. The digital reader gave me the results via a lit-up button. If the soil had too much of a nutrient, it registered as “surplus,” and lower amounts registered as “sufficient,” “adequate,” “deficient,” or “depleted.” 

Unfortunately, the digital tester did not show how low or high a nutrient might have been, but we were able to look in the booklet and see optimal NPK levels for different plants, grasses, and flowers. The booklet also offered suggestions on how to amend the soil to raise or lower specific nutrient levels. 

Get the Luster Leaf 1605 soil test kit at Amazon or Earth Easy.

Best For Crops

Whitetail Institute Laboratory Soil-Test Kit

 Whitetail Institute Laboratory Soil-Test Kit on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Professional, mail-in
  • Tests for: Calcium, magnesium, phosphorus, potassium
  • Result time: Results available by email in one week

What We Like

  • Ideal for food plots
  • Customizable—write down the intended crop for personalized results
  • Detailed results arrive quickly and are tailored to the chosen crop

What We Don’t Like

  • Less comprehensive than some other tests

Hobby farmers and crop growers can receive an expert soil analysis with the Whitetail Institute’s Laboratory soil test kit. Growers also receive a custom consultation and recommendations for improving their soil based on the type of crop that will be grown. 

For testing, we once again used the same soil gathered from various spots, blended well, and sent the sample to Whitetail. Of the three mail-in soil kits we tested, Whitetail offered the highest level of customization. When we filled out the form, they asked what we planned to grow in the soil. We chose alfalfa and Whitetail sent specific instructions for amending the soil to make it suitable for growing alfalfa. 

The nutrient test results were very close to those we obtained from the other labs and Kansas State University, but Whitetail only tested for four nutrients: phosphorus, potassium, calcium, and magnesium. We called the local extension agent and asked why. He said those are the most critical four nutrients for most agricultural crops.

We could access the test results in just one week, and a few days later, a paper copy arrived via snail mail. We found that the Whitetail test kit results would be a boon for farmers or hobby farmers who want to create optimal soil conditions for a specific crop.

Get the Whitetail Institute soil test kit at Amazon, Cabela’s, or Whitetail Institute.

Best Precision pH

Bluelab Soil pH Pen

 Bluelab Soil pH Pen on a white background
Photo: amazon

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 3/5; Accuracy 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs 

  • Type of test: Digital probe
  • Tests for: pH and temperature
  • Result time: Immediate

What We Like

  • Provides very precise pH testing, measuring to 0.1 degree
  • Easy-to-see digital readout on a backlit LCD display
  • Developed for commercial growing needs

What We Don’t Like

  • Must be calibrated before use

For commercial-scale growers, hydroponic growers, or gardeners who want the ultimate in precision pH testing, consider the Bluelab pH pen that provides highly accurate acid/alkaline results. The pen comes with a backlit LCD display and requires a AAA battery for operation. It also features two-point calibration for ensuring accurate pH readings, but the calibration solution is not included.

We had to locate 7.0 and 4.01 pH solutions, and we were able to borrow some of both from the local high school chemistry class, but be aware that if you want to use this pen, you’ll need to buy some of your own.

After calibrating the Bluelab pen, which involves putting it first in one solution and then the other and pushing the calibration button each time, we were able to test the pH and the temperature of the soil of our potted plants. We were surprised at the accuracy of this pen tester as it measured pH to a tenth of a degree and clearly displayed the number on the LED screen. The pH was close to what we had gotten in other tests, but this seemed to be the most accurate of all the tests. The temperature reading was also handy, and it would be vital for hydroponic growers or commercial growers who needed to maintain a specific growing temperature.

Get the Bluelab soil test pen at Amazon or Bluelab.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Soil Test Kits

Testing Stats
Products tested  9
Time spent testing  1 hour per kit
Tests performed 9
Price range $10 to $200

Our goal in testing the soil test kits was to determine how accurate each was, how easy they were to use, and how beneficial the results would be for our readers. The types of soil tests varied widely—from professional tests that required sending a soil sample to a lab to simple pH meters that determined a soil’s acid or alkaline level via a probe. We extensively researched dozens of soil test kits and products before choosing which ones to test, and we intentionally chose different types of kits because growers have very different needs. 

Misti Mathis, co-owner of Harvest Gold Organics, which sells plant care products out of McKinney, Texas, offers some advice on how shoppers can decide between kits: “Ultimately, the best choice depends on your specific needs and budget. While home test kits won’t be as precise as professional labs, they’re a good option for many gardeners.” She adds that “a professional lab test might be a better choice if you’re facing severe plant growth issues or have unique soil characteristics.”

To help determine the effectiveness of individual lab tests, we also sent a soil sample to the agricultural department at Kansas State University, where they do high-end soil and plant testing. The results from Kansas State were used as a starting point for comparing the other lab tests and the at-home chemical testing kits. 

We awarded points for each kit or product, and at the end of testing, we added the points and used them to help determine the best uses and specific awards for each of the kits that earned a spot in this lineup.

What to Consider When Choosing a Soil Test Kit

Many gardeners and home landscapers buy fertilizer and soil amendment products that promise to produce robust plant growth, improve soil structure, or result in abundant blooms. Still, unless the products provide what the soil lacks, the results may not be what the gardener expected. In some cases—such as adding fertilizer to nutrient-dense soil—plants may even suffer from fertilizer burn. Soil testing takes the guesswork out of gardening and landscaping, and that’s why I tested the top soil test products on the market today.

Soil

Soil quality varies from location to location. The soil in some regions might be perfect for growing vegetables and flowers, while the soil someplace else must be heavily amended with organic matter to grow anything. The following four common types of soil have different properties: 

  • Silt: Fine and soft, silt grains are smaller than grains of sand. Silty soil is associated with prior flooding that washed topsoil downstream. Silty soils are suitable for growing most types of plants but will benefit from adding organic matter to help increase drainage. Depending on its nutrient content, silt may also require a fertilizer.
  • Loamy: An optimal blend of silt, sand, clay, and organic matter, loamy soil is a gardener’s best friend. It drains well, yet resists compaction as it dries out. It’s suitable for growing fruits, vegetables, and most types of flowers and shrubs.
  • Clay: While clay soil is full of nutrients, it’s composed of ultra-fine particles that stick together when wet and become rock-hard when dry. Plants don’t grow well in clay soil because their roots can’t push as easily through thick clay as they can with other soil types. Clay soil must be amended with organic matter, such as compost, to help aerate the soil and make it suitable for growing plants.
  • Sandy: Better than clay because it offers spaces between the grains for roots to grow, but not as nutrient-dense as loam, sandy soil drains well. It is suitable for growing bulbs, such as tulips, and root crops, including potatoes and carrots. When preparing soil for the upcoming growing season, adding organic matter will help it retain moisture when growing other types of plants.

Test Types

Several soil-testing products are available to determine the amounts of various nutrients and macronutrients in the soil. Among the most comprehensive tests are those that involve taking soil samples and sending them to a lab for analysis. Still, at-home kits and instruments like these can be of help.

  • Strips: A simple type of soil test, pH strips are coated bits of paper that determine the current acidity or alkalinity level of the soil. The gardener mixes soil with distilled water, using the recommended ratio on the package instructions. (Tap water can influence the pH readout.) After inserting the test strip in the solution, the resulting color of the strip lets the gardener know whether the soil in the garden is acidic or alkaline. A chart usually comes with pH test strips so users can compare the colors.
  • Analog: These testers are commonly used to test soil for moisture content, pH levels, and some may even test the quantity of the light in specific locations. They feature aluminum probes to be inserted in the soil when taking readings. Some may use batteries, but many analog testers react to wetness in the ground and often don’t need batteries.
  • Digital: Like analog soil testers, digital soil testers often come with probes to insert in the ground to determine moisture content and pH levels. They usually require batteries and may also be used in conjunction with chemical testing to help determine nutrient levels, such as the amount of nitrogen or potash in the soil.
  • Chemical: At-home chemical soil tests require adding a drop or two of a specific chemical called a “reagent” to a soil sample. The reaction helps show the health of the soil. Chemical soil tests are suitable for testing one or more factors, including pH, and specific nutrients, such as nitrogen or calcium.
  • Professional: The most reliable of all soil tests, professional tests require the gardener to collect a soil sample. The sample is mailed to a laboratory, where it’s analyzed for structure and a variety of nutrients. Then the lab sends the results and soil recommendations back to the gardener.

Testing

Testing kits and instruments commonly help pinpoint soil characteristics. Knowing the makeup of the soil helps you better maintain your garden. Keep in mind that various plants have specific nutrient requirements, so it’s essential to research the plant that will be grown before adding nutrients.

  • Macronutrients: The three most common macronutrients needed for healthy plant growth are nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), and potassium (K). Every bag of fertilizer will list an NPK number that identifies the amount of each of these three nutrients. The types of N, P, and K nutrients come in various forms, such as potassium carbonate for phosphorus, and urea or anhydrous ammonia for nitrogen. In general, all the NPK varieties perform similar functions. The key is knowing which specific nutrient that a plant needs and then using the soil test results to add a fertilizer formulation that helps balance nutrient levels. 
  • Micronutrients: Plants may require trace minerals as well as macronutrients, and a soil tester that pinpoints micronutrients, such as copper, iron, and manganese, tells the gardener if too much or not enough of these nutrients is in the soil. 
  • Acid or alkaline: The pH scale runs from 0 to 14, with 7 being neutral. Most garden plants prefer slightly acidic soil, between 6 and 7. However, some plants such as lilac and clematis prefer slightly alkaline soils, while azaleas prefer acidic (5.5) conditions.
  • Temperature: Testing soil temperature is much like testing human temperature; the tester has a thermometer that indicates how warm or cool the soil is. This is helpful for commercial growers who want to start production as early in the spring as possible. It also can be helpful for hobby gardeners who want to make sure the soil is warm enough before they set out seedlings. 
  • Light: Because plants need various amounts of light, a light meter can help determine whether a location will be optimal for a specific plant variety. While plants have different light needs, all need some light for photosynthesis, which is how the plant synthesizes water and carbon dioxide into food. Most at-home light meters will display low, medium, and high lighting conditions. A gardener can use these readings to determine whether a plant is receiving enough light (or too much light) in a specific spot. 
  • Moisture: One of the most common soil tests is for moisture, and it’s used to determine whether the soil is draining well. Moisture meters usually have a gauge that allows the gardener to see if the soil, whether it’s in a garden bed or is a potting soil mix, is dry, moist, or wet. 

Accuracy

Soil test kits vary in accuracy, with professional lab tests ranking as the most accurate. The quality and composition of the soil may also vary from one end of the garden to the other based on the amount of light that a specific spot gets, whether leaves fall and decompose in one spot, or what types of plants were grown there in the past. For example, plants in the legume family, such as soybeans or clover, can add nitrogen to the soil. 

Choosing the most accurate test or tester can prove challenging, but look for features such as large, easy-to-read gauges on analog testers and probes that are solidly attached. Chemical kits should offer multiple testing processes for double-checking results, and pH test strips will be most accurate before their expiration date. No matter the individual test kit, gardeners can help avoid mistakes by performing multiple tests in different spots. 

Speed of Results

The quickest results come from tests that determine pH and moisture. At-home test kits and instruments can determine these two factors in mere seconds. Testing for other nutrients may take longer, especially if the soil has to be combined with water and then allowed to settle before performing a chemical test.Light and moisture meters can often determine results in a few minutes. Retesting can be done as often as desired to get an idea of light quality during different times of the day and to see whether moisture evaporates more quickly from soil during higher outdoor temps. 

The longest wait period comes when seeking professional laboratory results. The gardener must gather the soil samples, place them in a package, and mail the package to the laboratory. Depending on the speed of the lab, it may take a few days to test the sample and then a few extra days to get the results. Some labs can send results by email, which speeds up the process by a couple of days. 

Ease of Use

Test kits that feature pH strips and meters with probes are simple to use and self-explanatory for the most part, but the best soil test kits come with directions on how to handle the strips and the probes, in addition to offering information for understanding the relevance of the test results. Chemical test kits can be more complex, but they come with instructions on gathering soil samples, mixing them, and choosing the chemicals to use when conducting specific nutrient tests. Chemical kits often come with charts that explain what the different results mean, such as various color changes that occur when testing for particular macronutrients and micronutrients.

FAQs

The best soil test kit can help a gardener figure out the most beneficial fertilizers or amendments to add to a garden. Below are answers to some common questions about soil testing kits.

Q. Why do I need to test soil?

If plants are thriving, there’s no need to test the soil. However, if plants seem to wilt, die, or just do poorly, testing the soil could help determine if the problem is due to a structure or nutrient deficiency in the soil.

Q. Can I test my own soil?

Absolutely. Many DIY-type soil testers are available for testing everything from moisture and pH to the amount and type of nutrients in the soil. Some involve sending the soil sample to a professional lab—these can yield the most accurate results. 

Q. Are digital soil testers accurate? 

Digital soil testers are usually reasonably accurate. Gardeners can increase accuracy by performing multiple tests in different spots of the garden and comparing the results.

Q. What are the soil-testing methods?

There are several soil testing methods. Soil test kits you can buy for at-home use feature pH strips, analog or digital meters, and chemical testing. They will include directions for the testing method. Professional testing is available by sending soil samples to a lab—you mail in a soil sample and they’ll provide results within a few days or weeks. 

Q. What does a pH test measure?

A pH test measures the acidity and alkalinity levels of the soil. The acidity of the soil can affect plant health, including how well it absorbs nutrients, so aiming for the ideal pH level for your plant types is one important step toward a flourishing garden. 

Q. How do I adjust the pH level of my soil?

Soil treatments are available that will either raise or lower the soil’s pH level, depending on what the gardener is growing. These are often called pH-UP and pH-DOWN products. You can also use amendments like garden lime and bone meal (which increase soil pH) and peat moss or sulfur (which lower soil pH) to naturally adjust pH levels in your garden.

Q. Do soil test kits expire? 

Kits with pH strips may expire in a few months, especially if they’re not kept in an airtight container. Meters and monitors will not expire. However, if they’re battery operated, they will require new batteries when the old ones run down. Chemical kits are often good for 2 to 5 years. 

Meet the Tester 

Glenda Taylor is a product tester and writer specializing in the construction, remodeling, and real estate industries. She and her husband own a general contracting company, and Taylor is experienced in both residential and commercial building applications. She tests a wide range of power tools as well as other home improvement, household, and lawn-and-garden products.

The post The Best Soil Test Kits, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[The Best Hose Nozzles for Leak-Free Gardening, Tested]]>A reliable garden hose isn’t complete without a nozzle that can deliver effectively for watering tasks. We tested the most popular hose nozzles on the market, and you may be surprised by which ones took top billing.

The post The Best Hose Nozzles for Leak-Free Gardening, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-hose-nozzle/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-hose-nozzle/Mon, 17 Feb 2025 13:19:45 -0500ReviewsDIYLawn Care & GardeningLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Using your thumb to direct the flow on an open-ended garden hose is hardly an effective way to water plants. A good hose nozzle provides superior control and helps prevent the wasteful overwatering that can harm plants. However, with so many options out there, it can be challenging to decide which hose nozzle to choose. We wanted to know whether today’s top-rated nozzles are all they’re cracked up to be, so we tried them out.

We attached the nozzles to garden hoses and cranked up the water pressure, noting how easily they connected, whether they dribbled (no one likes that!), and how well each of the spray functions performed. We watered grass, potted plants, and raised beds in our quest to determine which nozzles would earn a spot in this lineup of the best hose nozzles. After all that testing, we chose the Green Mount New Patent Garden Hose Nozzle as our top pick. It earned that spot as a result of its ergonomic design and the fact that it didn’t leak even a little.

Keep reading to learn some essential tips for choosing the best hose nozzle, and find out the best (and worst) aspects of each of the following products before selecting the right one for your yard and garden this year.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Green Mount New Patent Heavy-Duty Hose Nozzle
    Jump to Review
  2. RUNNER-UP: Twinkle Star Heavy-Duty Brass Adjustable Hose Nozzle
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Gilmour Pistol-Grip Adjustable Watering Nozzle
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST HEAVY-DUTY: Dramm Adjustable Hose Nozzle
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST WAND: The Relaxed Gardener Watering Wand
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST ERGONOMIC: Green Mount Ergonomic Handle Fireman’s Hose Nozzle
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST LIGHTWEIGHT: Gilmour Heavy Duty Thumb-Control Nozzle
    Jump to Review
  8. BEST MULTIPURPOSE: Esow Garden Hose Nozzle
    Jump to Review
  9. BEST FOR POTS: Dramm One-Touch Rain Wand
    Jump to Review
  10. BEST HEAVY USE: Fanhao Garden Hose Nozzle
    Jump to Review
The Best Hose Nozzle Options
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

Product Comparison

TypeMaterialSpray Variations
Green Mount New Patent Heavy-Duty Hose NozzlePistolHigh-density ABS plasticSpray, mist, jet, shower, soaker, cone, and flat 
Twinkle Star Heavy-Duty Brass Adjustable Hose NozzleTwistHeavy-duty brassFluctuates between jet and cone
Gilmour Pistol-Grip Adjustable Watering NozzlePistolZincAdjustable from narrow jet to wide cone with spray variations in between
Dramm Adjustable Hose NozzleTwist BrassAdjustable from mist to jet 
The Relaxed Gardener Watering WandWatering wandSteel and molded plastic8
Green Mount Ergonomic Handle Fireman’s Hose NozzleTwist Steel, rubber coatingAdjustable, ranging from jet to mist with various shower functions in between
Gilmour Heavy Duty Thumb-Control NozzlePistolSteel, rubber coating8 (mist, shower, rinse, soft wash, clean, sweep, jet, and bucket-filling)
Esow Garden Hose NozzlePistolBrushed steel and brassAdjustable from jet to mist 
Dramm One-Touch Rain WandWandAluminum, rubber coatingShower (not adjustable) 
Fanhao Garden Hose NozzlePistolBrushed steel, brass, rubber coating7 (center, flat, jet, shower, mist, cone, and full)

Our Top Picks 

With so many hose nozzles on the market, selecting one can be tough. We put these nozzles through their paces, and we didn’t pull any punches so that our readers will have a good shot at getting a nozzle likely to perform well for years. All the nozzles that earned a spot in our lineup are GHT, so they’re all suitable for garden hoses in the U.S., and each one is a standout in its class.

Best Overall

Green Mount New Patent Heavy-Duty Hose Nozzle

 The Green Mount Hose Nozzle on a white background
Photo: amazon.com

Our Ratings: Comfort 5/5; Ease of Use 5/5; Effectiveness 5/5; Durability 4/5; Value 4.5/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Pistol
  • Material: High-density ABS plastic
  • Spray variations: Spray, mist, jet, shower, soaker, cone, and flat 

What We Like

  • Nonslip ergonomic grip prevents strain on the users’ hands and arms 
  • Fireman-type water-adjustment handle for ease of use 
  • Durable construction prevents any leaks or drips 

What We Don’t Like

  • Handle is slightly stiff but may loosen up over time  

DIY gardeners looking for a high-quality garden hose nozzle may want to check out Green Mount’s heavy-duty hose nozzle. We were certainly impressed. This hose nozzle features a large on-off handle with an ergonomic design that’s easy to grip and a pistol-grip-style handle for control. We were able to select from six spray options by twisting the selector ring, including jet, mist, soaker, and shower. We then adjusted the amount of water pressure by moving the handle forward or backward. 

The Green Mount nozzle connected to the hose easily, and it didn’t leak anywhere—not where it attached to the hose and not at the nozzle openings, which was refreshing because we’ve used nozzles that dribbled so much, our sleeves would be soaked. 

The construction of this Green Mount nozzle is mostly ABS plastic, making it impact-resistant and durable, but it also features a metal nozzle housing and hose fitting. It comes with a metal mesh screen that users can remove to clear clogged sediment from the nozzle. This garden hose nozzle is well suited for those with various watering needs. The spray options can provide a robust stream of water to clean off sidewalks, a gentle mist for delicate plants, such as orchids, and a soaker for quickly watering large potted plants or shrubs. 

Get the Green Mount heavy-duty hose nozzle at Amazon or Walmart.

Runner-Up

Twinkle Star Heavy-Duty Brass Adjustable Hose Nozzle

 The Twinkle Star Hose Nozzle on a white background
Photo: amazon.com

Our Ratings: Comfort 3/5; Ease of Use 4/5; Effectiveness 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Twist
  • Material: Heavy-duty brass
  • Spray variations: Fluctuates between jet and cone

What We Like

  • No-leak performance; heavy-duty construction lasts for a long time 
  • Easy to hold; long design is comfortable 
  • 4 adjustable spray pattern options integrated to suit any user’s preference 
  • Comes in a 2-pack

What We Don’t Like

  • No padded grip; may not be ideal for some users 

If we could only use two words to describe this pair of Twinkle Star twist nozzles, they’d be “rugged” and “dependable.” Some might call these old-fashioned nozzles, but there’s nothing stodgy about high performance. 

Each nozzle features rubber O-rings, located in the fitting attachment and in the twisting part of the nozzle, for maximum protection against leaking. There are also four holes in the tip of the nozzle, allowing for twice the water flow of a typical brass nozzle. It was easy to connect the nozzles to the hose, and neither one leaked. 

We twisted the nozzles to adjust the water flow to choose between a wide cone of spray, a powerful jet of water, and various shower-type pressures in between. There are no frills with these nozzles, just solid performance. 

Get the Twinkle Star hose nozzles at Amazon.

Best Bang for the Buck

Gilmour Pistol-Grip Adjustable Watering Nozzle

 The Gilmour Hose Nozzle on a white background
Photo: amazon.com

Our Ratings: Comfort 2/5; Ease of Use 4/5; Effectiveness 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.3/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Pistol
  • Material: Zinc
  • Spray variations: Adjustable from narrow jet to wide cone with spray variations in between

What We Like

  • Well made and functional; ergonomic design prevents fatigue during long periods of use 
  • Easy to adjust water pressure via the integrated trigger
  • Front threads adapt to optional spray tips to suit users’ preferences 

What We Don’t Like

  • No padded or nonslip grip; may cause some strain to the hands if used frequently 

A simple solution to watering control, the all-metal Gilmour pistol-grip nozzle is budget-friendly and durable. It has a small flow-control dial that helps users adjust the water force. Choose from full flow, cone spray, or a sharp stream that’s designed for cleaning tough messes. The Gilmour nozzle is made from zinc to resist rusting. This is another no-frills spray nozzle that offers good performance in a tried-and-true style. 

Initially, when we connected the Gilmour nozzle, we had some leaking at the fitting, but upon inspection, we’d overlooked putting the black rubber washer inside the fitting. We added the washer and experienced no more leaks. 

A threaded front makes it easier to attach cleaning tools, such as specially designed brushes (not included) for scouring patio furniture, bicycles, and other grimy gear. The trigger-style nozzle has a metal loop at the top of the trigger that locks it in place to make gripping more comfortable, but in truth this isn’t the most comfortable nozzle to use. It’s not padded and doesn’t have a nonslip grip. Yet we still believe this simple watering nozzle is a good product and an excellent price. 

Get the Gilmour pistol-grip hose nozzle at Amazon or Little Hardware.

Best Heavy-Duty

Dramm Adjustable Hose Nozzle

 The Dramm Hose Nozzle on a white background
Photo: amazon.com

Our Ratings: Comfort 2/5; Ease of Use 5/5; Effectiveness 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.2/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Twist 
  • Material: Brass
  • Spray variations: Adjustable from mist to jet 

What We Like

  • High-quality design; long nozzle with twist adjustment allows for ample customization 
  • Powerful water-jet ability; perfect for washing as well as watering 
  • Sturdy brass design provides no leaks and is built to last

What We Don’t Like

  • No padding or nonslip grip; may cause some fatigue over prolonged use 

The second twist nozzle we tested—the Dramm adjustable hose nozzle—proved to be a modest but highly efficient watering tool. A twist of the barrel was all it took to regulate the spray pattern on this all-brass nozzle. When we ran full water pressure, the Dramm nozzle narrowed the stream of water to a high-pressure jet that quickly removed dried mud from a concrete patio. 

When we twisted the nozzle in the other direction, it went from jet to mist and between the two extremes ran through a range of shower-like options. 

The Dramm is made from solid brass, and it didn’t leak at the nozzle end or the hose end during testing. This hardworking nozzle is designed to last, and it can serve a range of watering needs with just a simple twist.

Get the Dramm adjustable hose nozzle at Amazon.

Best Wand

The Relaxed Gardener Watering Wand

 The Relaxed Gardener hose nozzle on a white background
Photo: amazon.com

Our Ratings: Comfort 5/5; Ease of Use 4/5; Effectiveness 5/5; Durability 4/5; Value 4.5/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Watering wand
  • Material: Steel and molded plastic
  • Spray variations: 8 (one malfunctioned during testing due to perceived manufacturing error)

What We Like

  • Extended reach for watering baskets and pots and cleaning
  • Ergonomic nonslip grip is ideal for frequent or long-term use 
  • Comes with 8 easy-to-change spray patterns
  • Thumb control for easy adjustments to the water pressure 

What We Don’t Like

  • Some users have reported that one of the spray patterns is prone to malfunction 

Hose wands can be extremely helpful when watering hanging baskets and hard-to-reach plants. At 15 inches long, the Relaxed Gardener Watering Wand proved to be just the right length to access high baskets while still being easy to handle and store. It has a nonslip ergonomic grip, and we were able to adjust water pressure via the thumb lever. 

We scrolled through eight different watering spray patterns by turning the ring at the end of the nozzle. The shower and soaker patterns are excellent on this watering wand, but the Center option dribbled and sprayed off to one side. We inspected the head, and it appeared that something hard was stuck in that specific spray opening—perhaps lodged during manufacturing. We decided that this must have been a fluke, not an inherent design flaw.

The watering wand attached easily to the hose and didn’t leak except for that “center” spray setting. The wand simplified watering high baskets and potted plants while offering a range of other spray patterns that would be suitable for newly seeded lawns, flower beds, and even vegetable gardens.

Get the Relaxed Gardener hose nozzle at Amazon.

Best Ergonomic

Green Mount Ergonomic Handle Fireman’s Hose Nozzle

 The Green Mount Heavy Duty Hose Nozzle on a white background
Photo: amazon.com

Our Ratings: Comfort 5/5; Ease of Use 4.5/5; Effectiveness 4/5; Durability 4/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Twist 
  • Material: Steel, rubber coating
  • Spray variations: Adjustable, ranging from jet to mist with various shower functions in between

What We Like

  • High-quality construction should last a user a long time 
  • Large water pressure handle is suitable for multiple uses; perfect for watering, washing, and more 
  • Rubberized grip is comfortable to hold for long periods of time 

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavyweight compared to similar hose nozzles  

This sprayer nozzle excels at controlling water on even high-pressure hoses, yet while it weighs in at just under 2 pounds—about twice as heavy as the typical sprayer—it’s definitely built for comfort. This Green Mount nozzle features a large fire-hose-style handle that’s easy to grab and move, even with gloved hands, and it also has a nonslip rubber grip. 

Inside the attachment fitting, we found a screen designed to keep sand and dirt out of the sprayer. There’s a wide bell-shaped dial that we twisted one way and the other to change the spray pattern from a strong jet to a fine mist, with varying shower-type sprays in between. 

This nozzle boasts solid metal construction, so it should last multiple seasons without wearing out, and we felt it was very well made—no cut corners here. The only downside might be for those who experience hand or arm fatigue since the Green Mount nozzle may feel a tad heavy after a while. 

Get the Green Mount ergonomic hose nozzle at Amazon.

Best Lightweight

Gilmour Heavy-Duty Thumb-Control Nozzle

 The Gilmour Heavy Duty Hose Nozzle on a white background
Photo: amazon.com

Our Ratings: Comfort 5/5; Ease of Use 4/5; Effectiveness 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4.2/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Pistol
  • Material: Steel, rubber coating
  • Spray variations: 8 (mist, shower, rinse, soft wash, clean, sweep, jet, and bucket-filling)

What We Like

  • Quality construction; ergonomic and durable design for long-term use 
  • Nonslip handle is comfortable to hold while in use 
  • Swivel attachment ring can accommodate most garden hoses easily; no twisting required 

What We Don’t Like

  • Separate steel ring on end of nozzle can be accidentally loosened 

Anyone hunting for a lightweight garden hose nozzle may want to give this model from Gilmour a look. Weighing under 10 ounces, it’s one of the lightest pistol-type nozzles we tested. It features eight spray patterns, including mist, shower, rinse, soft wash, clean, sweep, jet, and a bucket-filling setting—all patterns worked well.

Our favorite feature of the Gilmour nozzle was the swivel attachment ring that allowed us to connect it to the garden hose without twisting either the hose or the nozzle. It was simple to spin the attachment ring and securely attach the nozzle.

The thumb-control lever is handy to operate using the same hand holding the sprayer, but this nozzle does have one thing against it: a separate steel ring that holds the spray pattern adjustment ring in place. Rather than a single adjustment ring, the end of the sprayer features an additional steel ring that we inadvertently kept loosening when we twisted the spray adjustment ring. Each time that happened, water would dribble out from under the ring. It held better after we tightened the steel ring using some force, but we feel it would have been designed better without the additional steel ring.

Get the Gilmour thumb-control hose nozzle at Amazon.

Best Multipurpose

Esow Garden Hose Nozzle

 The Esow Garden Hose Nozzle on a white background
Photo: amazon.com

Our Ratings: Comfort 3/5; Ease of Use 4/5; Effectiveness 4/5; Durability 5/5; Value 4/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Pistol
  • Material: Brushed steel and brass
  • Spray variations: Adjustable from jet to mist 

What We Like

  • High-quality materials; made with durable brushed steel and brass 
  • Loop integrated for the holding trigger; keeps the water running without having to grip the trigger 
  • Connects easily to standard garden hoses without leaking 

What We Don’t Like

  • Trigger may be on the short side for some users’ preferences 

Right out of the package, the Esow hose nozzle displayed high-end workmanship. Its smooth steel exterior features a brushed finish for an ultrasmooth feel, and its solid brass nozzle tip turned smoothly. There was no mistaking the quality—it simply felt good to hold.

While it’s a basic hose nozzle in design, it features brass and zinc-alloy construction to resist corrosion and make it durable and impact resistant. Its pistol-grip and fine-tune nozzle adjustment make it well suited for multiple uses, from misting the flower bed to washing the car. The spraying patterns range from a jet stream for high pressure to a fan spray for covering a wide area. 

It connected easily to our hose, and we didn’t detect any leaks. However, the downside to this nozzle is the length of the trigger. Maybe we just have big hands, but the trigger is barely over 2 inches long with room for only two fingers. If we didn’t use the loop to hold the trigger in the “on” position, our fingers got a little sore after about 10 minutes of constant watering. Other than that, however, this is a top-notch hose nozzle. 

Get the Esow hose nozzle at Amazon.

Best for Pots

Dramm One-Touch Rain Wand

 The Dramm Hose Nozzle on a white background
Photo: amazon.com

Our Ratings: Comfort 5/5; Ease of Use 4/5; Effectiveness 3/5; Durability 3/5; Value 3.5/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Wand
  • Material: Aluminum, rubber coating
  • Spray variations: Shower (not adjustable) 

What We Like

  • Long 16-inch wand for ample maneuverability in hard-to-reach places 
  • Optimal for watering pots, washing the car, and/or cleaning the exterior of a home 
  • Nonslip grip can be held comfortably for long periods of time without fatigue 

What We Don’t Like

  • Only 1 spray pattern integrated; not as versatile as some other comparable options 

The Dramm rain wand has only one spray pattern: a gentle shower that’s just the ticket for watering potted plants. Those who have tried watering potted flowers and shrubs will likely agree that most other spray patterns are either too robust, too wide, or otherwise not well suited to pot watering. 

This product delivers a wonderful shower, and the pressure is controlled by a thumb lever at the top of an ergonomic, nonslip handle. The wand features a sloped head that let us reach overhead baskets without accidentally spraying on the other side. 

Those in the market for an adjustable spray pattern nozzle may want to look at other options, but folks who have a lot of pots to water will likely be quite happy with this Dramm wand. It’s simple to use and the gentle rain-like, pot-pleasing spray pattern never changes. 

Get the Dramm one-touch hose nozzle at Amazon.

Best Heavy Use

Fanhao Garden Hose Nozzle

 The Fanhao Garden Hose Nozzle on a white background
Photo: amazon.com

Our Ratings: Comfort 2/5; Ease of Use 5/5; Effectiveness 5/5; Durability 5/5; Value 3.9/5

Product Specs 

  • Type: Pistol
  • Material: Brushed steel, brass, rubber coating
  • Spray variations: 7 (center, flat, jet, shower, mist, cone, and full) 

What We Like

  • Comes with 7 spray patterns; center, flat, jet, shower, mist, cone, and full
  • Easy to connect to any standard garden hose without leaking 
  • All-steel body components are durable enough to withstand frequent or heavy-duty use 

What We Don’t Like

  • No rubberized grip; may be harsh on the hands after extended use 

Those looking for a heavy-duty hose nozzle won’t be disappointed with this Fanhao model. This nozzle features all-steel body components for durability and a high-density molded-plastic spray adjustment ring covered with rubberized nonslip coating. The sprayer’s brushed-steel finish is soft to the touch, and the trigger, which is nice and long for secure gripping, can be held in place while watering via an attached steel loop at the bottom of the handle. 

We liked the high-end construction of the Fanhao spray nozzle, although we would have appreciated a nonslip grip on the handle to match the one on the adjustment ring. When water from the spigot is bitterly cold, the chilly temp transfers through the steel handle of this sprayer, so a coated grip would have been nice. (Tip: Wear gardening gloves for a thermal-resistant barrier between the cold steel and hands). 

The Fanhao spray nozzle features seven spray patterns; center, flat, jet, shower, mist, cone, and full. Each one was distinct and functioned well without drips. Water pressure can be controlled with the hand trigger. This sprayer is well-made and designed to stand up to heavy use. If you want a spray nozzle that’s likely to last, it’s hard to go wrong with this one.

Get the Fanhao hose nozzle at Amazon.

Jump To Our Top Picks

How We Tested the Best Hose Nozzles

Testing Stats
Products tested 10
Time spent testing 5 hours
Tests performed5
Price range$5 to $30

Hose nozzles are simple watering tools, but one that dribbles, leaks, or doesn’t spray as it should can be frustrating and take the fun out of gardening. Our goal in testing the top hose nozzle available today was to determine which performed best and which were well suited for various watering tasks. 

We examined each hose nozzle before use and read any accompanying information to make sure we fully understood its purpose and capabilities. To ensure they were working as intended, we checked all the moving parts—handles, spray selection rings, dials, and valves. We inspected the quality of the materials to help estimate potential durability. 

We attached each nozzle to the end of a standard garden hose and turned the water pressure up all the way (approximately 55 pounds per square inch, or PSI). We checked for leaks at the connection point as well as from the tip of the nozzle when using each of the available spray functions. 

We scored each nozzle using a rubric—awarding points between 0 and 4, depending on how well it performed. At the end of the testing, we added up the points and used them to categorize each nozzle for its best use. 

What to Consider When Choosing a Hose Nozzle

The Best Hose Nozzle
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

There are several things to keep in mind when it comes to selecting the best garden hose nozzles, but perhaps the single most important criteria is how you plan to use it. For example, a high-pressure nozzle that’s great for washing siding won’t deliver water optimally in the garden. We considered each of the following factors—and tested them when possible—to give our readers up-to-date information about each nozzle on our list.

Plastic vs. Metal 

Anything stored outside must endure a lot of wear and tear. However, hoses and their nozzles must withstand more than natural weathering; nozzles in particular may get dropped on hard surfaces or stepped on accidentally.

Plastic can crack when dropped and break down after prolonged sun exposure, while metal better stands up to impacts and the elements. Brass is a preferred material for metal hose nozzles due to its ability to resist corrosion. Some metal nozzles are dipped in a rubberlike coating, and others have a baked-on enamel finish; both methods add durability, protection, and longevity. 

For dependability and durability, avoid nozzles made entirely of plastic and consider metal or a plastic-and-metal hybrid. With inner components made of metal and exteriors constructed of molded plastic, hybrids are often lighter than their all-metal counterparts.

Spray Pattern 

In addition to water pressure adjustments, most hose nozzles come with adjustable spray patterns that allow users to change the amount and direction of the spray to match the specific watering situation. Need to water a pot? Just switch to the “shower” or “rain” option on the nozzle. Want to wash muddy paw prints from the patio? Switch to the nozzle’s jet function and spray the mess away.

If you’re looking for a versatile hose nozzle, one with a dial for switching between different spray patterns may be a good option. A dial generally provides a range of patterns, from a gentle mist perfect for moistening seeds to a high-pressure jet stream that blasts caked mud off the sidewalk. In addition to mist and jet, these nozzles often have several other patterns, including:

  • Shower is ideal for watering the garden and container plantings.
  • Flat is designed for fragile plants and young seedlings. 
  • Cone offers the excellent coverage needed when watering the lawn before a fertilizer application, for instance.
  • Soak is designed for watering large trees and shrubs. 

While these nozzles offer ample flexibility, if the large range of options is more than you need, a fitting alternative may be a basic metal nozzle that adjusts the spray from a fine mist to a powerful stream with a simple twist. 

Pistol vs. Dial 

The pistol grip is the most common type of hose nozzle; it has a squeeze trigger that activates water flow. When the trigger is released, the water flow stops. The amount of pressure applied to the trigger adjusts the water flow. Rotating a tiny flow adjuster above the trigger changes the spray from a mist to a jet stream. 

A dial nozzle suits those who want more options. The dial usually includes six or more spray patterns, which are adjustable with the turn of the dial on the front of the nozzle. This nozzle type might have a pistol grip or a simple molded handle with a button or a slider to adjust water flow. Both types allow the user to direct the water where needed rather than using a sprinkler that tends to oversoak one area while neglecting another. 

The Wand Alternative 

Nozzles suit many gardeners for a host of outdoor tasks. But for watering hanging baskets and plants in hard-to-reach places, or for those with physical limitations that make bending difficult, a watering wand might be an excellent solution. Like nozzles, wands come in numerous models, but their length sets them apart. Wands may be anywhere from 10 inches to 25 inches long, and some come with a hooked sprayer head to direct water downward into the pot when watering overhead.

Available in fixed length or telescoping, watering wands can have a single pattern spray head or a dial adjuster at the end. Some have a pistol grip to squeeze with one hand, and others use a button or slider to adjust the water flow. 

Another helpful feature included with some wands is a stop-valve trigger near the grip that lets the user control water flow from the watering wand, saving the walk to the faucet to turn it on and off. 

Ergonomics 

Ergonomic hand tools are designed to help users work pain-free. Comfort is an asset for anyone doing yard work and especially those with arthritis or strength issues in their hands and wrists. For example, maintaining constant pressure on a pistol or a trigger grip can take a toll on the hands, so many of the best garden hose nozzles are designed to stave off hand and wrist fatigue. 

No-press grips allow changing water flow with a simple button or a slider that can be manipulated with a thumb. Trigger nozzles often include a metal loop at the top of the trigger that can lock the handle in the spray position and take the pressure off a hand. 

Weight is another important consideration. All-metal construction nozzles, while very durable, are heavier than a hybrid made of metal and plastic. 

Hose Compatibility

There are more types of hoses than the one that hooks to a lawn and garden hose. Gardeners in the U.S. use a completely different hose thread system than everywhere else in the world, so compatibility with the hose on a hose reel is key. 

Nozzles sold to U.S. customers feature the standard garden hose thread (GHT) of ¾ inch. This means that the end of the hose has 11½ threads per inch and features a 1/16-inch thread pitch, which is the angle of the threads. 

For basic hose nozzles sold outside of the United States, the common thread in these countries is based on British Standard Pipe (BSP). These fittings are ¾ inch in diameter, and they feature 14 threads per inch. 

There also are quick-connect fittings that allow the user to snap a nozzle on and off a hose without unscrewing it. These nozzles will only work with quick-connect fittings on a hose, and they may not be necessary for the average gardener.

FAQs 

After learning about the different features of hose nozzles, some new questions might spring up. After all, there are a lot of choices on the market, and you still might not be sure which garden hose nozzle is ideal for you. This section aims to offer that info, as it answers some of the most frequently asked questions about the best hose nozzles.

Q. What is the best garden hose spray nozzle?

Finding the best garden hose spray nozzle depends on several factors, and it’s usually on a case-by-case basis. For watering pots, we appreciated the gentle rain-like spray of the Dramm one-touch hose nozzle, and those who might want the comfort of a lighter weight hose nozzle will want to consider the Gilmour thumb-control hose nozzle. While using a hose nozzle takes more hands-on watering time—as opposed to setting a sprinkler and then using a hose timer to turn the water on and off, nozzle is more versatile in its application because it can be used for a range of watering and washing chores.

Q. What is the best watering wand?

Watering wands can be tricky, as they’re often too long and cumbersome to be truly useful. The Relaxed Gardener hose nozzle/watering wand is one of the best watering wands, as it lets you reach hanging baskets, but it’s not so long that it’s difficult to handle.

Q. What is the best high-pressure hose nozzle?

Often, fire-hose-style nozzles offer the most concentrated pressure. They can restrict the opening while still allowing a jet stream of water to flow through for maximum pressure.

Q. Why do hose nozzles leak?

There are several reasons a hose nozzle might leak:
If it’s leaking at the hose connection, it’s likely that the rubber ring inside the nozzle is either in poor condition or missing.
If it’s leaking at the tip, the O-rings inside the nozzle might be broken, deteriorated, or missing. Most nozzles aren’t serviceable, so they’ll likely need to be replaced.
The other leading cause for a leak is a crack or corrosion within the nozzle. If corrosion removes metal or creates an uneven seal inside the nozzle, it will leak. Also, if the nozzle was dropped, there could be a crack inside, causing the leak.

Q. How do I keep my hose nozzle from leaking?

The first thing to try to repair a leak is to replace the rubber washer inside the hose connection. Very often, these rubber rings wear down or fall out, causing the handle to leak any time the hose is changed. You also can try wrapping the hose thread with a few passes of pipe tape. 
One thing to avoid is overtightening the nozzle, as the leak will probably worsen, and you could ruin the threads on the hose and the nozzle.

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a product tester and writer specializing in the construction, remodeling, and real estate industries. She and her husband own a general contracting company, and Taylor is experienced in both residential and commercial building applications. She tests a wide range of power tools as well as other home improvement, household, and lawn-and-garden products.

The post The Best Hose Nozzles for Leak-Free Gardening, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[8 Organic Weed Killers That Are Safe for Organic Gardening and the Environment]]>These effective alternatives to chemical herbicides are all natural solutions for keeping weeds from overrunning your organic garden or favorite flower bed.

The post 8 Organic Weed Killers That Are Safe for Organic Gardening and the Environment appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-organic-weed-killer/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=152444Mon, 17 Feb 2025 12:14:18 -0500ReviewsLawn & GardenLawn CareLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Despite attentive gardening practices, unwanted weeds can muscle in quickly, making organic weed killers a necessary tool for removing pesky plants without posing risks to food production or the environment. While these useful lawn-care products can help provide flowers and vegetables with the space they need to produce blossoms and edibles, it can be difficult to know which organic herbicides for weeds actually work. To help you in your search, we researched dozens of popular options and reached out to a lawn care and gardening expert for their experience-based insights.

As a result of our efforts, we found eight organic weed killers we feel confident recommending. Of those, our favorite is the Green Gobbler 20% Vinegar Weed & Grass Killer, a formula that’s easy to apply, works quickly, and is certified for organic use. Rather than spraying your garden with conventional herbicides full of toxic chemicals that do more harm than good, this and the rest of the best organic weed killers we selected use natural ingredients that work while keeping food, kids, and pets safe.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Green Gobbler 20% Vinegar Weed & Grass Killer
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Natural Armor 30% Home & Garden Vinegar
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST SPRAY: Natria Grass & Weed Control With Root Kill
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST CONCENTRATE: Bonide Captain Jack’s Deadweed Brew Concentrate
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST SPOT TREATMENT: Sunday Weed Warrior
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST MULTIPURPOSE: Earthborn Elements Pure Borax Powder
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST FOR GRAVEL: Ortho GroundClear Weed & Grass Killer
    Jump to Review
  8. ALSO CONSIDER: Eco Living Solutions Vinegar Weed & Grass Killer
    Jump to Review
The Best Organic Weed Killer Options
Photo: Amazon Photo: amazon.com

Before You Buy an Organic Weed Killer

The best organic weed killers are a one-step way to remove unwanted weeds like dandelions, poison ivy, and more. But they may not give you the results you’re after since they’re typically nonselective, meaning they can kill all the plants in vegetable gardens, flower beds, and grassy areas in addition to weeds. More traditional methods, such as pulling weeds by hand or using a weeding tool, may provide better weed control for lawns and spaces where you want more control over which plants you eradicate.

Organic Weed Killer Comparison Chart

Product NameTypeSizeFormula
Green Gobbler 20% Vinegar Weed & Grass KillerSpray1 gallon; other sizes availableNonselective; acetic acid
Natural Armor 30% Home & Garden VinegarSpray1 gallon; other sizes availableNonselective; acetic acid
Natria Grass & Weed Control With Root KillSpray24 ounces; other sizes availableNonselective; ammoniated soap 
Bonide Captain Jack’s Deadweed Brew ConcentrateLiquid concentrate32 ounces; other sizes availableNonselective; caprylic acid and capric acid
Sunday Weed WarriorSprayTwo 32-ounce bottles; other sizes availableNonselective; ammoniated soap
Earthborn Elements Pure Borax PowderPowder1 gallon; other sizes availableNonselective; sodium borate
Ortho GroundClear Weed & Grass KillerComfort wand spray1 gallon; other sizes availableNonselective; ammonium nonanoate
Eco Living Solutions Vinegar Weed & Grass KillerLiquid1 gallon; other sizes availableNonselective; sodium chloride and acetic acid

Our Top Picks

The following organic weed killers made our list because they’re potent enough to kill weeds naturally without the use of harmful chemicals that can contaminate fruits and vegetables or leave environmentally damaging residues behind. Choosing the best organic weed killer from these options depends on individual needs and weed types needing removal.

Best Overall

Green Gobbler 20% Vinegar Weed & Grass Killer

 Bottle of Green Gobbler 20% Vinegar Weed & Grass Killer on white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Organic Material Review Institute (OMRI)-listed for organic use
  • Spray application makes it easier to be precise
  • Starts working within 24 hours of application 

What We Don’t Like

  • May not totally eliminate particularly stubborn weeds

Specs

  • Type: Spray
  • Size: 1 gallon; other sizes available 
  • Formula: Nonselective; acetic acid

Crabgrass, dandelions, thistles, and other weeds are history with just a spritz of OMRI-listed Green Gobbler vinegar weed and grass killer. Derived from corn, this natural acetic acid herbicide is nonselective, meaning it kills all vegetation it’s applied to with a turnaround time of 24 hours. The easy-to-use spray attachment that comes with the gallon bottle makes application a cinch, and larger quantities are available without the extra nozzle for use as refills.

Green Gobbler is especially beneficial along fence lines, around patios and pool areas, and in mulched flower beds where common weeds and grasses tend to sprout most. Just use care not to spray it on desirable plantings because they, too, will die.

Get the Green Gobbler organic weed killer at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Green Gobbler

Best Bang for the Buck

Natural Armor 30% Home & Garden Vinegar

 Bottle of Natural Armor 30% Industrial Strength Vinegar on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • 6 times more potent than comparable formulas 
  • Comes with an attachable trigger sprayer
  • Ideal for large areas needing extensive weed control 

What We Don’t Like

  • Sprayer clogs sometimes

Specs

  • Type: Spray
  • Size: 1 gallon; other sizes available
  • Formula: Nonselective; acetic acid

To control weeds without spending a lot of cash, consider this Natural Armor concentrate. It’s available in an economical 1-gallon jug (as well as other sizes), comes at an attractive price, and contains vinegar that’s six times more potent than the household variety. This pet-safe weed killer can be applied using the attachable trigger sprayer, poured into a smaller spray bottle, or used with a pump-type garden sprayer. 

Natural Armor’s industrial-strength organic weed killer contains only pure and natural ingredients that are environmentally safe. It’s a nonselective vegetation killer that’s well suited for lawn edging and removing weeds from fence lines, between sidewalk cracks, and among patio pavers. This vinegar weed killer spray can also be used to clean mossy stone garden statues and outdoor ornaments.

Get the Natural Armor organic weed killer at Amazon or Natural Armor.

Best Spray

Natria Grass & Weed Control With Root Kill Herbicide

 Bottle of Natria Grass & Weed Control with Root Kill Herbicide on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Ready-to-use formula 
  • Ideal for cracks in pavement, edging, and more 
  • Precise spray applicator enables use as a weed killer for lawns

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires a relatively thick coating to work

Specs

  • Type: Spray
  • Size: 24 ounces; other sizes available
  • Formula: Nonselective; ammoniated soap

No need to mix or pour this Natria weed remover spray into another container—it comes in its own spray bottle and comes ready to apply. Unlike our two top picks, this option uses ammoniated soap of fatty acids, a natural ingredient that penetrates weed foliage to destroy the plant. Like our other recommendations, however, it’s also nonselective, so it shouldn’t be applied on a windy day if desirable plants are nearby. 

For best results, Natria recommends you apply enough of this organic product to fully saturate the weed’s foliage. The herbicide will then travel through the foliage and stems to the roots, destroying the weed completely and preventing regrowth. Though it’s a strong weed killer, Natria won’t contaminate soil, meaning gardeners can safely sow seeds 5 days after use.

Get the Natria organic weed killer (various sizes) at Amazon, Lowe’s, or Ace Hardware.

Best Concentrate

Bonide Captain Jack’s Deadweed Brew Concentrate

 Bottle of Bonide Captain Jack’s Deadweed Brew Concentrate on a white background
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Withers broadleaf or grassy weeds within hours
  • 32-ounce concentrate makes more than 8 gallons of product
  • Waterproof once dried 

What We Don’t Like

  • Requires dilution and a container for application

Specs

  • Type: Liquid concentrate
  • Size: 32 ounces; other sizes available
  • Formula: Nonselective; caprylic acid and capric acid

When it comes to making weed killers, Bonide has an excellent reputation, and this concentrate is no exception. It’s available in a couple of sizes, and the 32-ounce container of this organic weed killer is enough for over 8 gallons of diluted product. It’s easy to apply using a standard handheld or backpack sprayer, and once it dries, it’s waterproof for extended effectiveness. 

The chemical-conscious consumer can have peace of mind from this product as it is made with coconut and palm kernel oils, both capable of killing grassy and broadleaf weeds, moss, and algae. It is also suitable for applying to patios, walkways, driveways, fences, foundations, and more in temperatures as low as 40 degrees Fahrenheit. However, given that it is a nonselective option, it may not be safe for use directly on gardens or beloved plants. But, it can be used at a safe distance around these areas to kill harmful weeds and grasses. 

What our tester says: “We tried Deadweed Brew as part of our best weed killer tests by broadcasting it over a row of weeds growing between tire tracks on a gravel driveway. Within 4 hours, the weed zone had turned a pale greenish brown, and by the next morning, all the weeds were completely dead.”—Mark Wolfe, Product Reviews tester and writer 

Get the Bonide organic weed killer at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Bonide.

Best Spot Treatment

Sunday Weed Warrior

 The Best Organic Weed Killer Option Sunday Weed Warrior
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Easy to apply herbicidal soap kills grassy weeds
  • Results start to appear in just 20 minutes
  • OMRI-listed for safe organic use 

What We Don’t Like

  • May require periodic reapplication

Specs

  • Type: Spray
  • Size: Two 32-ounce bottles; other sizes available
  • Formula: Nonselective; ammoniated soap 

Sunday’s Weed Warrior is an herbicidal soap made from fatty acids designed to tackle grassy weeds, mosses, and algae. It works by breaking down the waxy coating that protects plants, leading to rapid dehydration and death. After application, you should start seeing visible results in about 20 minutes. 

As a nonselective killer, this isn’t a good weed killer for lawns since it will kill your grass, too. However, it’s quite effective as a spot treatment along sidewalks, next to flower beds, and near concrete patios via precise application using the spray bottle. Those needing to treat larger areas will be pleased to know there are refill sizes available, including a gallon jug that has a convenient sprayer wand. 

What our tester says: “The fact that I was so impressed with the Weed Warrior spot treatment that I bought the concentrated pouches to weed large areas is a testament to the product’s effectiveness.”—Daryna Tobey, Product Reviews tester and writer

Read our full review: Sunday Lawn Care Review 

Get the Sunday organic weed killer (various sizes) at Amazon, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Sunday.

Best Multipurpose

Earthborn Elements Pure Borax Powder

 The Best Organic Weed Killer Option Earthborn Elements Pure Borax Powder
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Can be mixed to varying strengths for different needs
  • Durable, resealable container is easy to store safely
  • Great for flower beds, driveways, and stepping stones 

What We Don’t Like

  • Finding the right strength may require some tinkering

Specs

  • Type: Powder
  • Size: 1 gallon; other sizes available 
  • Formula: Nonselective; sodium borate

Multipurpose borax can kill weeds, control unwanted insects, and boost laundry detergent—and it’s the active ingredient in Earthborn Elements borax powder. Borax, short for “sodium borate,” is a natural mineral mined in desert regions, including California’s Death Valley. 

To use, mix with water at a ratio of 10 ounces of borax to ½ cup of hot water, stirring until the powder dissolves. Next, further dilute the solution by pouring it into 2½ gallons of water, then spray it directly on weeds with a spray bottle or pump-type garden sprayer. Like many other natural weed killers, borax is nonselective, so you’ll want to take care to spray weeds only on a calm day to protect desirable plants. 

Get the Earthborn Elements organic weed killer at Amazon or Earthborn Elements.

Best for Gravel

Ortho GroundClear Weed & Grass Killer

 The Best Organic Weed Killer Option Ortho GroundClear Weed & Grass Killer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Listed by OMRI for safe organic use
  • Results appear in about 15 minutes
  • Battery-powered sprayer covers gravel pads quickly

What We Don’t Like

  • Sprayer tube sometimes becomes disconnected

Specs

  • Type: Comfort wand spray
  • Size: 1 gallon; other sizes available
  • Formula: Nonselective; ammonium nonanoate

Though we’ve yet to test it as a weed killer for gravel, we can hardly wait to unleash Ortho GroundClear’s battery-powered sprayer on our weed-prone gravel parking pad. Since this gravel area sits somewhat close to a drainage ditch, we’re careful about how we care for it, so the fact that this weed and grass killer is OMRI-certified is ideal. We also appreciate that the sprayer wand has adjustable settings to enable more precise application in mulched garden beds and alongside landscaped spaces. 

Once applied, GroundClear gets to work, destroying plants’ cell membranes to cause dehydration and death in about 15 minutes. Though larger and more stubborn weeds may take a bit longer to die, this rainproof spray provides lasting effects that help prevent unwanted plants from coming back. 

Get the Ortho organic weed killer (various sizes) at Amazon, Lowe’s, Tractor Supply Co., Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Ortho.

Also Consider

Eco Living Solutions Vinegar Weed & Grass Killer

 The Best Dandelion Killer Option: Eco Living Solutions Organic Vinegar Weed Killer
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Listed by OMRI for safe organic use
  • Results appear in about 15 minutes
  • Battery-powered sprayer covers gravel pads quickly

What We Don’t Like

  • Sprayer tube sometimes becomes disconnected

Specs

  • Type: Comfort wand spray
  • Size: 1 gallon; other sizes available
  • Formula: Nonselective; ammonium nonanoate

The Eco Living Solutions vinegar weed and grass killer contains high-strength vinegar for effective natural foliage eradication. It comes ready to use and should be sprayed full strength on weeds until foliage is saturated. It’s nonselective, so take care not to let overspray get on desirable plantings.

For those looking to get rid of grass, this product also works as an organic weed killer for lawns., making it an eco-friendly way to transition to xeriscape landscaping. Safe for honey bees, soil, and groundwater, it contains no harmful or toxic ingredients and can be applied to weeds in vegetable gardens or around fruiting vines. One gallon of this ready-to-use weed killer treats 1,000 square feet, and it also comes in a larger size to cover a greater area. Results start to show in as little as 24 hours, and no retreating is necessary.

Get the Eco Garden Pro organic weed killer at Amazon or Eco Living Solutions.

Or, DIY Your Own Organic Weed Killer 

If you prefer the DIY approach to killing weeds, you can make a weed killer using basic essentials you likely already have in your kitchen. Here’s Bob Vila’s favorite nonherbicide weed killer recipe.

In a large bowl, combine: 

  • 1 gallon of white household vinegar 
  • 1 cup of salt 
  • 1 tablespoon of dish soap 

After combining the ingredients, pour the DIY weed killer into a spray bottle or sprayer and apply. This homemade weed killer recipe will create a full gallon of foolproof organic weed killer that can be applied to large or small patches of weeds. 

If possible, try to apply this weirdly effective weeding solution when it is sunny to help dry out and shrivel the weeds. The combination of the weed killer and the sun will attack the weeds’ root systems and speed up the process.

For other ways to kill weeds without buying a weed killer, check out this list of homemade weed killer pros and cons. It details everything we like and don’t about popular DIY weed removal tactics. 

Our Verdict

Our top pick, the Green Gobbler 20% Vinegar Weed & Grass Killer, is less toxic than traditional formulas, while the Earthborn Elements Pure Borax Powder is a great multipurpose choice. Popular lawn and garden options from Roundup and Ortho weren’t listed because they didn’t meet our sustainability guidelines—each contains ingredients like glyphosate 2,4D that have harmful environmental effects.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose the Best Organic Weed Killers

Our list of recommendations is the result of an in-depth exploration of organic weed killers, which are more environmentally friendly products for killing weeds than conventional herbicides. It includes picks for specific categories so shoppers have more targeted options for their needs as well as products that come in different sizes with varying application methods for both expansive coverage and occasional spot treatment. 

Several of our recommendations are vinegar solutions of varying concentrations because vinegar kills weeds effectively without causing environmental harm. Depending on the specific weed problem, products with either 20 percent or 30 percent acetic acid will be appropriate.

What to Consider When Choosing an Organic Weed Killer

Before buying a weed killer, shoppers will want to investigate ingredients and read labels to determine whether the product will kill only specific weeds or affect all vegetation. It’s also a good idea to be mindful of the difference between organic herbicides that kill existing weeds and those that stop weed seeds from sprouting.

Pre-Emergent vs. Post-Emergent

Like chemical weed killers, organic herbicides are available in two types: pre-emergent and post-emergent. Herbicides that are pre-emergent destroy seeds or prevent them from sprouting, while the post-emergent kind kills or inhibits weeds that have already sprouted and are growing.

The difference between the two is crucial because once a pre-emergent product is sprayed on the soil, it will prevent all seeds from sprouting there—whether those of common weeds, plants you never knew were weeds, or desirable plants and flowers. While this type of spray will inhibit weed growth alongside fence lines, driveways, and patios, if any of it lands near a plot of soil intended for flowers or a vegetable garden, it’s unlikely that any seeds planted there will sprout.

Selective vs. Nonselective

A selective weed killer will destroy only specific types of weeds but not others. For example, organic herbicides developed for lawns likely target broadleaf weeds, such as chickweed and clover, but they won’t damage turf-type grasses like Bermuda grass

Nonselective weed killers will kill all vegetation—both weeds and desirable plants—so gardeners should use them with caution. If you’re trying to get rid of dandelions that have spread throughout your lawn, remember that spraying or broadcasting a nonselective weed killer will kill the grass along with the weeds. 

When it comes to natural herbicides, users have very few selective products to choose from; the majority are nonselective and designed to kill most forms of vegetation. They can be used between sidewalk cracks or patio pavers or to create fence lines but shouldn’t be used near desirable plants and flowers, especially on windy days.

Ingredients

True to form, organic weed killers will not have toxic ingredients. Shoppers looking for lawn-care items to start or maintain a garden may be surprised to find several household ingredients, such as vinegar, salt, and corn, present in some organic weed killers. Other beneficial ingredients include soaps and essential oils, such as cinnamon or clove. 

Lesser-known ingredients, like citric acid, caprylic acid (a coconut oil derivative), and D-limonene (derived from citrus fruits), also feature prominently in many organic weed killers. For added benefits, manufacturers may combine two or more of the above ingredients to control specific types of weeds.

Form

Natural weed-killing products are available in various forms, with some better suited to specific types of applications. 

  • Spray: Easy to use and offering uniform coverage, most sprays are designed for direct application to the weed’s foliage. Spraying should be avoided on windy days to avoid harming desirable plants.
  • Liquid concentrate: For those with large crops or heavy weed infestation, a liquid concentrate may be best. It can be diluted with water and easily applied over large areas with a pump-type garden sprayer.
  • Powder: Meant for broadcasting over specific areas, powder herbicides can also get carried by the wind and inadvertently kill nearby plants.
  • Salts: Products containing salt will kill plants, so be careful when using them. Salt makes soil infertile, and it can take years to leach it out. Salt-based nontoxic weed killers are often best for patio pavers or sidewalk joints rather than flower beds.

FAQs

If you’re switching from a traditional weed killer to an organic type, you may still have questions. Here are answers to some of the most frequently asked questions about organic weed killers.

Q. Will organic weed killers damage my soil? 

If they contain salt, then yes, they can. Organic herbicides that contain vinegar or other nonchemical ingredients that only stay in the soil for a few days and are less likely to cause damage

Q. Are organic weed killers completely safe and free of toxic elements?

Most organic weed killers are considered environmentally safe, but just because a product is natural or organic doesn’t mean it won’t cause headaches or other symptoms. Always read warning labels.

Q. How often can I use organic weed killers?

That depends on the product. Most sprays can be used whenever new weeds appear, and some may require two or more applications to get rid of certain types.

Q. What is the best time to spray weed killer?

For best results, apply weed killer early in the day or late in the afternoon to prevent rapid evaporation. Avoid spraying on windy days to keep the solution from drifting onto unintended areas, and try not to spray if rain is expected so the formula doesn’t get washed away before it has a chance to work.

Q. Is it better to spray weed killer wet or dry?

It’s better to spray weed killer on dry plants so the herbicide sticks instead of mixing with the moisture and running off.

Q. Should you cut weeds before spraying?

Many organic weed killers work by absorbing the solution through the leaves, so cutting them before application actually reduces the surface area available, which can reduce their efficacy. Chrissie Handley, a lawn care and gardening specialist at Online Turf—a turf, compost, and soil company—agrees. “It’s not really necessary—the weed killers generally target the plants by the root, so cutting the stems won’t increase the chances of absorbing the weed killer.” 

The post 8 Organic Weed Killers That Are Safe for Organic Gardening and the Environment appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[Cold Bathroom? These Heaters Will Fix That in Minutes]]>The right bathroom heater can make winter mornings bearable. We tested a range of popular models, and our favorite pick delivers some serious soothing warmth.

The post Cold Bathroom? These Heaters Will Fix That in Minutes appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-bathroom-heaters/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=295854Mon, 17 Feb 2025 10:52:11 -0500ReviewsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Stepping into a chilly bathroom isn’t the most pleasant experience, but fortunately, there is a wide range of bathroom heaters that can quickly warm any bathroom. We researched nearly 50 different models and tested four in our own homes, and we found a favorite. Dreo’s wall-mount space heater took top honors for its quick heating, safety features, and its ability to be controlled remotely.

In addition to the units we tested, several others met our high standards for quality, safety, and innovation, and we’ve included them here as well. Keep reading to learn more about how the following models earned their spots on our lineup of the best bathroom heaters. 

  1. BEST OVERALL: Dreo Wall-Mount Space Heater
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Lasko 1500W Bathroom Space Heater
    Jump to Review
  3. BEST FOR DRESSING ZONE: Lasko MyHeat Personal Mini Space Heater
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST OSCILLATING: Dreo Solaris Slim H3 Space Heater With ALCI
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST QUIET: DeLonghi Bathroom Safe 1200W Radiant Heater
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST CEILING-MOUNTED: Panasonic WhisperWarm DC Fan/Heater
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST FAN: Stiebel Eltron Wall-Mounted Electric Fan Heater
    Jump to Review
  8. BEST RECESSED: Broan-NuTone Comfort-Flo Wall Heater
    Jump to Review
The Best Bathroom Heater Lasko MyHeat personal heater
Photo: Glenda Taylor for Bob Vila

Bathroom Heaters Comparison Chart

 Max OutputMax OutputControl
Dreo Wall-MountWall-mount1500WDirect, Remote, Smart (App)
Lasko 1500WPortable1500WOnboard button
Lasko MyHeatPortable`200WOnboard button
Dreo Solaris Slim H3Portable1500WDigital thermostat
DeLonghiOil-filled radiator1200W3-Stage thermostat
Panasonic WhisperWarmCeiling-mount1600WWired wall switch
Stiebel EltronWall-mount1500WManual thermostat
Broan-NuToneWall-mount1500WManual thermostat

Our Top Picks

We tested the first four bathroom heaters on this list, and you’ll find a variety of options suited for various types of bathroom layouts and budgets. From wall-mount models that don’t take up floor space to small personal options for dressing nooks, these are some of the best bathroom heaters for keeping your space comfy. 

Best Overall

Dreo Wall-Mount Space Heater

 The Best Bathroom Heater Option Dreo Wall-Mount Space HeaterThe Best Bathroom Heater Option Dreo Wall-Mount Space Heater
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Wall-mounted convenience
  • Smart app integration 
  • Fast heating performance
  • Safe for bathrooms

What We Don’t Like

  • Location depends on outlet placement

Specs 

  • Type: Wall-mount
  • Maximum power consumption: 1500W
  • Heat control: Onboard, Remote, Smart (app)

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Performance 5/5; Functionality 4.8/5; Noise 4.8/5; Value 4.8/5 

Dreo has a winner with the Dreo WH517S smart space heater. We liked being able to hang this space heater on the wall, where it was up and out of the way, rather than sitting on a wet bathroom floor. Installation was simple: Dreo included a mounting template that indicated the location for the screws, and best of all, the template came with a bubble level so that we could ensure the heater would be perfectly straight.

Setting up the app was a snap. All we had to do was plug the Dreo WH517S into the wall socket and turn it on. We already had the Dreo app on our smartphone, which immediately recognized the heater. If you don’t have the app, a QR code walks you through the steps.

We tested the space heater in a small, 65-square-foot bathroom located at the end of an HVAC duct run, so it always felt cold during the winter—until now. On a day when the outdoor temperatures were in the single digits, the WH517S raised the bathroom’s temperature from a chilly 58 degrees to 70 degrees in about 20 minutes. 

This heater also comes with an ALCI plug option capable of shutting the heater off when it senses abnormal electric flow. It also has an IP24 rating, so it can take an occasional splash of water. In homes with small children, this heater can be mounted high on the wall for added safety. 

What our tester says: “On winter mornings, I love being able to turn on the heater in the bathroom from my smartphone without having to get out of bed. Just 15 minutes and the bathroom is warm and comfortable for my shower.” —Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Dreo Wall-Mount bathroom heater at Amazon or Dreo.

Best Bang for the Buck

Lasko 1500W Bathroom Space Heater

 The Lasko 1500W Bathroom Space Heater on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Affordable, compact, and lightweight
  • Heats very quickly
  • Built-in 1-hour timer
  • ALCI safety plug

What We Don’t Like

  • Limited control features

Specs 

  • Type: Portable
  • Maximum power consumption: 1500W
  • Heat control: Onboard button (high, low, and 1-hour timer)

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Performance 4.5/5; Functionality 4.5/5; Noise 4/5; Value 4.3/5 

You don’t have to spend a lot to warm up a chilly bathroom. The Lasko 1500W bathroom space heater is compact, comes with an ALCI safety plug, and best of all, is affordable. 

This Lasko heater doesn’t have many bells and whistles, but it’s a solid pick to heat a small- to medium-size bathroom. It measures just 8 inches tall by 6.25 inches wide and weighs just 3.35 pounds, making it small enough to sit on a bathroom shelf or countertop. 

In our tests, this budget-friendly heater raised the temperature of our bathroom by 10 degrees in under 30 minutes when we ran it on high. We liked the option of choosing high or low power, and the heater’s 1-hour setting ensures it won’t continue to produce heat after an hour if someone leaves it running. 

It comes with a cool-touch case that didn’t get hot after an hour of running the heater on high, but the grille on the front of the heater did get hot, so we’d suggest locating this bathroom heater out of the reach of pets and little hands. 

Get the Lasko 1500W bathroom heater at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Walmart.

Best for Dressing Zone

Lasko MyHeat Personal Mini Space Heater

 The Best Bathroom Heater Option Lasko MyHeat Personal Mini Space Heater
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Super compact and space-saving
  • Small space heater with compact footprint
  • Simple one-button operation
  • Cool-touch exterior
  • Low-wattage heater

What We Don’t Like

  • No ALCI plug; use in dry areas only
  • Limited heat range

Specs 

  • Type: Portable
  • Maximum power consumption: 200W
  • Heat control: Onboard button (on/off)

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Performance 4/5; Functionality 4.8/5; Noise 4/5; Value 4.5/5 

For those short on bathroom space but needing some added warmth in a dry area, such as a changing corner, dressing zone, or wardrobe nook, the super-compact Lasko MyHeat personal heater is a great option. 

It doesn’t come with an ALCI plug, so it’s not suitable for areas in the bathroom that are prone to occasional splashes, and it’s not powerful enough to raise the temperature of a large bathroom quickly, but in our test bathroom, after 45 minutes, the temperature climbed 10 degrees. We felt the most warmth within 3 to 4 feet of the front of the Lasko heater. 

Still, it’s a nice little unit that offers just the right amount of warmth for small spaces. It’s simple to operate with a single on/off button on the front, and the cool-touch case keeps the sides and back from getting uncomfortably hot. We found the perfect spot for the Lasko MyHeat–plugged in under our dressing area bench. No more cold feet while putting on socks!

What our tester says: “I love that despite its compact size, this little Lasko bathroom heater can create real warmth. When I need spot-warming, this is the one I turn to.” —Glenda Taylor, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Lasko MyHeat bathroom heater at Amazon, Walmart, or Best Buy.

Best Oscillating

Dreo Solaris Slim H3 Space Heater With ALCI

 The Dreo Solaris Slim H3 Space Heater on a white background with an illustration of orange waves representing glowing heat.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • 70-degree oscillation 
  • Thermostat, timer, and remote
  • ALCI safety plug 
  • Overheating and tip-over protection

What We Don’t Like

  • Controls aren’t entirely intuitive
  • No integrated cord keeper

Specs 

  • Type: Portable
  • Maximum power consumption: 1500W
  • Heat control: Digital thermostat with 1-degree increments

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4.5/5; Performance 5/5; Functionality 5/5; Noise 5/5; Value 4.5/5 

Thanks to its quiet operation, effective heating, and feature-rich design, this slim and stylish Dreo heater earned nearly perfect marks in all our tests. Though it weighs under 5 pounds and isn’t even 6 inches in diameter, it had no difficulty warming spaces significantly larger than its 200-square-foot recommended area. For that reason, we especially appreciate that it comes with a remote with an impressive 26-foot range, as we regularly have to turn it off during our baths in order to keep ourselves from getting too warm. 

Still, remotes are fairly commonplace for these types of appliances, so Dreo upped the ante by adding 70-degree oscillation, a 12-hour timer, a programmable thermostat, three heat settings, and fan-only operation. The heater also features an ALCI plug, V-0 flame-retardant construction, overheating and tip-over protection, and an inline carry handle. While it did take us a bit of fumbling to figure out this unit’s touch-control buttons at first, it wasn’t so complicated that we needed to consult the manual, and we’ve now used it without issue almost every day for nearly 2 months. 

Get the Dreo Solaris bathroom heater at Amazon or Dreo.

More Great Options

The following bathroom heaters were not personally tested, but we chose them for our lineup based on their quality, features, and consumer ratings. If you’re still looking for the right model, you’ll likely find it here.

Best Quiet

DeLonghi Bathroom Safe 1200W Radiant Heater

 The DeLonghi Bathroom Safe 1200W Radiant Heater on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Completely silent radiator heater
  • Fitted with a GFCI safety plug
  • Offers three power settings plus programmable timer
  • Built-in carry handles 

What We Don’t Like

  • Heating is slow

Specs 

  • Type: Oil-filled radiator
  • Maximum power consumption: 1200W
  • Heat control: 3-stage thermostat

Oil-filled radiators have long been silent heating options, but power-hungry devices have replaced them to a large extent. Still, we like the idea of this one, a lighter, maneuverable radiator from DeLonghi that weighs only 7.8 pounds. And, with a choice of three heat settings (1200W on high, 700W on medium, and 500W on low), it can be more economical than its predecessors.

It features a manually programmable timer with a 24-hour range that looks old-school but reportedly works flawlessly. The 8-fin design increases surface area so it heats consistently but without the surface getting scorching hot. We’re glad DeLonghi included a ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) safety plug, which makes this radiator a good choice for bathrooms. 

While the DeLonghi heater is a completely silent option, it does heat up a bit slowly, so the timer is useful for preheating the bathroom before use. We think this pick would be an excellent option for a central bathroom that’s used frequently by family members.

Get the DeLonghi bathroom heater at Amazon, Tractor Supply Co., Wayfair, or The Home Depot.

Best Ceiling-Mounted

Panasonic WhisperWarm DC Fan/Heater

 The Panasonic WhisperWarm DC Fan/Heater on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Combines bathroom exhaust fan and heater
  • Intelligent electronically commutated motor (ECM) 
  • Smartflow technology helps maximize performance 
  • Adjustable grille has a built-in diffuser 

What We Don’t Like

  • Professional installation is recommended

Specs 

  • Type: Ceiling-mounted
  • Maximum power consumption: 1600W
  • Heat control: Wired wall switch

A ceiling-mounted bathroom heater doesn’t use up valuable floor or wall space, and when properly installed, there should be no safety issues. The Panasonic WhisperWarm goes one better by integrating a bathroom vent with a heater in a single low-profile unit.

We like the exhaust fan, which can be set to run at 50, 80, or 110 cubic feet per minute (CFM) to suit a variety of room sizes. The heater has a fixed output of 1600W but can be connected to a thermostat, allowing full control over room warmth. The Panasonic WhisperWarm uses the brand’s own intelligent DC motor, making it an energy-efficient space heater. The grille can be adjusted to direct warm air.

A Flex-Z fast bracket is designed to simplify installation, and the Panasonic can be fitted to either 4-inch or 6-inch ducting. A dimmable LED is also an option (though at extra cost). If a ceiling-mount heater isn’t already installed, we suggest hiring an electrician, because this unit requires a dedicated electric circuit.

Get the Panasonic bathroom heater at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot.

Best Fan

Stiebel Eltron Wall-Mounted Electric Fan Heater

 The Stiebel Eltron Wall-Mounted Electric Fan Heater on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Downdraft fan design for quick heating
  • 60-minute boost timer 
  • Relatively quiet 49 decibels

What We Don’t Like

  • Must be hardwired; professional installation recommended

Specs 

  • Type: Wall-mounted
  • Maximum power consumption: 1500W
  • Heat control: Manual thermostat

The main draw of a bathroom heater with a fan is to spread the heat as rapidly as possible around the room, but a downside can be extra noise. The Stiebel Eltron wall heater is different in that it delivers warmth quickly while running at just 49 decibels, which is about the level of a modern refrigerator.

Its maximum output is 1500W, which Stiebel Eltron rates as sufficient for rooms up to 150 square feet. A built-in thermostat regulates performance, and we like its 60-minute boost timer, with the unit automatically reverting to its previous setting at the end of the period. There is also a frost protection setting and an on/off switch that shuts down the whole unit to prevent accidental use.

Keep in mind that this is a hardwired unit, so it can’t simply plug into an outlet. If there’s no existing hardwired heater, professional installation is a good idea.

Get the Stiebel Eltron bathroom heater at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Recessed

Broan-NuTone Comfort-Flo Wall Heater

 The Broan-NuTone Comfort-Flo Wall Heater on a white background.
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Fits discreetly into the wall 
  • The louvers help spread warm air
  • Durable steel construction 
  • Wipe-clean white enamel finish

What We Don’t Like

  • Single output level only
  • Professional installation recommended

Specs 

  • Type: Wall-mounted
  • Maximum power consumption: 1500W
  • Heat control: Manual thermostat

Wall heaters for bathrooms can save valuable floor space, but they can also butt into the room, providing a frustrating obstacle. The Broan-NuTone Comfort-Flo is a recessed or in-wall bathroom heater that provides a low-profile solution that we love for small bathrooms where space is at a premium. The louvers direct the heat flow downwards, helping to spread warmth evenly, and a front-mounted knob controls the built-in thermostat.

The Broan-NuTone Comfort-Flo is factory-wired at 1500W and 120 volts. It can be converted to 750W at 120 volts or 1500W at 240 volts, which may suit some installations. Note that the choice of watts is final; it does not offer two output levels. Installation is fairly straightforward, but we suggest hiring an electrician if this heater isn’t replacing an existing bathroom with a dedicated circuit. 

Get the Broan-NuTone bathroom heater at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose and Tested the Best Bathroom Heaters

When we started researching modern bathroom heating options, we quickly discovered that there were hundreds of different models available. After carefully considering nearly 50 choices, we settled on eight top models, and then we chose four of those to test in our own bathrooms. 

We also looked at how safe the various models were for use in standard bathrooms.Remodeling expert Benjamin Stenson, director of operations of Norsemen, a home remodeling contractor in Louisville, Kentucky, told us, “Safety features are paramount, so users must opt for heaters designed to withstand bathroom conditions.”

Hands-on testing consisted of assessing the quality of each heater’s build, trying out each of its features, and keeping records of how quickly each one heated a small bathroom during cold weather. We noted how hot the exterior of the heaters became after an hour of continuous use, and we awarded points based on a rubric—the better a bathroom heater performed on a test or assessment, the higher the points. After testing, we summed the points and used them to determine our best overall pick and assign relevant categories for the others. 

Testing Stats
Products tested 4
Time spent testing Several weeks
Tests performed4
Price range$25 to $250
Ease of UsePerformanceFunctionalityNoiseValue
Dreo Wall-Mount554.84.84.8
Lasko 1500W44.54.544.3
Lasko MyHeat544.844.5
Dreo Solaris Slim H34.55554.5

What to Consider When Choosing a Bathroom Heater

While the appearance of a bathroom heater will always impact choice, there are a number of technical aspects to consider. The information below will help shoppers choose the most appropriate types of electric bathroom heaters for their needs.

Type

The three general types of heaters for bathrooms include portable bathroom heaters, wall-mounted heaters, and ceiling-mounted heaters. Most (but not all) space heaters for bathroom use are electric. It’s harder to find non-electric heaters than electric heaters for bathroom use.

Portable

The term “portable” can refer to various bathroom heaters, including plug-ins, space heaters, and oil-filled radiators. These are usually among the most affordable bathroom heaters. Their distinguishing design feature is that they are not permanently fitted to the bathroom wall or ceiling, so they can be used in other rooms. Some are very light and easy to move. Space heaters often have carry handles. Although oil-filled radiators are heavier, they can still be moved if necessary. All of these might be good options for bathrooms not in regular use, such as in a guest accommodation.

Wall Mounted

The main advantage of wall-mounted bathroom heaters is that they don’t take up valuable floor space. They can also be very discreet. Wall-mounted exhaust fans are sometimes combined with heater elements, though these generally have more modest output.

Ceiling Mounted

Much like wall-mounted models, a ceiling-mounted bathroom heater can be both powerful and discreet. Its position also keeps it well away from small children and pets. Many are combined with an exhaust fan, which is a benefit but can complicate installation. Some ceiling models are infrared space heaters that use a large red bulb to radiate heat downward. 

Size and Heat Output

Physical size will have an impact on choice, especially in smaller bathrooms. Plug-ins and small bathroom heaters can be an effective option, though recessed wall units and ceiling models have no space penalty at all once installed.

Actual heat output can be difficult to assess on an electric heater. Most indoor room heaters are rated in watts. Opinions vary, but many experts quote 5 to 10 watts per square foot as optimal for comfortable warmth. However, manufacturer figures may contradict this rule of thumb and are perhaps a better guide. Models described as providing “supplemental” heat might also fall below this standard, but it does depend on bathroom size. Bathroom heaters that provide thermostats or two output settings offer greater control over personal comfort.

Safety

Water and electricity are a dangerous mix, with a risk of serious electrical shock. The descriptive materials for any heater intended for use in the bathroom should clearly state that it is for bathroom use, but we could not find any official guidelines. Ceiling heaters for bathrooms present little risk when installed correctly because there are no exposed heater elements or plugs.

Other units may be at risk of water splashes, so thought should be given to positioning. In addition, there is some risk at wall outlets. The usual solution is to fit either an ALCI or GFCI safety plug. Both will cut power in a fraction of a second and prevent harm. Many manufacturers provide these, but they can also be retrofitted.

Some use portable propane heaters in bathrooms and other interior rooms, but if you choose that option, make sure the heater is designed for inside use. Some will give off dangerous fumes. 

Additional Features

  • The amount of temperature control varies considerably. Although thermostatic control is common, ceiling fans may simply be on/off devices. Thermostats may offer only two or three settings or be fully variable. They may also be combined with separate heat settings. Comparing different types of bathroom heaters can be difficult, so shoppers will want to pay attention to exactly how much flexibility and control is provided.
  • Noise level is another key area. While bathroom heaters aren’t particularly noisy, fans may have an impact at high settings. Decibel ratings may be provided, though such descriptions as “low noise” and “whisper quiet” are used more often.
  • Handheld remote controls are a popular extra. Functionality varies, so this is another factor worth checking. Smart control via Wi-Fi and phone apps is widely available for space heaters, allowing remote control and scheduling. These options are also available on a few wall heaters.
  • Timers are sometimes offered and may be manual or digital.
  • Ceiling-mounted bathroom fans may include lighting.

FAQs 

There’s a lot of detailed information in the article above, and we hope it answers most questions that often crop up regarding choosing the best bathroom heater. While doing our research, we came across some queries of a more general nature, and we have addressed those here.

Q. What is the best way to heat a small bathroom?

The best way to heat a small bathroom is often with either a portable heater, a fan-less wall panel, or a heated towel rack for the bathroom. These provide sufficient heat but are either very quiet or completely silent. 

Q. Are bathroom heaters worth it?

Bathroom heaters are absolutely worth it, as anyone who has had to bathe in a cold bathroom will attest. What’s more, many are very affordable as well as economical to run, so users can have a little luxury without a big bill.

Q. What types of heaters are allowed in bathrooms?

Many different types of heaters are allowed in bathrooms, ranging from low-cost portable models to a variety of wall- and ceiling-mounted options. Our collection of top bathroom heaters listed above underlines the wide choice available.

Q. Are bathroom heaters safe to use?

Bathroom heaters are perfectly safe to use when installed and operated following the manufacturer’s recommendations. Sometimes it’s as simple as having an ALCI safety plug fitted. With others, the wiring is hidden and out of harm’s way.

Q. Is it bad to leave a bathroom heater on all night?

It’s not a good idea if it’s a continuously running heater. However, if you have a permanently installed heater that runs on a thermostat, it’s probably okay. For trips to the restroom at night, consider a heated toilet seat and leave the space heater off. 

Q. How big of a heater do I need for my bathroom?

Use 10 watts per square foot of floor space as a guide when sizing any kind of heater. For example, a 1500W bathroom heater will warm a 150-square-foot bathroom efficiently.

Q. Does a bathroom heater need its own circuit?

If it’s hardwired, probably. If it’s a high-capacity heater (1500W or up) that plugs into an outlet, it could overload the circuit if several other appliances are plugged in at the same time. 

Meet the Tester: Glenda Taylor is a contractor, product tester, and writer focusing primarily on construction, DIY tools, and home appliances.

The post Cold Bathroom? These Heaters Will Fix That in Minutes appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[The 15 Best Mattress Brands of 2025 ]]>A good night’s sleep isn’t only enjoyable; it’s vital for your health. Find your ideal mattress with one of the best mattress brands on the market.

The post The 15 Best Mattress Brands of 2025  appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-mattress-brands/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=176036Sun, 16 Feb 2025 06:20:13 -0500ReviewsBedroomsFurniture & DecorInteriorMattresses & BeddingWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

A mattress is one of the most important—and often one of the priciest—purchases most people make for their bedrooms, and the right mattress is worth the investment, because quality shut-eye and better health starts with a good foundation. With a huge range of types and price points, though, choosing the right one often requires starting the search with options from the best mattress brands. 

What is the best mattress to buy? It’s a tough question to answer, as each person’s needs and preferences are different. Good mattresses are supportive, comfortable, and durable, to lull sleepers into a cozy yet cradled rest night after night. Some people need extra support, while others seek out mattresses that aren’t hot, or focus on natural materials. The mattress brands listed below carry a variety of mattress types at different price points to complete the bedroom and help sleepers achieve a restful night. Learning about these well-regarded brands should help shoppers choose the right mattress with the confidence that they support their products and have earned their reputation for quality materials and excellent customer support.

1. Saatva

The Best Mattress Brand Option: Saatva
Photo: Saatva Mattresses Photo: saatva.com

Price Range: $$ to $$$

Top Products: Saatva Classic Mattress (from $1,399 at Saatva) and Saatva Latex Hybrid Mattress (from $1,699 at Saatva)

For hotel-quality comfort at home, consider a mattress from Saatva, which carries luxury mattresses made from premium materials like organic cotton, CertiPUR-US certified memory foam, and eco-friendly materials. Each Saatva mattress is handcrafted to order in the U.S. using consciously sourced materials. The various mattress styles are engineered for a pain-free sleep with a dedicated lumbar support zone to help with optimal alignment. 

To increase this luxurious feeling, most Saatva mattress styles also include a pillow-top design to add softness without sacrificing support. The company’s penchant for high-quality materials is evident across its range of mattress types, bedding, and bed frames, such as with the Saatva Classic Mattress, which is available in sizes from twin to split california king, firmness ranging from plush soft to firm, and two different height options, including 11.5 inches and 14.5 inches. The options give customers a wide variety of customizations to create the right base for comfortable slumber. 

Shop Saatva mattresses at::

2. DreamCloud

The Best Mattress Brand Option: DreamCloud
Photo: DreamCloud 

Price Range: $$ to $$$

Top Products: DreamCloud Luxury Hybrid Mattress (from $449 at DreamCloud) and DreamCloud Premier (from $649 at DreamCloud)

DreamCloud offers premium hybrid mattresses at a reasonable price. The company’s three mattress styles blend a variety of mattress technologies, featuring three material layers to help the user sleep deeply. The supportive coil system offers a bit of bounce and enhanced edge support, layers of high-density gel memory foam provide a cool but cozy sleep, and then there’s the plush, cashmere-blend Euro top. These attributes combine the best of latex, memory foam, and coil mattresses into a hybrid that works well for many sleepers. 

The DreamCloud Premier Mattress features contouring quilted gel memory foam, supportive quilted foam, therapeutic gel-infused memory foam, individually-wrapped coils, and a base layer for stability. DreamCloud offers one of the longest trial periods in the industry: A 365-night trial gives the user a full year to decide if the mattress is the right fit. Free delivery and returns make trying one of their mattresses risk-free. And for those looking to outfit the entire bedroom with plush fixings, DreamCloud also carries bed bases, bedding, and pillows. 

Shop DreamCloud mattresses at

3. Casper

The Best Mattress Brand Option: Casper
Photo: Casper

Price Range: $$ to $$$$

Top Products: Casper The One Mattress (from $599 at Casper) and Casper Sleep Element Mattress (from $335 at Amazon) 

Casper prides itself on providing supportive, cooling mattresses designed for a revitalizing sleep. The brand sells several mattress types, with affordable configurations made of breathable, perforated foam or pricier hybrid mattresses with supportive inner layers. The Casper Sleep Element Mattress is a top option with breathable open-cell foam layers that help to improve airflow through the mattress, keeping users cool and relaxed while sleeping.

What started with the Casper Original has expanded into four mattress styles, from the affordable, basic Element mattress to the extra-supportive Wave Hybrid. Each of Casper’s mattresses includes a supportive design and a perforated AirScape foam layer to help the user stay cool while sleeping. The reasonable price point is appealing to a range of consumers, and the 100-day trial period is also an excellent draw. 

Shop Casper mattresses at:

4. Nectar Sleep

The Best Mattress Brand Option: Nectar Sleep
Photo: Nectar Sleep

Price Range: $$ to $$$

Top Products: Nectar Premier Memory Foam Mattress (from $549 at Nectar Sleep) and Nectar Classic Hybrid Mattress (from $499 at Nectar Sleep) 

Nectar Sleep offers premium mattresses at competitive prices. Founded in 2016, the company has offices in New York, San Francisco, London, and Tel Aviv. The company provides all-foam, multilayered mattresses that boast plush comfort, comfortable support, and surface cooling. The four mattress styles feature an adaptive, contoured memory-foam layer to relieve common pressure points behind the shoulders, hips, and legs.

A quality option for just about any bedroom is the Nectar Premier Memory Foam Mattress that has a foundation base to minimize motion transfer, a memory foam core for pressure relief and support, all topped with a cooling cover to keep sleepers comfortable during warm nights. This option adds motion suppression and extra cooling over the Classic model, but customers can upgrade to the Luxe or Ultra models to benefit from increased luxury. The company also offers a Hybrid option in all four levels. Nectar Sleep sells mattresses, bedroom furniture, bedding, and dog beds online and in 2,000 retail stores across the U.S. As a prominent brand in the bed-in-a-box industry, Nectar Sleep exceeds expectations when it comes to guarantees, offering a 365-night trial period, forever warranty, free shipping, and free returns. 

Shop Nectar Sleep mattresses at: 

5. Purple

The Best Mattress Brand Option: Purple
Photo: Purple

Price Range: $$ to $$$

Top Products: Purple Restore Hybrid Mattress (from $1,699 at Purple) and Purple Mattress (from $799 at Purple) 

Purple’s origin story dates back to 1989 when founding brothers Terry and Tony Pearce worked to develop a cushioning fluid to prevent wheelchair pressure sores. Their process set off a chain reaction, eventually leading to the development of their Hyper-Elastic Polymer. While a range of industries—from medical beds to shoe insoles—incorporated this ground-breaking polymer, the brothers were interested in creating something new, and the Purple mattress was born. 

Purple incorporates the Pearce brothers’ invention into every mattress to create the ultimate no-pressure bed, such as the Purple Restore Hybrid Mattress, which features two inches of GelFlex® Grid and edge-to-edge coils to improve support and cradle the sleeper’s pressure points for improved sleep comfort. Each Purple mattress features the brand’s “Purple Grid’’ technology: a waffle-pattern topper made of hyperelastic polymer that is more responsive and sleeps cooler than traditional memory foam. Purple’s product repertoire includes adult and child mattresses, bed frames, pillows, seat cushions, bedding, and pet beds, to bring a cozy sleep to every member of the family.

Shop Purple mattresses at:

6. Tuft & Needle

The Best Mattress Brand Option: Tuft & Needle
Photo: Tuft & Needle 

Price Range: $ to $$$

Top Products: Tuft & Needle Mint Mattress (from $636 at Tuft & Needle) and Tuft & Needle Original Adaptive Foam Mattress (from $796 at Amazon) 

Tuft & Needle was created to simplify the mattress-buying process, as one of the first companies to shift the user experience online and away from overwhelming viewing rooms and salespeople. To accomplish that goal, Tuft & Needle delivers high-quality mattresses right to the front door for free, without any sales gimmicks. Tuft & Needle Mint mattresses use layers of T&N Flex, Release, and Adaptive foam for comfort, support, and pressure relief to help guarantee a restful sleep. 

The company sells three types of mattresses: two foam options (Original and Mint) and one hybrid style. Each mattress style features Tuft & Needle’s proprietary Adaptive Foam, a unique type of foam that provides pressure relief and support without sinking or retaining too much body heat. As mentioned above, the Tuft & Needle Mint Mattress is an upgrade from the Tuft & Needle Original, featuring multiple layers of Adaptive Foam, a heat-regulating top, reinforced edge support, and reduced motion transfer to suit two sleepers.

If a Tuft & Needle mattress isn’t the right fit, return the mattress within the 100-day trial period for a full refund and free removal to a charity of the user’s choice. 

Shop Tuft & Needle mattresses at:

7. Leesa

The Best Mattress Brand Option: Leesa
Photo: Leesa 

Price Range: $ to $$$

Top Products: Leesa Sapira Hybrid Mattress (from $944 at Leesa) and Leesa Original Mattress (from $609 at Leesa) 

Leesa creates stylish and comfortable mattresses with the community in mind. Beyond using recycled and natural materials in its mattresses, the brand also works with local partners to donate one mattress to a family in need for every 10 mattresses sold. Based in Virginia, Leesa’s products are manufactured in the U.S. and ship for free from its online store. Leesa mattresses are available for testing in some West Elm, Pottery Barn, and Macy’s stores. Don’t fret if there isn’t a retailer nearby; each mattress comes with a 100-day risk-free trial period to make sure it’s the right choice. 

Leesa mattresses are available in a variety of styles to suit every sleeper. The company manufactures all foam mattresses and foam-and-spring hybrids, like the Leesa Sapira Hybrid Mattress. This choice features a breathable cover, a ventilated foam layer, a memory foam recovery layer, and a responsive support layer to help keep pressure points supported throughout the night. Each style includes the brand’s premium breathable foam, a soft and stylish outer cover, and a range of other comfort features depending on the mattress style. 

Shop Leesa mattresses at:

8. Nolah

The Best Mattress Brand Option: Nolah
Photo: Nolah

Price Range: $$ to $$$

Top Products: Nolah Signature 12-Inch Mattress (from $844 at Nolah) and Nolah Evolution 15-Inch Mattress (from $974 at Nolah) 

Each of Nolah’s U.S.-manufactured mattresses features the company’s breathable and durable multilayer-foam design. For ultimate comfort, the mattresses include a high-density foam base, a supportive and high-resilience foam layer, and a top layer of cooling Nolah AirFoam. The AirFoam is a temperature-neutral foam without the heat-trapping chemicals found in some other memory-foam mattresses. Unlike many other popular mattresses on the market, this unique design excludes memory foam, with the intention of providing cooler sleep, better pressure relief, and improved durability. 

Nolah carries three mattress options, ranging in height and price points, but each mattress style comes with a variety of customization choices. The Nolah Evolution 15-Inch Mattress can be customized in both size and firmness while maintaining the high-quality design that supports the curves of the body for natural spinal alignment. The mattresses cater to side and back sleepers to offer better support at key pressure points like the hips, shoulders, and back. Free shipping, free returns, and a 120-night trial period provide ample time to decide if a Nolah mattress is the right choice.

Shop Nolah mattresses at:

9. Brooklyn Bedding

The Best Mattress Brand Option: Brooklyn Bedding
Photo: Brooklyn Bedding

Price Range: $ to $$$

Top Products: Brooklyn Signature Hybrid Mattress (from $465.50 at Brooklyn Bedding) and Brooklyn Chill Memory Foam Mattress (from $191.80 at Brooklyn Bedding)

For those who prefer the more responsive appeal of a hybrid mattress, consider a model from Brooklyn Bedding. The brand designs and manufactures its bedding at a facility in Arizona. Most sales take place online, but customers can visit showroom and partner locations in select cities across the U.S. Even with its affordable price, the Brooklyn Signature Hybrid Mattress is a high-quality product made with several layers to improve sleep, including a moisture-wicking quilted top, transition foam, and eight-inch individually encased coils that help to support pressure points and retain the natural position of the spine. 

Along with bedding, pillows, and bed bases, Brooklyn Bedding carries multiple hybrid mattress options that range in firmness, materials, and price points to cater to different sleepers. Many of the company’s mattress styles provide the option to choose a firmness level and mix a supportive coil system with hyper-responsive, variable foam to create a balanced mattress. Free shipping and returns plus a 120-night trial period make it risk-free to try a mattress.

Shop Brooklyn Bedding mattresses at:

10. WinkBeds

The Best Mattress Brand Option: WinkBeds
Photo: WinkBeds

Price Range: $$ to $$$

Top Products: The WinkBed (from $849 at WinkBeds) and WinkBeds GravityLux (from $899 at WinkBeds) 

WinkBeds prides itself on making handmade luxury hybrid mattresses designed for a more restful sleep. Beyond the brand’s focus on craftsmanship, WinkBeds aims to design mattresses that prevent and relieve back pain. The various styles offer decompressing spine support and advanced pressure-point relief to support the spine, hips, and shoulders. Plus, a cooler sleeping surface offers an optimal snoozing temperature for a restful night. 

Available in three firmness options, the WinkBeds GravityLux Mattress is a great choice for side, back, and side-back combo sleepers, as well as couples who are looking for a balance between motion isolation, pressure relief, and responsiveness for the ideal sleep. Purchase a WinkBeds mattress from the online store (with free shipping, free returns, and a 120-night trial) or via a handful of partner showrooms in the U.S. 

Shop WinkBeds mattresses at:

11. Layla Sleep

The Best Mattress Brand Option: Layla Sleep
Photo: Layla Sleep

Price Range: $$ to $$$

Top Products: Layla Memory Foam Mattress (from $599 at Layla Sleep) and Layla Sleep Hybrid Foam Mattress (from $1,099 at Layla Sleep) 

Can’t decide between a soft or a firm mattress? Have the best of both worlds with a Layla Sleep mattress. Layla Sleep offers flippable foam mattresses that feature a firm side and a soft side so sleepers can pick their ideal sleeping surface without needing to swap out the mattress. One of Layla’s top products is the flippable Layla Sleep Hybrid Foam Mattress, which features an advanced coil system for zero motion transfer and tri-zone airflow layers to absorb and transfer the shock between the comfort layer and the spring system.

The company manufactures a coil-foam hybrid and full-foam option. Both styles include copper-infused memory foam, which Layla Sleep claims has cooling and antimicrobial properties for a more pleasant rest. Layla Sleep offers mattresses, bed frames, pillows, and bedding directly to consumers and supports its mattresses with a 120-night trial period with a money-back guarantee and no return fees. And for anyone who doesn’t love their choice, the company donates returned mattresses to charity rather than having customers ship them back. 

Shop Layla Sleep mattresses at:

12. Avocado Mattress

The Best Mattress Brand Option: Avocado Mattress
Photo: Avocado Mattress

Price Range: $$ to $$$$

Top Products: Avocado Green Mattress (from $1,189 at Avocado) and Avocado Vegan Mattress (from $1,189 at Avocado) 

For the environmentally conscious shopper, a mattress can be a difficult purchase. Factors like mattress waste, materials, and treatment chemicals are important to consider. Handmade in California, Avocado Mattresses are 100 percent certified organic so buyers can be confident in the origins of the materials. Beyond a focus on eco-friendly materials, the company also pays mind to its supply chain, offering transparency for multiple steps—from the source of its latex to where it hand-manufactures its mattresses in Los Angeles. 

The Avocado Green Mattress is made with exclusively organic materials to help give environmentally-conscious individuals peace of mind when they are making their purchases. Avocado also offers mattresses in a variety of sizes and firmness options, making it a good choice for front, side, and back sleepers. While all the brands on this list provide safe mattress options, Avocado Mattress takes care to omit chemicals that may concern health- and eco-conscious consumers.

Shop Avocado mattresses at:

13. Cocoon by Sealy

The Best Mattress Brand Option: Cocoon by Sealy
Photo: Cocoon by Sealy

Price Range: $$ to $$$

Top Products: The Chill Memory Foam Mattress (from $399 at Cocoon by Sealy) and The Chill Hybrid Mattress (from 539 at Cocoon by Sealy) 

Cocoon by Sealy is Sealy’s mattress-in-a-box brand, blending Sealy’s years of mattress expertise with a direct-to-consumer model. The brand was created with the goal of manufacturing a shippable mattress with a simpler shopping process. Cocoon by Sealy mattresses feature a resilient and high-density memory-foam top that cradles the sleeper’s body without collapsing. The company’s two mattress options include a hybrid mattress that includes coils and memory foam along with The Chill Memory Foam Mattress, which is exclusively constructed from memory foam. Cocoon by Sealy backs up its products with a 100-night free trial, so buyers can feel confident about their mattress investment.

Both mattress styles have undergone years of testing and in-house development, and are manufactured in the U.S. to ensure they measure up to Sealy’s quality and durability standards. 

Shop Cocoon by Sealy mattresses at:

14. Serta

The Best Mattress Brands Option: Serta
Photo: Mattress Firm

Price Range: $$ to $$$

Top Products: Serta Perfect Sleeper Pro Mattress (from $1,274 at Serta) and Serta Perfect Sleeper 14-Inch Ultra Plush Hybrid Mattress (from $725 at Wayfair)

Serta’s first mattress—The Perfect Sleeper—was released in 1931, though it would still be another two years until the company changed its name to Serta. In the more than 90 years that have followed, Serta has become a household name and a top choice for many shoppers searching for the best brand of mattress. 

The Serta Perfect Sleeper Pro Mattress continues the long tradition of offering high-quality rest for weary individuals with a five-zoned design to help improve spinal alignment, responsive coils for better pressure point support, and an advanced cooling system for enhanced comfort. 

Serta strives to meet the highest quality and safety standards when manufacturing their mattresses. All of the foam used in their mattresses is CertiPUR-US certified. The company is also working to decrease their carbon footprint by incorporating sustainable resources and minimizing the use of chemicals in their production.

Shop Serta mattresses at:

15. Tempur-Pedic

The Best Mattress Brands Option: Tempur-Pedic
Photo: Mattress Firm

Price Range: $$ to $$$$

Top Products: Tempur-Pedic TEMPUR-LUXEbreeze° 13-Inch Soft Mattress (from $4,799.00 at Mattress Firm) and Tempur-Pedic Proadapt 12-Inch Firm Mattress (from $2,799 at Mattress Firm) 

The special viscoelastic foam, also called Tempur material, used to make Tempur-Pedic mattresses provides just the right amount of support to alleviate pressure and keep individuals comfortable as they sleep. 

Don’t skip the Tempur-Pedic Proadapt 12-Inch Firm Mattress, which is designed to alleviate aches, stiffness, pain, and sleep apnea by providing consistent support across the entire bed. Meanwhile, the hypoallergenic composition prevents dust mites from taking up residence in the mattress, making this product ideal for allergy-prone sleepers.

Tempur-Pedic is currently working towards creating zero-landfill waste and achieving carbon neutrality for their facilities. The company offers both all-foam and hybrid mattresses. The mattresses are delivered in a box, and can be ready to use within minutes of unrolling and setting up. In addition to mattresses, Tempur-Pedic also sells pillows, mattress toppers, bed bases, sheet sets, blankets, and more.

Shop Tempur-Pedic mattresses at:

How We Chose the Best Mattress Brands

What is the best mattress brand? The answer will depend on the needs and budget of the customer. With so many good mattress brands serving the varied sleeping preferences and space constraints of sleepers, it can be challenging to choose the best brands among them. To select this list of the top brands, we gave preference to brands that offer firm, soft, and hybrid options in various sizes from reputable sellers. We looked carefully at brands offering eco-friendly options, as well as those with specialized foam formulas that help keep sleepers cool and supported throughout a night’s rest. Popular brands that offer children’s mattresses, mattresses in a box delivery, and other unique features like the double-sided hybrid mattress were also given consideration for a spot on the list of the best mattress brands.

The post The 15 Best Mattress Brands of 2025  appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[The Best Air Impact Wrenches of 2025 for Tough Jobs, Tested]]>An air impact wrench not only loosens stubborn bolts, but it also tightens them quickly. Often found in professional automotive shops, they are useful for amateurs as well.

The post The Best Air Impact Wrenches of 2025 for Tough Jobs, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-air-impact-wrench/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=169558Sun, 16 Feb 2025 06:02:55 -0500ReviewsPower ToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

It’s difficult to imagine the immense twisting force that an air impact wrench can apply. Here’s an example: A nut that is “hand tight” requires a pressure of about 2 pounds per square foot, or 2 foot-pounds (ft-lbs). The best air impact wrenches multiply that energy more than 500 times. Air impact wrenches make easy work out of otherwise tough jobs like loosening lug nuts, in which an extension bar on a standard wrench can prove insufficient. You won’t find a pro auto shop without an impact wrench for tires, and they’re also used in engineering and construction.

Air impact wrenches are neither complicated nor difficult to use, so there’s no reason amateur mechanics shouldn’t have one of these tools at home, especially if they already own an air compressor. We tested five impact wrenches and found the Aircat 1250-K, with its high torque output (twisting force) and sturdy build, to be the best of the bunch.

We compiled the following sections to help you understand the important features of these handy tools. This information can help you find the best air impact wrench for the job.

  1. BEST OVERALL: Aircat 1250-K ½-Inch Nitrocat Kevlar Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
  2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: ACDelco ANI405A Pneumatic Air ½-Inch Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
  3. UPGRADE PICK: Ingersoll Rand 2235QTiMAX ½-Inch Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
  4. BEST COMPACT: Aircat 1056-XL ½-Inch Nitrocat Compact Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
  5. BEST FOR HOME MECHANICS: DeWalt DWMT70773L ½-Inch Drive Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
  6. BEST HIGH-POWERED: Aircat 1150 ½-Inch Composite Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
  7. BEST FOR LUG NUTS: Ingersoll Rand 232TGSL ½-Inch Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
  8. BEST ERGONOMIC: Campbell Hausfeld ½-Inch Impact Wrench 
    Jump to Review
  9. HONORABLE MENTION: Workpad ½-Inch Mini Air Impact Wrench
    Jump to Review
The Best Air Impact Wrench Options
Photo: Tony Carrick for Bob Vila
TorqueSpeedNoise level
Aircat 1250-K ½-Inch Nitrocat Kevlar Impact Wrench1,300 ft-lbs 8,500 RPM86 decibels
ACDelco ANI405A Pneumatic Air ½-Inch Impact Wrench500 ft-lbs 8,000 RPM97.7 decibels
Ingersoll Rand 2235QTiMAX ½-Inch Impact Wrench1,300 ft-lbs 8,500 RPM88.7 decibels
Aircat 1056-XL ½-Inch Nitrocat Compact Impact Wrench750 ft-lbs 9,000 RPM85 decibels
DeWalt DWMT70773L ½-Inch Drive Impact Wrench650 ft-lbs 7,500 RPMUnlisted
Aircat 1150 ½-Inch Composite Impact Wrench900 ft-lbs 9,0000 RPM86 decibels
Ingersoll Rand 232TGSL ½-Inch Impact Wrench 500 ft-lbs10,000 RPM105.2 decibels
Campbell Hausfeld ½-Inch Impact Wrench 550 ft-lbs 8,000 RPMUnlisted
Workpad ½-Inch Mini Air Impact Wrench500 ft-lbs10,000 RPM112 decibels

Our Top Picks

We chose the following air impact wrenches for their performance, reliability, and value. While Aircat and Ingersoll Rand dominate the market, some interesting alternatives exist in several categories.

Best Overall

Aircat 1250-K ½-Inch Nitrocat Kevlar Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrench Option: AIRCAT 1250-K 1 2-Inch Nitrocat Kevlar Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Powerful lug nut-removing torque for changing tires
  • Pro-level build quality
  • Three torque settings for tightening

What We Don’t Like

  • Only one torque setting for reverse

Specs

  • Torque: 1,300 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 8,500 revolutions per minute (RPM)
  • Noise level: 86 decibels

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Ergonomics 4/5; Performance 5/5; Noise 5/5; Value 4/5 

The ½-inch Nitrocat air impact wrench is an outstanding tool from the Aircat range. In terms of pure performance, to say it is impressive is an understatement. But there’s no denying that it is expensive, and casual or home users are unlikely to need the performance it delivers.

Its breakaway torque is 1,300 ft-lbs, with a normal level of 950 ft-lbs. That showed during testing. Of the five impact wrenches we tested, the Nitrocat offered the least resistance when removing lug nuts from our Toyota Tundra, spinning off each lug nut with ease using our 21-millimeter impact socket. 

To maximize control, this high-torque impact wrench contains a three-way adjustment, including three torque settings for tightening bolts. This was handy in avoiding over-torquing our lug nuts when we were reattaching them. But when it comes to removal, the impact wrench only has a single torque setting. While this didn’t impact performance, it was overkill for removing our lug nuts and could potentially cause them to spin off the socket and go flying through the air.

The Nitrocat is built to take a beating with a heavy-duty stainless steel housing and Kevlar-reinforced body that’s durable enough to handle a professional shop. 

For all its power and rock-solid build quality, the Nitrocat 1250-K air impact wrench still weighs under 5 pounds. The Aircat comes with a steep price tag, but for serious home mechanics or those who work on other people’s cars, it’s a worthy investment. 

What our tester says: “The Aircat somehow manages to produce ample power while at the same time operating with very little vibration or noise.” —Tony Carrick, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the Aircat 1250-K air impact wrench at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best Bang for the Buck

ACDelco ANI405A Pneumatic Air ½-Inch Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrench Option: 3 ACDelco ANI405A Heavy Duty Pneumatic Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Fraction of the price of competing impact wrenches
  • 5-speed design adds versatility 
  • Durable build quality 

What We Don’t Like

  • Lacks the power of higher-end impact wrenches

Specs

  • Torque: 500 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 8,000 RPM
  • Noise level: 97.7 decibels

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Ergonomics 4/5; Performance 3.3/5; Noise 3/5; Value 4.5/5 

The ½-inch ACDelco air impact wrench is a high-quality all-around tool that offers excellent value without much sacrifice. Its 500 ft-lbs of max torque is well below the top-performing impact wrenches on this list, but for most home mechanics, it’s more than sufficient. While we experienced a little hesitation when breaking the lug nuts on our truck free, the wrench still removed the lug nuts and did so fairly quickly. The torque output is not adjustable, but the speed adjusts via four settings that go to a maximum free speed of 8,000 RPM, giving some flexibility when working with different-size nuts

The ACDelco is noticeably louder than the other impact wrenches we tested, which is in line with its rating of 97.7 decibels. It’s heavier, too, weighing in at nearly a pound more than our top pick for this guide, though it is well balanced, and the handle does feel comfortable to hold. With its stainless-steel housing, this air impact wrench feels durable, but the steel housing does nick and scratch fairly easily. 

The ACDelco’s limited torque wouldn’t pass muster for most professional auto shops, but it’s certainly adequate for home mechanics working on their own vehicles. Moreover, its low cost puts it within reach of users who might not have considered owning an air impact wrench.

What our tester says: “While the ACDelco may not match other air impact wrenches in power, it’s hard not to like the performance it offers at a super low price.” —Tony Carrick, Product Reviews tester and writer

Get the ACDelco air impact wrench at Amazon or Walmart.

Upgrade Pick

Ingersoll Rand 2235QTiMAX ½-Inch Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrench Option: Ingersoll Rand 22235QTiMAX Air Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Produces a tremendous amount of torque
  • Operates with very little vibration
  • Durably built yet surprisingly light

What We Don’t Like

  • Comes with a steep price tag
  • Hard plastic handle

Specs

  • Torque: 1,300 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 8,500 RPM
  • Noise level: 88.7 decibels

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 5/5; Ergonomics 4/5; Performance 4/5; Noise 5/5; Value 4/5 

With a nut-busting torque rating of 1,300 ft-lbs and a standard rating of 900 ft-lbs, the ½-inch 2235QTiMAX air impact wrench from Ingersoll Rand is among the most powerful tools in its class. A four-stage power regulator provides excellent control, and the twin hammer action runs at 1,220 blows per minute (BPM). 

All of those impressive specs added up to outstanding performance in testing. The 2235QTiMAX spun off our lug nuts rapidly with little resistance. Despite all that power, this heavy-duty impact wrench operates smoothly with very little vibration, making it comfortable to use. We also liked the versatility of the torque adjustment dial, which works when both tightening and in reverse. This allowed us to slow down the tightening speed to avoid over-tightening while also dialing back the power after breaking free a lug nut to prevent spinning it off into the air. Our only gripe is with the lack of a rubber grip on the hard plastic handle.

The 2235QTiMAX is also built like a rock with a titanium case that’s impact- and chemical-resistant. It’s clearly a tool that is built for professional auto mechanics. Despite its sturdy build, it weighs just 4.6 pounds.

The Ingersoll Rand 2235QTiMAX is easily the most expensive impact wrench on our list, but it’s worth the splurge for those who spend most of their weekends working in their home auto shop or those who work on other people’s cars for a living. 

Get the Ingersoll Rand 2235QTiMAX air impact wrench at Amazon or Northern Tool + Equipment.

Best Compact

Aircat 1056-XL ½-Inch Nitrocat Compact Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrench Option: Aircat 1056-XL-1/2" Nitrocat Compact Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Compact design can fit into tight spaces
  • Surprisingly powerful considering small, lightweight build
  • Convenient power controls on the trigger

What We Don’t Like

  • Fair amount of vibration when using

Specs

  • Torque: 750 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 9,000 RPM
  • Noise level: 85 decibels

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Ergonomics 4/5; Performance 3.8/5; Noise 4/5; Value 5/5 

The Aircat 1056-XL’s compact lightweight design, surprising power, and affordable price tag make it a great choice for home auto mechanics. This impact wrench is the easiest to use of the five impact wrenches we tested thanks to its compact size. Its head measures just 4.25 inches front to back, it weighs only 2.5 pounds, and it has an ergonomic grip. This makes the 1056-XL easy to use with one hand in tight spaces, allowing access to bolts located deeper inside the engine bay. We also like the trigger-mounted power management switch, which makes it easy to adjust torque and speed without changing position or shifting the grip. 

Despite its small size, this Aircat has a high breakaway torque of 750 ft-lbs, which was plenty of power for removing lug nuts from our truck rims, though we did notice significantly more vibration with this impact wrench over beefier models. With a max speed of 9,000 RPM, we never felt like this was an impact wrench that would slow us down. The Aircat 1056-XL has a composite housing that gives it a solid, durable feel, even with its lighter overall weight. And at just 85 decibels, the Aircat 1056-XL air impact wrench is among the quietest tools on this list. Add to that an affordable price tag, and the Aircat 1056-XL is a great option for home mechanics or as a travel tool for mechanics on the go. 

Get the Aircat 1056-XL air impact wrench at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best for Home Mechanics

DeWalt DWMT70773L ½-Inch Drive Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrenches Options: DeWalt ½-Inch Drive Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Ergonomic handle with shock-absorbing rubber grip
  • Easy-access switch on the trigger
  • Great cost value
  • High breaking torque of 1,200 ft-lbs

What We Don’t Like

  • Noticeable vibration when operating
  • A little top-heavy

Specs

  • Torque: 650 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 7,500 RPM
  • Noise level: Unlisted 

Our Ratings: Ease of Use 4/5; Ergonomics 4/5; Performance 4/5; Noise 4/5; Value 5/5 

The DeWalt ½-inch drive impact wrench provides both power and ease of use with its rugged, high-powered design and the ability to use with a one-handed grip. While the DeWalt operates at a lower speed and torque than some of the top-of-the-line models that cost twice as much, it does have a breaking max torque of 1,200 ft-lbs, which is more than enough to break even tougher lug nuts. It didn’t hesitate after repeated efforts to remove lug nuts during testing.

The DeWalt has more vibration than some of the pricier impact wrenches we tested, but it makes up for it with an ergonomic handle and shock-absorbing rubberized grip that makes it comfortable to hold. We also like the three variable-speed power settings that can be adjusted via the built-in power dial, and a direction switch that’s located at the trigger for easy access. The DeWalt also has a durable feel with a hard plastic housing and rubber bumpers on the sides that protect against scuffing or scraping. 

While the DeWalt’s lower torque output means it won’t find a place in many professional auto shops, its high breaking torque output makes it more than powerful enough for automotive maintenance at home. Plus, it costs hundreds of dollars less than those higher-end impact wrenches.

Get the DeWalt air impact wrench at Amazon or The Home Depot.

More Great Options

Along with the products we hands-on tested, we also recommend the following impact wrenches, which we selected based on extensive research and customer reviews. 

Best High Powered

Aircat 1150 ½-Inch Composite Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrench Option Aircat 1150 ½-Inch Composite Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Produces high amount of torque 
  • Quiet operation volume at just 86 decibels 
  • Lightweight, ergonomic option at just 4.5 pounds

What We Don’t Like

  • Longer head won’t fit into tight spaces

Specs

  • Torque: 900 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 9,000 RPM
  • Noise level: 86 decibels

With so many good tools around, it’s tough to pick the best air impact wrench for everyone’s power needs. However, the ½-inch Aircat 1150 is likely to appeal to most people, as it certainly offers impressive performance. 

The loosening torque of 1,295 ft-lbs should raise a few eyebrows as well as the standard operating torque at 900 ft-lbs with three-way adjustment. A twin hammer action works at 1,400 impacts per minute (IPM), and the free speed is 9,000 RPM; plus, at 4.5 pounds, this is not an unwieldy tool. It’s also among the quieter air impact wrenches at just 86 decibels. Plus, the ergonomic handle prevents any strain on the user’s wrists or hands.

Available as a stand-alone tool or with a number of extras, this model comes with three invaluable extensions to increase reach and versatility.

Get the Aircat 1150 air impact wrench at Amazon or The Home Depot.

Best for Lug Nuts

Ingersoll Rand 232TGSL ½-Inch Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrench Option: Ingersoll Rand 232TGSL Super-Duty Air Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • High free speed of 10,000 RPM
  • Ample nut-busting torque 
  • Designed to look like NASCAR impact wrenches

What We Don’t Like

  • Heavy overall weight 
  • Very noisy at 105 decibels

Specs

  • Torque: 500 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 10,000 RPM
  • Noise level: 105.2 decibels

Lug-nut removal is one of the most common uses for air impact wrenches, and the ½-inch Ingersoll Rand 232TGSL air impact wrench is designed specifically for this purpose. While largely intended for professional use, it also makes a good addition to a home auto enthusiast’s tool kit.

NASCAR fans might recognize its design since it’s based on the racetrack version of the tool. The 232TGSL produces 625 ft-lbs of maximum reverse torque and 500 ft-lbs of forward torque, with a regulator for power adjustment. Its BPM is 1,250, and with a free speed of 10,000 RPM, it’s the fastest full-size air impact wrench currently available.

At 6 pounds, it’s a bit of a handful, and it’s quite loud at 105.2 decibels. Nevertheless, for those who remove lug nuts all day, the performance is hard to beat.


Get the Ingersoll Rand 232TGSL air impact wrench at Amazon or Tractor Supply Co.

Best Ergonomic

Campbell Hausfeld ½-Inch Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrenches Options: Campbell Hausfeld ½-Inch Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Well-balanced for ease of use
  • 3 power settings 
  • Ergonomic rubberized grip 

What We Don’t Like

  • Weighs over 5 pounds

Specs

  • Torque: 550 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 8000 RPM
  • Noise level: Unlisted

Campbell Hausfeld is perhaps better known for its high-performance compressors, but its ½-inch air impact wrench has plenty to offer the home auto enthusiast and DIY user. Although at 5.2 pounds it weighs more than some, it’s a well-balanced tool with a tough but comfortable rubberized grip and protective body armor.

This impact wrench’s working torque of 550 ft-lbs is plenty for the home user, with three power settings to maximize control. Its free speed is 8,000 RPM, and the hammer action produces 1,200 IPM.

Get the Campbell Hausfeld air impact wrench at Amazon or The Home Depot

Honorable Mention

Workpad ½-Inch Mini Air Impact Wrench

 The Best Air Impact Wrench Option Workpad ½-Inch Mini Air Impact Wrench
Photo: Amazon

What We Like

  • Can fit into tight spaces 
  • Adjustable power settings prevent over-tightening 
  • Surprisingly powerful for its size 

What We Don’t Like

  • Not ideal for heavy-duty applications

Specs

  • Torque: 500 ft-lbs
  • Speed: 10,000 RPM
  • Noise level: 112 decibels

Although Workpad may not be a top brand name, its ½-inch air impact wrench has all the features offered by many of its rivals and may be all that many home users need.

Although it’s called a “mini” air impact wrench, the term applies to its compact size and is no reflection on performance. In fact, the power-to-weight ratio is excellent. A maximum of 500 ft-lbs of torque is available, and there’s a three-position regulator for easy adjustment. Free speed is 10,000 RPM.

The tool has a durable, corrosion-resistant aluminum body that keeps its weight down to 3.3 pounds. The only drawback is the noise; at 112 decibels, it’s louder than many.

Get the Workpad air impact wrench at Amazon

Jump to Our Top Picks

How We Chose and Tested the Best Air Impact Wrenches

Testing Stats
Products tested 5
Time spent testing 6 hours
Tests performed2
Price range$50 to $350

When gathering our top picks for this guide, we looked at a range of brands to find suitable options across a variety of categories. All of our recommendations are from reputable manufacturers that produce robust tools with respectable power and are made from high-quality materials that can stand up to heavy use. 

Our list of recommendations ranges from 500 to 1,300 ft-lbs of torque output, with options to suit many shoppers’ needs. We also considered noise level, reviewing tools that produce a relatively quiet 85 decibels up to 105 decibels.

Of our nine selections, we hands-on tested five. Our testing involved using each impact wrench to remove large lug nuts on a Toyota Tundra with a 21mm-deep impact socket from a Neiko Drive Master ½” impact socket set, which we had previously tested as part of a guide covering the best socket sets. Each socket was tightened to 97 ft-lbs. We evaluated each impact wrench based on several factors, including how easy it was to break each lug nut loose and remove it, the amount of vibration produced by each impact wrench, and each model’s noise level. Finally, we considered each impact wrench’s weight, ergonomics, and build quality. 

What to Consider When Choosing an Air Impact Wrench

Most people’s mental image of an air impact wrench typically includes an auto mechanic attacking stubborn lug nuts. While that’s certainly a popular use for these air tools, they are versatile enough to tackle almost any hexagonal fixing. When shopping for an air impact wrench, consider the following technical features.

Torque 

Torque is rotational force: the energy required to loosen or tighten screws, nuts and bolts, and other fasteners. It is generated by using a screwdriver or a wrench to tighten screws and nuts.

An air impact wrench can generate far more torque than even the strongest person. The most powerful models in this guide produce well over 1,000 ft-lbs. However, when shopping for the best air impact wrench for specific needs, remember that it’s more important to have the right amount of torque rather than the maximum available. 

While users with heavy-duty needs might need the highest torque levels possible, any tool that generates 400 to 500 ft-lbs is sufficient for most users. The terms “nut busting” and “breakaway torque” are used frequently to indicate the maximum torque available for releasing difficult fixings. However, normal operating torque is lower. Depending on the intended use, it may be worth checking forward and reverse torque figures, as they often differ.

Rotation Speed and Impacts

Rotational speed, which appears in RPM on the label, is not the same as torque. Here it’s not about energy but about how quickly the socket spins. It’s an important consideration for those who work on multiple fixings, because it impacts how quickly they can be fastened or loosened. Manufacturers usually describe rotation speed as “free speed” or “no load speed,” which assumes no effort is required to turn the fixing. In the real world, even a small amount of mechanical friction reduces this speed. Nevertheless, knowing the speed is useful for comparison.

Air impact wrenches contain hammer mechanisms within the tool that jolt the socket to increase the effectiveness of the torque. Specifications are stated in impacts per minute (IPM) or, sometimes, blows per minute (BPM). A higher number generally means a more aggressive action, so if you’ll be regularly working with tough fixings, this is another area that warrants attention. That said, high IPM also means the tool vibrates more, which increases user fatigue. Twin hammer actions help balance vibration; while tools with twin hammers still vibrate, the effect is less severe.

Additional Features

  • Air demands: All air tools need a portable air compressor to supply sufficient air pressure and volume. Pressure is stated in pounds per square inch (PSI) and volume in standard cubic feet per minute (SCFM, or sometimes just CFM). Air impact wrenches don’t have particularly high-pressure needs, but CFM demands can be higher than other tools. Checking these demands is vital. Many otherwise very good home air compressors may not produce the required supply.
  • Weight and grip: Air impact wrenches come in a variety of sizes and materials. Weight can have a big impact on manageability and user fatigue, so while lighter tools usually cost more (because the materials are more expensive), it’s often money well spent. Users also need a good grip on the handle both for control and safety. Contoured and rubberized areas generally improve grip and ergonomics.
  • Noise levels: The hammer action generated by an air impact wrench is loud. While better manufacturers try to reduce noise, most tools still exceed current safety levels. Always wear ear protection while using an air impact wrench.
  • Sockets: ¼-inch drives exist on light-duty air impact wrenches, but most measure ⅜ inch or ½ inch. This measurement specifies the size of sockets needed. The sockets should be of good quality and marked as “impact ready” or something similar. Cheap socket sets are unlikely to stand up to the pounding they receive and can actually shatter under the force.

Tips for Using an Air Impact Wrench

Always be aware of the important practical and safety aspects of using these powerful tools.

A key component that may be overlooked is the compressor required to supply air. Take into account the necessary air supply specifications, but remember that optimal performance is achieved only if the compressor is properly maintained. While air impact wrenches require little maintenance, regular lubrication is vital. In both cases, always follow the manufacturer’s recommendations.

In addition:

  • Make sure the air hose is properly connected to the compressor and that the air supply to the air impact wrench is set at the correct pressure (PSI).
  • Although many air impact wrenches can be used with one hand, make certain to keep a good grip on the tool when loosening tight nuts and bolts. If the fixing breaks away suddenly, the torque reaction can make the tool jump and cause a nasty wrist sprain.
  • Be careful when tightening nuts and bolts. If the torque is too high, the power of the air impact wrench can easily strip threads. If the tool is adjustable, always start at low pressure, then increase it if the fixing is not tight enough.
  • Always wear some kind of ear protection. Even “quiet” air impact wrenches may still exceed the 80-decibel limit above which hearing damage can occur.

FAQs

The information provided here is a comprehensive overview of these tools and should help you find the best air impact wrench for your needs. We’ve backed the information with a host of real-world examples of the top tools available. However, a number of questions crop up frequently, so yours may be answered below.

Q. What does “impacts per minute” mean, and why is it important? 

Impacts per minute, also referred to as blows per minute, is how fast the tool’s internal hammer action works to help loosen tough fixings. However, as explained, it’s just one factor to consider.

Q. Are air impact wrenches adjustable?

The best air impact wrenches contain a “power regulator” (also called an “air pressure flow switch”) to adjust the air supply independently of the compressor. This effectively allows more precise control of torque. It’s sometimes referred to as speed control, though technically, that’s not an accurate term.

Q. Are electric impact wrenches as good as cordless models?

It depends on the task. The best cordless impact wrenches are less-powerful but convenient tools, particularly for light-duty tasks. However, some struggle with higher torque demands and their runtimes can be underwhelming. Corded impact guns often outcompete their cordless impact gun rivals. In many cases, although a battery impact wrench may be a good choice for a home garage or the job site, most automotive and engineering professionals choose an air tool, perhaps in part because a compressor is usually available.

Q. Is drive size an important feature?

Drive size describes the size of the socket that the impact wrench uses. Most measure either ⅜ inch or ½ inch. If you already own impact-compatible sockets, this is important. Adapters are available, but using one is not an ideal solution. If buying both an air impact wrench and sockets, a ½-inch drive model is generally the more powerful option.

Q. What size impact wrench do I need to remove lug nuts?

Removing lug nuts requires around 100 ft-lbs of torque, so it’s a good idea to have an impact wrench that offers at least 150 ft-lbs. While some electric impact tools might struggle to achieve this, most air impact wrenches can do so comfortably. Never put lug nuts back on with an air impact wrench, because you can easily overtighten them or strip the threads. Use a manual torque wrench to set them to the tightness recommended by the vehicle manufacturer.

Q. What is the optimum PSI required for an air impact wrench?

Each tool has its own demands. Pneumatic air wrenches need anywhere from 80 to 150 PSI, so it’s a figure that should be checked like air consumption.

Meet the Tester

Tony Carrick is a freelance writer specializing in home improvement, landscaping, technology, home security, and design. His articles have been featured on such sites as Popular Mechanics, Futurism, SFGate, Pro Tools Review, and more. Tony has conducted rigorous product testing on everything from power tools to home security systems to backyard grills. With each review, his goal is to help readers determine whether a product meets their needs and if it is or isn’t worth its price tag.

Additional research provided by Bob Beacham.

The post The Best Air Impact Wrenches of 2025 for Tough Jobs, Tested appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[Why You Should Never Knock Down Icicles Yourself—and What to Do Instead]]>While it might be satisfying to rip down icicles, that action could cause costly damage to your home.

The post Why You Should Never Knock Down Icicles Yourself—and What to Do Instead appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/exterior/how-to-remove-icicles/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427564Fri, 14 Feb 2025 17:20:27 -0500ExteriorRoofingWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Icicles hanging off your house and glistening in the sun might produce a gorgeous winter scene, but they can also cause damage and be a safety hazard to your family, pets, and home. Icicles form as snow on your roof melts slowly when temperatures rise above freezing, but then refreezes as ice when long drips of water hit colder air. As multiple icicles form over time, the weight can put stress on gutters and the roof, leading to expensive repairs. Tiny icicles are harmless, but those at least 1 foot long or more should be addressed. 

Although it might be fun and satisfying to knock down the icicles yourself, that is not the best idea. These are sharp objects that can pierce anything below when they drop quickly to the ground. Plus, the act of removing icicles can essentially be as dangerous as the icicles themselves. 

Learn why you should not remove large icicles yourself, how to remove icicles properly with the help of a professional to avoid any injury or destruction to your home, and when it’s necessary to do so. 

Falling icicles can injure people, animals, and structures.

It’s risky business trying to knock down icicles yourself because these spear-like objects can injure you or others in the vicinity as they break from the side of your house. They tend to fall in unpredictable ways, so you might be caught by surprise and get hit on the head, which could easily cause bleeding and in some cases, a head injury like a concussion. You could also end up with bad bruises and even broken bones. While the icicles are hanging on the side of your house, be mindful that they could come crashing down at any time on people, pets, wildlife, and structures or objects like your car. 

Long icicles and snow overhaning the roof and gutter of a home.
Photo: georgeclerk/E+ via Getty Images.

Removing icicles can damage gutters.

If excess water can’t flow freely through gutters, icicles can form on them and weigh them down. This is often the result of heat inside your house keeping the roof warm, and causing snow to thaw. As the snow melts, water flows into the freezing cold gutter and forms icicles as it spills over the sides of the gutter. This typically happens if the gutters are clogged with debris like leaves, pine needles, and dirt that block the water from running down the rainspout. 

If you tear down the icicles, the gutters can break. This is a costly repair you want to avoid. If they break and your home lacks functional gutters during wintertime when snow and ice are melting, this can cause a real problem, including structural damage to your house. 

Knocking down icicles can harm the roof.

If heavy icicles weigh your roof down, there might be an ice dam issue. It is common for ice dams to form on roofs in cold climates. An ice dam results from snow that melts and then refreezes at the gutter or soffit due to an abnormally warm roof. Water pools up on the roof and gets trapped between shingles before it freezes, which can weaken the roof, loosen shingles, and even cause leaks in the interior of your home. Those leaks can damage walls, ceilings, and insulation.

Ice dams are most common on asphalt shingle roofs, but can form on other roofing materials, especially if the roof is flat. Icicles are inevitable with ice dams, but removing icicles could cause damage to the roof if not done properly. It is best to take steps to prevent ice dams.

Man cleaning leaves from gutters of house.
Photo: svetikd/E+ via Getty Images.

Take steps to prevent icicles from forming in the first place.

While it’s unlikely that you can prevent all icicles from forming on your house, you can take some measures to minimize their occurrence and help prevent winter weather damage to your home.  

  • Clean gutters regularly to prevent clogs from debris buildup, which ultimately can cause water to back up and freeze. 
  • Keep up with snow removal, such as by using a snow rake, since less snow on the roof means less melting water that can lead to icicles forming.
  • Hire a professional to install heating cables on your roof to keep the snow and ice melted.
  • Check that the insulation in your attic is adequate because warm air that heats up that space can end up melting snow in some areas of the roof, creating water that runs off the edge of the roof where it freezes into icicles or ice dams.
  • Ensure there is adequate ventilation at the ridge and soffits to help keep the attic cool enough to prevent snow melt. 
  • Replace or add a drip edge to the roof to help manage water flow and prevent roof and structural damage. 
Snow roof rake clears the snow off of a house roof.
Photo: Douglas Sacha/Moment via Getty Images.

Icicle removal is best left to the pros.

Even if you are tempted to save some money and rip those icicles down, try to contain yourself and make a phone call instead. Safe, proper icicle removal from a gutter or the roof is best done by a licensed contractor or roof cleaner. Besides the risks of getting hurt by the sharp ice itself, it is dangerous to work on ladders and a roof under snowy, icy conditions. Plus, pros know how to remove icicles in such a way that won’t destroy your gutters, roof, and siding. 

Pros also have the right tools, gear, and training to remove the icicles and prevent them from forming in the future. This includes gloves, a helmet, safety glasses, a long pole or broom handle, and an extendable roof rake. Before the next winter, take steps to help prevent yearly icicles.

The post Why You Should Never Knock Down Icicles Yourself—and What to Do Instead appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[Dormer Windows: Styles, Pros, Cons, and Costs]]>Dormer windows add light and space to homes with sloped roofs, and can give your home's exterior "face" a new expression.

The post Dormer Windows: Styles, Pros, Cons, and Costs appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/dormer-windows/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=96909Fri, 14 Feb 2025 16:47:30 -0500DesignArchitectureExteriorRoofingWindowsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Located on the sloped side of a roof, a dormer window brings natural light into the top floor of a home. They can be a great addition to an attic space that’s being converted into a finished space like a home office or bedroom. 

“Dormers are a great way to improve usable attic space, but costs can quickly add up depending on the sort of roof that one is being added to, and how big the dormer might be,” says Mike Patterson, Production Manager for Smiley Renovations LLC in Bethesda, Maryland. “There are also considerations of what to do with HVAC, plumbing, or electric components, which might need to be modified or relocated. Those affect the budget as well.”

If you’re considering dormer windows for a new house construction or loft conversion, keep reading. We’ll explain the pros and cons and advise on the style options available.

What are dormer windows?

Blue New England-style home with dormers and a front porch.
Photo: Oleg Albinsky via Getty Image

So what is a dormer window? This type of window sits vertically in a framed structure that juts outward from the pitch of the main roof and features a little roof of its own above the window. Dormer windows are often associated with Craftsman, Queen Anne, Colonial, Greek Revival, and other traditional architecture styles, but they can be found on any style of house that has a sloped roof.

Dormer windows first appeared in residential roofs in 16th-century Britain, where they helped direct natural light into attic sleeping areas. In residential construction, the use of dormer windows hasn’t changed much over the past few hundred years. They’re still valuable for bringing light into attics and lofts, but today, homeowners are more interested in choosing a style of dormer window to complement their house design.

Dormer vs. Gable

There are a lot of terms that architects and contractors use when discussing roofs, and it can be difficult to keep all of them straight. Both dormers and gables are parts of roofs, but are distinct architectural features. 

A dormer is a perpendicular protrusion from a sloped roof. While dormer and dormer window are often used interchangeably, they aren’t the same. All dormer windows are part of a dormer, but not all dormers have windows. Those without windows are called blind or false dormers. The extensions create more usable square footage without the additional natural light boost that a window would provide. 

A gable is the flat triangular portion of a roof that has two sloping sides. There are types of gable houses; the terms depend on the orientation of the house—whether the entry door is on a gable side or the sloped side. Those that have the entry on the gable side are called front-gable homes. Side-gable homes have the entry on a slanted roof side. Dormers aren’t found on the gable, but windows can be on gables. 

Dormer Window Styles

The style of the roof above the window defines the style of a dormer window. Often, a dormer roof matches the style of the house’s main roof, but there are plenty of exceptions. While a house with a gable roof can have a gambrel dormer, a shed dormer, or another style, the dormer roof often matches the main roof style. The type of roofing material on a dormer window also typically matches the roofing material on the main roof. If the main roof has asphalt shingles, for example, the roof over the dormer window likely will as well. 

Tip: Don’t place roof shingles on the sides of the dormer. The sides should be treated with the same siding material as the rest of the house.

While both traditional dormers and modern dormers exist, the following dormer window styles are common on today’s homes. Your favorite might just be among these dormer window ideas.

  • Old grey nuanced brick with white trim cottage style Canadiana home facade with landscaped front yard in summer, Quebec, Canada. This image is property released. CUPR0285
  • Chatham, MA, USA - Shingle house in New England with gambrel dormer and beautiful landscaping.
  • Beige octagonal Sears house with hipped dormer.
  • Shed dormer on a house with a grey shingled roof.
  • Eyebrow dormers on a building in Sibiu, Romania.
  • Colorful, Victorian-style house with bonnet dormers.
  • A slate-roofed house with a wall dormer.
  • A timber clad house with a gravel drive and lucarne dormers.
  • Dutch-style building with red roof and blind dormers in Suriname.

Gable Dormer

The most common style of dormer window features a gable (a triangular roof with slopes of equal pitch) over the window. Since it resembles a traditional dog house, it’s often called a dog-house dormer by contractors. 

Gambrel Dormer

The roof on a gambrel dormer features a gable at the peak of the roof, but then descends into two steeper roof slopes on the sides of the roof. Gambrel roofs often appear on traditional Dutch Colonial homes and barns, since a gambrel dormer has a barn-like feel.

Hipped Dormer

Unlike a hipped roof that has four equal sloped sides, a hipped window dormer features just three roof planes, one on each side and a third parallel to the front of the dormer. The fourth side of the dormer is the interior of the house. The three planes slope upward and meet at a common point at the peak of the dormer’s roof.

Shed Dormer

This dormer has only one roof plane that slopes in the same direction as the slope of the main roof, but with a much shallower pitch. The pitch of a shed dormer is sometimes so slight that it appears to be almost horizontal. Some slope is necessary, however, to allow water to run off.

Eyebrow Dormer 

Instead of flat roof planes, an eyebrow dormer roof features a gently curved wave that extends up and completely over the window. An eyebrow dormer has no additional vertical wall sides and can give the impression of an eye peering out from under a hooded lid. These are often found on shingle-style and Tudor homes.

Bonnet Dormer

A bonnet dormer has a curved roof—like half of a cylinder—and vertical walls on either side of the window. It’s common to install arch-top windows in bonnet dormers so the top of the window matches the arch of the bonnet. Though they are not popular as contemporary dormer windows, bonnet dormers might be featured on homes from the late 19th century. 

Wall Dormer

This type of dormer can appear on any one of the above styles of roofs, but its defining feature is that the front of the dormer is an extension of the exterior wall below. Instead of setting back in the middle of the roof, the siding on the main part of the house continues right up into the dormer, making the front of the dormer flush with the front of the house.

Lucarne Dormer

Inspired by those found on Gothic cathedrals, residential lucarne dormers are typically tall and narrow. Originally created just for ventilation, most feature gable roofs above the windows but can have a hipped or other style. Some also refer to all dormers as lucarnes. 

Blind Dormer

While most dormer windows permit light into the loft, a blind (or false) dormer is for adding extra space or for architectural massing. From the street, a blind dormer can appear identical to an ordinary dormer window, but instead of the dormer opening into the interior of the house, it merely attaches to the surface of the roof. While it can increase the usable space inside the top floor, it can also serve merely as decoration.

Pros and Cons of Dormer Windows

Bed and lamp in a modern interior with a dormer window, flooded with sunlight.
Photo: Jon Lovette / Getty Image

Dormer windows are desirable not just for bringing in natural light and adding extra usable space; they also have exterior aesthetic appeal. A common misconception about dormer windows is that they make interior spaces smaller, but without a dormer window, there could be even less usable space. The dormer window opens up part of the floor area for a person or piece of furniture to occupy and increase the light into the space. Otherwise, the top floor space would need to be rebuilt with a flat roof or even a mansard, which was developed to create a more usable attic floor. 

If you’re considering adding dormer windows to a new house or having one retrofitted on your existing home, the following benefits and drawbacks might help in the decision-making process.

Pros

  • Interior illumination: Attics and lofts are naturally dim without a window to brighten the interior.
  • Increased living space: The interior area of a typical dormer window can serve as a sleeping or reading nook, or hold a dresser or bench.
  • Better airflow: An operable window in a dormer helps ventilate warm air out and fresh air in.
  • Exterior appearance: Dormer windows attractively break up the long expanse of a roof, adding character and style.

Cons

  • Added cost: It takes time and materials to build a dormer window, so installation cost is greater than the price of a roof without one. Plus, you might need to reroute HVAC, electrical, or plumbing, which adds to costs and might increase the number of trades that need to be involved in the project.  
  • Increased leak risk: Dormers, like chimneys, penetrate the main roof, which means there’s a greater likelihood of leaks. Flashing—a method of interweaving shingles and sheet metal—is necessary to reduce the risk of leaks. Still, penetrations remain more leak-prone than other parts of the roof.

Dormer Window Cost

According to HomeAdvisor, adding a dormer window costs an average of $12,000, and can range from $2,500 to $30,000 per window, depending on the style, size, roof framing, roof type, and material choice. Prefab dormers, like this dormer window kit for a shed or garage, are also an option. However, prefab dormers designed for a home can cost between $8,000 and $14,000.  

Shed dormers are usually the least expensive option, and more complicated eyebrow and arched dormer windows can cost the most to install. However, a dormer provides about a 40 percent return on investment. 

Dormer Window Installation

Young man checking plank on construction site under dormer window with exposed insulation.
Photo: UWE_UMSTAETTER / Getty Images

Installing a dormer window is not a DIY project. Putting in a dormer window is strictly a job for the pros. It involves working on the sloped roof, and often requires complex angle-framing. If it’s a retrofit, an engineer must design the reconfiguration of the rafters necessary to support and install the new dormer. 

Dormer Windows in New Home Construction

Framing contractors will construct the frame of the dormer at the same time they frame the roof structure. Sheathing (the plywood that covers the framing studs) is attached to the outside dormer walls and over the rafters of the main roof at the same time. The next step is the installation of a vapor barrier wrap over the sheathing on the vertical walls of the dormer. 

A pro usually installs the window next, and then the roofing contractor will install the roof shingles over the dormer roof and the main roof at the same time so there is no noticeable transition between the two—just a seamless layer of shingles over the entire roof. The sides of the dormer are clad in exterior wall cladding like siding. When the exterior is complete, the interior of the dormer is finished (painted and trimmed) at the same time the interior loft space is finished.

Dormer Windows in Remodeling Projects

When a dormer window is retrofitted in an existing house, the main focus is to reduce the amount of time you have a gaping hole in your roof. 

Timing

It’s essential to consider the season and weather when scheduling the construction of a new dormer. “Opening a house in winter or a rainy season is going to require a lot more protection efforts,” says Patterson. “The size and competence of the crew make a difference also. A larger crew, with everything well planned, materials pre-cut etc., will get the dormer weathertight more quickly than one or two guys just plodding along. Every day open, there is more risk of damage,” he says.

Find trusted local pros for any home project
+

For this reason, interior framing, such as alterations to the interior rafters or trusses (alterations that must be cleared by a structural engineer), is often done first, and then the contractor constructs the exterior frame of the dormer on the surface of the roof. 

Roof Framing 

When the interior framing is complete, the contractor cuts a connecting hole through the roof and then completes any necessary additional framing. “If the roof is made of trusses, any alterations need to be carefully looked at by a licensed professional engineer (PE),” says Patterson. “Stick-built roofs are a little easier to modify, but both require that the load path of the new dormer be properly installed down to the foundation—and still should use a PE. This can involve opening ceilings and walls below the work area to install posts or beams; adding costs that might not immediately be apparent.” 

The window is typically installed next and then the dormer can be wrapped with a vapor barrier before finishing the exterior and interior as desired.

Roof Shingles

If you’re thinking about retrofitting one or more dormer windows in an existing house, the best time to do it is when you’re replacing the shingles. That way, the roofing contractor can lay new shingles over the entire roof at the same time. This provides the most cohesive look because it can be difficult to perfectly match new shingles to existing ones.

Access to Finished Attic Space

“Another potential surprise can happen when deciding to turn an attic into finished living space, and that is how one gets up there,” says Patterson. “A steep attic staircase will likely need to be replaced with a code-compliant one, and space and money need to be found to do that work,” he says.

The post Dormer Windows: Styles, Pros, Cons, and Costs appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[We Asked Plumbers the 3 Biggest DIY Repair Mistakes to Avoid]]>These seemingly small missteps can lead to expensive problems.

The post We Asked Plumbers the 3 Biggest DIY Repair Mistakes to Avoid appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/diy/plumbing-mistakes/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427552Fri, 14 Feb 2025 15:42:51 -0500DIYInteriorPlumbingRepair & MaintenanceWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

A burst pipe or clogged toilet can be a real headache. We depend on the plumbing in our home to function seamlessly so we have clean water to use; cold and hot water running throughout the house in each shower, tub, faucet, and water-using appliance; and the ability to remove wastewater. 

But when plumbing isn’t working, the problem needs fixing right away. Many homeowners try to address plumbing issues on their own, but that isn’t always a good idea. “While it’s great that homeowners are interested in tackling some plumbing tasks themselves, it’s important to know where to draw the line,” warns Al Fagundes, founder and CEO of A. Fagundes Plumbing and Heating Inc., with locations in Massachusetts and New Hampshire. “I’ve seen my share of DIY mishaps over the years, and some can be costly,” he says.

We spoke with Fagundes and other professional plumbers to ask what they think are the three biggest DIY plumbing mistakes they’ve seen and been asked to fix. They also offered tips to help homeowners determine which plumbing repairs are typically suitable for DIYers and which are best left to the pros. 

1. Over-Tightening Connections

A common mistake that DIYers make is tightening pipe fittings, supply lines, faucet connections, and toilet bolts too much, which can result in cracking pipes or destroying washers. “Many DIYers think that if a little tightening is good, then more is better, but this is often not the case,” says Fagundes. “Over-tightening pipe fittings, especially plastic ones, can actually damage them, leading to cracks and leaks. It can also strip threads on metal fittings, making them unusable.” This can ultimately cause leaks that could have easily been avoided. 

The goal should be to create a seal, not to crush the pipes. Fagundes offers a good rule of thumb: tighten fittings until they’re snug and then give them just a little bit more—usually no more than a quarter turn. Use Teflon tape or pipe dope on threaded connections to help create a seal and prevent seizing.

A DIYer using pipe dope or pipe joint compound to install a bathtub faucet.
Photo: BanksPhotos/E+ via Getty Images

2. Incorrect Use of Sealants and Tape

Another issue occurs when DIYers use duct tape or epoxy fillers incorrectly. Danny Pen, a plumbing and HVAC contractor at New Era Plumbing & HVAC in Dracut, Massachusetts, often sees inexperienced homeowners wrapping Teflon tape backward or using too much of it. “In both of these cases, it causes leaks instead of preventing them,” he says. Pen suggests wrapping the tape clockwise two to three times so it tightens with the fitting.

Understanding which sealant to use for which application is also critical. Teflon tape is great for threaded connections, but it’s not appropriate for all plumbing situations, says Fagundes. “For example, it shouldn’t be used on compression fittings,” he explains. “Pipe dope (pipe joint compound) is another sealant that’s used on threaded connections, often in conjunction with Teflon tape.” Also, using too much sealant can be just as bad as using too little. Excess sealant can squeeze out and create obstructions in the pipes.

Finally, Alex Atkinson, plumber and HVAC technician with Super Brothers in San Jose and Sacramento, California, has walked into homes where residents have attempted to repair a burst or leaking pipe with temporary solutions like duct tape or DIY epoxy fixes. “While these might hold for a short time, they’re not permanent solutions and can lead to costly water damage if they fail,” he says. The temporary patches can easily give out, requiring you to replace entire sections of drywall or flooring due to water damage. 

The main water line to a house with a valve for turning water on and off.
Photo: fhm/Moment via Getty Images

3. Forgetting to Turn Off the Water Supply and Drain Pipes

Another big error is when homeowners forget to turn off the water supply and then drain pipes before they attempt to fix a plumbing issue. “It’s amazing how often DIYers forget (or don’t know how) to turn off the water supply before starting a plumbing repair,” says Fagundes. “This can lead to a real mess—water spraying everywhere, potential water damage to walls and floors, and even the risk of electrical shock if water comes into contact with electrical wiring.”  

How can you avoid a disaster? Before tackling any plumbing project, be sure to always locate the main water shutoff valve for your home and turn it off. For smaller repairs, like replacing a faucet, you might be able to use the shut-off valves under the sink or toilet.

It’s also critical to drain the pipes before starting any work on them, says Pen. “This means when they start unscrewing a connection, water still under pressure sprays everywhere, leading to soaked drywall, flooded cabinets, and a mess they didn’t see coming.” Always open a faucet downstream to relieve pressure before doing anything with your plumbing.

Plumbing Repairs Most Suitable for DIYers

When it comes to determining which plumbing repairs are DIY-friendly and which require a professional, consider complexity, risk, and tools, says Atkinson. Make sure you have the proper plumbing tools, including a toilet plunger, plumber’s tape, mini sink and drain plunger, and drain-cleaning auger. You’ll also want to find the proper instructions for each type of repair that you can follow easily. 

Here are some straightforward, quick plumbing repairs that can typically be handled as DIY projects:

A DIYer using a drain snake or auger to unclog a toilet.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

When It’s Time to Call a Pro

On the other hand, sometimes it’s best to hire a professional plumber to avoid DIY plumbing mistakes and ensure the job is done well. The typical cost range to hire a plumber is between $180 and $489, with a national average cost of $331. Costs will vary depending on the plumber’s expertise level, type of service, job complexity, supplies, labor, and geographic location.

Anything that includes cutting into pipes, working with pressurized water lines, or taking care of sewage should be left to a licensed plumber, says Atkinson. “If a mistake has the potential to cause significant water damage, mold growth, or safety hazards, it’s best to bring in an expert who has the training and equipment to handle the job properly,” he says.

A good rule to follow, according to Fagundes, is: “if it’s wet, call a pro.” If the problem involves a significant amount of water or if you’re dealing with drain lines or sewer lines, it’s generally best to call a professional plumber. “Water damage can be very expensive to repair, so it’s not worth the risk,” he says.

If you’re not sure if a plumbing repair is something you can handle yourself, it’s always best to err on the side of caution and call a licensed plumber. Here are some of the more complex plumbing tasks that often require a pro:

  • Repairing burst or leaking pipes
  • Relocating pipes
  • Repairing or replacing water heaters
  • Working on any plumbing behind a wall, under the foundation, or involving gas or sewer lines
  • Addressing persistently low water pressure
  • Figuring out the cause of mysterious leaks
  • Addressing major drain clogs
  • Installing smart toilets and luxury faucets and fixtures
  • Performing any work requiring permits or adherence to local codes

The post We Asked Plumbers the 3 Biggest DIY Repair Mistakes to Avoid appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[EcoFlow’s Rugged Solar Generator Is $800 Off Exclusively for Prime Members Right Now]]>You can be prepared with whatever Mother Nature throws your way with a top-of-the-line generator. Even better, during Presidents' Day sales, you can save up to $800 on our favorite models.

The post EcoFlow’s Rugged Solar Generator Is $800 Off Exclusively for Prime Members Right Now appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/generator-deals-presidents-day-2025/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=426926Fri, 14 Feb 2025 14:52:52 -0500ReviewsDealsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Presidents’ Day sales are live, and this holiday marks a great time to buy larger appliances, power tools, and home essentials like generators.

Generators and power stations are designed to power electronics, appliances, and other home gadgets in the event of a power outage. 

For a limited time, you can save $400 off one of our favorite generators. The DuroMax XP13000EH Dual Fuel Portable Generator is available at Amazon for $1,099. This generator boasts 13,000 watts of power and can serve as a home back-up energy source. It’s equipped to handle powering large appliances and is equipped with never-flat tires for ultimate portability.

In addition to the DuroMax, we found some huge discounts on top brands like Ryobi, DuroMax, Jackery, and more. See our favorite deals below. 


EcoFlow Portable Power Station Delta 2 Max at Amazon for $1,099 (save $800)

Prime members can save a whopping $800 on the EcoFlow Delta 2 Max. This portable generator features six 120-volt AC outlets, 2 USB-A, 2 USB fast charge, 2 USB-C, one 12-volt car outlet, and 2 barrel ports. While it may look like a large power station, it has the ability to serve as a whole-home back-up, and can power a refrigerator for up to 14 hours. You can read our results when we tested this generator for efficiency ad overall power.

Ryobi 6,500-Watt Gas Portable Generator at The Home Depot for $799 (save $100)


The Ryobi 6500-watt generator features a dependable engine, a rugged hand truck frame with 10-inch wheels, and a carbon monoxide sensor with automatic safety shutoff. The gas tank holds 6 gallons, which is enough to keep it running for up to 10 hours. 

During testing, the Ryobi was able to easily handle couple of portable saws, a router, and work lights—plugged into the 120-volt 20-amp duplex outlets—for several hours without interruption.


Anker SOLIX F3800 Portable Power Station at Amazon for $2,598 (save $1,400)

The Anker Solix F3800 bridges the gap between whole-home backup power and portable power stations. This powerful generator features 6,000 running watts with options for expandability up to 26,880 watt-hours making it ideal for extended power outages. This unit surpassed our expectations during testing as it easily handled a window air conditioner, a full-size refrigerator, a microwave, three table lamps, a Wi-Fi router, and a television for 2 hours without any issue. It also has incredible recharging times. When plugged into a wall outlet, the unit fully recharged from 15 percent in less than 2.5 hours.

Westinghouse 12,500-Watt Dual-Fuel Portable Generator at Walmart for $1,049 (save $350)

The Westinghouse WGen9500DF is a dual-fuel powerhouse that features up to 12,500 peak watts and reliable 9,500 running watts. It offers a variety of outlet options, three start-up options, and a dependable 457cc 4-stroke OHV engine.

Wen 11,000-Watt 120V/240V Dual Fuel Portable Generator at Amazon for $789.99 (save $115)

The Wen 11,000-watt dual-fuel generator boasts an output of up to 8,300 running watts on gas and up to 7,500 running watts on propane. What we loved about this generator is the ability to simply flip a switch to change between gasoline or electric power. This generator was among the most powerful we tested.


DuroMax XP13000EH Dual Fuel Portable Generator at Amazon for $1099 (save $400)

The Best Propane Generator Option: DuroMax 1,300-Watt Dual Fuel Portable Generator
Photo: amazon.com

There’s no denying DuroMax makes incredible generators. The XP13000EH features 13,000 watts of power and is built to withstand any elements. It includes a push button start and a handy front-facing interface for quick access to controls. It can also be home-backup ready with its 50-amp outlet.


EcoFlow Portable Power Station Delta 3 Plus at Amazon for $629 (save $270)

The EcoFlow Delta 3 Plus is a game-changer when it comes to portable power stations and back-up solutions. It boasts a plug-and-play model, numerous charging options, and the option to add more battery storage as needed. It supports 120-volt and 240-volt AC charging, high- and low-voltage solar charging, car charging, and combination charging through AC and solar ports. We put this generator through extensive testing and rated it 4.8 out of 5. See our full review.


EcoFlow Portable Power Station River 3 at Amazon for $159 (save $100)

Another Prime member-exclusive discount, the EcoFlow River 3 has a 245-watt hour capacity and 300-watt maximum output. This makes the River 3 ideal for charging handheld electronics and powering small appliances. The River 3 is compact and portable. It can also recharge in under 45 minutes. While this power station may not be able to power larger appliances, it is ideal for quick power outages or keeping electronics charged and ready to use.

The post EcoFlow’s Rugged Solar Generator Is $800 Off Exclusively for Prime Members Right Now appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[Presidents’ Day Power Tool Deals Are Here and I’ve Already Added This $99 Circular Saw to My Cart]]>Presidents' Day is for big brands offering deep discounts of up to 66% off. Save on DeWalt, Milwaukee, and more–but hurry, these deals won’t last long!

The post Presidents’ Day Power Tool Deals Are Here and I’ve Already Added This $99 Circular Saw to My Cart appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/power-tool-deals-presidents-day-2025/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427065Fri, 14 Feb 2025 14:47:08 -0500ReviewsDealsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Any day I can score a power tool deal is a good day–and Presidents’ Day is packed with them. Right now, Lowe’s has a killer price on the Bosch Profactor 18V 7-¼-inch Cordless Circular Saw for just $99 (that’s $130 off!) This circular saw is already in my cart. You’d better hurry if you want to snag the same deal. 

Bosch isn’t the only big-name toolmaker dropping deals. Right now, The Home Depot has the DeWalt MAX XR Router for just $299.99 (Save $50!). This high-end router was a BobVila.com Tool of The Year winner and is the lowest price I’ve seen. Don’t wait–this one is a steal! 

And that’s just the start–I’ve scoured the web to track down the best power tool out there. Keep scrolling for the top discounts and my must-have picks!

My Favorite Presidents’ Day Power Tool Deals

Ryobi 18V Compression Drive Cordless 3/8-in. Crown Stapler at The Home Depot for $49.97 (Save $29.03)

A solid stapler is a must for DIYer’s and the Ryobi ONE+ is a steal right now at The Home Depot. It’s cordless, so no compressor is needed, and it’s an excellent pick for light-duty construction, upholstery, or tacking insulation.

Bosch Profactor 18V 7-¼-in. Cordless Circular Saw at Lowes for $99 (Save $130)

Circular saws are a must-have for any DIYer. They’re portable, versatile, and made for all kinds of cuts. Right now, this Bosch Circular Saw is a steal at $99.

DeWalt 20V MAX 4-½-in. Angle Grinder at Amazon for $91.73 (Save $57.27)

It’s hard to bean an angle grinder for down-and-dirty DIY tasks–whether you’re cutting metal, grinding welds, sharpening tools, or prepping surfaces, the DeWalt 4-½-inch angle grinder will get the job done. At this price, I’m thinking of buying two! 

Project Source 3-Gallon 110 PSI Pancake Air Compressor at Lowe’s for $49.98 (Save $30)

An air compressor for under $50? Almost unheard of–but Lowes has one! The Project Source 3-gallon model is perfect for brad nailing, tire-inflating, or power stapling.

DeWalt 10-in 15-Amp Portable Jobsite Table Saw w/ Rolling Stand at Lowe’s for $549 (Save $100)

This powerful DeWalt table saw took top honors in our tested lineup of the best table saws. It features a versatile 10-inch blade, and offers all the power and performance DeWalt is known for. This is the lowest price I’ve seen on this model. 

Bosch 18V Cordless Brushless Jigsaw at Lowes for $79 (Save $80)

You may not use a jigsaw every day, but when you need to make curved cuts or intricate shapes, it’s a game changer. The Bosch 18V cordless jigsaw is 50% off right now at Lowes, so if you’re into woodworking, don’t miss this one.

More Great Presidents’ Day Power Tool Deals

Find the Best Power Tools for Your Project

Still searching for the perfect tool? Our expert-tested guides break down what to look for when shopping for power tools. We share shopping tops and out top tool recommendations to help 

The post Presidents’ Day Power Tool Deals Are Here and I’ve Already Added This $99 Circular Saw to My Cart appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[Presidents’ Day Outdoor Tool Sales You Can’t Ignore—These Are My Top Picks]]>The best outdoor tools and accessories are on sale now, and these deals are too good to miss–up to 54% off!

The post Presidents’ Day Outdoor Tool Sales You Can’t Ignore—These Are My Top Picks appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/presidents-day-outdoor-tool-deals-2025/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=426984Fri, 14 Feb 2025 14:45:38 -0500ReviewsDealsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Punxsutawney Phil may have called for more winter, but spring is right around the corner—and Presidents’ Day is the perfect time to score great deals on outdoor tools and equipment. I can’t stop adding deals to my online shopping cart—like this heavy-duty collapsible utility wagon for sale on Amazon for $69.99. That’s more than half off, and a dependable garden cart is a must-have for anyone who gardens or landscapes.

Then, I came across some big-ticket items that I may have to splurge on, like the Worx Landroid Robotic Lawn Mower now  just $719 at Lowe’s (a $480 savings). The Landroid earned our top spot in a hands-on test of robotic lawn mowers. With robot mowers trending, now’s the perfect time to pick up a proven winner at a steep discount. 

That’s just the beginning: I’ve uncovered some incredible Presidents’ Day deals on outdoor tools and equipment. Now’s the perfect opportunity to grab them ahead of the busy spring season. Scroll down for the hottest sales and my top picks. 

My Favorite Presidents’ Day Deals

Ego Power+ 21-inch 56V Cordless Snow Blower at Amazon for $599 (Save $150)

Photo: Amazon

Tired of shoveling snow? Now’s your chance to get an Ego electric snow blower at a great price. This single-stage model is battery-powered for convenience and clears a wide 21-inch path. The steel auger helps this machine plow through heavy snow and ice.

Karcher K5 2500 PSI Electric Pressure Washer at Lowe’s for $379 (Save $120)

Photo: Lowe’s

An electric pressure washer gets sidewalks, driveways, siding, and even patio furniture clean without scrubbing. This corded Karcher model comes with three spray tips, a surface cleaner, and pressure control—and at this low price, it’s a steal.

Makita 18V Cordless String Trimmer at The Home Depot for $199 (Save $50) 

Photo: The Home Depot

A cordless string trimmer is the easiest way to keep your yard looking its best. This Makita trimmer features a high-efficiency motor and variable speed control. Now is your time to score Makita’s high-quality trimmer at a great price.

Ryobi 80V ZTR Riding Mower at The Home Depot for $3,999 (Save $1,000)

Best Lawn Mower Deals Option Ryobi 30-inch Zero Turn Riding Mower
Photo: The Home Depot

If you have a large lawn, you know how much time mowing can take—time you spend on other activities. The answer is a riding lawn mower, and this zero-turn-radius model from Ryobi makes it effortless to navigate around trees and fences.

BigBear Tornadic Gas Chipper/Shredder at The Home Depot for $2,199 (Save $300) 

The Home Depot

Serious yard work calls for serious tools, and the BigBear Power Tornadic wood chipper/shredder is at the top of my wish list for an outdoor tool upgrade. I’ve had my eye on this baby for months, and at this price, it just might be time to pull the trigger.

More Great Presidents’ Day Tool Deals

Find the Best Outdoor Tools for Your Yard

Still searching for the perfect tool? Our expert-tested guides break down what to look for in outdoor equipment and we share shopping tips and top product recommendations to help you make the best choice. 

The post Presidents’ Day Outdoor Tool Sales You Can’t Ignore—These Are My Top Picks appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[5 Major Appliance Deals You Don’t Want to Miss at Lowe’s Presidents’ Day Sale]]>I wasn’t planning to upgrade my appliances—until I saw these impressive Lowe’s deals.

The post 5 Major Appliance Deals You Don’t Want to Miss at Lowe’s Presidents’ Day Sale appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/lowes-presidents-day-appliance-sale-2025/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=426802Fri, 14 Feb 2025 14:42:58 -0500ReviewsDealsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

If there’s one thing I’ve learned, the best time to buy appliances is when yours are approaching—but not quite at—the ends of their lifespans. This gives you time to review newer options on the market and the advantage of shopping major sales. And right now, Lowe’s announced its Presidents’ Day Sale 2025 early, which includes up to 40 percent off major appliances. I found massive markdowns on refrigerators, washers, and even countertop appliances. I couldn’t resist buying the Frigidaire Bullet Ice Maker for $89. I saved $40, and now I won’t run out of ice when friends come over! 

Lowe’s Presidents’ Day Sale runs from February 6 to 19. The sale is packed with major appliance deals—but it gets even better. Right now, you’ll save an extra 10 percent when you spend $699 on any combination of appliances, making this the best time to score the lowest prices of the year on refrigerators, washers and dryers, ranges, microwaves, and more! Your dream kitchen awaits.

And, for the best shot at big savings now and all year long at Lowe’s, consider becoming a MyLowe’s Rewards member. Signing up for MyLowe’s Rewards is quick, easy, and, best of all, free.

Our Top 5 Appliance Picks from Lowe’s Presidents’ Day Sale

GE French Door Refrigerator with Ice/Water Dispenser at Lowes for $1,499 (Save $900)

Lowes Presidents Day Appliance Sale GE French Door Refrigerator
Photo: Lowe’s

With fingerprint-resistant stainless steel, an internal water and ice dispenser, and a spacious 27 cu.ft., it’s a family-friendly upgrade at a price you won’t want to miss. 

GE Profile All-In-One Washer Dryer Combo at Lowes for $1,798 (Save $801)

Lowes Presidents Day Appliance Sale GE Profile All-In-One Washer Dryer Combo
Photo: Lowe’s

GE incorporates ventless heat pump technology (for energy savings) into this 4.6 cu. ft. capacity washer and dryer combo that completes a large load in just 2 hours! But hurry: This deal ends February 19.

Bosch 500 Series Super Quiet Smart Dishwasher at Lowes for $999 (Save $250)

Lowes Presidents Day Appliance Sale Bosch 500 Series Super Quiet Smart Dishwasher
Photo: Lowe’s

Bosch makes amazing dishwashers—I know because I own one, and I love it! This 500 Series Bosch dishwasher is Energy Star certified and whisper-quiet at just 38 dB. 

GE 30-Inch 5-Burner Glass Top Double-Oven Range at Lowes for $1,199 (Save $350)

Lowes Presidents Day Appliance Sale GE 30-Inch 5-Burner Glass Top Double-Oven Range
Photo: Lowe’s

Looking for double-oven convenience in a single electric range? This GE model delivers—and it’s a steal at this price! Cook multiple dishes simultaneously with its sleek glass 5-burner top, air fry capabilities, and convection technology.

Lowes Presidents Day Appliance Sale Frigidaire Gallery 1.9-Cu Ft 1000W Over-the-Range Microwave
Photo: Lowe’s

This Frigidaire microwave is peak convenience. It features sensor cooking for optimal results, an easy-wipe interior, and a sleek, fingerprint-resistant finish. 

Looking for more options? 

Lowe’s Presidents’ Day sales only happen once a year. Sleep in, and these deals could sell out or end. If you’ve considered upgrading your appliances, now’s the time to do it. Shop with the confidence that you’re choosing the right brand and model, and check out our comprehensive buying guides for shopping tips and recommendations first. 

The post 5 Major Appliance Deals You Don’t Want to Miss at Lowe’s Presidents’ Day Sale appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[Ace Is the Place—For a New Lawn Care Subscription Service]]>After decades of providing DIYers with the tools and supplies for lush lawns and bountiful gardens, the neighborhood hardware store chain unveils its own subscription lawn care service: Ace YardRx.

The post Ace Is the Place—For a New Lawn Care Subscription Service appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/lawn-and-garden/ace-hardware-yardrx-news/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427622Fri, 14 Feb 2025 14:27:21 -0500Lawn & GardenDIYLawn CareLawn Care & GardeningWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Even the greenest of thumbs can struggle with common lawn issues like patches, snow mold, and pests. As an antidote to wandering a store searching for the right products and hoping that you chose correctly, lawn care subscriptions offer everything for proper yard maintenance — delivered right to your door.

Now, that convenient service, more synonymous with large chains, is available through a local hardware store. Known for providing personalized advice on home and lawn maintenance to its in-store customers, the venerable lawn and garden retailer Ace Hardware is now debuting a lawn care subscription called Ace YardRx—a natural next step on the journey to help even more homeowners work on their landscape.“We’re excited to launch Ace YardRx, a new subscription service that delivers yard care directly to our neighbors’ homes,” said Kim Lefko, Chief Marketing Officer at Ace Hardware.

How Does Ace YardRx Work?

Similar to other lawn care subscription services, the customized lawn care plan is location-based and delivered to customers throughout the growing season—spring, summer, and fall. Each box includes seasonal treatments for lawn growth and nourishment, weed prevention, and pest problems, as well as recommended application dates. Prices are given upfront along with estimated delivery dates for each box. Customers can also pick up subscription boxes in store or curbside.

To get a customized lawn care plan, customers simply create an account and enter their home address. Ace YardRx will use data such as climate, property size, and seasonal growth habits to develop a lawn care plan. Customers can further identify specific issues including insects, diseases, and fungi and filter by product preferences such as brand names, natural ingredients, or concentrates.

Ace Hardware YardRx truck loaded with supplies with man standing next to it
Photo: Ace Hardware

Curated Solutions From Local Experts 

Local Ace “YardRx-perts” identify the right products for specific regions and issues based on the data you submit. All products ship from local Ace Hardware stores, making pricing competitive and shipping free. Plus in-store experts are available to help troubleshoot or further tailor the products to specific growing zones.

Ace YardRx Takes the Guesswork Out of Lawn Care 

Available nationwide, Ace YardRx offers homeowners a lawn care prescription to treat any lawn care problems and get a fast track to a healthy, lush lawn. Simply follow each product’s recommendations for proper application. This program handles everything besides applying the products—or mowing the lawn. For that, a robot mower may be in order.

The post Ace Is the Place—For a New Lawn Care Subscription Service appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[Is Your Yard Disaster-Proof? 5 Projects That Could Protect Your Home]]>These outdoor improvements do more than add curb appeal.

The post Is Your Yard Disaster-Proof? 5 Projects That Could Protect Your Home appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/lawn-and-garden/outdoor-natural-disaster-protection/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427544Fri, 14 Feb 2025 13:32:34 -0500Lawn & GardenHome SafetyInteriorLandscapingWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Nearly half of American homes are at severe or extreme risk of facing at least one type of climate-related natural disaster, according to the 2024 Realtor.com Housing and Climate Risk Report. This includes damage from floods, hurricane winds, wildfires, extreme heat, or hazardous air quality. Not only could this be devastating to your family and property, but it comes with a hefty price tag to repair and rebuild after a storm or other climate-related event.

Fortunately, there are several preventive measures you can take to safeguard your property so it is climate resilient. Consider pursuing the following hardscaping and landscaping projects to help with natural disaster protection.

1. Install permeable pavers.

As you add more hardscape materials like concrete patios to your yard, you can increase water runoff and erosion from the nonpermeable materials. Choosing permeable materials—which are porous so water can flow through them easily—for projects like pathways, patios, and decks can lessen runoff. 

According to the Environmental Protection Agency, such materials include pervious asphalt, interlocking pavers, pervious concrete, gravel, mulch, and plastic grid pavers, which allow rain and snowmelt to drain more easily into the soil during a storm. The ground absorbs the water, which decreases the burden on storm drains. This helps minimize water pooling and prevent flooding and water damage, especially during and after heavy rainfall. 

Grey permeable pavers with green grass peaking through
Photo: Douglas Sacha/Moment via Getty Images.

2. Design a landscaping windbreak.

The selection and placement of natural materials in your yard can help protect your property from strong winds. Referred to as landscaping windbreaks, these efforts can provide effective protection when the wind speed increases. A windbreak can reduce wind speed for a distance of as much as 30 times the windbreak’s height. Interestingly, windbreaks also lower heating costs by reducing the wind chill, or cooling effects of wind, on your house. 

To create an effective windbreak, you’ll need to identify the best trees, bushes, and shrubs for your local climate. The best foliage for a windbreak has low crowns that can slow wind speeds close to the ground. A mix of evergreens and deciduous trees is an effective option, and might include Eastern red cedar (Juniperus virginiana), Arizona cypress (Hesperocyparis arizonica), Ponderosa pine (Pinus ponderosa), Sycamore (Platanus occidentalis), and Chinese elm (Ulmus parvifolia).

Plant the greenery together in a clump to block wind from the ground up to the height of the trees. The best place to plant a windbreak is one or two tree heights away from your house on the side where winds are worst. The larger the tree, the farther you should plant it from the house. Never plant trees near power lines. Dense trees and shrubs, combined with a wall, fence, or earth berm, can stave off or lift the wind all the way over the house.

3. Build a retaining wall.

Consider building a durable retaining wall to protect your home from flooding. Retaining walls are typically constructed out of reinforced concrete blocks, gabion, stacked stones, brick, rammed earth, or steel. The wall creates raised sections of the yard that serve as a strong barrier. By redirecting rainwater away from your property, a retaining wall helps keep flood water at bay to prevent basement leaks and other types of water damage to your home. 

Retaining walls also can prevent soil erosion. They stabilize slopes and help keep soil in place; eroded soil is a significant contributor to flooding, especially during heavy rain. By stopping erosion, the wall minimizes the amount of sediment that could block drainage systems or make flood conditions worse.

Retaining walls are a good investment overall. In addition to helping with long-term water management in your yard, their design can add an attractive hardscaping feature that enhances curb appeal. Given the complexity of building a retaining wall, it’s advisable to hire a pro to handle the job.

Brown stone retaining wall with plants in backyard
Photo: fotolinchen/E+ via Getty Images.

4. Create defensible space through firescaping.

Another way that vegetation in your yard can play a role in protecting your home is through firescaping. This approach involves designing fire-resilient landscaping around the perimeter of your home to reduce risks from wildfires in what’s referred to as a defensible space. 

Defensible space consists of multiple layers, or zones, that make it easier for firefighters to put out a blaze. 

  • Zone 0: This zone consists of the nearest 5 feet that surround your home; it should be free of dead or dying plants and any combustible items like wood piles or flammable outdoor furniture. Choose hardscaping materials such as pea gravel or decorative rocks, as opposed to combustible mulch or bark for shrub beds.
  • Zone 1: This is the area within 30 feet of your house that allows firefighters to tackle the fire. In addition to close hardscaping, plant low-growing and less-dense foundation shrubs, such as azaleas and boxwoods, and keep trees away from your house. 
  • Zone 2: This area extends 100 feet from your home and should include trees and shrubs that are thinned out, along with wide paths that create firebreaks. 

5. Add a rain garden.

Another way to minimize flooding is to build a rain garden in your yard, which is a garden strategically designed to collect and filter stormwater runoff from roofs, driveways, and other impervious surfaces. A rain garden design includes layers of soil, mulch, and native plants with deep root systems that help slow the flow of water. This way, the water seeps into the ground rather than pooling in the yard, overwhelming storm drains, or soaking areas by the house that can damage the foundation. Trees, grasses, ground covers, and shrubs are all part of an effective—and attractive—rain garden. 

The post Is Your Yard Disaster-Proof? 5 Projects That Could Protect Your Home appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[I Washed Over 50 Sets of Sheets With Wad-Free and My Opinion Hasn’t Changed]]>Can this piece of plastic really be a $20 game-changer when washing sheets and other bulky blankets? See my thoughts below

The post I Washed Over 50 Sets of Sheets With Wad-Free and My Opinion Hasn’t Changed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/wad-free-review/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427138Fri, 14 Feb 2025 12:13:33 -0500ReviewsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

I’ve had the Wad-Free tangle preventer for over a year, and I used it to wash our household sheets a collective four to six times each month during that time. Featured on Shark Tank, this simple yet clever tool gained attention for preventing the annoyance and wasted time caused by tangled and twisted sheets. While it took me a few tries to get the hang of installing it, I think those initial efforts—and the couple of minutes it adds to laundry day—are worth it. 

Rating: 4.5/5

Wad-Free

Buy Wad-Free for Bed Sheets Wad Preventer

At first glance, the Wad-Free doesn’t look like much. It comes with two 4-inch by 4-inch plastic squares (enough for a set of sheets), each with four plastic slots with tabs that attach to the corners of a bed sheet. To use it, cover each tab with a different sheet corner, slide the tabs to lock everything in place, and wash and dry as normal. The device keeps the corners separated so the sheets don’t end up in a tightly tangled ball that doesn’t get fully clean or stays damp in the middle no matter how many times it’s fluffed and re-dried.

Simple enough, right? Yes, but also no. The first handful of times I used the Wad-Free I had to watch how-to videos to get the installation process down. The process is easy once you’ve got it, but it’s not intuitive. Even once I thought I had it, I didn’t always cover the tabs with enough fabric to stay put during washing and drying, causing the fabric to fall out and ball up. Now, I can attach each square to each sheet automatically and in a matter of minutes.

Here’s my process:

  1. Toss one Wad-Free on the flat sheet while it’s still on the bed, insert all four corners, and set aside.
  2. Pull the corners of the fitted sheet off the mattress and insert those into the other unit.
  3. Place both sheets in the wash and set to a delicate or normal cycle with no more than medium spin speed. 
  4. Wash and dry, leaving the Wad-Free installed for both processes. 
  • Wad-Free Review product photo
  • Wad-Free Review Wad-Free attached to fitted sheet
  • Wad-Free Review Wad-Free on sheets after drying
  • Wad-Free Review
  • Wad-Free Review Wad-Free on top of fitted sheet
  • Wad-Free Review Wad-Free on sheets before washing
  • Wad-Free Review Wad-Free on sheets after washing
  • Wad-Free Review Crinkled sheet corners after using Wad-Free

When the bed sheets come out of the dryer, the corners may be crinkled from the tight grip of the tabs. If this bothers you, simply remove the Wad-Free a few minutes before the sheets are dry to knock those wrinkles out. 

The best part of using the Wad-Free wad preventer is that I never open my washer or dryer door to find a tangled ball of sheets—even when I throw a few towels or T-shirts in with the load. As long as I secure each sheet corner sufficiently, the small plastic squares stay in place and stand up to hot water as well as high drying heat. Even after dozens of trips through my washer and dryer, my squares look identical to when I first opened the package.

Everyone in our family has the percale version of these Brooklinen sheets, and my wad preventers have never damaged them. However, Wad-Free is not for use with silk, rayon, bamboo, eucalyptus, or beechwood sheets. The squares themselves are made from non-toxic materials and free of latex, PVC, BPA, and phthalates, and the company also makes a Wad-Free for blankets and duvet covers

At just under $20 per set, the highly-durable Wad-Free bed sheet wad preventer gets sheets cleaner (since soap and water can better reach all parts) and dries sheets up to 75 percent faster. It stops sheets from becoming tangled and prevents loads from becoming unbalanced. Yes, it takes a little practice to get used to installing them, and yes, the process adds a few minutes to washing your sheets. But for the annoyance and energy it saves? Totally worth it. 

Where to Buy Wad-Free for Bed Sheets Wad Preventer

Get the Wad-Free for Bed Sheets Wad Preventer at:

The post I Washed Over 50 Sets of Sheets With Wad-Free and My Opinion Hasn’t Changed appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[I Never Thought I Needed a Suction Lifter—But Once I Tried It—I Had to Have Another One]]>Whether you’re lifting glass, drywall, tile, or heavy panels, this cordless DeWalt suction tool makes it easier—plus, it won a top spot our BobVila.com’s Tool of the Year contest!

The post I Never Thought I Needed a Suction Lifter—But Once I Tried It—I Had to Have Another One appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/dewalt-grabo-tool-review/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427600Fri, 14 Feb 2025 11:38:59 -0500ReviewsDIYHand ToolsToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

I’ve never been able to carry a full sheet of drywall alone—until now. Even with a helper, it was always awkward. And plate glass? Let’s just say my wallet took a hit after a costly mishap. 

Rating: 4.5/5

Dewalt Grabo

DeWalt Grabo Lifter

The first time I saw a DeWalt Grabo, I was intrigued—but skeptical. I’d used glass suction cups before, and they only worked on perfectly smooth, impermeable surfaces.There was no way the Grabo could grip drywall or plywood, or so I thought. I was wrong. 

After loading a DeWalt PowerStack battery into the Grabo, I set it on my kitchen counter and pressed the suction button. Instantly, the rubber seal compressed, gripping the countertop like a vise. Within seconds, it was locked tight—and no matter how hard I yanked, it wouldn’t budge. That was impressive, but how would it fare on other flat surfaces? I headed outside to test. 

Over the next few weeks, I used the Grabo on virtually every hard flat surface I could find, including drywall panels, plywood, steel plates, and more. I discovered that the Grabo worked even on slightly porous surfaces like concrete pavers. It dawned on me that I’d been lifting things the hard way for years. 

That’s when I decided I needed another one—for large, two-person tasks, like carrying heavy marble or travertine slabs. I bought a second DeWalt Grabo Suction Lifter

So, how does it work? Pressing the suction button activates an internal vacuum that removes the air between the tool and the surface. A dense foam ring around the base compresses, forming a rock-solid seal. I could actually see the Grabo sink down as the suction kicked in. When the (negative) pressure between the tool and the surface reached about -12.1 PSI, the vacuum shut off, but the suction remained. 

On semi-porous materials, such as concrete pavers, the suction began to drop slowly after the vacuum shut off, but I could still lift and carry the items. When the suction dropped to around -8.4 PSI, the vacuum automatically kicked back on to increase the suction again. The time it takes for the suction to drop depends on the material being carried. When I tested the Grabo on a clean mirror, the suction barely dropped at all—not enough for the tool to kick back on. 

  • Dewalt Grabo Review hand placing on storage base
  • Dewalt Grabo Review inserting battery
  • Dewalt Grabo Review on large format tile
  • Dewalt Grabo Review sunshade screen cover
  • Dewalt Grabo Review woman holding two dewalt grabos
  • Dewalt Grabo Review using dewalt grabo on mirror
  • The Best New Power Tools Option DeWalt 20V MAX Grabo Lifter
  • Dewalt Grabo Review hand holding
  • Dewalt Grabo Review

One of my favorite features on the Grabo is its safety button, which prevents accidental activation. DeWalt added a tiny release lever next to the suction start button, which I had to push before I could fully press the start button to activate suction. It only took a few tries before I could do it by feel, but that extra step adds a simple and critical layer of safety.

Like any power tool, the Grabo Suction Lifter may need occasional maintenance. It comes with extra vacuum filters for the small intake holes on the base, and the dense foam seal is also replaceable. Most retailers sell this as a “tool only,” which means you’ll need to buy a separate battery if you don’t have other DeWalt 20V tools. But at $249.00, it’s well worth it for anyone who regularly lifts and hauls panels, glass, or other unwieldy items with smooth surfaces. 

Now, I can’t imagine lifting without it. 

Where to Buy the Dewalt Grabo:

Meet the Tester

Glenda Taylor is a contractor, product tester, and writer focusing primarily on construction, DIY tools, and home appliances.

The post I Never Thought I Needed a Suction Lifter—But Once I Tried It—I Had to Have Another One appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[This Is the Easiest Way to Paint Baseboards With Carpet ]]>Immediately improve the appearance of a room with just one project: painting baseboards. Learn how to tackle this job with carpeted floors.

The post This Is the Easiest Way to Paint Baseboards With Carpet  appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/diy/how-to-paint-baseboards-with-carpet/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427615Fri, 14 Feb 2025 11:32:18 -0500DIYPainting & FinishingSkills & TechniquesWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

One of the most common ways to update the interior of a home is with fresh painted walls and trim. While it can be easier to paint baseboards when the flooring is a hard surface like tile or wood, avoiding painting baseboards with carpet can cause worn trim to stick out and detract from your makeover efforts.

Some may say that the most surefire method for painting baseboards in a carpeted room is to remove the baseboards entirely, paint them in a separate space, then reinstall the baseboards once the paint has dried. However, if you aren’t careful, you can damage the baseboards during removal or reinstallation, making this a risky and time-consuming endeavor. 

Instead, many DIYers touch up baseboard trim and paint the baseboards in place, with great attention and care required to avoid getting paint on the carpet. If you are repainting baseboards in a carpeted room and don’t want to remove the baseboards, follow the steps in this guide to learn how to paint baseboards with carpet.

Tools & Materials

Bobvila.com may earn a commission from purchases made through these links.

Before You Begin

There are a few necessary steps you need to take before painting floor molding—baseboards and shoe molding—in order to prepare the area and make sure that you have everything you need on hand to get the ideal baseboard paint finish. First, you will need to head to a local home improvement store to purchase paint and baseboard painting tools, including a paint brush, putty knife, sandpaper, and painter’s tape. It’s also a good idea to find heat-resistant paint for baseboard heaters if the home has these heating appliances. 

Next, it’s important to vacuum the floor before painting baseboards with carpet to get rid of any hair, fluff, or other debris that could mess up the paint job. You will also want to open the windows and doors, as well as setting up a fan to help ventilate the space, especially if you are using paint that is high in volatile organic chemicals (VOCs).

While you can paint baseboards without removing the carpet, you can also try to peel back the carpet and roll it up and out of the way while you work. Since carpet is secured next to the wall with a tack strip, you may be able to lift the carpet off the tack strip to peel it back. However, carpet is often attached to the tack strips under the baseboards, which can make this process difficult. It’s even more difficult to reinstall the carpet when you are done, so this may not be a feasible option for many DIYers based on skill level.  

Step 1: Sand and make any necessary repairs to the baseboards.

Some baseboard painting hacks may skip the sanding and repair process. If the baseboards are in poor condition, touch up any minor damages and sand down any old or peeling paint to prepare the baseboards for a new coat. Otherwise, the finished product will just look like you tried to cover up past mistakes. 

Use 100- to 180-grit sandpaper to sand down the surface of the baseboards using even pressure and back-and-forth strokes. Apply caulk to any small holes or cracks in the baseboards to make simple repairs and then run a fresh bead of caulk along the edge of the baseboard where it meets the wall to fill in any gaps. Just keep in mind that if there is any severe damage, it’s best to replace the damaged baseboard entirely. 

A DIYer using a putty knife to mask off carpet for painting baseboard trim.
Photo: Jenny Stanley for Bob Vila

Step 2: Apply painter’s tape and lay down a drop cloth.

The easiest way to paint baseboards in a carpeted room without accidentally painting the carpet is to use painter’s tape to create a protective coating over the carpet nearest the walls. You should also lay down a plastic drop cloth over the rest of the room to avoid dripping paint on exposed carpeting. 

It also helps to use a putty knife to press the tape down and under the baseboards for full protection. Since there is usually a decently sized gap between the carpet and baseboard, this process should be relatively easy. If you aren’t confident in just one layer of painter’s tape, apply a second layer to ensure the paint doesn’t seep through. 

Step 3: Prep the paint brush.

Once the room is ready to go, you can load up the paint brush with paint. It’s recommended to invest in a paint edger brush for superior control while painting. Cover about half of the bristles when dipping the brush into the paint, then use the sides of the paint can or paint tray to wipe off any dripping paint from your brush. Follow this process each time you dip the brush into the paint to reduce the risk of dripping paint on the floor or walls. 

A DIYer painting baseboards in a carpeted room.
Photo: aquaArts studio/E+ via Getty Images

Step 4: Paint the baseboards.

Ultimately, it’s up to you whether to paint the walls or trim first, but once you have started on the baseboards it’s recommended to continue until you are done. Use the loaded-up paint brush to paint along the length of the baseboard either from left to right or from right to left, depending on your personal preference. Just make sure to stick to painting in one direction after you make your choice to achieve the best results. 

Apply one coat, then wait for it to dry before applying another coat, if necessary. Usually two coats of paint is more than enough for the baseboards, so after the paint has dried, you can remove the tape and the drop cloth to complete the project. 

Final Thoughts

Whether you are painting the entire room, updating the baseboards and trim, or just touching up areas around the room, it’s important to protect the floor. While you may be able to wipe up a few drips of paint from hardwood, spilling paint onto carpet creates a significant problem that is difficult to undo without professional cleaning or replacing the carpet entirely. 

With this in mind, when you are painting baseboards in a carpeted room, make sure to take the time to lay down protection and apply painter’s tape under the baseboards to create a secure barrier. Not only will this keep the carpet in good condition, it will also help speed up the painting process, since you can work faster when you don’t have to worry about accidentally painting the carpet.

The post This Is the Easiest Way to Paint Baseboards With Carpet  appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[This Is Why You Need a Belt Sander in Your Home Workshop]]>Discover several DIY projects you can tackle with a belt sander inside your home and out in the yard.

The post This Is Why You Need a Belt Sander in Your Home Workshop appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/diy/belt-sander-uses/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427492Thu, 13 Feb 2025 18:09:38 -0500DIYSkills & TechniquesToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

There are a wide range of sanders and each is designed for specific uses, such as a detail sander for fine furniture or a benchtop drum sander for sanding large pieces of wood or metal. Belt sanders are another great addition to a lineup of sanding tools, as they offer a variety of uses that make them essential for a woodworker’s or metalworker’s tool kit. 

Belt sanders are typically handheld power tools that can be either corded or battery-powered. These sanders are highly versatile, though they are commonly equipped with coarse-grit sanding belts that can remove substantial amounts of material in a hurry. Use this guide to learn about a range of belt sander uses and projects these tools can handle around the home. 

Our Recommendation: Makita 9903 3″ x 21″ Belt Sander at The Home Depot for $339 
This Makita belt sander features auto-tracking belt alignment to help keep the abrasive belt centered on the track even after several sanding passes, and a built-in dust collection bag that reduces the amount of airborne dust by about 65 percent.

Smooth wooden playground equipment.

Wooden swings, sandboxes, and see-saws can develop rough surfaces that make the playground equipment hazardous for your kids. Without proper maintenance, one wrong move could result in cuts, scrapes, or splinters, which is why it’s a good idea to use a belt sander for smoothing and sanding wood surfaces in order to improve the look and safety of the equipment. 

While you are working, if there are any uneven areas on the wooden playground equipment, you can take the opportunity to use the belt sander for leveling out these spots to reduce the areas where water may otherwise pool. After sanding smooth, seal the wood to prevent weathering.

A DIYer sanding a hardwood floor with a belt sander.
Photo: Steve Heap/Alloy via Getty Images

Prepare a hardwood floor for refinishing.

Refinishing a hardwood floor can reinvigorate the appearance and texture of the floor, giving the room an aesthetic upgrade without the expense of new flooring. Belt sanders are one of the best sanders for hardwood floors because they can be used to quickly and efficiently remove old floor finishes. 

After removing the old finish on the hardwood floor, you can also use a belt sander to prepare the exposed wood for a new finish. Just make sure to work slowly and carefully to avoid removing too much material from the existing hardwood. 

Restore a wood gate, fence, or deck.

When you are still learning how to use a belt sander, it’s a good idea to take on a project where there is room for mistakes, like restoring an old deck. Since decking tends to be made of thick pieces of wood, there’s wiggle room if you oversand a bit. You can usually go back and even out the surface with little issue. 

Deck boards become rough and cracked over time due to exposure to rain, UV radiation, snow, and ice. By using a belt sander to remove old paint or stain, sand away the top layer of material, and level out any uneven spots, you can expose the smooth layers of the wood below. Similarly, a belt sander can be used for the same purpose on a wooden gate or fence boards. Just be sure to sink all of the fasteners below the wood decking before beginning. 

Strip old paint, stain, or varnish.

Many types of sanders can be used to strip old paint, stain, or varnish from a wooden or metal surface, but belt sanders are a top choice due to their ability to quickly and efficiently remove thick layers of material with little effort. However, when you are using a belt sander to strip paint, stain, or varnish, you need to be careful to avoid removing too much material. 

Additionally, if you apply too much pressure to the sander, there is a risk of damaging wood, metal, or even plastic materials, making the job significantly more difficult, so make sure to work slowly and diligently if you plan to tackle this type of project. 

Pro tip: Always practice on a scrap surface in order to develop a level of comfort with a sander.

A DIYer using a belt sander to remove stain from an old desk.
Photo: Crispin la valiente/Moment via Getty Images

Sharpen knives and chisels.

A surprising use for belt sanders is sharpening knives, chisels, and other metal tools. However, it’s important to mention that this process takes some time and effort to learn properly, so you should practice with an old knife or chisel the first couple of times in case you make a mistake. 

You can switch between different grit belts to grind, sharpen, hone, and polish the tools to get the ideal result. If you feel it’s too difficult to start with a belt sander, you can also tackle this project with a fixed-base bench sander, allowing you to focus on the tools as you work. 

Shape metal contours.

Using a belt sander on metal may seem counterintuitive at first glance, but the power behind these essential tools allows metalworkers to smooth and shape complex contours into softer metals. You can get the desired shape for the metal by using the continuous movement of the sanding belt to follow the curve of the metal surfaces, while applying light pressure to shape the intended contours. 

However, if you want to create tight curves or cylindrical shapes, you would be better off using a specialized tube belt sander, which is typically designed to wrap the sanding belt around the contours of the metal. 

A DIYer using a belt sander to smooth a wood board.
Photo: ProfessionalStudioImages/E+ via Getty Images

Level uneven wood, metal, or plastic.

One of the most well-known uses for a belt sander is to level an uneven surface. These tools can be used on wood, metal, or even plastic to quickly and efficiently grind away material, allowing you to smooth and level surfaces. 

The best belt sanders can quickly switch out sanding belts so you can choose the correct grit depending on the amount of material that needs to be removed and the target material you are working with. Carefully move the belt sander across the material to gradually level uneven areas and achieve a flat, even plane.

The post This Is Why You Need a Belt Sander in Your Home Workshop appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[How to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers]]>Hedge trimmers are only as effective as their blades are sharp. Restore the original cutting power of the tool by taking the time to file down its cutting edges.

The post How to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-sharpen-hedge-trimmers/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=66331Thu, 13 Feb 2025 16:27:56 -0500DIYLandscapingLawn & GardenRepair & MaintenanceToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

If they’re properly sharpened, power hedge trimmers are a great time saver over manual trimmers for maintaining neat hedges and other landscaping. If your power trimmers are continually getting jammed and are chewing instead of slicing through branches, however, it’s probably time to sharpen the blades.

As is the case with lawn mower blades, knives, and other sharp implements, you can bring trimmers in for professional sharpening, but you can save money by handling this job yourself. Follow the simple steps below on how to sharpen hedge trimmers.

Why It’s Important to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers

Sharpening your hedge trimmers allows you to make quick work of that pruning job, plus it contributes to the health of your plants. “Letting your trimmers go dull is like trying to cut steak with a butter knife,” says Bryan Clayton, a longtime landscaper and CEO of GreenPal, a company that matches homeowners with landscaping services. He says with dull blades, “You’ll end up tearing your hedges rather than cutting them cleanly, which can lead to unhealthy plants prone to disease.”

RELATED: AUDIO: Bob Vila Explains How to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers

Best Power Hedge Trimmer

Black+Decker hedge trimmer
Photo: Lowe’s

Black+Decker 20V Max Cordless Hedge Trimmer, $64.98 at Lowe’s. This Black+Decker tool can cut through branches 3/4 inch in diameter. It has a padded front handle and enough battery power to trim up to 3,000 square feet. 

To discover other top-performing tools in this category, read our tested guide to the best hedge trimmers,

How often should you sharpen your hedge trimmers?

While you don’t need to sharpen your hedge trimmers often, you’ll need to give them a little TLC every now and then. “A good rule of thumb is to sharpen them at the start of the season, then check them every 50 hours of use,” Clayton says. It’s worth the time, he says, since “dull blades make your job harder.”

There are telltale signs that your hedge trimmer has dull blades:

  • Frequent jams: If branches and foliage are getting jammed in between the hedge trimmer’s teeth, it’s likely because the blades aren’t sharp enough to cut through the material.
  • Ragged cuts: Your hedge trimmer should cut cleanly through twigs and branches. If they’re chewing through them and leaving ragged cuts, then the blades are dull

Hedge trimmers and materials needed to sharpen blades.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Types of Hedge Trimmers

Power hedge trimmers come in several types, including gas, corded, and cordless electric models. Whether you own gas hedge trimmers, electric hedge trimmers, or battery-operated hedge trimmers, you’ll use the same process to sharpen the blades.

Tools & Materials

Bobvila.com may earn a commission from purchases made through these links.

Project Overview

Working Time: 1 hour
Total Time: 1 hour
Skill Level: Intermediate
Estimated Cost: $10 to $15

Before You Begin

Unplugging the battery from an orange hedge trimmer with work gloves on.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Sharpening a hedge trimmer involves working around blades and filing, which can send metal shavings airborne. Take the required safety precautions before getting started. “Wear gloves and eye protection,” says Clayton. “Always unplug electric trimmers before you start, and for both types, make sure the trimmer is securely clamped down or held in a vise.” If you are maintaining battery-powered hedge trimmers, remove the battery.

How to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers the Right Way

Step 1: Clean the trimmer blades.

Cleaning the trimmer blades on hedge trimmer with solvent.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Hedge trimmer blades often end up clogged with sap and pieces of branches and leaves. Start by removing any debris that’s caught in the trimmer’s teeth. Spray the blade with a little WD-40 to break down any sap that’s stuck to the blade. Give it a few minutes for the solvent to work its magic, then use a cloth to wipe the blades clean.

Step 2: Misalign the trimmer blades.

If the blades are aligned over top of each other, you’ll need to misalign them to expose all the edges so you can access each one with the file. Use a flathead screwdriver to reposition the blades so that each one is accessible.

Step 3: Sharpen with a flat file.

Sharpening hedge trimmer blades with flat file while wearing gloves.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Using your flat file, sharpen each blade individually.

  • File in the direction of the cutting edge only. Don’t use a back-and-forth sawing motion, since a flat file is designed to remove material in one direction only.
  • Filing using the correct angle is crucial to getting a sharp edge. Check your trimmer’s manual for the proper angle for the specific hedge trimmer.
  • File with care. Removing too much metal from the blades can weaken them, making the trimmer unusable.
  • Be consistent with the number of strokes you make on each blade to ensure they’re a consistent length when done. “Just focus on sharpening the top edge of each blade, maintaining the original angle, and whatever you do, don’t touch the flat bottom side,” Clayton says. “That’s your guide for keeping the cut accurate.” After sharpening one tooth, move onto the next until you’ve sharpened each one.

Step 4: Use a whetstone to remove burrs.

Removing burrs from hedge trimmers with whetstone.
Photo: Tom Fenenga for Bob Vila

Run a whetstone over the sharpened blades to remove any burrs that formed during sharpening. Remember, the blades cut by sliding against each other like a pair of scissors, so removing burrs that can interfere with this action is crucial.

Step 5: Spray with resin solvent.

Sharpening your hedge trimmers also removes any corrosion protection that was on the blades. Before you put the hedge trimmers back into service, you’ll need to restore that protection by applying a resin solvent to the blades. Spray the solvent onto the blades and wipe off any excess resin.

Final Thoughts

While learning how to sharpen hedge trimmer blades isn’t difficult, there is some risk to doing it yourself. Over-sharpening the blades can weaken them, making your hedge trimmer unusable. “Sharpening hedge trimmers isn’t rocket science, but it does require a steady hand and a bit of know-how,” Clayton says. “If in doubt, taking them to a professional isn’t just playing it safe; it’s ensuring your tools last longer and perform better.”

The post How to Sharpen Hedge Trimmers appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[Cleaning and Preventing Black Mold in the Bathroom]]>Wet areas with poor ventilation are prime breeding grounds for black mold. This guide explains how to clean black mold in the bathroom, and keep it from coming back.

The post Cleaning and Preventing Black Mold in the Bathroom appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/black-mold-in-bathroom/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=76845Thu, 13 Feb 2025 14:46:14 -0500InteriorBathroomsCleaning & OrganizingDIYWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

People spend about 90 percent of their time indoors, so keeping indoor air healthy is a must. 

Mold is a fungus that’s plentiful in the natural environment and, when conditions are right, indoors as well. The bathroom is damp, and often warm, so it can be a favorite spot for black mold to grow. 

According to Donald Weekes, a certified industrial hygienist in Ontario, Canada, and a member of the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) Indoor Environmental Quality Committee, “there is something in the neighborhood of 200,000 different types of mold.” Since it’s natural, alive, and goes airborne, mold can happen just about anywhere, Weekes says. Read ahead to learn what conditions support mold growth in your home, how black mold can make you sick, and what to do about black mold in a bathroom.

What is black mold?

Black mold around white tub and tile
Photo: iStock

The black mold species Stachybotrys chartarum is an aggressive and highly toxic mold variety that might be best removed by a professional. It’s among the world’s 10 most hazardous fungi. “Black mold, in particular, produces mycotoxins,” says Kenny Key, CEO and founder of Lead and Mold Detectives in New York. Those can lead to health problems, especially in the respiratory system.

It can be difficult to tell whether a fungus in your bathroom is black mold vs. mildew or another mold variety. But even as you consider the health effects and identification markers of black mold below, note that the experts we consulted agree that you should address any signs of mold, regardless of type. ”If you spot any mold in your bathroom—whether black or not—it’s important to take action immediately,” says Laura Linn Knight, author of The Toxic Mold Solution: A Comprehensive Guide to Healing Your Home and Body from Mold. Leaving any mold in place too long, especially without addressing moisture, can increase the chance the problem will progress to black mold.

Black Mold’s Impact on Health

Exposure to any mold over time can lead to health effects. The type and range depend on “the type of mold, the level of exposure, and the individual’s sensitivity,” says Knight. Potential health effects of mold exposure and black mold symptoms include:

  • Respiratory issues—black mold exposure can cause or worsen asthma. Other signs are wheezing, coughing, sneezing, shortness of breath, and sinus infections.
  • Allergic reactions, such as skin rashes, watery eyes, and even swollen eyes.
  • Headaches, such as migraines
  • Fatigue, dizziness, or vertigo
  • Brain fog and difficulty concentrating
  • Abdominal pain, nausea, bloating
  • Mental health effects such as anxiety or depression.

The mycotoxins in black mold “can cause chronic fatigue, nausea, vomiting, and neurological symptoms like dizziness, confusion, and sometimes memory loss,” says Key. Knight says that mycotoxins can interfere with brain function, “contributing to mood swings, memory problems, and increased stress levels.” If you don’t address mold exposure like black mold in the shower, you can have “chronic, long-term health issues, including chronic respiratory problems and neurological effects,” says Knight.

How to Identify Black Mold in the Bathroom

Person wearing yellow gloves pulls back sealant to find black mold in shower tiles.
Photo: mikulski/Depositphotos

Before knowing how to get rid of black mold in the bathroom, learn what conditions support mold growth. First, Weekes says to look for the three things mold needs to thrive: mold spores, a porous surface they can latch onto, and high humidity/moisture. Drifting through the air, mold spores eventually land on a moist surface amenable to mold, like cellulose, and “they’ll most likely land on that surface and grow,” says Weekes. 

To tell the appearance of black mold from other molds, look for a dark patch that forms in a circular pattern. “Black mold typically is darker in color, a black or greenish-black, and usually looks wet,” says Key. “Black mold also has a very distinct musty smell that can help in identification,” he says.

Still, black mold could lurk under bathroom floors or inside walls. The only sure way to identify black mold is to take a sample and test it—either by asking professionals to come in or by using a black mold test kit. Once you confirm the bathroom mold type and extent of the problem, you can learn how to remove black mold safely or seek professional help.

Before You Begin

Cleaning mold requires that you be near the spores. If you attempt to remove black mold, “you need to wear protective gear,” says Key. This includes gloves, goggles, an N95 respirator mask, and long sleeves. “Make sure you have proper ventilation in the area in which you’re working,” Key advises. Further, use similar caution when turning to various cleaning products; follow all instructions on the container and never mix chemicals, especially ammonia and bleach. 

Follow these protective measures to minimize exposure. If you notice any health effects from being near the black mold, it’s best to stop working and have a professional take over. Likewise, if you are uncertain about the type of mold or extent of the problem, notice significant water damage, or see that black mold covers more than 10 square feet of surface area, turn to a professional remediator instead.

How to Clean Black Mold From Bathroom Surfaces

SUPPLIES

N95 respirator mask
Rubber gloves or chemical-resistant gloves
Eye goggles
Distilled white vinegar
Detergent or antifungal cleaner
Hydrogen peroxide
Rags, sponges, or a scrub brush
BleachAmmonia

Without testing the mold, it can be difficult to know in advance what works best to kill black mold or another type. If uncertain and facing a small amount of stain, start with milder household products and move on to harsher ammonia if necessary. “Generally speaking, it’s the simplest product that works best,” says Weekes. When deciding how to eliminate mold in bathroom fixtures or walls, always consider the surface type, partly to avoid abrasive tools that might scratch the surface. In addition, porous surfaces can absorb all liquids, as well as the mold spores you can see.

How to clean hard surfaces, like ceramic tiles and bathroom countertops

Follow these directions for nonporous surfaces and fixtures include toilets, porcelain sinks, some shower or floor tiles, mirrors, and vinyl shower curtains. Unless they are sealed well, grouts and many types of caulk are porous. 

  1. Spray the area with your preferred safe cleaner, such as distilled white vinegar or a mixture of vinegar and household detergent. You could also use undiluted 3% hydrogen peroxide or a commercial antifungal cleaner (follow manufacturer’s directions.)
  2. Let the cleaner sit for several minutes, then spray again just before wiping.
  3. After wiping the cleaner on the surface, check your results.
  4. If mold remains, spray again and scrub with a brush or abrasive scrubber. Dry the area thoroughly and assess whether the cleanup was effective.
  5. If mold remains after cleaning, clean the area again with ammonia and water (10 percent ammonia to 90 percent water).
  6. If the problem persist, you may need to call in the experts.

The easiest way to clean a vinyl shower curtain is to remove it and soak it in a large tub or container filled with water and about a cup of white vinegar (or bleach if the curtain is colorfast) for about an hour. 

Only turn to bleach if necessary when cleaning black mold in bathrooms. Biocides like chlorine bleach kill living organisms such as mold, but the EPA does not recommend them for routine mold cleanup, even on nonporous surfaces. Weekes says the suggestion for years has been to use “water and about a 10 percent solution of ammonia.” You also can opt for a commercial product designed to kill mold, but check it carefully for safety precautions for surfaces and ventilation.

How to clean porous surfaces such as grout, ceiling tiles, and walls

Porous materials allow moisture—and mold—to penetrate their surfaces. In a bathroom, this might include wood, walls, wallpaper, carpet, unsealed grouts, caulk, and ceiling tiles. According to Weekes, mold will latch onto surfaces “made up of cellulose, like paper and wallboard.” He says the porous materials are “soft and chewy, which is why most problems are in walls and ceilings.” Even moisture-resistant wall materials like greenboard can take in mold if a shower surround or wall was not designed or installed properly or if excess moisture and mold have been allowed to sit on the walls.

Again, although you might see advice about using bleach to kill mold, apply that only to nonporous surfaces. “You don’t want to use bleach on a porous surface,” says Key. It could make the problem worse, since water in the bleach will penetrate the porous surface and add to moisture. Plus, Key says “black mold has a protective outer layer that bleach doesn’t penetrate effectively.” 

  1. Select your treatment option. As with hard surfaces, start with the simplest or mildest option. White vinegar can help kill mold since it penetrates porous surfaces, and its acid could help rid crevices of mold.You also can use a commercial mold cleaner designed for multiple surfaces—follow package directions. If you have a small patch of black mold, skip right to the 10 percent ammonia and water solution.
  2. Spray the product on the affected area and let it sit for a few minutes.
  3. To avoid soaking the porous surface, wipe the area with a cloth or sponge, since a brush could harm porous surfaces.
  4. To avoid soaking the porous surface, Wring out the cloth or sponge if you dip it in a solution or as it becomes damp from wiping. 
  5. Gently wipe the wall again with a wrung-out sponge or cloth dipped in clean water.
  6. To clean grout, dip a toothbrush in the cleaning solution and scrub the grout lightly before wiping with a cloth or sponge dipped in clean water and wrung out.
  7. Help the porous surface dry quickly by opening windows or directing fans toward the cleaned area.
  8. Let the wall dry for 24 hours if possible before checking results. 
  9. If mold persists, repeat steps above or call in a pro.

According to the EPA, mold in ceilings and carpet can be difficult to impossible to remove since it fills the empty spaces and crevices of the porous materials. It is generally better to replace moldy ceiling tiles, carpet, or any large section of wall affected by mold.

When to Hire a Professional for Bathroom Mold Remediation

Tackling small spots of mold and mildew are easy DIY tasks and important bathroom maintenance to prevent black mold. But it’s important to know when you should call in a mold remediation professional instead. Professionals have the equipment and expertise to return your home to a safe state. They also can make recommendations on how to prevent mold from coming back in the future. 

“Times to call in a pro are when it’s more than 10 square feet of mold, or if there is structural damage like mold growing on the walls, ceilings, or floors,” says Key. If mold is hidden behind walls, under carpet, or in your HVAC system, he explains, you need a professional remediation. 

“Call in a pro…when it’s more than 10 square feet of mold, or if there is structural damage like mold growing on the walls, ceilings, or floors.” 

— Kenny Key, CEO and founder of Lead and Mold Detectives

Your health and sensitivity also are factors, say Key and Knight. For example, those with asthma or allergies shouldn’t tackle black mold removal. “If you are sensitive to mold, I suggest hiring a professional to remove even a small amount of mold,” says Knight. Key adds: “If there is extensive water damage from flooding or minor damage in the bathroom from a leak,” you need a pro to treat that as well.

Key says to look for a licensed company in your state. All states have some type of certification for professional mold remediators. The AIHA maintains a list of industrial hygiene and environmental health and safety consultants. Mold inspection costs typically average around $656, but some companies will waive this fee if the customer hires them for remediation services. 

Black mold removal costs start at about $1,223 and average about $2,300. Homeowners insurance may cover mold remediation, depending on the circumstances.

How to Prevent Mold in Your Bathroom

Woman in an apron cleaning the bathroom.
Photo: brusinski via Getty Images

The best way to address black mold in your bathroom is to prevent mold from growing and to address any mold or signs of moisture damage immediately. “Prevention is a matter of maintenance more than anything else,” says Weekes. This includes making sure your home is sealed from outside moisture, that you’re not seeing condensation on windows, mold on windowsills, or water activity on surfaces, and that your home has adequate ventilation.

Clean your bathroom regularly.

Thoroughly clean the bathroom weekly; this consistent regimen should keep mold spores from taking hold and running amok. If you see signs of bathtub mold or other mold or mildew, rotate an antifungal cleaner into the routine at least once a month. Store a spray bottle of vinegar in the bathroom, then apply it and let it air-dry after every shower or bath. And don’t simply paint over mold on walls; take steps to clean the spores first.

Keep bathroom surfaces dry between uses.

To prevent black mold in the shower, use a squeegee to remove water droplets from the shower walls, then towel down glass doors and tile to remove the remaining moisture from those surfaces. It’s even helpful to dry the floor, dry off shampoo bottles, and hang damp towels elsewhere. Prevent black mold in a bathroom sink by wiping the basin out after each use. If you see signs of black mold in a bathtub or around it, be sure to drain it completely, wipe down wet edges if necessary, and check for signs of cracks in or black mold in bathroom caulk around the tub, shower, windows, or sink.

Take steps to eliminate moisture from leaks or a poorly sealed home.

“One of the main contributors to mold growth is excess moisture,” says Knight. “Fix any leaks in your bathroom plumbing or shower as soon as possible to prevent water from pooling or seeping into the walls,” she says. When the weather allows, open your bathroom window after a shower. Add moisture-loving plants like orchids or peace lilies to soak up some of the moisture and green up the space.

Running an exhaust fan for at least 30 minutes after fogging up the bathroom with showers or laundry if located there can help, but if you already have mold spores, use caution. “Most bathroom vents go directly up into the attic,” says Weekes. The attic probably has plenty of porous and cellulose surfaces for those spores to grow. If your exhaust fan vents to the outside, it can help. However, Weekes says, the best ventilation comes from your air conditioning system. 

Use mold- or moisture-resistant construction.

“When renovating or maintaining your bathroom, consider using mold-resistant products,” says Knight, who says that new products like mold-resistant paperless drywall, vapor barriers or retarders, are always coming on the market. Opt for nonporous surfaces when possible, and ensure that all caulks, grouts, and joints are properly sealed to prevent water from seeping through cracks. 

Final Thoughts

According to Weekes, cleaners and other efforts help control mold, but you can’t be completely free of this living organism. “Mold has survived for hundreds of thousands of years. Anything that you can throw at it will not be completely effective,” he says. Still, managing moisture, regularly cleaning spores from surfaces, and getting rid of any black mold with these steps or through professional remediation can help. If black mold returns or spreads after you try to kill it, turn to a licensed mold removal company to help eliminate existing mold damage and correct issues like moisture or poorly constructed shower walls that support its growth.

The post Cleaning and Preventing Black Mold in the Bathroom appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[In Just 2 Months, This Tool Has Transformed My Workshop]]>After years of workarounds, this was finally the right tool for the job.

The post In Just 2 Months, This Tool Has Transformed My Workshop appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/dewalt-planer-review/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=426556Thu, 13 Feb 2025 13:20:54 -0500ReviewsDIYToolsTools & MaterialsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

A couple of months ago I got the Dewalt 735 Planer to help expedite board prep for woodworking projects. I wanted the flexibility to use wood from a variety of sources, but flattening boards and matching thicknesses has never been my favorite part of a project. Sanded “project” lumber is prohibitively expensive and limited in scope. Hand planing is slow, and router planing requires a clunky jig. After years of workarounds, I finally splurged on the right tool for the job.

As a brand, DeWalt enjoys broad-based customer satisfaction across its array of power tool offerings, and I’ve had positive experiences with the DeWalt jobsite table saw and router I’ve been using the past few years. After initially testing it in combination with a Rikon 8-inch jointer, I’ve been using the 13-inch planer to clean up edge-glued panels, and for dimensioning a couple of log-to-lumber milling projects in my workshop. In this DeWalt planer review, I’ll share my observations after two months using the DeWalt DW735, including the pros and cons that I’ve experienced, and why I’m confident that I made the right choice.

Rating: 4.7/5

Best Benchtop Planer Option: DEWALT DW735 13-Inch Thickness Planer with Stand

DeWalt Planer DW735

DeWalt Planer DW735 Specs
Motor15-amp
CutterheadThree-knife, 10,000 RPM
Maximum width13 inches
Maximum thickness6 inches
Feed rateTwo-speed 196 CPI or 79 CPI

Testing the DeWalt Planer DW735 

DeWalt Planer action
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

Store-bought lumber is milled within a fairly wide error-tolerance range that can leave woodworking projects looking rough unless you take the time to match the pieces. The usual way to match boards is by using a jointer to remove cupping and warping, which creates one flat face, then planing the other face down to a set thickness. Alternatively, both of these functions can be completed using only a planer with the help of a shop-built planing sled—an effective option for boards that are too wide for the jointer. The planer smooths the surface, but more importantly, it evens out the board thickness while also making it possible to match thicknesses from one board to the next. I’ve tested this planer both ways.

Over the past couple of months I’ve used the DeWalt 735 Planer with and without the jointer as project circumstances have dictated. I used it while preparing boards for glue-ups, and for final surfacing after gluing. When I wanted to make lumber from an oak log, I used a sled with the planer to flatten the surfaces, then matched thicknesses of the rough-cut boards. I’ve logged about 12 hours on the planer so far, which has been enough time to know that this is exactly the tool I was looking for and that I’m glad I fought the urge to buy a cheaper model. The heavy build and powerful motor give it ample stability and steady cutting power. The thickness selector makes it easy to avoid over-planing while precisely matching boards, and the finished pieces come out with very little snipe or chip-out.

What We LikeWhat We Don’t Like
Automatic carriage lockLarger than other bench planers, very heavy
Fan-assisted dust port with impellerRequires dust collection add-ons
Material removal gauge for quick set up
Heavy-duty height adjustment system

Helpful Features Boost Productivity and Minimize Mistakes

DeWalt Planer action 3
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

This model has been around long enough to become “exhibit A” when woodworkers need a point of reference with regard to thickness planers. It accepts workpieces up to 13 inches wide and 6 inches thick, and is capable of removing up to ⅛ inch layers per pass. Powered by a 15 amp motor, the cutter rotates at 10,000 revolutions per minute (RPM), while the two-speed rollers feed at either 14 or 26 feet per minute. The three-knife cutterhead extends production time between blade replacements up to 30 percent compared to 2-knife models. The two-speed gearbox allows the operator to choose either faster planing at 79 cuts per inch (CPI) or a smoother finish at 196 CPI. 

A few key features set DW735 apart from other planers on the market. First off, it weighs a hefty 92 pounds, which is up to 40 pounds heavier than other popular models. The extra weight hints at better-than-average durability, and more importantly the weight boosts working stability. Another unique feature that I haven’t seen anywhere else is the fan-assisted dust port. Unlike other planers that require an external dust collection vacuum to pull the chips away, this machine is equipped with an impeller and fan that grinds up the shavings and blows them out—all the way across the shop, if not attached to a collection bag.

One of the handiest features is the material removal gauge. It helps when setting up the first pass on a face-jointed rough board. I can place the board beneath the spring-loaded gauge and crank the carriage down until the gauge needle indicates the amount of material I want to remove, then turn on the motor and plane as normal. The planer also has several automatic thickness settings that, when selected, will prevent accidentally making the board too thin.

Hard to Lift, Easy to Operate

DeWalt Planer chip chute
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

I had minimal experience with thickness planers before I got the DeWalt DW735. I had borrowed one a couple of times, but was not proficient. I spent the evening after it arrived setting it up and reading the owner’s manual to make sure I wouldn’t break anything or get injured. Turns out, the biggest risk was that I might throw my back out trying to move it. I recommend getting a helper any time you need to pick this machine up. For shop use, a dedicated planer stand would be a smart addition.

It only took about 15 minutes to set up the planer and assemble the infeed and outfeed tables. I actually purchased the DW735X kit, which is the same machine as the DW735 but includes the infeed/outfeed tables, dust port adapter, and an extra set of knives. The unit is pretty much plug-and-play, but opting for the tool-only unit will require just a bit more setup.  

After adjusting the carriage height for my plank, I flipped the switch and sent the piece through. I decided to test the planer outdoors since I don’t have a dust collection system, and I’m glad I did. When I ran the first test piece through I was amazed to see the wood shavings blown up to 20 feet away. The noise level was much louder than I anticipated, so I put on a set of over-ear hearing protectors and kept working. I experimented with different removal thicknesses, tried out the material removal gauge, the thickness selector, and the different feed speeds on a pile of pine and hardwood scrap. Everything worked as expected and there was basically zero learning curve. 

Plenty of Cutting Power, Silky Smooth Finish, Consistently Accurate

DeWalt Planer automatic thickness control
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

So far I have used the DeWalt Planer DW735 on store-bought poplar and yellow pine lumber, blanks split from an oak log, and various cutoffs and reclaimed boards. I mostly work with pieces that are less than 4 feet long. It has delivered excellent results on everything I have fed it. Neither the feed rate nor the cutting speed seems to be affected by the hardness of the wood. Hardwood, softwood, fresh and sappy or old and dried boards, the finished faces always come out clean and smooth. Thickness accuracy has been pretty much perfect too, although it does produce a bit of snipe. 

Snipe is a ubiquitous issue with benchtop planers. The snipe section averages about 15 thousandths of an inch, measured with a digital caliper, and runs about 3 inches back from the board end. Raising the infeed-outfeed tables a bit has helped, but the best solution I found was to either run longer boards and cut off the snipe, or send a sacrificial board through just ahead of the good board.

The DW735 has a maximum planing depth of ⅛ inch. I usually plane no more than 1/16 inch at a time, often as little as 1/32 inch. The owner’s manual cautions against planing the maximum depth on 13-inch wide boards due to the strain it would place on the motor. In order to provide a full review, I did test the maximum depth on 8-inch-wide lumber. On the nearly flat surface, the full-depth cut seemed (audibly) to strain the motor some, but it did not affect the feed rate or the appearance of the finished surface.

Why I Think the DeWalt DW735 Planer Is Worth Every Penny

DeWalt Planer height crank
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

I am a firm believer in “buy it once, use it forever,” and the DeWalt DW735 feels like that kind of tool. Based on 2 months of fairly intensive hobby-level use, it has done everything I’ve needed exceedingly well. The blades have remained sharp, the cutter and carriage structure is perfectly sturdy and still exactly square with the feed table. The adjustment mechanisms are dead-on reliable. Just as importantly, it comes from a highly-regarded, time-tested brand that also has an excellent track record for product support. When I eventually need replacement blades, I don’t have to worry whether or not I’ll be able to get them. I think that the price is fair for that level of performance and peace of mind. 

Buy the DeWalt 735 Planer on:

Product Comparisons

DeWalt Planer DW735Grizzly Planer G0940Hercules Portable PlanerCraftsman Benchtop PlanerOliver Machinery 10045 Planer
Motor15-amp15-amp15-amp15-amp15-amp
CutterheadThree-knife, 10,000 RPM30-insert helical, 8,500 RPMThree-knife, 9,700 RPMTwo-knife, 8,000 RPM36-insert helical, 10,000 RPM
Maximum width13 inches13 inches12.5 inches12.25 inches13 inches
Maximum thickness6 inches6 inches6 inches6 inches6 inches
Feed rateTwo-speed 14 FPM or 26 FPM25 FPM25.3 FPM26.2 FPMTwo-speed 17 FPM or 26 FPM
Price$599.00$870.00$399.99$349.00$999.99

So, is the DeWalt Planer DW735 right for you?

DeWalt Planer infeed
Photo: Mark Wolfe for Bob Vila

A power planer can be a big help in the wood shop. Flattening and choosing custom-thickness for rough-cut boards is far less expensive than buying sanded-four-sides (S4S) project lumber at a retail store. Your shop-planed boards will be more consistent than those at the store, and it gives the option to use wood from other sources, like local sawmills or your own logs. A planer also allows for flattening multiple-board panels after gluing them together.

Not every workshop needs a thickness planer. Other workarounds can suffice until buying one is necessary or fits into the budget. If it’s time to buy a benchtop planer, the DeWalt 735 is one of the best options available. The DW735 is not the cheapest or most expensive option, but it offers outstanding performance for the price, and is backed by a support network that offers replacement knives and other parts and accessories to keep it in top condition. You’ll get the best value from the DW735X kit, which includes the infeed/outfeed tables, or for the smoothest possible finish and extra-long cutter life, it is available with the Byrd Tools Shelix upgrade cutterhead pre-installed.

Meet the Tester

Mark Wolfe is a writer, product tester and serial DIYer who lives in an older home. When he isn’t writing, he spends his time upgrading, repairing, and replacing anything and everything in his home, yard, and garden. He tests and writes reviews about hand and power tools, lawn care and home repair products, and outdoor living goods.

The post In Just 2 Months, This Tool Has Transformed My Workshop appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[What Are the Tiny Black Bugs in My House Near the Window?]]>As seasons change, homeowners may find insects congregating on their window sills. Learn how to identify and rid your home of the unwanted invaders.

The post What Are the Tiny Black Bugs in My House Near the Window? appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/tiny-black-bugs-in-house-near-window/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=219359Thu, 13 Feb 2025 13:16:44 -0500InteriorDIYPest ControlPestsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Finding tiny black bugs in the house, especially near windows, can be an unsettling experience. These pests may be harmless nuisances like ants or carpet beetles, or they could signal a larger pest infestation that requires immediate attention.

Understanding what type of bugs have invaded your home, what attracts them, and how they’re getting inside is key to removing them quickly and preventing future problems. This guide covers common household bugs, effective removal methods, and prevention strategies to keep your home pest-free. If the infestation persists, a professional pest control service may be the best solution to eliminate the issue for good.

Identifying Tiny Black Bugs

For those who aren’t entomologists, distinguishing small black bugs in the house can be tricky. Many species look alike, but these key features help with identification:

  • Size: Tiny black bugs that look like specks of dirt look much different from bugs over a millimeter long.
  • Color: Some insects that seem black from a distance actually appear dark red, brown, or gray up close.
  • Patterns & texture: Unique markings or body textures can set certain bugs apart.
  • Body structure: Ants have three body segments, while ticks only have two.
  • Legs: Insects have six legs, while arachnids (like spiders and ticks) have eight.
  • Wings: Whether or not the bugs have wings can help narrow down the type.

By noting these characteristics, you can more easily determine which tiny pest has invaded your home.

Types of Small Black Bugs

1. Ants

Carpenter ant on a pebbled wall background.
Carpenter ant. Photo: recepoz / Depositphotos

Ants are one of the most common household pests, often entering homes through tiny cracks in search of food and water. Different types of ants may be found near windows:

  • Carpenter ants: These large black ants tunnel through wood, potentially causing structural damage.
  • Little black ants: These tiny ants form large colonies and often invade kitchens and bathrooms.
  • Fire ants: Recognizable by their reddish color, fire ants are aggressive and can sting, causing painful welts.

To manage an infestation, it’s important to seal entry points, clean surfaces to remove scent trails, and use bait traps to eliminate colonies.

2. Flies

A black fly sitting on a white interior blind.
Housefly. Photo: Catherine Falls Commercial / Getty Images

Flies are common pests found near windows, often attracted to food, moisture, or organic matter. The most common types include:

  • Houseflies: These dark gray flies are about ¼ inch long and hover near garbage, dirty dishes, or decaying food.
  • Phorid flies: Smaller than houseflies, phorid flies have a distinct humped back and prefer damp environments like leaky windows or drains.
  • Drain flies: Also known as moth flies, these fuzzy-winged insects breed in slow or clogged drains and are common in bathrooms and kitchens.

Preventing fly infestations involves maintaining cleanliness, sealing food properly, and repairing any moisture issues around windows.

3. Mites

A closeup of a clover mite on a black surface.
Clover mite. Photo: Wirestock / Depositphotos

Mites are tiny, often microscopic pests that thrive in household environments. Two common types include:

  • Clover mites: Often mistaken for black specks, reddish clover mites leave a red stain when crushed. They are attracted to moisture and can invade homes in large numbers.
  • Carpet mites (dust mites): Too small to see with the naked eye, these mites live in textiles and feed on dust and skin cells. Their presence is often linked to allergies and respiratory issues.

Reducing mite populations involves regular vacuuming, controlling humidity, and replacing air filters.

4. Gnats

Closeup of a fungus gnat on a white background.
Fungus gnat. Photo: HenrikL / Depositphotos

Gnats are small, winged insects that thrive in warm, humid environments. They can become a nuisance, especially when they swarm in large numbers. Some common types include:

  • Fungus gnats: Attracted to damp soil, fungus gnats infest potted plants and overwatered areas.
  • Fruit flies: These tiny flying insects are drawn to overripe fruit and sugary spills.
  • Biting midges (no-see-ums): Unlike other gnats, these tiny insects bite and feed on blood, leaving itchy welts.

To control gnats, keep the home dry, avoid overwatering plants, and use traps like vinegar or sticky tape.

5. Carpet Beetles

Macro photo of a varied carpet beetle on a white background.
Carpet beetle. Photo: Dario Lo Presti / Depositphotos

Carpet beetles are small, oval-shaped insects that can damage household fabrics. They lay eggs on materials like wool, silk, leather, and pet hair. While adult beetles feed on pollen, their larvae consume natural fibers, leading to holes in clothing and upholstery. Signs of an infestation include shed skins, fecal pellets, and damage to textiles. 

Using diatomaceous earth, essential oils, or professional pest control can help eliminate carpet beetles.

6. Booklice

A clump of reddish brown booklice.
Photo: Sweemingyoung / Deposiitphotos

Booklice are tiny, brownish insects that thrive in warm, damp areas. Despite their name, they are not related to lice but instead feed on mold, decaying paper, and organic matter. They are commonly found on window sills, bookshelves, and near indoor plants. 

To eliminate booklice, reduce indoor humidity, improve ventilation, and clean affected surfaces with bleach.

How to Prevent Tiny Black Bugs From Coming into Your Home

Preventing tiny black bugs starts with keeping windows clean and sealing potential entry points. Regular maintenance makes it easier to spot gaps or cracks that insects use to get inside. Here are key steps to keep pests away:

  • Seal gaps and cracks: Use caulk to fill holes around windows and repair any tears in window screens.
  • Apply perimeter treatments: Spray insect repellent around the foundation, doors, baseboards, and any cracks where bugs might enter.
  • Store food properly: Keep pantry items in airtight containers to eliminate food sources for pests.
  • Reduce moisture: Fix leaks, use dehumidifiers, and ensure proper ventilation to discourage bugs that thrive in humid environments.
  • Upgrade insulation: Install or replace weatherstripping around windows and doors to block entry points.

If tiny black bugs keep appearing despite these precautions, replacing old windows with better-insulated ones may help prevent infestations in the long run.

Tiny black bugs in your house?
Talk to a pro to help identify and eradicate them.
+

When to Call a Professional

If tiny black bugs continue to be a problem despite preventive measures, a pest control professional can provide a more effective solution. They can identify the source of the infestation, locate entry points, and seal problem areas to prevent future issues. Professionals can also inspect for more serious pests, such as termites, that may have gone unnoticed.

Pest control experts have specialized equipment and treatments designed to handle large-scale infestations. While DIY methods may seem cost-effective, repeated failed attempts can add up, often making professional services the more affordable option in the long run. 

The post What Are the Tiny Black Bugs in My House Near the Window? appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[How to String a Weed Eater the Right Way]]>Replacing the line on your string trimmer doesn’t have to test your patience.

The post How to String a Weed Eater the Right Way appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/diy/how-to-string-a-weed-eater-the-right-way/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427101Wed, 12 Feb 2025 17:21:34 -0500DIYSkills & TechniquesToolsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

Next to the lawn mower, a weed eater is perhaps the most essential tool for managing a lawn, allowing you to trim grass that’s up against your house, along fencing, and in other places the blade of your lawn mower can’t reach. A handy tool, but its trimmer line doesn’t last forever. You’ll need to replace the trimmer line from time to time to keep your weed eater doing its job. 

While threading a weed eater with fresh line doesn’t take long, it can be an exercise in frustration if you’ve never done it before. Ahead, we take you step by step through the process of changing out the trimmer line while sharing a few tricks of the trade from a few lawn care pros to help make learning how to restring a weed eater easier. 

Safety Precautions

String trimmer line replacement is a job you should only do with the string trimmer completely powered down. That means cutting off the engine if it’s a gas string trimmer, removing the battery if it’s a cordless electric string trimmer, or pulling the plug if it’s a corded string trimmer. 

Tools & Materials

Bobvila.com may earn a commission from purchases made through these links.

How to Restring a String Trimmer

Changing weed eater string requires very few tools and doesn’t take long if you follow the steps below. 

Step 1: Purchase the right line.

Make sure you’re using trimmer line that’s the same thickness as the line you’re replacing or a line thickness that’s compatible with your string trimmer. String trimmer line comes in different thicknesses ranging from light-duty 0.065 inch line up to heavy-duty 0.11 inch line. If you’re not sure what sizes are compatible with your weed eater, check the tool’s manual. 

Pro Tip: Michael Clarke, founder of home and garden site Yardwork, advises selecting a line gauge that suits the job. “For thicker weeds, consider using a heavier gauge line or a twisted line, which are more durable and can handle tougher conditions without wearing out as quickly,” he says. 

Step 2: Remove the cap.

A man hold a weed eater machine upside down to remove the top.
Photo: Milan Marknvic via Getty Images.

Position the string trimmer on the ground upside down so that the trimmer head is facing upwards, giving you access to the cutting head. Remove the cap that covers the cutting head by pinching the cap on its two tabs or by unscrewing it. Just under the cap you’ll find a spool that holds the trimmer line. Remove the spool and discard any leftover line.

Pro Tip: Jeremy Yamaguchi, owner of Lawn Love, suggests using the old line as a guide. “A mistake a lot of people make is taking out the spool and then taking out the last bit of string without looking at it, and then when they go to attach the new string, they realize they aren’t exactly sure where things go,” Yamaguchi says. “If you just take a few moments to assess how/where the old string is attached—or better yet, take a picture on your phone—that will make installing the new string way easier.”

Step 3: Measure the line. 

The best way to measure the amount of fresh line you need for your string trimmer is to use your arm span, says Mark Clement, home and garden tool reviewer and licensed contractor with MyFixitUpLife. Clement suggests making three pulls of string, extending your arm to its full length with each pull. While the amount you pull will vary depending on your arm length, this method should give you about what you need to fill the spool. 

Step 4. Replace the line. 

A close up of the spool on a weed eater.
Photo: Thomas Winz via Getty Images

Locate the small hole that’s on the spool and insert the trim line into the hole. If your string trimmer has two cutting lines, there will be two channels on the spool (one for each line) and two holes, one for each line. 

Look for an arrow that indicates the direction you should wrap the line and begin wrapping the line around the spool. Be mindful when wrapping the line, Clarke says. “When winding the trimmer line in the spool, keep it tight but not too tight, since a loose line can cause it to get caught or stuck when in use and a tight line can force the line to stick together,” he says. Clarke also warns against overfilling the line, which can cause it to jam. 

After wrapping the line, you’ll need to hold it in place while you reload the spool. “Without letting the sprung line spring out of the channel it’s in, feed each one through the corresponding eyelet of the spool housing, then push the spool back into the housing and twist/lock it into place,” Clement says. 

Note: If you find the process of re-wrapping trimmer line to be more of a hassle than you’re willing to deal with, you can skip the wrapping process by buying replacement spools of trimmer line. These spools are already wrapped with a trimmer line. Rather than re-wrapping the line you simply replace the entire spool. You’ll spend a little more for this convenience, but these pre-loaded spools make the process quicker. If you go this route, be sure to purchase replacement string heads that are compatible with the make and model of your string trimmer. 

Step 5: Install the spool.

The next step is installing the spool, and the method depends on the type of trimmer you own. 

Standard String Trimmer

Place the spool back into the string trimmer, making sure to thread the line into the hole or holes in the spindle as you do. Some string trimmers have grooves that you can drop the line into as you’re installing it. Once the spindle is in place and the lines are extending through the holes, pop the spindle cap back into place. 

Speed Feed String Trimmer

If you have a weed eater with a speed feed head, you don’t need to remove the cutting head. Align the hashmarks on the head, then thread the line into one of the eyelets on the head and push it through and out the other eyelet. 

Pro Tip: Given that line comes wrapped in a coil and you need to push it through a straight channel, threading it through both eyelets can be a challenge. To make the process easier, Clement suggests straightening some of the line first. “Flex the curve out of the first foot of line by straightening it,” he says. 

Clement adds that the hashmark guides typically wear away after a few months of use. If that’s the case with your speed feed trimmers, you’ll need to rotate the spindle by pressing down on the head repeatedly until you can look through one eyelet and see out the eyelet on the other side. 

Once the line is through, make sure there is an even amount of line on each side of the head, then turn the base of the head to wind the string into the trimmer. 

A person using a string trimmer on the lawn.
Photo: AdShooter/E+ via Getty Images

Step 6: Set the line length.

Set the line length by pressing the head of the string trimmer, then use your fingers to pull out the line. You should be able to pull out a few inches of line with each press. If the line doesn’t come out, then you’ve made a mistake loading it, and you’ll need to start over. Repeat the process until the line is to the desired length. Don’t pull the line out far enough that it can come into contact with the shield that is around the head. 

Final Thoughts

Having to pause to replace string trimmer line in your weed eater should only cause a minor delay in your summertime yard work ritual. But if you don’t know how to install trimmer line, what could be a quick and easy job can quickly spiral into a time-wasting struggle. By following the above instructions and tips, you can make quick work of this job and get back to beautifying your lawn. 

FAQ About Stringing a Weed Eater

If you have lingering concerns about how to string a weed eater, here are some helpful answers to popular questions.

Q. Should I soak my trimmer line in water?

A. While it isn’t an absolute necessity, it’s not a bad idea to soak your trimmer line in water for about a day before loading into your trimmer. Trimmer line is made from nylon, which absorbs moisture. Soaking weed eater string in water makes it more malleable and less likely to break, so it will last longer. 

Q. Should I use a thick or thin weed eater string?

A. First, make sure you choose a weed eater string that is compatible with your string trimmer. Check the manual if you’re not sure. If you’re trimming grass and light weeds, a thinner string will give you a precise, clean cut. If you’re taking down thicker vegetation, choose a thicker string line that’s compatible with your trimmer. 

Q. How much string should be out on a trimmer?

A. Extend the line between 4 and 6 inches from the cutting head. This allows for enough length to cut weeds and grass without being so long that the line comes into contact with the shield. 

Q. How do I know if I need to replace the string in a weed eater?

A. There are several signs that it’s time to change the string line in your weed eater. The most obvious is your weed eater is no longer trimming vegetation because there is no string extending from the head. It may also be time to change the string if the line repeatedly becomes tangled in weeds or grass or if it breaks easily, indicating it has become dry and brittle. 

The post How to String a Weed Eater the Right Way appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
en-US
<![CDATA[How to Remove Paint From Brick]]>Tastes change and fashions change, so the fireplace you painted 10 years ago may look dated now. A determined DIYer can strip paint from brick with the right paint stripper, and ample patience.

The post How to Remove Paint From Brick appeared first on Bob Vila.

]]>
https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-remove-paint-from-brick/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=59228Wed, 12 Feb 2025 16:09:00 -0500DIYCleaning & OrganizingPainting & FinishingWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

If you’ve ever tried to remove paint from brick, you know that it can be a painstaking process. Depending on the scope of the job, it might take you several hours or several days to complete the work. Because of the time and effort involved, many homeowners are unable or unwilling to commit their schedules to the project and choose instead to hire professionals, or not to undertake the project at all.

If you’re dealing with only a modest expanse of brick, or if you relish a challenge, there’s good news: Paint-stripping products have improved over the years, making the work friendlier to your health and to the brick itself. These new, safer formulations are the way to go. Many pros and DIYers recommend Citri-Strip. SmartStrip has its devotees, too. None are cheap, but all are comparably effective.

Find trusted local pros for any home project
+

You may be tempted to try a short cut, possibly sandblasting or powerwashing the paint. This may do more harm than good, and leave the building material in a vulnerable condition. Many caustic, chemical-based paint-removal solutions compromise brick in a similar way. If you remove paint from brick using any of these potentially damaging methods, you may end up with a problem that’s much more serious than paint.

Tried-and-True Advice

“Before you start, I’d give serious thought to answering, ‘Just because I can do this project, should I do this project?’ The likelihood you can get all the paint off is near zero. The approaches to stripping paint from brick, heat or chemicals, re-liquefy the paint, turning it into a sloppy slurry that is hard to manage.

First, you could try a heat gun brick-by-brick. Start on low and heat up the paint. It’ll bubble on the surface of the brick like cheese melting, and that’s your signal to scrape the paint from the brick. I’d use a 1-inch Hyde putty knife for this. As you go, adjust the heat gun to match your site conditions. For example, there may be multiple coats of paint that require more heat. That said, if there is lead paint, heat is a no-go because re-liquefying that paint can cause noxious fumes. Also, brick can fracture if it gets too hot.

Second, you can try chemicals. The chemicals also heat up the paint and render it a slop. Plus there is the additional gel of the actual chemical to deal with. It’s literally a hot mess.”

—Mark Clement, Contributing Writer

If you’re dealing with old brick, it’s critical to not to clean the brick in a way that does lasting harm. Today, the best solutions are gel or paste compounds, followed by fabric-based peeling strips. The paint stripper triggers a chemical reaction that causes the paint to soften and adhere to the fabric. In the final step, the fabric strips are peeled away, taking the paint with them in the process and exposing the natural brick. Know what you’re getting into, though. The right paint stripper can do much of the work for you, but most situations call for a great deal of further scrubbing and/or scraping by hand.

Tools & Materials

Bobvila.com may earn a commission from purchases made through these links.

How to Remove Paint From Brick

Step 1: Test the paint stripper.

Before applying a stripping agent to painted brick, test the stripper on an inconspicuous part of the installation. You may find that the stripper you’ve chosen does not work as well as expected, or you may discover the brick was painted to conceal its poor condition. Another good reason to start with a test: Doing so gives you a sense of how much effort the job is going to take. You may still opt to hire a pro, or you may decide you can put up with the paint.

Step 2: Protect yourself and your work area.

Stripping paint from brick is a messy job. Minimize cleanup by setting up your work area in a thoughtful way. First, lay down a series of drop cloths or some thick plastic sheeting to catch the peeling and flaking paint that will fall away from the brick. Don’t forget to tape the drop cloth or plastic to the bottom edge of the brick. If you don’t want to disturb the finish of nearby painted areas—the adjacent wood trim, perhaps—take the time to cover it up completely with painter’s tape.

Don the protective gear recommended by the manufacturer of the paint stripper you’ve chosen.

Step 3: Apply the paint stripper.

Before applying the gel or paste, start out by scraping away any paint that’s already loose. Next, using a trowel or a specialized tool provided by the paint stripper manufacturer, apply the compound to the brick. Be thorough, making sure to push the gel or paste into all the little crevices in the brick and mortar. Layer by layer, build the stripper up to the thickness recommended by the manufacturer.

Step 4: Position the peeling strips.

With the compound in place, start positioning the peeling strips. Typically made of fabric, these strips should be pressed and held against the stripper until firmly attached. Overlap the strips so that no brick remains visible. Once the strips have been applied, let them set for the period of time stipulated by the manufacturer. In many cases, particularly when multiple paint layers are involved, it takes a full 24 hours for the compound to cure and really work its magic.

Step 5: Remove the strips.

Once sufficient time has passed, return to the work area and begin lifting off the strips. If necessary, use the trowel to gain purchase behind any sluggish strips. Peel the strips in a slow and deliberate fashion; don’t rip them. As you peel, the paint beneath should come off too. Wherever the strips leave behind either compound or paint, use the trowel to flake off as much residue as possible. If the trowel doesn’t cut it, scrub with a stiff-bristled brush and rinse with water. If it wasn’t already clear, now it is: Removing paint from brick is a labor-intensive, if not grueling, project.

    Dispose of the used strips according to the manufacturer’s instructions. For some products, the chemical reaction stops on its own, while for others it stops only after the addition of a neutralizing chemical. Also important: Do not attempt to remove paint from brick if, within a month or so, there’s any chance that the temperature is going to fall below freezing. If the brick doesn’t dry completely before the frost, it will be especially likely to succumb to damage.

    The post How to Remove Paint From Brick appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US
    <![CDATA[This Major Power Tool Brand Wants to Help You Clean Your Pool]]>Ryobi’s newest tool can be submerged in water up to 13 feet.

    The post This Major Power Tool Brand Wants to Help You Clean Your Pool appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/exterior/ryobi-pool-vac-news/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427102Wed, 12 Feb 2025 13:05:58 -0500ExteriorCleaning SuppliesDIYLawn, Garden & PoolPool MaintenancePools & Water FeaturesReviewsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Although best known for its DIYer-friendly electric power tools, Ryobi actually makes a pretty diverse portfolio of products. Over the years, the brand ventured into the world of vacuums with its cordless stick, handheld, and wet/dry vac (which we tested and consider one of the better compact wet/dry vacs). Now, this March 2025, Ryobi will expand its cleaning line even more to include its new and improved handheld pool vacuum. 

    Powered by the brand’s flagship 18V One+ battery system, the handheld pool vacuum boasts a hose-free design, which means no more fighting with bulky and tangled hoses. The vacuum, instead, suctions everything into the removable debris tank. If you’re like me and have experienced frustration over tangled hoses while cleaning a pool, that’s quite a helpful upgrade! For greater reach, the handheld vacuum can also be used with a standard pool pole. The vacuum has an IPX8 rating and is submersible up to 13 feet. With a suction power of 13 gallons per minute and a wide inlet, this powerful handheld vacuum will make quick work of dirt and debris, including leaves. The large 1.7-liter tank will also allow pool owners to clean more before having to empty the tank. 

    • Person using Ryobi pool vac with pole to clean pool
    • Ryobi pool vac cleaning pool stairs
    • Person emptying Ryobi pool vac debris bin
    • Ryobi pool vac cleaning pool floor

    The Ryobi 18V One+ pool vacuum will be available for $149 (tool only) or $179 (as a kit with 18V lithium battery) exclusively at The Home Depot

    Ryobi wading into the waters of pool and hot tub cleaning is a pleasant surprise. Although, honestly, I’m not too shocked by the launch after having seen Ryobi launch everything from power scrubbers to coolers in recent years. It’s clear that Ryobi is on a mission to make its impressive rechargeable batteries even more versatile and useful for the average homeowner by adding these outdoor, cleaning, and even recreational gadgets to the collection.  The flagship One+ line includes more than 300 handy products that can run on 18V One+ batteries! So if you don’t already have a collection, maybe this is your sign to start one.

    The post This Major Power Tool Brand Wants to Help You Clean Your Pool appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US
    <![CDATA[Improve the Look and Health of Your Grass With One of These Effective Organic Lawn Fertilizers]]>Feed grass the good stuff and achieve a deep green lawn that resists droughts, diseases, and pests.

    The post Improve the Look and Health of Your Grass With One of These Effective Organic Lawn Fertilizers appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-organic-lawn-fertilizer/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=159816Wed, 12 Feb 2025 12:37:42 -0500ReviewsLawn & GardenLawn CareLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Along with mowing and watering, applying organic lawn fertilizers is an important part of creating a lush, healthy lawn. But while keeping your grass the right height and ensuring it gets enough to drink are relatively simple, choosing the proper natural lawn fertilizer is much more complicated. Factors like soil acidity, grass type, and time of year necessitate being somewhat selective about the lawn care products you choose.

    To aid you in your efforts, we reached out to a lawn care expert for advice and researched dozens of good fertilizers before choosing the versatile and nonburning The Andersons Innova 7-1-2 Organic Fertilizer as our top pick. Still, depending on the season or specific species of grass you have, another pick might be more appropriate. Read on for our reviews of some of the best organic lawn fertilizers and helpful tips for selecting the right one.

    1. BEST OVERALL: The Andersons Innova 7-1-2 Organic Fertilizer 
      Jump to Review
    2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food
      Jump to Review 
    3. BEST FOR P & K DEFICIENCY: Scotts Natural Lawn Food
      Jump to Review 
    4. BEST FOR N DEFICIENCY: Urban Farm Fertilizers 13-1-2 Liquid Lawn Fertilizer
      Jump to Review 
    5. BEST WITH NO PHOSPHORUS: Espoma Organic Lawn Food Spring Lawn Booster
      Jump to Review
    6. BEST FOR DARK-GREEN LAWN: Milorganite 6-4-0 Slow-Release Nitrogen Fertilizer
      Jump to Review 
    7. BEST FOR FALL: Espoma Organic Lawn Food Fall Winterizer
      Jump to Review 
    8. BEST ORGANIC LIQUID: GS Plant Foods Organic Liquid Kelp Seaweed Fertilizer
      Jump to Review 
    The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizers Options
    Photo: Amazon Photo: amazon.com

    Before You Buy Organic Lawn Fertilizer

    Choosing the best organic grass fertilizer requires an understanding of the lawn’s current condition. Is it generally healthy and simply needs regular feeding? Or does it display a nutrient deficiency of some kind? The type of grass will also determine which fertilizer to use. For example, fertilizers for St. Augustine grass will deliver different levels of nutrients than those for Bermuda grass. 

    Before buying and applying fertilizer, it’s smart to perform a soil test to identify your soil’s pH and nutrient content. These results will help you determine which organic natural fertilizer to apply as part of your personal DIY lawn-care program

    Organic Lawn Fertilizers Comparison Chart

    Product NameNPK RatioQuantityCoverage
    The Andersons Innova 7-1-2 Organic Fertilizer 7-1-240 pounds5,600 square feet
    Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food10-0-117 or 51 pounds5,000 or 15,000 square feet
    Scotts Natural Lawn Food11-2-229.1 pounds4,000 square feet
    Urban Farm Fertilizers 13-1-2 Liquid Lawn Fertilizer 13-1-21 gallon (makes 256 gallons)Up to 60,000 square feet
    Espoma Organic Lawn Food Spring Lawn Booster8-0-030 pounds5,000 square feet
    Milorganite 6-4-0 Slow-Release Nitrogen Fertilizer6-4-036 pounds2,500 square feet 
    Espoma Organic Lawn Food Fall Winterizer8-0-530 pounds5,000 square feet
    GS Plant Foods Organic Liquid Kelp Seaweed Fertilizer0.3-0-0.61, 5, 55, or 275 gallon(s)1,000 square feet per gallon

    Our Top Picks

    Each organic lawn treatment on our list of top picks is made from quality ingredients and provides essential nutrients for growing new grass or helping an existing lawn thrive. 

    Best Overall

    The Andersons Innova 7-1-2 Organic Fertilizer

     The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option: The Andersons 7-1-2 Innova Organic Fertilizer
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • Minimal dust granules
    • Suitable for many types of grass
    • Formula won’t cause fertilizer burn

    What We Don’t Like

    • Only comes in 40-pound bags

    Specs 

    • NPK ratio: 7-1-2
    • Quantity: 40 pounds
    • Coverage: 5,600 square feet

    The Andersons Innova organic fertilizer is a slow-release formula that earned our top spot for its versatile 7-1-2 NPK ratio and amino acids that provide extended feeding without burning. It supplies a high percentage of highly digestible carbon to support beneficial soil microbes for a healthier growing environment. The OMRI (Organic Materials Review Institute)-listed fertilizer contains no biosolids, manure, composted waste products, or animal parts, making it an especially eco-friendly option. We also appreciate how little dust is produced during application, minimizing respiratory irritation that causes coughing and sneezing. 

    But more than our own comfort, we love this formula for what it does for our lawn. Even with accidental overapplication, it doesn’t cause turf burn and is safe to use adjacent to sensitive waterways and around kids and pets. Though this is an excellent all-around fertilizer for lawn grass, it only comes in 40-pound bags that cover up to 5,600 square feet each, which might be excessive for some.

    Get The Andersons organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon

    Best Bang for the Buck

    Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food

     The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option Jonathan Green Organic Lawn Food
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • Child- and pet-friendly lawn fertilizer
    • Grass treatments last up to 10 weeks
    • Plant- and animal-derived ingredients for added versatility

    What We Don’t Like

    • Not suitable for lawns requiring potassium

    Specs 

    • NPK ratio: 10-0-1 
    • Quantity: 17 or 51 pounds
    • Coverage: 5,000 or 15,000 square feet

    Jonathan Green’s organic lawn care fertilizer food is a granular fertilizer made with a complex of plant and animal proteins, including feather meal, soybean meal, molasses, and wheat middlings. The 10-0-1 NPK slow-release formula delivers a boost of nitrogen plus iron to grow dark green grass for up to 10 weeks. 

    One of the things we like best about this budget-friendly pick is its safety profile. Unlike synthetic fertilizers, this product poses no risk of burning the grass, even if overapplied. Kids and pets can play on it immediately, and it can be used for both cold- and warm-season grasses and applied during spring, summer, or fall. The Jonathan Green fertilizer comes in two sizes: a 17-pound bag for up to 5,000 square feet of coverage and a 51-pound bag that feeds up to 15,000 square feet of lawn.

    Get the Jonathan Green organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon, Walmart, or Johnathan Green

    Best for P & K Deficiency

    Scotts Natural Lawn Food

     The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option: Scotts Natural Lawn Food
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • Gentle enough for freshly seeded or sodded grass
    • OMRI-listed and comes from natural sources
    • Lawn is safe immediately after application

    What We Don’t Like

    • Relatively limited coverage area

    Specs 

    • NPK ratio: 11-2-2
    • Quantity: 29.1 pounds
    • Coverage: 4,000 square feet

    New and struggling lawns sometimes require a bit more phosphorus and potassium to boost root development and ensure drought tolerance, and with its 11-2-2 NPK content, the Scotts natural lawn food offers both. Made from natural sources like bone meal, blood meal, and meat meal, the formula is excellent for maintaining lawns across seasons and is suitable for all grass types, including zoysia grass

    The manufacturer recommends feeding up to four times through the growing season at 6- to 8-week intervals, and you should start seeing results within those first few weeks. Since the 29.1-pound bag only covers 4,000 square feet, you’ll probably need a few packages to make it through the year.

    Get the Scotts organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon, The Home Depot, or Scotts.

    Best for N Deficiency

    Urban Farm Fertilizers 13-1-2 Liquid Lawn Fertilizer

     The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option: Urban Farm Fertilizers Liquid Lawn Fertilizer
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • Concentrated formula covers up to 60,000 square feet
    • Iron helps produce deep green grass
    • Includes animal- and plant-based ingredients

    What We Don’t Like

    • Recommended application frequency is 2 to 3 times per month

    Specs 

    • NPK ratio: 13-1-2 
    • Quantity: 1 gallon (makes 256 gallons)
    • Coverage: Up to 60,000 square feet

    This super-concentrated liquid lawn fertilizer from Urban Farm Fertilizers boasts 13 percent nitrogen plus iron to help the grass grow and turn deep green at the beginning of spring. This innovative option goes beyond traditional picks by incorporating a blend of hydroponic-grade nutrients, mycorrhizae, humic acid, bacteria, enzymes, and minerals. Its 13-1- NPK content promotes rapid greening and growth for nutrient-deficient lawns. 

    The ingredients in this combination organic fertilizer come from bat guano, sea kelp, worm casings, and more, creating a concentrated formula that makes up 256 gallons of fertilizer to feed up to 60,000 square feet. However, the manufacturer does recommend you apply it two to three times each month, so you may end up needing more than one bottle to make it through the season. For best results, apply in the evening using a boom sprayer or hose. Dilution instructions for each option are on the back of the bottle.

    Get the Urban Farm Fertilizers organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon, Walmart, or The Urban Farm

    Best with No Phosphorus

    Espoma Organic Lawn Food Spring Lawn Booster

     The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option: Espoma EOLB30 Organic Lawn Booster Fertilizer
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • Includes calcium and sulfur for improved grass health
    • Promotes disease resistance
    • Made from feather meal, pasteurized poultry manure, and gypsum

    What We Don’t Like

    • Not suitable for lawns requiring potassium or phosphorus

    Specs 

    • NPK ratio: 8-0-0
    • Quantity: 30 pounds
    • Coverage: 5,000 square feet

    This lawn fertilizer for spring uses a moderate dose of slow-release nitrogen and a boost of calcium for deep greening and healthy growth with limited nutrient application. It has an NPK ratio of 8-0-0, 3 percent calcium, and 1 percent sulfur, and is made from feather meal, pasteurized poultry manure, and gypsum. Available in 30-pound bags, it can feed up to 5,000 square feet of lawn.

    We love this pick for its ability to provide a sustained supply of nitrogen over time. This allows it to encourage the growth of thicker, greener grass and reduces the frequency of mowing required. It also won’t cause turf burn and is safe for people and pets. You can apply it to newly seeded and sodded areas in early spring to get a good crop of green grass growing. 

    Get the Espoma spring organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon or Walmart.

    Best for Dark-Green Lawn

    Milorganite 6-4-0 Slow-Release Nitrogen Fertilizer

     The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option: Milorganite 0636 Organic Nitrogen Fertilizer
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • Fortified with iron for a dark green lawn
    • Feeds for up to 10 weeks
    • Helps establish a healthy room system 

    What We Don’t Like

    • Limited coverage area of 2,500 square feet

    Specs 

    • NPK ratio: 6-4-0 
    • Quantity: 36 pounds
    • Coverage: 2,500 square feet

    In the early 1900s, the City of Milwaukee began reclaiming its wastewater on a massive scale and using it to make for-profit products. The name Milorganite comes from Milwaukee organic Nitrogen (nite), and the brand’s 6-4-0 slow-release nitrogen granular has had a consistent spot in the sheds of many home and professional landscapers throughout the many decades since its creation. Made from nutrient-rich heat-dried microbes that have digested the organic matter in wastewater, the resulting product is 85 percent organic matter. It encourages deep root development and can create healthy grass growth for up to 10 weeks after application. 

    In addition to nitrogen and phosphorus, this fertilizer contains 2.5 percent iron to encourage vibrantly green grass. As one of the most versatile picks on our list, it also makes a great garden fertilizer safe for flowers, vegetables, shrubs, and trees. As much as we love this pick and the story behind it, a 36-pound bag only feeds 2,500 square feet, so you’ll probably want to buy more than one bag. 

    Get the Milorganite organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon, Ace Hardware, The Home Depot, Walmart, or Target

    Best for Fall

    Espoma Organic Lawn Food Fall Winterizer

     The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option: Espoma EOFW30 Organic Fall Fertilizer
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • Specifically formulated for winterizing lawns
    • Works well as a Bermuda grass fertilizer 
    • Nonburning, even if overapplied

    What We Don’t Like

    • Not good for lawns needing phosphorus

    Specs 

    • NPK ratio: 8-0-5 
    • Quantity: 30 pounds
    • Coverage: 5,000 square feet

    Looking for a way to prepare a lawn for a harsh winter and promote healthy spring growth? This 8-0-5 fertilizer from Espoma is designed to be used between September and November. It has extra potassium that helps lawns recover from summer stress while enhancing winter hardiness. 

    This slow-release formula is made from a blend of high-quality natural and organic ingredients, ensuring consistency and quality in every application. It’s nonburning, guaranteeing overfertilization isn’t an issue, and it’s suitable for all lawn types, including those that have recently been seeded or sodded. It is, however, best to apply this product to a dry lawn that has recently been mowed. A 30-pound bag will feed up to 5,000 feet. 

    Get the Espoma fall organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon or Walmart

    Best Organic Liquid

    GS Plant Foods Organic Liquid Kelp Seaweed Fertilizer

     The Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer Option GS Plant Foods Organic Liquid Kelp Seaweed Fertilizer
    Photo: Amazon

    What We Like

    • OMRI-listed for organic food production
    • Helps prevent having a drought-stressed lawn
    • Works with other fertilizers for enhanced performance

    What We Don’t Like

    • Smell can be offputting, especially if used indoors

    Specs 

    • NPK ratio: 0.3-0-0.6
    • Quantity: 1, 5, 55, or 275 gallon(s)
    • Coverage: 1,000 square feet per gallon

    This organic kelp fertilizer from GS Plant Foods is dependent on one hero ingredient: Ascophyllum nodosum extract. Touted as one of nature’s miracle plant foods, the seaweed fortifies plants of all types, making it suitable for everything from lawns to flower beds, vegetable gardens, and houseplants. So long as its strong smell doesn’t bother you, you can even use it to extend the life of cut flowers. 

    The product comes in a 1-gallon bottle and is designed to be diluted with water at a ratio of 1 ounce of fertilizer to 1 gallon of water. The NPK ratio is 0.3-0-0.6, so nutrient levels are low, allowing this product to be combined with other types of fertilizers if desired. It also contains trace amounts of sulfur, magnesium, calcium, sodium, boron, iron, manganese, copper, zinc, and other carbohydrates and should be applied when temperatures are low to encourage nutrient uptake. 

    Get the GS Plant Foods organic lawn fertilizer at Amazon or GS Plant Foods.

    Or, DIY Your Own Organic Lawn Fertilizer

    While there are plenty of commercially produced organic lawn fertilizers on the market, it’s also possible to make a homemade fertilizer for lawns that delivers excellent results. A good fertilizer for grass should be about 50 percent organic matter and plant-based material, such as composted manure, garden clippings, decomposed leaves, sphagnum peat moss, sawdust, wood chips, or even seaweed. The other half of the fertilizer blend should contain slow-release sources of nitrogen such as blood meal, fish meal, cottonseed meal, feather meal, kelp meal, or soybean meal. 

    Once you have gathered the necessary materials for the homemade lawn fertilizer mix, start blending them in equal parts in a bucket or large container. Make sure to mix them thoroughly so it’s easy to apply everything evenly on your lawn. 

    Jump to Our Top Picks

    Our Verdict

    We love The Andersons Innova 7-1-2 Organic Fertilizer for its versatility and quality organic formula. Other popular lawn fertilizers, such as Scotts Turf Builder, Pennington UltraGreen Weed & Feed, and Spectracide Weed & Feed, are effective but do not meet our sustainability guidelines. We cannot recommend them in our list of the best organic lawn fertilizers due to their potentially harmful ingredients and negative impact on the environment. 

    How We Chose the Best Organic Lawn Fertilizers

    We created this guide by drawing on our extensive experience covering home and garden products and comprehensive product research. We considered dozens of fertilizer options, primarily focusing on the following considerations before making our recommendations:

    • Organic vs. inorganic: We only considered organic fertilizers for this guide since they are capable of top-notch performance without negative environmental impact. 
    • NPK ratio: Since different lawns have different macronutrient needs, we included formulations with various NPK (nitrogen/phosphorus/potassium) ratios.
    • Value: Plant fertilizers vary widely in type and quantity. We ensured that each recommended product offered excellent value, regardless of the format. 

    What to Consider When Choosing the Best Organic Lawn Fertilizer

    When choosing between the best organic lawn fertilizers on our list, consider type, ease of application, and the desired effect.

    Type

    Organic fertilizer ingredients fall into three types: animal-based, plant-based, and mineral-based. However, most products contain a combination of these types to deliver the best possible balance of major and minor nutrients. Some products may only offer a single ingredient or a blend of ingredients from a single type. 

    Animal-based fertilizers include blood meal, bone meal, feather meal, fish meal, and various manures. These products slowly break down over time, providing lawns and garden plants with season-long benefits.

    Plant-based fertilizer ingredients include alfalfa meal, cottonseed meal, kelp meal, soybean meal, and compost. Soil microbes convert these materials into plant food much more quickly than animal products. They provide an immediate impact, often within days or weeks after application.

    Mineral-based fertilizer ingredients like sulfur, dolomitic limestone, gypsum, greensand, and rock phosphate are naturally occurring concentrated forms of plant-food elements. They boost trace nutrient levels and eliminate deficiencies in the soil.

    Liquid vs. Granular

    Organic fertilizers, both liquid and granular, work with the naturally occurring microbes in the soil. When the fertilizer is applied to the soil, bacteria and fungi consume the natural ingredients and release the nutrients at a measured rate and in a form that is readily available to plants. 

    The difference between liquid and dry organic fertilizers is in the rate at which the soil consumes them. Dry granular formulations, which are applied using a fertilizer spreader, break down slowly and feed lawns over weeks or months. Liquid organic fertilizers deliver a quick boost of nutrients and work faster due to their minute particle size and embedded moisture. 

    NPK Ratio 

    Three elements make up the major nutrients that lawns and plants need for lush, green growth: 

    • Nitrogen (N) promotes green color and leafy growth.
    • Phosphorus (P) stimulates deep root development. 
    • Potassium (K) boosts vigor and disease resistance.

    Nitrogen is quite volatile. The amount not used by the lawn dissipates and must be regularly replenished. Phosphorus and potassium persist in the soil, so they are not required in such large quantities. On average, organic lawn fertilizer offers two to three times or more N compared to how much P and K are in the mix.

    NPK ratios on fertilizer labels show the amount of each element present in the product as a percentage of the total weight, always in the order N-P-K. For instance, a product with a ratio of 11-2-2 contains 11 percent N, 2 percent P, and 2 percent K. Other ingredients and any additional nutrients will also be listed on the label.

    Desired Effect

    After a soil test (see the tips for using organic lawn fertilizer section below), it’s essential to factor the condition of the lawn into the fertilizer choice. Phosphorus is already sufficiently present in the soil in many areas. If your soil test shows levels are already high enough, you can help prevent pollution by not adding more. 

    If the grass is robust with dense foliage and deep green color, choose a fertilizer with a moderate to high amount of nitrogen (10 percent or greater) and little to no phosphorus and potassium. As the lawn approaches the dormant season in late summer and fall, apply fertilizer with a lower nitrogen ratio and slightly more potassium. 

    If your lawn is yellow or remains dull even when all three major nutrients are properly supplied, your grass may be deficient in iron. For a deeper green, choose a lawn fertilizer with supplemental iron.

    Tips for Using Organic Lawn Fertilizer

    There’s more to an effective organic lawn fertility program than simply applying fertilizer on a timed schedule. Don’t waste time and money by blindly applying fertilizer. First, test the soil, either with an over-the-counter testing kit from a local garden center or by sending a sample to your state’s Cooperative Extension Service for analysis. Then, use the results to map out a plan of action. 

    The first step should be to adjust the pH of the soil as indicated by test results. Establish the proper soil pH, between 5.8 and 7.2 depending on the grass species, to ensure that the grass can efficiently pull nutrients out of the soil. Lime raises the pH, while sulfur and aluminum sulfate lower it. Once the acidity is ideal, proceed with the necessary fertilizer application—and remember to mulch grass clippings. 

    • Use soil test results to determine fertility needs.
    • Apply lime as necessary to maintain the proper soil pH and maximize fertilizer efficiency.
    • Mulch grass clippings and leave them on the lawn to reduce fertilizer requirements by as much as 30 percent.

    FAQs

    The best organic fertilizer can help keep lawns vigorous and healthy. For more information on using fertilizers, check out the answers to these frequently asked questions.

    Q. How do I know what fertilizer to use on my lawn?

    Before purchasing a fertilizer, buy an over-the-counter soil test kit or send a soil sample to your county’s Cooperative Extension Service for analysis. Use the soil test results to guide fertilizer choice and application.

    Q. When should I apply fertilizer to my lawn?

    Grass will take up fertilizer throughout the growing season. The best times to apply it are when active growth begins in spring and again in midsummer as well as prior to winter to increase hardiness.

    Q. How much organic lawn fertilizer can I use? 

    While organics are typically labeled as “nonburning,” excess fertilizer is a source of pollution. Follow soil test results and the instructions on the label of the specific product you are using.

    Q. Can you overfertilize your lawn with organic fertilizer?

    Generally speaking, it’s unlikely you will cause fertilizer burn with an organic fertilizer. However, applying excess product is bad for the environment and your wallet. 

    Q. What are the disadvantages of organic fertilizer?

    The disadvantages of organic fertilizer are that it may cost more yet have lower levels of nutrients. Still, organic fertilizer has advantages like helping create healthier soil and providing nutrients at a more consistent rate. 

    Q. How often should I apply organic fertilizer to my lawn?

    The frequency with which you should apply organic fertilizer to your lawn depends on the product you’re using and the conditions of the soil. Generally speaking, however, you will need to fertilize anywhere from a few times a month to once every few months. To get the best results for your lawn, perform a soil test and follow the manufacturer’s instructions. 

    Q. What time of day is best to fertilize a lawn?

    We spoke to Ryan Farley, the CEO of LawnStarter, an online marketplace that links you up with affordable lawn care services in your area, and he had this to say: “I tend to recommend fertilizing in the late afternoon or even a bit before sunset to avoid the hottest part of the day and give your fertilizer a chance to get into your soil overnight.” 

    Q. How long does organic lawn fertilizer take to work?

    While organic lawn fertilizer starts to get to work as soon as it’s applied, it will likely be at least a few days or even a couple of weeks before you start to notice its effects. 

    The post Improve the Look and Health of Your Grass With One of These Effective Organic Lawn Fertilizers appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US
    <![CDATA[Last Chance: Score 20% Off Our Favorite Ego Snow Blower]]>Now is your time to snag a powerful snow blower before end-of-the-season snow storms hit.

    The post Last Chance: Score 20% Off Our Favorite Ego Snow Blower appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/reviews/ego-snow-blower-presidents-day-2025/https://www.bobvila.com/?p=427036Wed, 12 Feb 2025 11:50:27 -0500ReviewsDealsWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Presidents’ Day sales tend to focus on the upcoming milder weather, but many of us continue to deal with snow and ice throughout much of February and into March. However, as the winter season starts to wind down, it’s a great time to score deep discounts on snow blowers or other snow removal tools.

    While scouring for the best Presidents’ Day sales, we discovered one of our favorite snow blowers, the Ego Power+ SNT2112 21-inch cordless snow blower on sale for $599.99 (save 20%). The Ego Power+ snow blower features a 21-inch clearing width with a steel auger making it a powerhouse when chomping through snow and ice. The chute throws snow up to 40 feet ensuring a clean and clear path.

    After testing this snow blower in heavy Colorado snow, we rated it a 9.5/10. We really loved that the machine was easy to maneuver and the handle-mounted chute was a cinch to control. Our editor was a first-time user, and she had no problem using this snow blower.

    Even better, the Ego Power+ 21-inch snow blower comes with two 5.0Ah batteries and dual-port charger so you’ll be powered up any time snowy weather hits. Don’t wait, this deal won’t last long.

    The post Last Chance: Score 20% Off Our Favorite Ego Snow Blower appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US
    <![CDATA[The Best Fertilizers for Palm Trees]]>Prevent fronds from turning brown or yellow with the right fertilizer for palm trees.

    The post The Best Fertilizers for Palm Trees appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizers-for-palm-trees/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=230437Wed, 12 Feb 2025 10:11:54 -0500ReviewsLawn & GardenWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Palm trees are notorious for the tropical touch they add to a garden landscape. Though easy to maintain once established, they require adequate sunlight, water, and the proper fertilizer. If these needs aren’t met, a palm tree’s fronds will begin to curl or yellow.

    Gardeners can keep fronds lush and green by supplying a fertilizer with a healthy dose of nitrogen and potassium, and a low amount of phosphorus. Palm trees also benefit from micronutrients such as manganese, magnesium, and iron. Our favorite is the Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed thanks to its easy to use and long-lasting formula. There are many options to weed through, but we’ve done the work and found some of the best fertilizers for palm trees.

    1. BEST OVERALL: Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed Palm Plant Food
    2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Miracle-Gro Palm Tree Food
    3. BEST SPIKES: Jobe’s Fern and Palm Plant Food Container Spikes
    4. BEST ORGANIC: Dr. Earth Organic and Natural Exotic Blend
    5. BEST GRANULATED: Jobe’s Organics Palm Granular Plant Food
    6. BEST WATER-SOLUBLE: JR Peters Jack’s Classic Palm Food 16-5-25
    7. HONORABLE MENTION: Carl Pool Palm Food 12-4-12
    The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Options
    Photo: istockphoto.com

    Product Comparison

    TypeNPK RatioProduct Size
    Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed Palm Plant FoodGranular8-2-124.5 pounds
    Miracle-Gro Palm Tree FoodGranular8-4-820 pounds
    Jobe’s Fern and Palm Plant Food Container SpikesSpikes16-2-630 spikes
    Dr. Earth Organic and Natural Exotic BlendDry organic matter5-4-64 pounds
    Jobe’s Organics Palm Granular Plant FoodGranular4-2-44 pounds
    JR Peters Jack’s Classic Palm Food 16-5-25Water-soluble16-5-251.5 pounds
    Carl Pool Palm Food 12-4-12Granular12-4-124 pounds

    Our Top Picks

    What is the best palm tree fertilizer? Let’s look at some of the best food for palm trees. When used as directed, these products will help palm trees thrive.

    Best Overall

    Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed Palm Plant Food

     The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Option: Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed Palm Plant Food
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Easy to apply
    • Contains the proper micro- and macronutrients
    • Reapply as little as every 3 months
    • Works for container-grown and in-ground trees

    What We Don’t Like

    • Overuse can lead to plant burns

    Gardeners looking for a product with the right blend of nutrients in an easy-to-use bottle will appreciate Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed Palm Plant Food. It provides an NPK of 8-2-12 with magnesium, manganese, and iron to support fronds so they won’t yellow or curl.

    Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed comes in a convenient container with a spout. To use the product, shake it around the drip line of the palm tree, lightly work it into the soil, and then water. Gardeners can use this product every 3 months.

    This fertilizer works for palms in the ground or container-grown varieties. The only downside is that it can potentially cause plant burns if overused.

    Product Specs

    • Type: Granular
    • NPK ratio: 8-2-12
    • Product size: 4.5 pounds

    Get the Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed fertilizer for palm trees at Amazon, Lowe’s or Tractor Supply Co.

    Best Bang for the Buck

    Miracle-Gro Palm Tree Food

     The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Option: Miracle-Gro Palm Tree Food
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • 1 bag provides 15 feedings
    • Contains necessary nutrients for a healthy tree and fronds
    • Inexpensive
    • Easy to use

    What We Don’t Like

    • Need to apply more frequently compared to other fertilizers

    While moderately priced palm tree foods are abundant, Miracle-Gro’s Palm Tree Food is especially great for budget-conscious palm tree lovers. This fertilizer delivers approximately 15 feedings to a palm tree. Since it needs reapplication only every 6 weeks, one bag lasts a long time.

    The Miracle-Gro Palm Tree Food packs an NPK ratio of 8-4-8 and contains manganese, magnesium, and iron. It’s easy to use: Apply the fertilizer evenly to the soil under the palm’s branches, and lightly work it in the ground.

    Product Specs

    • Type: Granular
    • NPK ratio: 8-4-8
    • Product size: 20 pounds

    Get the Miracle-Gro Tree Food fertilizer for palm trees at Lowe’s or Tractor Supply Co.

    Best Spikes

    Jobe’s Fern and Palm Plant Food Container Spikes

     The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Option: Jobe’s Fern and Palm Plant Food Container Spikes
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Easy-to-use spikes
    • Lasts for 2 months
    • Eliminates mess and fertilizer runoff

    What We Don’t Like

    • Suitable only for container-grown palm trees

    Jobe’s Fern and Palm Plant Food Spikes are hard to beat for gardeners with container-grown palm trees. They are easy to use, release nutrients slowly, and have an NPK ratio of 16-2-6.

    To use Jobe’s plant food, insert the spikes in the palm tree’s pot between the tree trunk and the edge of the container. The number of spikes inserted depends on the container size, ranging from two to six. Replenish spikes every 2 months.

    Jobe’s also makes a fertilizer spike for palm trees planted in the ground. These spikes have a slightly different NPK ratio, are larger, and should be used only twice per year.

    Product Specs

    • Type: Spikes
    • NPK ratio: 16-2-6
    • Product size: 30 spikes

    Get the Jobe’s fertilizer for palm trees on Amazon.

    Best Organic

    Dr. Earth Organic and Natural Exotic Blend

     The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Option: Dr. Earth Organic and Natural Exotic Blend
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Organic and non-GMO
    • Contains microbes to improve soil health
    • Gentle 5-4-6 formula won’t burn plants
    • Easy to apply

    What We Don’t Like

    • May have a slightly unpleasant smell

    Dr. Earth packs a great mix of nutrients and microbes for gardeners who are more interested in organic products. The formula features an NPK ratio of 5-4-6 with sulfur and magnesium. This fertilizer is ideal for palm trees, plumeria, hibiscus, and other tropical plants.

    For planted palm trees, apply this fertilizer every 2 months—use ½ to ¾ cups of fertilizer for every foot of tree height. Mix the fertilizer into the ground under the tree’s drip line. Fertilize container-grown palms every 2 months by adding 2 tablespoons of fertilizer for every 6 inches of pot diameter.

    Product Specs

    • Type: Dry organic matter
    • NPK ratio: 5-4-6
    • Product size: 4 pounds

    Get the Dr. Earth fertilizer for palm trees on Amazon.

    Best Granulated

    Jobe’s Organics Palm Granular Plant Food

     The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Option: Jobe’s Organics Palm Granular Plant Food
    Photo: lowes.com

    What We Like

    • Organic fertilizer with environmentally friendly ingredients
    • Gentle NPK won’t burn palm trees
    • Easy to use for planted and container-grown palms
    • Contains a mix of microorganisms for soil health

    What We Don’t Like

    • Large trees require a lot of fertilizer
    • May have an unpleasant, organic smell

    Jobe’s Organics Palm Granular Plant Food provides the ideal NPK ratio and can boost soil health. This fertilizer contains Jobe’s Biozome, a unique blend of bacteria, fungi, and archaea, encouraging palm trees to absorb nutrients more quickly. It has an NPK ratio of 4-2-4.

    To use this fertilizer, gardeners need to measure their palm tree’s longest frond. For example, a tree with a 2-foot frond will need 1 cup of fertilizer, while a tree with a 6-foot frond will need 11 cups of fertilizer. Gardeners should evenly work the correct amount into the soil under the tree’s canopy. This fertilizer also works for container-grown palm trees.

    Product Specs

    • Type: Granular
    • NPK ratio: 4-2-4
    • Product size: 4 pounds

    Get the Jobe’s Organics fertilizer for palm trees at Amazon.

    Best Water-Soluble

    JR Peters Jack’s Classic Palm Food 16-5-25

     The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Option: JR Peters Jack’s Classic Palm Food 16-5-25
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Fast delivery of nutrients
    • Easy-to-mix powder
    • Contains macro- and micronutrients

    What We Don’t Like

    • Easy to overuse
    • Needs to be reapplied every 7 to 10 days

    JR Peters Jack’s Classic Palm Food mixes with water and goes around the palm’s base to deliver nutrients quickly. The NPK of this fertilizer is 16-5-25. It also contains micronutrients such as magnesium and sulfur.

    Gardeners can apply Jack’s Classic Palm Food every 7 to 10 days during the growing season. It’s ideal for the following palm varieties: Date, Royal, Queen, Majesty, Kentia, and Lady.

    Since this fertilizer is highly concentrated, take care not to overuse it. Using too much product or applying it too often can cause adverse effects such as burnt or yellowing fronds.

    Product Specs

    • Type: Water-soluble
    • NPK ratio: 16-5-25
    • Product size: 1.5 pounds

    Get JR Peters fertilizer for palm trees on Amazon.

    Honorable Mention

    Carl Pool Palm Food 12-4-12

     The Best Fertilizer For Palm Trees Option: Carl Pool Palm Food 12-4-12
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Contains 7 beneficial micronutrients
    • Lasts up to 4 months
    • Works for landscaped and container-grown palms
    • Simple application

    What We Don’t Like

    • Can get expensive for fertilizing large palm trees

    Carl Pool Palm Food 12-4-12 is one of the best fertilizers for palm trees because it’s versatile and long lasting. This granular fertilizer is a slow-release formula, leaching nutrients into the soil for up to 4 months. It contains an NPK of 12-4-12 with seven added micronutrients, including manganese, magnesium, and iron.

    Planted palms will need 1 cup of fertilizer per 3 feet of tree, not to exceed 3 cups. Spread the fertilizer across the soil at the tree’s drip line. Potted palms receive amounts based on container size, with doses ranging from a ½ teaspoon to ⅜ cup.

    Product Specs

    • Type: Granular
    • NPK ratio: 12-4-12
    • Product size: 4 pounds

    Get the Carl Pool fertilizer for palm trees on Amazon.

    Our Verdict

    The best fertilizer for palm trees provides the nutrients palms need but meets a gardener’s needs for cost, convenience, and personal preference. Our top pick for the best palm fertilizer is Miracle-Gro Shake ’N Feed fertilizer for palm trees. It’s easy to use; contains the ideal NPK ratio; and contains manganese, magnesium, and iron for healthy palm fronds. Our budget pick, Miracle-Gro Tree Food fertilizer for palm trees, provides one palm tree with an average of 15 feedings and needs to be reapplied only every 6 weeks.

    How We Chose the Best Fertilizers for Palm Trees

    Palm trees are finicky when they don’t receive proper nutrients, causing their fronds to yellow and curl. We considered their unique nutrient needs and looked for fertilizers with higher ratios of nitrogen and potassium rather than phosphorus. This balance of macronutrients helps a palm tree maintain lush green fronds and supports growth.

    Once we found products with the proper macronutrient blend, we looked for micronutrient content, ease of use, and price. Next, we narrowed our choices by searching for the best palm tree food in several categories based on price and type of fertilizer. And since palms can grow in containers or in the ground, we looked for options that work in both scenarios.

    What to Consider When Choosing the Best Fertilizer for Palm Trees
    Palm trees require a unique blend of macronutrients and micronutrients to thrive. Gardeners can provide these nutrients through granular, water-soluble, or spike fertilizers. These fertilizers deliver nutrients to the soil, which palm trees can absorb through their root system. Here’s what to look for when choosing the best palm fertilizer.

    Type

    There are a few forms of palm tree fertilizer, with liquid, water-soluble, granular, and spike being the most common. The difference between them is how they’re applied and how long they work.

    • Liquid: Liquid fertilizer comes premixed in concentrated or ready-to-pour containers. Users must dilute concentrated liquid fertilizer with water before adding it to the plant’s soil.
    • Water-soluble: Water-soluble fertilizers are highly concentrated and come in a fine powder. The powder is added to water to dissolve before use.
    • Granular: Granular fertilizers come in hard pellets that gardeners can work into the soil. Granular fertilizer is typically a slow-release type, providing nutrients to the plant for a longer time than liquid or water-soluble products do.
    • Spikes: For gardeners who like to “set it and forget it,” spike fertilizer is the way to go. Place these fertilizer sticks in damp soil around the base of the tree to release nutrients slowly into the soil.

    NPK Ratio

    Like humans and animals, plants need proper nutrition, and each species has its own requirements. The three macronutrients plants need are nitrogen (N), phosphorous (P), and potassium (K), also known as NPK. Nitrogen helps plants and trees grow green, lush foliage. Phosphorus helps establish a root system and encourages bloom growth in flowering varieties, and potassium improves a plant’s overall health.

    On a fertilizer package, these nutrients are listed similarly to this: 10-30-10. Each number represents how much of each nutrient the fertilizer contains, always in the same order (nitrogen-phosphorus-potassium). In this example, the fertilizer has 10 percent nitrogen, 30 percent phosphorus, and 10 percent potassium.

    The best food for palm trees is a fertilizer that has a low middle, or phosphorus, number. In addition, the best fertilizer for palms will contain potassium levels equal to or greater than its nitrogen levels. Palm trees also benefit from micronutrients such as magnesium, manganese, and iron.

    Organic vs. Inorganic

    Aside from the form of fertilizer, gardeners can choose between organic and inorganic products. Though both can deliver the same or similar nutrients to a palm, they have distinctive differences.

    Organic fertilizers contain natural ingredients such as minerals from plants, rocks, and animals. These fertilizers are easy for a plant to use and can deliver microorganisms to improve soil quality over time. Most organic fertilizers are nontoxic, making them a top pick for gardeners who have kids and pets.

    Inorganic (synthetic, man-made) fertilizers also contain some natural ingredients, such as minerals, that are combined with chemicals to create a highly concentrated product. Because of this process, inorganic fertilizers are less expensive and deliver nutrients quickly. However, they do not last long in the soil or improve its health. They also add to pollution of water bodies and are not as eco-friendly as organic fertilizers, so the best palm tree fertilizer option might depend on personal preference.

    Tips for Fertilizing Palm Trees

    Though palm trees are a relatively low-maintenance plant, they require ample sunlight, water, and the right fertilizer. Palm trees can be planted in the ground or grown in containers. Gardeners who live in areas with colder winters can choose hardy palms that can handle temperatures as low as 10 degrees Fahrenheit or keep their palms in pots, bringing them inside during the winter.

    To get the most benefit out of palm tree fertilizer, follow these tips:

    • For outdoor palms, fertilize only during the growing season, which is March through October
    • Stop fertilizing 2 months before your area’s average frost date
    • To prevent potassium deficiencies that can cause fronds to turn yellow, use a fertilizer with potassium equal to or higher than nitrogen.

    For indoor palm trees, use a potting soil developed for palms, place your plant in bright light, and water when the soil is dry. After about a month of having the palm indoors, fertilize it following the directions on the product package.

    FAQs

    Palm trees can be grown anywhere—the key is to pick a suitable variety based on the climate. For example, gardeners who live in areas with cold winters can choose hardy palms, while those who live in warmer regions can grow most types of palm trees. Here are some common palm tree fertilizer questions and their answers to help palm tree growers.

    Q. Do palm plants require fertilizers?

    Palm trees require fertilizer to keep their fronds from curling and turning yellow. These plants need a low amount of phosphorus compared to the amounts needed for nitrogen and potassium.

    Q. Can I use homemade fertilizer for a palm tree?

    Many homemade palm tree fertilizer recipes incorporate ingredients such as bone meal, kelp, bat guano, and eggshells. Making your own plant food can provide necessary nutrients if it is customized to a palm tree’s needs.

    Q. What kind of fertilizer should I use for palm trees?

    Use a fertilizer with low phosphorus and a potassium level equal to or higher than the nitrogen level. Gardeners can choose between granular fertilizer, spikes, and water-soluble powders. If possible, select a fertilizer that also has the key micronutrients of magnesium, manganese, and iron.

    Q. How much fertilizer do palm trees need?

    The amount of fertilizer a palm needs depends on the tree’s size and the fertilizer type. Slow-release fertilizers can last up to 4 months between applications.

    Q. Are coffee grounds good for palm trees?

    Coffee grounds increase the soil’s acidity level, which may be beneficial for palms that prefer a higher acidity. However, some palms do better in pH-neutral soil.

    Q. Will vinegar kill palm trees?

    Vinegar can kill palm trees when repeatedly applied to the root system. Some gardeners use vinegar as a nontoxic way to kill unwanted trees.

    The post The Best Fertilizers for Palm Trees appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US
    <![CDATA[The Best Fertilizers for Gardenias]]>With a boost from the best gardenia fertilizer, gardeners can grow this attractive blossoming plant and enjoy its captivating scent.

    The post The Best Fertilizers for Gardenias appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizers-for-gardenias/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=197232Wed, 12 Feb 2025 09:42:45 -0500ReviewsLawn & GardenWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Those who live in temperate climates—typically where winter temps don’t drop below 10 degrees Fahrenheit—may be interested in growing gardenias in their garden. These are shrubs known for their soft, large, typically white blossoms that give off a heady aroma. While the gardenia (Gardenia jasminoides) isn’t difficult to grow, it has a few soil requirements. In addition to choosing the right type of soil for gardenias—well-draining and amended with organic matter, such as mulch or dry leaves—the plant stands a better chance of developing healthy roots and producing blooms if it receives regular fertilizer feedings.

    But don’t just grab the first package of all-purpose plant food you see off the shelf at the garden center. It might boost the gardenia bush’s foliar growth, but it might not encourage blooming. The best plant food for gardenias should be formulated to provide the nutrients acid-loving plants need for optimal results. Our favorite is Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid Plant Food because it dissolves quickly and has added minerals. Ahead, learn what to look for when shopping for the best fertilizer for gardenias and find out why the following products fit the bill.

    1. BEST OVERALL: Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid Plant Food
    2. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Perfect Plants Gardenia Liquid Fertilizer
    3. BEST ACIDIFIER: Jobe’s Organics Soil Acidifier Fertilizer
    4. BEST WITH MICROBES: Dr. Earth Organic Acid Lovers Fertilizer
    5. BEST WATER-SOLUBLE: Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Azalea, Camellia Plant Food
    6. BEST SPIKES: Jobe’s Azalea, Camellia & Rhododendron Fertilizer
    7. ALSO CONSIDER: Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer
    best fertilizer for gardenias
    Photo: amazon.com

    Product Comparison

    NPK AnalysisFertilizer TypeAdded Ingredients
    Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid Plant Food30-10-10Water-solubleTrace minerals
    Perfect Plants Gardenia Liquid Fertilizer9-3-6LiquidSulfur, magnesium, copper, iron, manganese, and molybdenum
    Jobe’s Organics Soil Acidifier FertilizerNot applicableGranulesNone (sulfur only)
    Dr. Earth Organic Acid Lovers Fertilizer3-4-3GranuleLand plants, ocean plants, fish, fish bones, and mined minerals
    Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Azalea, Camellia Plant Food30-30-10Water solubleIron, boron, copper, manganese, molybdenum, zinc, and boric acid
    Jobe’s Azalea, Camellia & Rhododendron Fertilizer9-8-7SpikesNone listed
    Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer4-3-6Time-release granulesTrace minerals, calcium, magnesium, and sulfur

    Our Top Picks

    To earn a spot in this lineup, the following fertilizers had to contain ingredient formulations that offered the vital nutrients that gardenias need for healthy growth and abundant blossom development. The NPK analysis varies from product to product, and some contain no NPK components at all. Still, each is designed to benefit gardenias and other acid-loving plants.

    Best Overall

    Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid Plant Food

     Best Fertilizer For Gardenias Option: Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid Plant Food
    Photo: amazon.com

    Pros

    • Dissolves quickly in water
    • Nitrogen sources help acidify soil
    • Added minerals

    Cons

    • Requires frequent feedings

    Product Specs

    • NPK analysis: 30-10-10
    • Fertilizer type: Water-soluble
    • Added ingredients: Trace minerals

    From one of the top names in gardening aids, the best overall pick for feeding gardenias is Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid Acid-Loving Plant Food. This water-soluble fertilizer is designed to be mixed with water and poured over foliage or around the base of the plant. It can also be used in a garden hose dispenser and sprayed over plants on a broader scale. The granules dissolve rapidly and provide a quick boost for the plant.

    Miracid features an NPK analysis of 30-10-10, with its nitrogen sourced from ammonium and urea, both of which help acidify the soil. Trace minerals are also included, with boron, copper, iron, and zinc rounding out the nutrient quotient. Miracle-Gro recommends feeding when the gardenia is first transplanted and every 7 to 14 days after that during its growing season.

    Get the Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid on Amazon or at Ace Hardware.

    Best Bang For The Buck

    Perfect Plants Gardenia Liquid Fertilizer

     Best Fertilizer For Gardenias Option: Perfect Plants Gardenia Liquid Fertilizer 8oz.
    Photo: amazon.com

    Pros

    • Up to 48 feedings
    • Affordable
    • Added nutrients

    Cons

    • Requires frequent feedings

    Product Specs

    • NPK analysis: 9-3-6
    • Fertilizer type: Liquid
    • Added ingredients: Sulfur, magnesium, copper, iron, manganese, and molybdenum

    Those who want to keep gardenias healthy and happy on a budget should check out Perfect Plants Gardenia Fertilizer, since a single 8-ounce bottle will last for the entire growing season.  Just a teaspoon of this concentrated liquid mixed into a gallon of water can feed one or more gardenia plants weekly or every other week.

    This fertilizer has an NPK analysis of 9-3-6, making it well suited for healthy foliage and abundant blossoms on acid-loving gardenias. Other beneficial ingredients include sulfur, magnesium, copper, iron, manganese, and molybdenum—all nutrients ideal for gardenias and other acid-loving plants.

    Get the Perfect Plants Gardenia Fertilizer on Amazon.

    Best Acidifier

    Jobe’s Organics Soil Acidifier Fertilizer

     Best Fertilizer For Gardenias Option: Jobe’s Organics Soil Acidifier Fertilizer
    Photo: amazon.com

    Pros

    • Reduces pH in soil
    • Requires only two to three yearly doses
    • Easy-to-use granules

    Cons

    • Contains no other nutrients

    Product Specs

    • NPK analysis: Not applicable
    • Fertilizer type: Granules
    • Added ingredients: None (sulfur only)

    Rather than struggle with overly alkaline soil, consider feeding with Jobe’s Organics Soil Acidifier, which can help create the ideal pH for gardenias to thrive. This granular product contains no nitrogen, phosphorus, or potassium. Instead, the formula features 100 percent sulfur—an excellent soil acidifier—sourced from elemental sulfur and gypsum.

    For best results, test the soil before applying Jobe’s acidifier and then follow the directions for sprinkling the granules around the plant base (how much to use depends on plant size). Work the granules into the soil and water well. Reapply the acidifier two or three times per year to maintain an optimal pH balance. Tip: This product does not contain other nutrients, so consider feeding with other fertilizers described in this guide to boost healthy gardenia growth.

    Get the Jobe’s Organics Soil Acidifier on Amazon.

    Best With Microbes

    Dr. Earth Organic Acid Lovers Fertilizer

     Best Fertilizer For Gardenias Option: Dr. Earth Organic Acid Lovers Fertilizer
    Photo: amazon.com

    Pros

    • Reduces soil alkalinity
    • Time-release granules
    • All natural

    Cons

    • Slight objectionable smell

    Product Specs

    • NPK analysis: 3-4-3
    • Fertilizer type: Granule
    • Added ingredients: All-natural ingredients sourced from land plants, ocean plants, fish, fish bones, and mined minerals

    Dr. Earth’s Acid Lovers Organic Fertilizer goes a long way toward helping maintain the acidic soil gardenias prefer. It also helps improve soil quality by adding probiotic microbes: tiny microorganisms that add organic content and boost soil’s structure. The ingredients in Dr. Earth are 100 percent natural and designed to encourage abundant blooming.

    Among the included microbes are eight strains of ecto and endo mycorrhizae (mushroom-based components) that help plant roots withstand the slight drought conditions that can occur if a watering is inadvertently missed. The granules should be spread around the base, worked into the top inch or so of soil, and then watered thoroughly. For the best results, reapply Dr. Earth every 6 weeks.

    Get the Dr. Earth’s Acid Lovers Organic Fertilizer on Amazon or at Ace Hardware.

    Best Water-Soluble

    Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Azalea, Camellia Plant Food

     Miracle-Gro Water Soluble Azalea, Camellia Plant Food
    Photo: amazon.com

    Pros

    • Dissolves rapidly
    • Offers instant boost of nutrients
    • Acidifies soil

    Cons

    • Requires frequent application

    Product Specs

    • NPK analysis: 30-30-10
    • Fertilizer type: Water soluble
    • Added ingredients: Iron, boron, copper, manganese, molybdenum, zinc, and boric acid

    This water-soluble Miracle-Gro fertilizer dissolves instantly in water to provide an immediate boost of nutrients for gardenias and other acid-loving plants, including azalea, camellia, and hydrangea. It features an NPK analysis of 30-30-10 for lush leaf growth, abundant bloom production, and healthy root development.

    In addition, Miracle-Gro added trace minerals to assist in acidifying the soil for even better growth. The product can be mixed with water in a watering can and applied to foliage or poured directly around the plant’s base; it can be used in a garden hose dispenser for spraying large areas. Recommended application is every 7 to 14 days.

    Get the Miracle-Gro Azalea and Camellia Plant Food on Amazon or The Home Depot.

    Best Spikes

    Jobe’s Azalea, Camellia & Rhododendron Fertilizer

     Best Fertilizer For Gardenias Option: Jobe’s Azalea, Camellia & Rhododendron Fertilizer
    Photo: amazon.com

    Pros

    • Time-release feeding
    • Feeds up to 8 weeks
    • Simple to use

    Cons

    • Animals may dig them up

    Product Specs

    • NPK analysis: 9-8-7
    • Fertilizer type: Spikes
    • Added ingredients: None listed

    Those looking for a fertilizer that suits gardenias and other acid-loving shrubs but doesn’t require frequent feeding may find Jobe’s Fertilizer Spikes to be just the ticket. This product contains an NPK analysis of 9-8-7 combined in tightly compressed spikes that dissolve gradually to provide a long-term, continuous supply of nutrients.

    Push the spikes about an inch beneath the surface of the soil around the base of the plant (the number of spikes depends on plant size, so follow package directions) and water thoroughly. Jobe’s spikes will continue to feed gardenias, azaleas, and similar flowering shrubs for 8 weeks.

    Get the Jobe’s Fertilizer Spikes on Amazon or True Value.

    Also Consider

    Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer

     Best Fertilizer For Gardenias Option: Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer
    Photo: amazon.com

    Pros

    • Acidifies soil
    • Requires only three feedings per year
    • Improves soil content

    Cons

    • Pricey

    Product Specs

    • NPK analysis: 4-3-6
    • Fertilizer type: Time-release granules
    • Added ingredients: Trace minerals, calcium, magnesium, and sulfur

    Down to Earth All Natural Acid Fertilizer is designed to feed acid-loving plants the nutrients they need while improving soil content in the process. The fertilizer has an NPK analysis of 4-3-6 and also provides trace minerals, calcium, magnesium, and sulfur to help acidify the soil and encourage nutrient uptake in the roots. Down to Earth has also amended its product with leonardite, a natural, mineral-based soil conditioner.

    The manufacturer recommends applying these time-release granules in early spring, again in summer when blooms first appear, and once more in fall to promote root development and increase the plant’s resistance to winter temperatures.

    Get the Down to Earth All Natural Acid Fertilizer on Amazon or at Walmart.

    Our Verdict

    While any of the fertilizers in this lineup are beneficial for feeding gardenias, Scotts Miracle-Gro Miracid Plant Food is an excellent choice for helping maintain the acidic soil gardenias prefer. For a budget-friendly fertilizer that goes a long way, we like Perfect Plants Gardenia Fertilizer; it comes in a concentrated liquid that makes up to 48 gallons.

    What to Consider When Choosing the Best Fertilizer for Gardenias

    The best food for gardenias is easily absorbed by the plant’s roots. It boosts both overall plant growth and blossom production, and it should encourage robust root development. Beneficial products are available in several types and formulations.

    Types of Fertilizer

    Today’s fertilizers come in various types, and some are better suited to specific growing conditions than others.

    • Granular: Designed for gradual release, granular fertilizers resemble tiny pellets or grains of sand. They’re designed to be mixed into the top inch or so of the soil, where they gradually dissolve, providing the plants with a continuous supply of food for several weeks, depending on brand.
    • Liquid: Liquid fertilizer comes in two forms: ready-to-use sprays for application directly on foliage or in concentrated form that’s mixed with water and sprinkled on the leaves or poured near the plant’s base. Plants absorb liquid fertilizers quickly—so they’re good for a quick boost—but they also drain out of the soil quickly, so they should be applied frequently, some even weekly.
    • Spikes: Like granules, spikes provide time-released feedings. They’re inserted below the soil level near the plant base to feed the plant for up to 6 months.
    • Water-soluble: This type of fertilizer comes in a grainy or powdery form that dissolves rapidly in water. It can be applied via a garden hose dispenser or mixed with water in a watering can and then poured over the plant or soil.

    Soil Acidity and NPK Ratio 

    Understanding soil and fertilizer nutrient values helps gardeners achieve success. The pH scale measures soil acidity, running from 0 to 14, with 7 considered neutral. Numbers below 7 are progressively more acidic, and those higher than 7 are more alkaline. Gardenias grow best in soil with a pH content on the acidic side, ranging from about 5 to 6.5 on the pH scale.

    Fertilizers today are identified by the amount of nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), and potassium (K) they contain by content. For example, a fertilizer with an NPK analysis of 3-3-3 contains equal amounts of each nutrient. These three primary nutrients are designed to boost different parts of plant growth.

    • Nitrogen: Responsible for boosting leaf development.
    • Phosphorus: Encourages root development and flower production.
    • Potassium: Helps ensure root uptake of nutrients and overall plant function.

    Fertilizers made for gardenias may have an NPK analysis that’s higher in nitrogen, but nutrient levels vary from product to product, depending on other ingredients in the mix. Some of the best fertilizers for gardenias don’t contain any nitrogen, phosphorus, or potassium at all. Some include components such as sulfur or iron sulfate instead, which increases acidity in the soil and encourages the plant to absorb nutrients better.

    The NPK ratio doesn’t tell the whole story when it comes to feeding gardenias; the nutrient source plays a role here as well. For example, the nitrogen found in fertilizer can come from dozens of sources, but if it’s sourced from nitrate (a salt of nitric acid) it will be of less benefit to acid-loving plants than if it’s sourced from ammonium (ammonia combined with a hydrogen ion).

    Fortunately, you don’t need a degree in chemistry to choose the best fertilizer for gardenia plants. Instead, look for a fertilizer labeled for “acid-loving plants” or an “acidic fertilizer,” which will gear it toward other acid-loving plants, such as rhododendrons, azaleas, or blueberries. A fertilizer formulated for any acid-loving plant will be beneficial for gardenias.

    However, gardenia enthusiasts shouldn’t expect acid-loving fertilizer alone to correct soil that’s too alkaline—it simply cannot do the trick. Instead, test soil before planting via an inexpensive pH test kit (available online and from garden centers). The tests come with suggestions for correcting pH balance, such as adding decomposed compost to the soil to increase acidity. When the soil is in the correct pH range, it’s time to plant gardenias.

    Soil Type

    Soil is one thing gardenias are especially picky about. These bushy plants like moisture, but they don’t like wet feet, meaning their roots can’t tolerate standing water. Planting gardenias in a raised flower bed can solve drainage problems, but the soil must also be light and resist compaction.

    Clay-based soils are thick and heavy and do not permit gardenia roots to develop freely. Soils that are high in decomposed organic matter, such as compost and dried leaves, are lighter in weight, and the decomposed matter also helps raise the acidity level.

    While there is not one specific best soil brand for gardenias, those looking to grow gardenias in containers should opt for a commercial potting soil containing peat moss, sand, and perlite—ingredients that encourage drainage while retaining adequate nutrients and moisture.

    How We Chose the Best Fertilizer for Gardenias

    To arrive at this lineup of the best fertilizers for gardenias, we extensively researched dozens of popular products. We eliminated any fertilizers not explicitly designed for acid-loving plants. Brand reputation was considered—for example, Miracle-Gro, a nationally known manufacturer with an excellent reputation for producing top-quality gardening products and aids. But startup and niche manufacturers weren’t eliminated if their products met the qualifications for being suitable for acid-loving plants. Finally, we looked at the product’s track record as cited by other gardeners who used it.

    FAQs

    Just a few open gardenia blossoms are sufficient for filling the air with a heady aroma, so it’s no surprise that gardeners and landscapers in moderate climates love growing this bushy plant. Still, gardenias require acidic growing conditions, and using the right fertilizer will help maintain that pH balance. Newbies to growing gardenias are likely to have some questions, the most common of which are answered below.

    Q. When should I fertilize gardenias?

    While manufacturer recommendations may vary, in general, feed gardenias from March to October but don’t feed during the plant’s resting season from November to February.

    Q. How often should I fertilize gardenias?

    This depends on the type of fertilizer, so follow manufacturer instructions. You may need to feed every week or so with liquid fertilizer or every few months with spikes.

    Q. How do I fix yellow leaves on my gardenia plant?

    Yellow leaves may be a sign of poorly draining soil. Consider amending the soil to increase drainage by adding sand, peat moss, or perlite.

    Q. How often should I put coffee grounds on my gardenia?

    Like Epsom salt, coffee grounds are acidic and can be used occasionally to supplement a good acid-loving fertilizer. Don’t overuse them, however—once a month is probably fine.

    Q. Can I use Miracle Grow on gardenias?

    Since so many people are familiar with the manufacturer yet err on the name, we kept the common misspelling in this question so folks can find the answer! And the answer is: Yes, our Best Overall pick for a gardenia fertilizer is Miracle-Gro Miracid Acid-Loving Plant Food.

    The post The Best Fertilizers for Gardenias appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US
    <![CDATA[The Best Rooting Hormones]]>Root cuttings are a fun way of propagating new plants, and rooting hormone can increase the odds of success.

    The post The Best Rooting Hormones appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-rooting-hormone/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=150726Wed, 12 Feb 2025 09:11:10 -0500ReviewsGardeningLawn & GardenLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Gardeners use multiple methods for growing new plants, including starting them from seeds, bulbs, and rhizomes. However, when the goal is to produce a plant identical to an existing plant, taking a cutting is usually the simplest way. A cutting is a 4- to 8-inch section of stem taken from a healthy plant and then put in water or a growing medium to root. Using cuttings to propagate plants is suitable for many types of plants, including some species of trees and bushes, but it’s especially well suited to the indoor gardening plants that tend to grow well from cuttings. Even those who aren’t familiar with advanced gardening concepts and are just trying to clone a favorite plant from a planter can often be successful with cuttings.

    Cuttings from some plants, such as ivy and Dieffenbachia, root easily in plain water. Others need a little encouragement, and that’s where rooting hormone comes in. Rooting hormones are chemicals that stimulate the growth of new roots on cuttings. For example, the odds of growing a plant from a cutting taken from a cascading plant in a hanging planter increase when a rooting hormone is used. Finding the best rooting hormone is somewhat a matter of personal preference because most rooting hormone products are very similar.

    Ahead, learn what to look for in a rooting hormone product and find out why the following are among the top choices of home gardeners. Our favorite is Clonex’s HydroDynamic Rooting Gel thanks to its ready-to-use formula and suitability for different types of cuttings. Each of the top picks below was selected after an in-depth review of the market and thorough product vetting.

    1. BEST OVERALL: Clonex HydroDynamics Rooting Gel
    2. RUNNER UP: Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #3
    3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Bonide Bontone II Rooting Powder
    4. BEST POWDER: Garden Safe TakeRoot Rooting Hormone
    5. BEST LIQUID: Bonide Root & Grow Concentrate
    6. BEST GEL: Midas Hydro IBA Rooting Hormone Gel
    7. BEST CONCENTRATE: Hormex Vitamin B1 Rooting Hormone Concentrate
    8. ALSO CONSIDER: Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #8
    The Best Rooting Hormone Options
    Photo: amazon.com

    Product Comparison

    TypeActive IngredientsQuantity
    Clonex HydroDynamics Rooting GelGelIBA3.4 fluid ounces
    Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #3PowderIBA0.75 ounces
    Bonide Bontone II Rooting PowderPowderIBA1.25 ounces
    Garden Safe TakeRoot Rooting HormonePowderIBA2-ounce container
    Bonide Root & Grow ConcentrateLiquidIBA and fertilizer1 quart
    Midas Hydro IBA Rooting Hormone GelGelIBA4 ounces
    Hormex Vitamin B1 Rooting Hormone ConcentrateLiquidNAA4 fluid ounces
    Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #8PowderIBA0.75 ounces

    Our Top Picks

    To qualify as a top pick, a rooting hormone should be simple to apply, the instructions should be easy to understand, and the product should contain either IBA or NAA (see the Ingredients section below for more information) to promote root growth. The following five products feature different types of rooting hormone—including liquid, powder, and gel—but all are top performers popular with experienced gardeners. Any one of the products in the lineup will be an asset for propagating plants from cuttings.

    Best Overall

    Clonex HydroDynamics Rooting Gel

     The Best Rooting Hormone Options: HydroDynamics Clonex Rooting Gel
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Gel formula seals cut tissue around stem
    • Suitable for starting a variety of cuttings
    • Requires no mixing, and there’s or mess

    What We Don’t Like

    • Gel can loosen and become watery if not stored correctly

    Product Specs

    • Type: Gel
    • Active ingredients: IBA
    • Quantity: 3.4 fluid ounces

    Looking for the sticking power of an easy-to-use gel? Consider this option from Clonex that contains the active ingredient IBA for stimulating root growth. The gel seals the cut tissue around the stem, helping to protect it from rot while encouraging strong root development. The gel is suitable for use on different types of cuttings, including flowering species, woody plants, and fruit tree cuttings, among others.

    The jar contains 3.4 fluid ounces, plenty for rooting dozens of cuttings. There’s no mixing or mess, just dip the stem in the gel and insert it into a moist growing medium.

    Get the Clonex HydroDynamics rooting hormone at Amazon or Tractor Supply Co.

    Runner Up

    Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #3

     The Best Rooting Hormone Options: Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #3
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Comes in powder form that can bolster sagging cuttings
    • Contains no added chemicals, dyes, or preservatives
    • Can also boost root growth in transplants

    What We Don’t Like

    • Adheres better when dipping a cutting in water first

    Product Specs

    • Type: Powder
    • Active ingredients: IBA
    • Quantity: 0.75 ounces

    To propagate new cuttings, consider this rooting powder from Hormex that helps prevent stem rot while stimulating new root development. The powder, which can also help strengthen and bolster sagging cuttings, is suitable for use on most plants that can be propagated from cuttings.

    The active ingredient is IDA. The Hormex powder does not contain added chemicals, dyes, or preservatives, making it desirable for use on vegetables and fruit plants used in food production. In addition to treating cuttings, it is also beneficial for helping transplants adapt to a new location. Hormex #3 comes in a ¾-ounce jar.

    Get the Hormex #3 rooting hormone at Amazon, Grow Generation, or Hormex.

    Best Bang For The Buck

    Bonide 925 Bontone Rooting Powder

     The Best Rooting Hormone Options: Bonide (BND925 - Bontone II Rooting Powder, Hormone Root Fertilizer (1.25 oz.)
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Can be used for many cutting types
    • Also boosts growth of seeds and bulbs
    • Can ease transplant shock
    • Promotes healthy root production

    What We Don’t Like

    • Works best if cutting is dipped in water first

    Product Specs

    • Type: Powder
    • Active ingredients: IBA
    • Quantity: 1.25 ounces

    Bonide’s rooting powder is well suited for helping establish healthy, robust roots on stem cuttings, but it’s also useful for encouraging strong growth when planting seeds and bulbs. The active ingredient, IBA, stimulates root growth on most cuttings, including softwoods, hardwoods, vegetables, and flowering varieties.

    It comes in powder form and can also be used to coat seeds and bulbs by sprinkling it directly on them before planting. When transplanting a plant to a new location, users can also mix a teaspoon, or so, of the powder in the growing medium to reduce transplant shock and help the plant adapt. Each jar contains 1.25 ounces, enough for a few dozen cuttings or transplants.

    Get the Bonide rooting hormone at Amazon,The Home Depot, or Walmart.

    Best Powder

    Garden Safe TakeRoot Rooting Hormone

     The Best Rooting Hormone Option: Garden Safe TakeRoot Rooting Hormone
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Suitable for use in gardens, greenhouses, and residential areas
    • Stimulates at the root
    • Easy to use and more affordable than other powders

    What We Don’t Like

    • Low concentration formula

    Product Specs

    • Type: Powder
    • Active ingredients: IBA
    • Quantity: 2-ounce container

    For a concentrate that can help your plants grow strong, look no further than the Garden Safe TakeRoot Rooting Hormone. This pick comes in a low-concentrate, powdered form that stimulates plant cuttings at the root.

    This easy-to-use powdered formula is made with indole-3-butyric acid, a compound that is naturally occurring in plants. This ingredient is safe to use on African violets, roses, and other plants that are grown in residential, greenhouse, and garden spaces. It should be noted that the roots should be moistened before applying the hormone.

    Get the Garden Safe rooting hormone at Amazon (2 pack) or Lowe’s.

    Best Liquid

    Bonide Root & Grow Concentrate

     The Best Rooting Hormone Option: Bonide Root & Grow Concentrate
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Helps promote root growth and boost plant growth
    • Makes up to 9 gallons of fertilizer/growth hormone
    • All-in-one fertilizer/rooting hormone

    What We Don’t Like

    • Contains a smaller amount of IBA

    Product Specs

    • Type: Liquid
    • Active ingredients: IBA and fertilizer
    • Quantity: 1 quart

    Bonide Root & Grow concentrate is a 4-10-3 (4 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphate, and 3 percent potash) fertilizer with IBA growth hormone. It helps reduce transplant shock and promotes vigorous plant growth. The 1-quart concentrate will make up to 9 gallons of fertilizer/rooting stimulator. It instantly mixes with water, and the diluted solution is applied directly onto the soil and roots.

    The rooting hormone fertilizer combo works on all types of plants, including vegetables, trees, shrubs, and houseplants. It’s designed to be used while seeding or on transplants to help stimulate early root formation. It also works well as a rooting hormone for plant cuttings due to the IBA growth hormone in the mix. It mixes at a ratio of 3½ tablespoons per gallon of water—so a quart can last an entire growing season. The Bonide Root & Grow concentrate is perfect for gardeners who want an all-in-one product that will give their plants a boost at planting time.

    Get the Bonide Root & Grow rooting hormone at Amazon, Ace Hardware, or The Home Depot (128 ounces).

    Best Gel

    Midas Hydro IBA Rooting Hormone Gel

     The Best Rooting Hormone Option: Midas Hydro IBA Rooting Hormone Gel
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Concentrated formula can help reduce cloning time
    • Gel is easier to use than powder products
    • Large 4-ounce container

    What We Don’t Like

    • Used gel should not be poured back into the container for future use

    Product Specs

    • Type: Gel
    • Active ingredients: IBA
    • Quantity: 4 ounces

    Packed in a convenient 4-ounce container, this cutting-edge rooting hormone gel from Midas Hydro is formulated with a high concentration of indole-3-butyric acid, the active ingredient known for its powerful rooting properties. The strong IBA formula gel can help reduce cloning time, enabling gardeners to achieve stronger and healthier roots in no time. Whether you prefer water propagation, general hydroponics, or other methods, Midas Hydro rooting gel is compatible with various techniques, providing versatility and ease of use.

    For users who dislike the mess involved with rooting powder, a gel option may be a cleaner and more user-friendly choice. Note that used gel cannot be reused, though, so users may go through it quicker than they anticipate.

    Get the Midas Hydro rooting hormone at Amazon, Walmart, Etsy, or Midas Hydro.

    Best Concentrate

    Hormex Vitamin B1 Rooting Hormone Concentrate

     The Best Rooting Hormone Options: Hormex Vitamin B1 Rooting Hormone Concentrate
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Affordable concentrated liquid
    • Includes vitamin B1 to add nutrients
    • Can also be diluted for use on transplants

    What We Don’t Like

    • Strong concentrate might require mixing with water
    • NAA is a synthetic chemical

    Product Specs

    • Type: Liquid
    • Active ingredients: NAA
    • Quantity: 4 fluid ounces

    Also from Hormex, this rooting hormone features the active ingredient NAA and comes in a concentrated liquid form that will treat dozens of cuttings. To use, dip a fresh cutting into the undiluted rooting hormone and insert the cutting in a moist growing medium. For an added root-boosting effect, mix 1 teaspoon of Hormex concentrate in 1 gallon of water and use the solution to saturate the soil around the new cutting.

    When transplanting newly rooted plants, use the same liquid solution for watering to reduce transplant shock. The inclusion of Vitamin B in the Hormex product adds a vital nutrient to the soil for robust plant growth. Best of all, the rooting hormone is available at an attractive price point.

    Get the Hormex Vitamin B1 rooting hormone at Amazon or Hormex.

    Also Consider

    Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #8

     The Best Rooting Hormone Options: Hormex Rooting Hormone Powder #8
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Suitable for cuttings from most plants
    • Package contains plenty of powder
    • Free of dyes and preservatives

    What We Don’t Like

    • Requires dipping a cutting in water before dipping in powder

    Product Specs

    • Type: Powder
    • Active ingredients: IBA
    • Quantity: 0.75 ounces

    For quick rooting of most cuttings, opt for a rooting hormone like this one that contains the active chemical IBA. Suitable for use in most plants, including greenwood and softwood cuttings, this Hormex option is formulated to promote the development of healthy roots. The product comes in powder form for easy application.

    A single jar contains 0.75 ounces of powder—plenty for rooting dozens of cuttings. For best results, take cuttings only from the current season’s growth from a healthy mother plant. Dip the end of the cutting in water before dipping it in the powdered rooting hormone.

    Get the Hormex #8 rooting hormone at Amazon or Hormex.

    Jump to Our Top Picks

    How We Chose the Best Rooting Hormones

    Use of a rooting hormone can help gardeners duplicate favorite plants from cuttings. Although most rooting products are similar, we looked at types and some features of products to help buyers choose based on personal preference. This list includes liquid, gel, and powder formulas and a choice of the two most common active ingredients. We also considered application methods and ease of use.

    What to Consider When Choosing a Rooting Hormone

    Rooting hormone products are relatively inexpensive and range from around $13 for a bottle that will treat up to 50 cuttings to $25 (or more) for a large container that will treat more than 100 cuttings. The most significant difference is in the type of product and whether it contains added ingredients, such as nutrients or fertilizers intended to help the plant grow and thrive once the cutting develops roots.

    Form

    Rooting hormone products come in three main types: liquid, gel, and powder. No matter the type, all three are used in a similar manner: the gardener dips the end of the cutting in the hormone product and then puts the cutting in a moist, growing medium.

    • Liquid: Bottles of liquid rooting hormone come in either ready-to-use formulations or concentrated formulations that require mixing with water. Some gardeners feel liquid offers the best coverage since it can seep into tiny pores in the cutting.
    • Gel: This rooting hormone adheres well to cuttings and provides a slightly thicker coating of the hormone than liquid varieties, which may offer more root-boosting stimulus.
    • Powder: One of the most common types of root hormone products available, powder is simple to use and offers a thick layer of root-stimulating chemical. Before dipping the cutting in the powder, many gardeners will dip the cutting in water, so the root hormone adheres better.

    Ingredients

    The majority of rooting hormone products on the market today contain one of two common chemicals, IBA or NAA, both of which are synthetic forms of natural plant hormones known to stimulate root growth.

    • Indole-3-butyric acid (IBA): A chemical form of the plant hormone, auxin, IBA triggers root growth and is found in many commercial rooting hormone products of all types.
    • Naphthaleneacetic acid (NAA): Similar to IBA, NAA is a synthetic chemical formulation that stimulates root growth and retards rotting. It is often found in all three types of rooting products.
    • Added nutrients: While IBA and NAA are the active ingredients in rooting compounds, some products contain additional nutrients, such as nitrogen, to boost leafy green growth or have various vitamins to help bolster floral production. These added ingredients can be helpful, but some gardeners prefer to use only rooting compound, so they can add the exact nutrients they choose to the soil later.

    Application

    The information necessary for plant propagation in cuttings is available in gardening books, but, for the most part, the process is straightforward and simple enough for even newbie gardeners. The following offers an idea of the basic techniques used for taking cuttings and applying rooting hormone. Before proceeding, do a little research on the intended plant. While cuttings can successfully propagate many plants, others require different methods. Some cuttings should be from greenwood (new, supple growth), while others should be taken from the older, hardwood portions of a stem. Knowing the best method of propagation for a specific plant will increase the odds of success.

    1. Take a 4- to 8-inch stem cutting from a healthy plant.
    2. Strip all but one or two top leaves from the stem.
    3. Bruise the end of the stem by slightly crushing it or take a sharp knife and scrape away some of the stem’s outer covering. This step helps the rooting hormone penetrate more efficiently.
    4. Dip about 2 inches of the stem in the rooting compound. If you’re using a powdered mixture, dip the cutting in water first, so the powder adheres well.
    5. With a pencil or stick, make a hole about 2 inches deep in the growing medium and insert the treated end of the cutting.
    6. Press the growing medium around the cutting and cover the whole pot or tray with plastic to keep moisture in while the cutting takes root. By keeping the cutting in an enclosed container, the soil will stay moist, which is a requirement for roots to develop. Alternately, consider starting the cutting in a self-watering planter where it will receive a consistent amount of moisture.

    FAQs

    The application of rooting hormone increases the odds of success when propagating with cuttings. The product stimulates root growth and reduces the risk of stem rot. For gardeners new to the product, a few questions are to be expected.

    Q. How does a rooting hormone work?

    A rooting hormone stimulates root growth at the cut end of a stem.

    Q. Is rooting hormone necessary for cuttings?

    Not always, but it’s handy to have around. Some plants, especially indoor plants, can root in just plain water.

    Q. How long will my rooting hormone take to work?

    Depending on the plant, roots should start to develop within two to six weeks. Research the plant you’re trying to propagate for a specific timeline.

    Q. Do rooting hormone solutions work for hydroponic plants?

    Rooting hormones are often used in hydroponic systems to stimulate plant growth.

    The post The Best Rooting Hormones appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US
    <![CDATA[The Best Fertilizers for Hydrangeas]]>With suitable soil and an optimal fertilizer, this showy shrub will produce a bounty of large, beautiful blooms.

    The post The Best Fertilizers for Hydrangeas appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/articles/best-fertilizers-for-hydrangeas/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=156240Wed, 12 Feb 2025 08:51:29 -0500ReviewsGardeningLawn & GardenLawn, Garden & PoolWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    A perennial favorite in the landscape, hydrangea is hardy in a wide range of growing zones and is a relatively easy keeper. While hydrangeas vary in form, color, and bloom time, they are known for the large flower heads that cover the plants—so large, in fact, the blooms often weigh down the stems. Once established, the hydrangea is one of the summer season’s most impressive shrubs, but it needs fertilizer to reach its full potential.

    The best fertilizer for hydrangea plants should contain a blend of nutrients to encourage healthy root and branch development while boosting the color, size, and quantity of flower heads. Don’t just grab a package of garden fertilizer off the shelf, though.

    We recommend Espoma Organic Holly-Tone 4-3-4 as our top pick for its versatility, organic formulation, and availability. There are other common hydrangea fertilizer options on the market, including Miracle-Gro Acid-Loving Plant Food and JR Peters Jacks Classic Blossom Booster Fertilizer. However, they do not meet our sustainability guidelines and are not recommended in our top picks due to their potentially harmful ingredients and negative impact on the environment.

    Learn what to look for when choosing a fertilizer for hydrangeas, and find out why the following products can help this impressive plant become a focal point in the landscape.

    1. BEST OVERALL: Espoma Organic Holly-Tone 4-3-4
    2. RUNNER-UP: Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer
    3. BEST BANG FOR THE BUCK: Miracle-Gro Performance Organics Blooms Plant Nutrition
    4. BEST FOR BLUE: Dr. Earth Acid Lovers Organic Acid Fertilizer
    5. MOST VERSATILE: Dr. Earth GL61100518430 Fertilizer
    6. BEST ACIDIFIER: Espoma Organic Soil Acidifier
    The Best Fertilizers for Hydrangeas Options
    Photo: istockphoto.com

    Before You Buy a Fertilizer for Hydrangeas

    Before buying fertilizer for hydrangeas, it’s important to perform a soil test to determine the soil’s pH level and check for nutrient deficiencies. Hydrangea blooms will vary in color based on the acidity of the soil, and if the pH level is too high or too low, it can affect the plant’s ability to absorb essential nutrients from the soil. A soil test can also reveal if the soil lacks certain nutrients, such as nitrogen, phosphorus, or potassium, which can affect the plant’s growth and overall health. Knowing the soil’s pH level and nutrient content enables shoppers to choose the appropriate fertilizer and make any necessary amendments to ensure hydrangeas thrive.

    Product Comparison

    TypeNPK RatioQuantity
    Espoma Organic Holly-Tone 4-3-4Granular fertilizer4-3-4Two 4-pound bags
    Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix FertilizerLiquid fertilizer4-3-65 pounds
    Miracle-Gro Performance Organics Blooms Plant NutritionWater-soluble fertilizer8-8-81 pound
    Dr. Earth Acid Lovers Organic Acid FertilizerGranular fertilizer3-4-34 pounds
    Dr. Earth GL61100518430 FertilizerGranular3-9-4Two 4 pound bags
    Espoma Organic Soil AcidifierSoil acidifierN/A6 pounds

    Our Top Picks

    The best fertilizer for hydrangeas will vary depending on the gardener’s goals for this spectacular shrub. Any one of the following fertilizers is well suited for use on hydrangeas, but keep in mind that more is not necessarily better when it comes to fertilizing plants. Follow application instructions carefully. Do not overfeed hydrangeas; rather, err on the side of too little rather than too much and use fertilizer in combination with other soil amendments and an optimal growing location.

    Best Overall

    Espoma Organic Holly-Tone 4-3-4

     The Best Fertilizer for Hydrangeas Option: Espoma Organic Holly-Tone 4-3-4
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Suitable for a wide variety of acid-loving plants
    • Plants only need to be fertilized twice a year
    • Available from major retailers at an affordable price

    What We Don’t Like

    • Might need extra applications on alkaline soil
    • Smaller box than expected

    Product Specs

    • Type: Granular fertilizer
    • NPK Ratio: 4-3-4
    • Quantity: Two 4-pound bags

    The best overall pick is an acid-based fertilizer from a well-known and respected manufacturer in the gardening industry. A granular plant food designed for hydrangeas and other plants that prefer slightly acidic soil, this fertilizer comes in a 4-pound bag of granules. It features a 4-3-4 N-P-K ratio to help hydrangeas get off to a robust start in spring and grow vigorously throughout the summer.

    The plant food’s acid formulation gently reduces the soil’s pH level, increasing the chance the hydrangea flowers will be a deep pink, purple, or blue tone. Along with hydrangeas, this fertilizer works well for holly, azaleas, rhododendrons, blueberries, evergreens, strawberries, camellias, and other plants that thrive in acidic soils.

    Get the Espoma Organic Holly-Tone 4-3-4 at Amazon or The Home Depot.

    Runner-Up

    Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer

     The Best Fertilizer for Hydrangeas Option: Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Suitable for a wide variety of acid-loving plants
    • Contains macro-nutrients as well as magnesium and calcium
    • Encourages colorful blooms

    What We Don’t Like

    • Must be applied monthly for the best results

    Product Specs

    • Type: Liquid fertilizer
    • NPK Ratio: 4-3-6
    • Quantity: 5 pounds

    This acidic, granular fertilizer comes in a 5-pound bag and is suitable for use on many types of flowers and plants. One application will provide hydrangeas with a steady 4-3-6 N-P-K diet for about a month. In addition to the N-P-K nutrients, the fertilizer contains additional beneficial ingredients like calcium and magnesium as well as sulfur, which helps to make the soil more acidic.

    Designed to encourage large, bountiful blooms, this fertilizer should be spread around the base of the plant at a ratio of 1 pound per 1 inch of trunk diameter. Along with hydrangeas, it’s a great pick for feeding rhododendrons, azaleas, camellias, evergreens, blueberries, raspberries, and strawberries.

    Get the Down to Earth All Natural Acid Mix Fertilizer at Amazon.

    Best Bang For The Buck

    Miracle-Gro Performance Organics Blooms Nutrition

     The Best Fertilizer for Hydrangeas Option: Miracle-Gro Performance Organics Blooms Nutrition
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Includes both macro- and micro-nutrients
    • Suitable for a variety of flowering plants
    • Water-soluble fertilizers are easy to apply evenly

    What We Don’t Like

    • Must be applied weekly for the best results

    Product Specs

    • Type: Water-soluble fertilizer
    • NPK Ratio: 8-8-8
    • Quantity: 1 pound

    There’s no need to spend a bundle on plant food. This affordable option features an 8-8-8 N-P-K formulation that promotes more blooms per shrub, along with vibrant flower heads. This is an all-purpose blossom booster that’s suitable for use on a wide variety of perennial and annual blooming plants, including hydrangeas.

    It provides various minerals, including copper, calcium, and iron, to supplement common nutrient deficiencies. The water-soluble formulation should be applied every 7 days throughout the growing season for the biggest, brightest blooms and healthiest plants.

    Get the Miracle-Gro Performance Organics Blooms Plant Nutrition at Amazon, Lowe’s, or The Home Depot (2.5 pounds).

    Best For Blue

    Dr. Earth Acid Lovers Organic Acid Fertilizer

     The Best Fertilizer for Hydrangeas Option: Dr. Earth Acid Lovers Organic Acid Fertilizer
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Continuously feeds acid-loving plants for months
    • Contains macro-nutrients, probiotics, and microbes
    • Encourages vibrant blue blooms

    What We Don’t Like

    • Strong smell; could attract dogs or insects

    Product Specs

    • Type: Granular fertilizer
    • NPK Ratio: 3-4-3
    • Quantity: 4 pounds

    Dr. Earth’s acid fertilizer contains only natural ingredients, including alfalfa meal, bone meal, and kelp meal, in a 3-4-3 N-P-K formulation. In addition to nutrients, it contains select strains of probiotics that improve soil health and increase plant performance. Some of its ingredients are designed to reduce the soil’s pH level, too, making the product suitable for use on all acid-loving plants and increasing the chances that hydrangeas will produce blue flowers.

    For the best results, apply in mid-to-early spring and then every 60 days afterward. The granules should be mixed with the soil and watered well.

    Get the Dr. Earth Acid Lovers Organic Acid Fertilizer at Amazon or The Home Depot.

    Most Versatile

    Dr. Earth GL61100518430 Fertilizer

     The Best Fertilizer for Hydrangeas Option: Dr. Earth GL61100518430 Fertilizer
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Suitable for use on a variety of plants, trees, and shrubs
    • Supplemented with probiotics for optimal overall plant health
    • GMO-free formula

    What We Don’t Like

    • May encourage gnat infestations

    Product Specs

    • Type: Granular
    • NPK ratio: 3-9-4
    • Quantity: Two 4 pound bags

    Dr. Earth Flower Girl has a 3-9-4 NPK analysis and includes additional probiotics to boost overall plant health, making it a great option for feeding bulbs, tubers, corms, and rhizomes. It contains eight strains of ecto- and endomycorrhizae, which work together to increase drought tolerance and provide enhanced nutrient availability.

    The 4-pound bag of granules is designed to provide slow-release nutrients for several months after the initial application. The formula includes ingredients like fish bone meal, alfalfa meal, feather meal, soft rock phosphate, and mined potassium sulfate, and is GMO-free. It’s free of chicken manure and sewage sludge.

    Get the Dr. Earth GL61100518430 Fertilizer at Amazon or The Home Depot.

    Best Acidifier

    Espoma Organic Soil Acidifier

     The Best Fertilizer for Hydrangeas Option: Espoma Organic Soil Acidifier
    Photo: amazon.com

    What We Like

    • Amends soil for acid-loving plants; creates blue blooms
    • Doesn’t conflict with other fertilizers
    • Only needs to be applied every 60 days

    What We Don’t Like

    • Does not provide plant nutrients

    Product Specs

    • Type: Soil acidifier
    • NPK Ratio: N/A
    • Quantity: 6 pounds

    Gardeners and landscapers looking to create highly desirable blue flower heads need look no further than this soil acidifier from Espoma Soil. While not a strict fertilizer in the common sense—Espoma does not come with an N-P-K ratio—the product does contain elemental sulfur and gypsum that act together to lower the soil’s pH level, encouraging blue hydrangea blooms. For the best results, apply Espoma granules around the plant’s base in early spring before flowerhead buds develop and reapply every 60 days.

    It comes in a 6-pound bag and is suitable for use on hydrangeas and other acid-loving plants. Be aware that pH levels adjust gradually. Depending on the soil’s current pH level, two or more applications may be necessary before the acidity is low enough to produce blue flower heads. This product can be used in conjunction with an all-purpose fertilizer to encourage robust plant health as well as blue flower heads.

    Get the Espoma Soil Acidifier at Amazon or The Home Depot.

    Or, DIY Your Own Fertilizer for Hydrangeas

    One of the most effective and sustainable ways to make fertilizer for hydrangeas is by making compost from household scraps. Composting is a process of breaking down organic materials, such as fruit and vegetable scraps, leaves, and grass clippings, into nutrient-rich soil amendments that can be used to fertilize plants.

    Start by collecting organic materials that are rich in nutrients, such as banana peels, eggshells, coffee grounds, and fish emulsion. Add them to an outdoor compost bin and mix in leaves and grass clippings.

    Once the compost bin includes a good mix of materials, add some water and turn the compost pile regularly to provide oxygen and ensure even decomposition. As the compost breaks down, it will transform into a nutrient-rich soil amendment that can be added to the soil around the hydrangeas.

    Not only is making compost a great way to provide hydrangeas with natural and healthy fertilizers, but it also helps to reduce waste and minimize environmental impact.

    Jump to our Top Picks

    How We Chose the Best Fertilizers for Hydrangeas

    To keep hydrangeas growing and blooming bountifully, you need a fertilizer or soil amender that’s made specifically for these acid-loving plants. Our recommendations include a variety of options to help improve the health and beauty of these plants. We’ve selected traditional water-soluble fertilizers that help stimulate root growth, granular fertilizers, and soil amenders that help increase the soil’s acidity to achieve blue flowers.

    To qualify as a top pick, a fertilizer should provide the nutrients hydrangeas need for developing strong branches, healthy foliage, and beautiful blooms. Our favorite options effectively increase the bloom rate of hydrangeas, and gardeners can choose between organic and non-organic products.

    What to Consider When Choosing a Fertilizer for Hydrangeas

    Like all plants, hydrangeas draw nutrients from water, sunlight, air, and soil, but not all soil contains the nutrients necessary for robust growth and flower development. That’s where hydrangea fertilizer can help. The best fertilizer for any individual hydrangea plant will depend on the gardener’s preferred method of delivering the fertilizer to the soil, and the condition of the existing soil.

    Type

    Hydrangea fertilizers come in three primary forms: liquid, granule, and compressed spikes. All three offer slightly different benefits.

    • Liquid: Available as either a concentrate for diluting with water or a ready-to-use product, liquid fertilizers are quickly absorbed by the plant’s roots and leaves for a fast boost of nutrients. Depending on the product, liquid fertilizers are either sprayed on the plant’s foliage or poured around the plant’s base.
    • Granules: One of the most common forms of fertilizers, granule fertilizers can either be dissolved in water and poured on the soil or sprinkled around the plant’s base. Time-release granules, which have a polymer coating, should be worked into the soil around the hydrangeas’ base with gardening tools. They dissolve slowly and offer the plant a long-term supply of nutrients.
    • Spike: Like time-release granules, gardeners often use spikes if they’re looking for a long-term plant food. This fertilizer is compressed and shaped into hardened spikes that the gardener pushes into the soil around the plant’s base. Over the course of 2 or 3 months, the spikes slowly dissolve and provide nutrients for the plants.

    Organic vs. Inorganic Fertilizers

    Fertilizers are made up of either organic or inorganic ingredients.

    • Inorganic: This type of fertilizer contains chemical and synthetic nutrients. It has been formulated in a laboratory to produce specific growing results, such as larger or more abundant blooms or an increased acidity level, which is desirable when growing hydrangeas. Inorganic fertilizers may also include time-released ingredients that dissolve slowly and feed the plant over a period of weeks or months. We’ve opted to exclude inorganic fertilizers from our recommendations because of their potentially negative impact on the environment.
    • Organic: Many gardeners prefer using only natural fertilizers that contain ingredients such as earthworm castings, poultry manure, or compost. Organic fertilizers contain no chemicals, and they may not be as strong as inorganic fertilizers. They may, however, help increase soil health in addition to providing nutritional value. For example, compost doesn’t just provide the plant with essential nutrients; it also helps heavy clay soil drain better.

    N-P-K Ratio

    Commercial fertilizers are labeled by the amounts of nitrogen (N), phosphorus (P), and potassium (K) they contain by weight, which appears on the package as the N-P-K ratio. Hydrangeas will benefit from an all-purpose, balanced fertilizer, such as a 10-10-10 N-P-K, that contains equal amounts of each nutrient. A balanced fertilizer will encourage healthy foliage as well as bountiful blooms. For gardeners explicitly seeking to increase the blooms’ quantity and size, a fertilizer with a higher concentration of phosphorus (the middle number), such as a 10-20-10 N-P-K, may be beneficial.

    Plant Needs 

    The hydrangea will tolerate partial sun, but it prefers a mostly shady spot in the yard. When possible, locate the shrub where it will not receive direct sun in the late afternoon in hot climates. Morning sun is usually acceptable and well tolerated. In northern climes where afternoon temps are moderate, some hydrangeas will also thrive if they receive some early afternoon sun. It’s the combination of hot temperatures and blazing sun that can take a toll on these spectacular shrubs. Hydrangeas like a permanent spot in the landscape, so planting them in pots or grow bags might not allow the shrubs to reach their full potential.

    Soil Condition

    Well-drained soil that’s high in organic matter is optimal for growing hydrangeas. Heavy, clay-type soil and sandy soil will benefit from additional organic matter, such as compost or dried leaves. By adding organic matter, the gardener will increase drainage and enhance the soil’s phosphorus level, which is favorable to producing colorful hydrangea blooms. Before amending soil, it’s a good idea to take a sample of the existing soil to a local extension office for testing. The test results will include recommendations for creating healthy, balanced soil.

    Color and pH

    White hydrangea species produce only white flower heads, but an interesting thing happens to colored hydrangeas when the gardener alters the soil’s pH level. The more acidic the soil’s pH, the more likely it is that the hydrangea flowers will be blue. The pH scale ranges from 0 to 14, with 7 considered neutral. Levels higher than 7 are considered alkaline, while levels lower than 7 are considered acidic. The greater the pH variation, the more pronounced the hydrangea color change.

    • Neutral: At a neutral soil pH level, around 7, colored hydrangea will produce flowers in shades of pink to deep pink.
    • Alkaline: At pH levels higher than 7, hydrangea flowers are a light, clear pink hue.
    • Slightly acidic: When the soil’s pH is around 6, the blooms take on a dark pink or even slightly red or purple hue.
    • Strongly acidic: When the soil’s pH level is lower than 6, hydrangea blooms tend to turn blue. This is the most desirable color for many gardeners, who regularly amend the soil to achieve beautiful blue flower heads.

    When shopping for hydrangea fertilizers, you may notice that a good number of them are called acidic fertilizers. In addition to the product’s N-P-K nutrients, acidic fertilizers contain pH-changing additives, such as sulfur or aluminum sulfate. For those who strive for blue flower heads, it’s worthwhile to purchase a pH soil tester to monitor the soil’s pH level.

    FAQs

    Hydrangeas grow in most regions of the country and are prized for their spectacular blooms, so it’s natural to have a few questions about how to make the most of these eye-catching shrubs.

    Q. When do hydrangeas start to bloom?

    In warm climates, hydrangeas start to bloom in early summer. In northern climes, they bloom in mid-summer.

    Q. What is the best time to fertilize hydrangeas? 

    It depends on the type of fertilizer. It’s a good idea to give hydrangeas a first feeding in mid-to-late spring. After that, apply additional fertilizer at intervals recommended by the manufacturer. Time-released fertilizers might need to be applied only once every 3 months, while other types should be applied every 1 to 2 weeks.

    Q. How do I fertilize hydrangeas?

    It’s essential to follow the directions on the product label. Liquids can be diluted and poured around the plant’s base or sprinkled on the foliage, while granules are often worked into the top inch or so of the soil. Fertilizer spikes are inserted near the base of the plant and pushed beneath the soil’s surface.

    The post The Best Fertilizers for Hydrangeas appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US
    <![CDATA[How to Use Painter’s Tape the Right Way]]>Ensure perfectly crisp lines by choosing the right painter’s tape and knowing how to apply it.

    The post How to Use Painter’s Tape the Right Way appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-use-painters-tape/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=205545Tue, 11 Feb 2025 17:06:30 -0500DIYInteriorWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Painter’s tape is used to create crisp lines, protect ceilings and trim, and make a painting job look like it was done by a professional. Using painter’s tape, however, can be trickier than it looks.

    While experienced painters sometimes cut in without tape, beginners usually use painter’s tape to mask off areas that they don’t want to paint and then peel the paint off to reveal perfectly painted lines.

    This guide will teach you about the different types of painter’s tape, and how to use this kind of tape around doors, windows, and other areas you want to protect from paint spatter.

    5 Types of Painter’s Tape DIYers Should Know

    These are the most common types of painter’s tape you’re likely to see at your local home improvement store. The best painter’s tape for you depends on the task at hand.

    1. Multipurpose Painter’s Tape

    how to use painters tape
    Photo: Amazon Photo: Amazon.com

    Multipurpose painter’s tape is suitable for most common household projects. It has a medium level of adhesion and sticks to most painted walls without causing any damage. It can also be used on floors, trim, baseboards, tile, and glass. Some tape brands use colors to differentiate their painter’s tape varieties, and most blue tape is considered multipurpose tape.

    Our Recommendation: ScotchBlue Original Multi-Surface Painter’s Tape at Amazon (0.7 inches / 60 yards) for $6.05
    ScotchBlue’s Original Multi-Surface Painter’s Tape is an excellent all-around pick with medium adhesion that works well for a wide variety of surface types.

    2. Textured Surface Painter’s Tape

    how to use painters tape
    Photo: Amazon

    When masking textured surfaces for paint, it’s important to use a style of tape with a higher level of adhesion that’s ideal for rougher materials like brick, concrete, and wood. Many brands make their high-adhesion tape green.

    Our Recommendation: Scotch Rough Surface Extra Strength Painter’s Tape at Amazon (0.94 inches / 60 yards) for $5.99
    This tape from Scotch adheres well to rough and textured surfaces and resists UV rays.

    3. Delicate Surface Painter’s Tape

    how to use painters tape
    Photo: Amazon

    One of the risks of using painter’s tape is potentially damaging the surface. With delicate surface painter’s tape, however, that’s not a concern. Some brands use the color purple to designate their delicate surface painter’s tape.

    Our Recommendation: FROGTAPE Delicate Surface Painter’s Tape (24mm x 55m) at Acme Tools for $7.49
    This low-adhesion tape is easy to tear and gives you very sharp paint lines while protecting the delicate surface underneath.

    4. Exterior Painter’s Tape

    how to use painters tape
    Photo: Amazon

    When working outdoors, the highest level of adhesion is necessary—especially if your project takes a few days. Exterior painter’s tape is designed to withstand the elements and won’t peel off if it rains.

    Our Recommendation: Scotch Exterior Surface Painter’s Tape (1.88 in. / 45 yards) at Amazon for $19.99
    This tape adheres well to common outdoor surfaces like metal, vinyl, painted wood, and glass, and it’s ideal for when you need a high-adhesion option.

    5. Decorative Shape Tape

    Five rolls of yellow decorative shape painter's tape with wavy edges.
    Photo: Amazon

    Those attempting crafty DIY projects may appreciate thinner rolls of painter’s tape, which allow them to create thin lines for a design. Some decorative tapes come in unique patterns like chevrons, which can be used to create a graphic effect on walls and other surfaces.

    Our Recommendation: Chinco Painter’s Automotive Masking Tape (6 rolls) at Amazon for $12.99
    This set of six tape rolls comes in a variety of widths so that users can use them for myriad artistic painting projects.

    How to Protect Trim and Ceilings Using Painter’s Tape

    how to use painters tape
    Photo: iStock

    When painting walls, painter’s tape can be used to protect ceilings, baseboards, and trim. The following steps will help ensure that your paint lines are crisp and that no paint splatters onto unwanted surfaces.

    Step 1: Prep and clean walls, ceiling, and trim. 

    Before starting any painting project, it’s important to ensure that all of the surfaces are clean and free of dust. This is especially important when using painter’s tape since it won’t adhere properly to dirty surfaces.

    After cleaning, make sure everything has dried completely before moving on to the next step.

    Step 2: Apply the tape to the trim and ceiling. 

    The next step is identifying the areas you need to protect. In most rooms, this means the ceiling, the trim around windows and doors, and baseboards.

    Rip off 1-foot-long pieces of tape, which are easier to handle. Apply them to the intended area in a straight line. Start in the middle of each piece, smoothing it down with a finger or putty knife as you go. If any pieces bubble or lay unevenly, it’s best to pull them up and try again.

    Step 3: Remove the tape as soon as you’re done painting. 

    While painter’s tape can usually remain in place for hours—or even days—without causing any damage to the surface underneath, it’s best to remove it as soon as possible to ensure the best results.

    Slowly peel the tape off the trim at a 45-degree angle. If any sections don’t come off easily, a putty knife usually helps.

    How to Use Painter’s Tape When Painting Trim

    how to use painters tape
    Photo: iStock

    When it’s time to paint your trim, you’ll need to protect your walls, floors, and ceiling from becoming covered in paint.

    Step 1: Apply tape to the floor, whether it’s carpeting or a hard surface. 

    When painting trim, painter’s tape can be used to protect hard flooring like wood and tile as well as carpeting. It’s especially important to protect wall-to-wall carpeting from paint because it’s really hard to get paint out of carpet.

    Ensure that the floor is clean, and then apply a wide piece of painter’s tape along the edge where the baseboards meet the ground, working one foot at a time. For carpets, use a putty knife to tack the tape down so that no carpeting is exposed to paint while you work.

    Step 2: Use tape to protect your walls from paint. 

    The next step is applying painter’s tape to the walls where they meet the trim. Ensure that walls are clean and free of dust before applying the tape along all of the trim.

    If you painted your walls first, it’s important to wait 24 hours—or until the paint has dried completely—before using painter’s tape to ensure the paint doesn’t peel off when it’s removed.

    Tried-and-True Advice

    “Choosing the correct painters tape for the surface makes a big difference for me. It ensures the tape adheres and functions as it should. I find it easier to tape long surfaces with a partner. Together, we pull out the correct length of tape and line it up before setting over the surface. While not mandatory, it does make for even lines with less fuss.

    At the end of the day, taping is tedious and takes time to get everything perfect. Don’t rush and pay attention to the details. It will make for a cleaner and better looking paint job when everything is finished.”

    —Zach Lazzari, Contributing Writer

    Step 3: Apply painter’s tape to the ceiling. 

    If your trim includes crown molding or any other style of molding that abuts the ceiling, the ceiling will need to be protected. It would be easy to assume that white trim paint won’t be noticeable on a ceiling, but trims are typically painted with semi-gloss paint, whereas it’s generally recommended that ceilings are painted with flat paint.

    Apply paint along the upper edge of the trim, smoothing it down as you work.

    How to Use Painter’s Tape When Painting a Ceiling

    how to use painters tape
    Photo: iStock

    When painting a ceiling, protect your walls—especially if they’re freshly painted. Similarly, if the space has crown molding, tape can be used to maintain its crisp, white color.

    Step 1: Apply tape along the edges of the ceiling. 

    If the room in question doesn’t have an upper molding, apply painter’s tape directly onto the walls where they meet the ceiling. If the walls have recently been painted, make sure they have dried completely.

    Ensure the tape lies perfectly flush with the edge of the ceiling and doesn’t have any bubbles or ripples. Take your time—it’s important to ensure the tape is straight.

    Step 2: Apply painter’s tape to the crown molding.

    If the room has a molding that meets the ceiling, use the same technique detailed above, applying the tape to the molding instead.

    Press down the edges of the tape using your fingers or a putty knife, ensuring it adheres to the molding. When working with a particularly detailed molding, this may require a bit more time.

    Step 3: Remove the tape as soon as you’re done painting. 

    Once you’ve finished painting the ceiling, remove the tape from the walls or moldings as soon as possible. If the paint has already dried, you may need to use the straight edge of a putty knife to score the tape in order to cleanly peel it away without causing the ceiling paint to chip.

    The prices listed here are accurate as of February 11, 2025.

    The post How to Use Painter’s Tape the Right Way appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US
    <![CDATA[The Right Trash Can Sizes for Every Room of Your Home]]>Trash cans come in a surprising range of sizes and styles. Here’s how to pick the perfect receptacle for any room.

    The post The Right Trash Can Sizes for Every Room of Your Home appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/articles/trash-can-sizes/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=287325Tue, 11 Feb 2025 14:26:58 -0500InteriorWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Trash cans may interrupt the vibe an otherwise beautifully designed bedroom sanctuary, or take up floor space where you least want them to but one thing is for sure: Like it or not, trash cans are part of our everyday lives. We use them all the time, and every home has at least a few of them. With these rubbish receptacles being such a normal part of our days, it only makes sense to know their typical sizes and the rooms in the home that they’re best suited for. 

    Trash can sizes are described by volume and measured in gallons or liters. Once you have a better idea of the most common trash can sizes, you’ll be in a better position to choose the best trash can for any room in the house—and the right can sizes for your outdoor use, too.

    1. 1- to 4-Gallon Trash Can

    Umbra Woodrow trash can in spruce green near a floor-length mirror and a plant in a bedroom.
    Photo: Umbra

    These small receptacles include the typical bathroom trash can as well as countertop composting containers and bins that can be suspended from a countertop, hung inside a cabinet, or mounted to a wall. Not only are these real space-savers, but their small size encourages frequent emptying, which cuts down on odors. Trash cans in this size range are also handy for lint disposal by the dryer or use in any room where small bits of trash accumulate slowly. Bathroom trash cans often come with hands-free lids, whether in the form of a sensor or a foot-activated lever, allowing the user to throw out waste without touching the can. They’re also available with swinging or tightly sealing lids, or no lid at all. Expect heights to top out around 15 inches with the lid closed, depending on the configuration and capacity of the can.

    Note: If you’re shopping for a lidded trash can for a tight space, make sure there will be enough room for the lid to open fully.

    Best For: Bathrooms, kitchen compost, hanging or wall-mounted kitchen bins, bedrooms

    Our Recommendations:
    For bathrooms: Simplehuman 1.2-Gallon Round Stainless Steel Step-On Trash Can at Amazon for $29.99 This highly rated receptacle features a removable inner bucket for easy disposal and comes in four finishes, including fingerprint-proof stainless.
    For narrow spaces: Cesun 1.6-Gallon Small Bathroom Stainless Steel Trash Can With Lid, Soft Close and Step-On at Amazon for $34.97 Offering the twin convenience of a removable inner bucket and a narrow footprint, this rectangular can works well in tight spaces—for instance, next to the dryer or in that awkward spot between the toilet and vanity.
    For bedrooms: Umbra Woodrow 2-Gallon Wooden Trash Can at Umbra for $30 This stylish wooden trash can has an integrated handle and comes in a range of appealing colors. 

    2. 5- to 8-Gallon Trash Can

    A woman in a kitchen walks past a light blue  5- to 8-Gallon Trash Can.
    Photo: Brabantia

    The 5- to 8-gallon trash can is a popular trash can size that works well in larger bathrooms, home offices, rec rooms, and even small kitchens. This is also a good option for a recycling bin stashed in a kitchen cabinet. Trash cans in this size range vary widely in height and style, offering an opportunity to use an otherwise utilitarian accessory to add a little whimsy or decorative flair to a room.

    A trash can at the low end of this range could also be a practical addition to an entryway. Elissa Hall, lead designer at vacation rental management firm awning.com, notes, “Rather than allowing trash mail and packaging to clutter living areas, a compact, fashionable bin in the entryway is quite useful for disposal as you enter your home.” 

    Best for: Larger bathrooms, small kitchens, offices

    Our recommendations:
    For the bathroom: Amazon Basics 5.3-Gallon Cylindrical Trash Can at Amazon for $49.31 A solid choice that ticks all the boxes: foot pedal operation, soft-close lid, brushed stainless steel finish, and a removable pail for easy clean-up.

    For a small kitchen: Brabantia 8-Gallon NewIcon Step Trash Can at Brabantia for $105 A slim profile, colors that range from staid to playful, and a removable inner bucket make this a stylish option. 

    For a home office: Rubbermaid Commercial Products Concept Collection Mesh Metal Trash Can at Amazon for $17.97 Just under 14 inches tall, this 5-gallon silver mesh basket fits tidily under a desk. The epoxy-coated steel receptacle has a vinyl ring at the bottom to protect floors from scratches.

    3. 10- to 20-Gallon Trash Can

    A steel 10- to 20-Gallon trash can stands in a kitchen with white cabinets.
    Photo: Amazon

    The 10- to 20-gallon trash can is the real workhouse in the trash collecting world. This is the size of the typical kitchen trash can, big enough to handle food scraps, food packaging, discarded paper goods, and other household garbage, but not so big that it takes up too much floor space. In the kitchen, this size trash can is almost always used with a standard 13-gallon trash bag or can liner, which keeps the can cleaner and makes trash disposal easier.

    Depending on the size of a kitchen trash can and the configuration of the kitchen, the trash can may sit on the floor or be installed inside a cabinet and roll out on tracks. If kept out in plain sight, the kitchen trash can usually has a lid, typically operated by a pedal, touch, motion, or even voice. Hall recommends avoiding the tired, old plastic can with a swinging lid, or no lid at all: “The traditional fragile plastic bin…seems antiquated and sometimes attracts unpleasant comments. 

    This size trash can is also a good fit in a craft room or homework space, and is a nice size for collecting recycling. 

    Best for: Kitchens, craft rooms, recycling

    Our recommendation: Simplehuman 10-Gallon Rectangular Kitchen Step Trash Can at Amazon for $99.99
    A perennial online favorite, the Simplehuman can is available in brushed stainless steel, matte black, or white. The hinge on the quiet, slow-close lid prevents it from banging against the wall, and the lid can be set to stay open as long as needed, making it easier to change the trash bag.

    4. 30- to 48-Gallon Trash Can

    A man in a red shirt pours lawn clippings into a black 30- to 48-Gallon trash can in his front yard.
    Photo: The Home Depot

    Cans in the 30- to 48-gallon size range are usually found outside, where their main job is to hold multiple bags of garbage securely beneath a lid until trash day.

    These large outdoor trash cans can serve other purposes too. They’re great in the home workshop and for collecting yard debris like leaves and sticks. These are also the cans you stick out by the deck or porch when you’re hosting a party so your guests can toss out their discarded paper plates and other trash. Cans in this size range are usually a good fit for standard outdoor trash and contractor-style garbage bags. 

    Best For: Outdoor trash and yard debris

    Our Recommendations:
    Loose lid: Roughneck 32-Gallon Easy Out Wheeled Trash Can at The Home Depot for $34.97 The Roughneck 32-gallon trash can features plenty of volume and built-in wheels for easy rolling. 

    Hinged lid: Rubbermaid Commercial Products Brute Rollout Trash Can With Wheels at Amazon for $160.45 It’s pricey, but this 32-gallon can is also extremely sturdy. It features durable wheels and a hinged lid, and it’s compatible with automated curbside collection (but first check with your municipality).

    5. 64- to 96-Gallon Trash Can

    A large 64- to 96-Gallon trash can sits on a curb.
    Photo: The Home Depot

    Very large trash cans, like those in the 64- to 96-gallon range, are for wheeling to the curb on trash day. They usually have large wheels and handles that make them easy to move. They usually feature hinged lids to trap odors and keep pests away; the attached lid has the added benefit of not getting lost or damaged on trash day.

    Smaller households may be fine with a 64-gallon trash can (or even a can or two in the 32-gallon range) to handle a week’s worth of garbage, or several weeks’ worth of recycling. Cans larger than 64 gallons are best reserved for very large households or those with every-other-week trash pickup since they hold a lot of garbage.

    Best for: Trash storage and garbage pickup services

    Our recommendation: Toter Black 96-Gallon Can at The Home Depot for $124
    With built-in wheels, a hinged lid, plenty of volume, and sturdy construction, the Toter 96-gallon can is great for large families or households with biweekly trash pickup. It’s designed to be compatible with automated and semi-automated curbside collection (but check with your municipality first).

    When Does the Trash Can Really Need a Lid?

    Outdoor garbage cans require lids, and hinged lids are usually best because loose lids are so easily lost or damaged. But do you need a lid for indoor trash cans? There are certainly rooms where a lid might get in the way of easy access to the can, such as kids’ rooms, the home office, or a rec room. But in any of the following situations, you probably want to opt for a lid:

    • Wherever odor control is important, especially in kitchens and bathrooms
    • Wherever food regularly gets tossed out, even if that’s a rec room or game room
    • Wherever pests are a problem, such as bugs and mice in the kitchen
    • Wherever pets like to graze, whether they swipe a chicken bone from the kitchen trash or smelly tissues from the bathroom
    • Wherever aesthetics matter: Do you really want guests looking at your used cotton swabs?

    Prices listed here are accurate as of February 11, 2025.

    The post The Right Trash Can Sizes for Every Room of Your Home appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US
    <![CDATA[How to Remove Linoleum Flooring]]>Hoping to ditch your linoleum flooring? Pulling it up a doable DIUY, given you are willing to invest some time and elbow grease in the project.

    The post How to Remove Linoleum Flooring appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    https://www.bobvila.com/articles/how-to-remove-linoleum/https://www.bobvila.com/articles/?p=73144Tue, 11 Feb 2025 12:53:22 -0500InteriorDIYEasy DIY ProjectsFlooringWe may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn More ›

    Linoleum is a classic and resilient material, often found in high-traffic spaces like kitchens, bathrooms, and hallways. Because the bond between linoleum and its adhesive actually strengthens over time, you’ll need a few special tricks up your sleeve—and a good measure of patience—when you’re ready to rip out outdated linoleum flooring. If you’re thinking about updating your space and wondering how to remove linoleum flooring, follow these steps.

    Before You Begin 

    While the terms are often used interchangeably (even by flooring salespeople), linoleum and vinyl flooring are not the same thing, and they do not behave the same way during removal. Before removing any flooring, your first step is to confirm that your flooring is, indeed, linoleum. Removing vinyl flooring is a different process altogether.

    Though linoleum is made of natural materials, if your linoleum flooring was installed before 1980, there’s a good chance that it contains asbestos in its backing paper. When asbestos is disturbed, it can release carcinogenic fibers into the air.

    Before pulling up linoleum flooring, use a home kit or hire a pro to test it for asbestos, and hire a qualified contractor to remove it if you find any. Among other requirements, removing asbestos requires wearing safety gear and disposal into approved disposal bags. We advise that asbestos removal be done only by professionals; some municipalities even prohibit homeowners from removing the material themselves.

    Tools & Materials

    Bobvila.com may earn a commission from purchases made through these links.

    After confirming the linoleum does not contain asbestos, follow these steps to learn how to remove old linoleum flooring.

    How to Pull Up Linoleum Flooring

    Sliced and rolled linoleum is stacked on a table.
    Photo: iStock

    Step 1: Score the flooring into 6- to 12-inch strips.

    Working in small sections with a utility knife, score the flooring into strips about 6 to 12 inches wide. If your linoleum features a tile pattern, you can use the outlines of the tiles as general guides to show where to score. Proceed carefully and don’t cut all the way through the material to avoid damage to the floor underneath, particularly if it’s hardwood that will become the new finished floor.

    Tried-and-True Advice

    “I find that a hair dryer or heat gun really helps to soften glue while releasing the linoleum from the floor. It helps to have an extra person [to pull up flooring],  but you can complete the job solo while scoring the flooring to remove in small sections.

    Take your time and use a scraper to remove glue while it’s soft. The glue is often more difficult [to remove] than the flooring itself, and it will require some cleaning time even after the flooring is cleared.”

    —Zach Lazzari, Contributing Writer

    Step 2: Remove the top layer of flooring material.

    To fully remove linoleum, you’ll need to tackle both of its layers: The top is a layer of flooring material that should come off fairly easily, and the bottom is a paper backing with adhesive. Removing the latter can be a challenge.

    Remove the entire top layer of linoleum first before going back later to pull up any remaining paper backing or adhesive. Start by working your scraper or the edge of your oscillating multi-tool underneath one of your score marks. Then, push forward to bring up the top of the linoleum. Keep working in small sections until you have removed the entire first layer.

    Step 3: Remove the underlying paper backing and/or adhesive.

    To remove any remaining backing, apply heat to the floor in small sections using a wallpaper steamer (a heat gun or even a hair dryer set on high can also work in a pinch). Soften a small section with your chosen heat source, and scrape up the adhesive, working at a 45-degree angle and being careful not to gouge the subfloor as you work. Move section by section until all the backing and adhesive has been removed.

    If you come across particularly stubborn spots, apply some isopropyl alcohol or paint thinner to the area and allow the solvent to sit according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Proceed to scrape away the remainder of the adhesive, again working at a 45-degree angle.

    Step 4: Dispose of the old linoleum properly.

    Linoleum is made of natural materials. Unless the vintage linoleum flooring contains asbestos, there is no need to take special steps to dispose of it. While it can be bagged and picked up by the regular trash pickup, there are more sustainable alternatives.

    Many areas have local recycling centers that will take linoleum. There also are some composting centers around the country that accept linoleum—or you can add asbestos-free linoleum to your backyard composting bin.

    Final Thoughts 

    Updating old flooring like linoleum can have a huge impact on the home’s style. While removing linoleum flooring is a DIY project, it’s best handled by a professional if it contains asbestos. If the floor is asbestos-free, remember that the removal process is a marathon, not a sprint. With patience and the right tools, you can rid your rooms of linoleum and lay the groundwork for a new floor, and a whole new look.

    FAQs

    Q. How do I tell if my floor is vinyl or linoleum?

    An easy way to tell if a floor is vinyl or linoleum is to look at the surface and thickness. Vinyl flooring is rarely more than ⅛-inch thick and the pattern is stamped on the top. It’s usually linoleum if the pattern is seen through the thickness of the material.

    Q. What is the best floor-adhesive remover?

    Isopropyl alcohol or paint thinner can help remove adhesive. However, one of the best adhesive removers on the market is Goo Gone.

    Q. Can you put new flooring over old linoleum?

    You can, in some instances, lay a new material directly on top of your current linoleum. But be aware that this shortcut will raise the floor by at least ⅛ inch, so the transitions into adjoining rooms may need to be adjusted.

    The post How to Remove Linoleum Flooring appeared first on Bob Vila.

    ]]>
    en-US